Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference

Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch
Command Reference
Cisco IOS Release 12.2(58)EX
March 2012
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
Text Part Number: OL-26663-01
CCVP, the Cisco logo, and Welcome to the Human Network are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn is a service mark of
Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Access Registrar, Aironet, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, CCSP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo,
Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Fast Step,
Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, GigaDrive, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, iQuick Study,
LightStream, Linksys, MeetingPlace, MGX, Networkers, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, PIX, ProConnect, ScriptShare, SMARTnet, StackWise, The Fastest Way
to Increase Your Internet Quotient, and TransPath are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship
between Cisco and any other company. (0711R)
Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. A listing of Cisco's trademarks can be found at
www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership
relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1005R)
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
© 2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Preface
xix
Audience
Purpose
xix
xix
Conventions
xx
Filtering show Command Output
Related Publications
xx
xx
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
CHAPTER
1
Using the Command-Line Interface
xxi
1-1
CLI Command Modes 1-1
User EXEC Mode 1-2
Privileged EXEC Mode 1-3
Global Configuration Mode 1-3
Interface Configuration Mode 1-4
VLAN Configuration Mode 1-4
Line Configuration Mode 1-4
CHAPTER
2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch
Cisco IOS Commands 2-1
aaa accounting dot1x
2-1
aaa authentication dot1x
action
2-3
2-5
alarm-contact
2-7
archive download-sw
archive tar
2-12
archive upload-sw
arp access-list
bandwidth
2-15
2-17
2-19
boot buffersize
2-22
boot config-file
2-23
boot enable-break
boot helper
2-9
2-24
2-25
boot helper-config-file
2-26
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
iii
Contents
boot manual
2-27
boot private-config-file
boot system
2-29
channel-group
2-30
channel-protocol
class
2-28
2-34
2-36
class-map
2-38
clear ip arp inspection log
2-40
clear ip arp inspection statistics
clear ip dhcp snooping
clear ipc
2-41
2-42
2-44
clear ipv6 dhcp conflict
2-45
clear l2protocol-tunnel counters
clear lacp
2-46
2-47
clear logging onboard
2-48
clear mac address-table
2-49
clear mac address-table move update
clear pagp
2-51
clear policer cpu uni-eni counters
clear port-security
2-53
clear rep counters
2-55
clear spanning-tree counters
2-52
2-56
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
clear vmps statistics
conform-action
2-57
2-59
2-60
copy logging onboard module
cpu traffic qos cos
2-62
2-64
cpu traffic qos dscp
2-68
cpu traffic qos precedence
cpu traffic qos qos-group
define interface-range
delete
2-50
2-73
2-76
2-78
2-80
deny (ARP access-list configuration)
2-81
deny (IPv6 access-list configuration)
2-83
deny (MAC access-list configuration)
2-88
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
iv
OL-26663-01
Contents
diagnostic monitor
2-91
diagnostic schedule test
diagnostic start test
dot1x default
2-93
2-95
2-97
dot1x host-mode
dot1x initialize
2-98
2-100
dot1x max-reauth-req
dot1x max-req
2-101
2-103
dot1x port-control
2-104
dot1x re-authenticate
2-106
dot1x reauthentication
2-107
dot1x supplicant force-multicast
dot1x system-auth-control
2-109
dot1x test eapol-capable
dot1x test timeout
dot1x timeout
2-110
2-111
2-112
dot1x violation-mode
duplex
2-108
2-114
2-115
errdisable detect cause
errdisable recovery
ethernet dot1ad
2-117
2-119
2-121
ethernet evc
2-123
ethernet lmi
2-124
ethernet lmi ce-vlan map
2-126
ethernet loopback (interface configuration)
ethernet loopback (privileged EXEC)
ethernet oam remote-failure
ethernet uni
2-137
exceed-action
2-138
2-133
2-140
hw-module module logging onboard
interface port-channel
interface range
interface vlan
2-131
2-135
ethernet uni id
flowcontrol
2-128
2-142
2-144
2-146
2-148
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
v
Contents
ip access-group
ip address
2-150
2-153
ip arp inspection filter vlan
ip arp inspection limit
2-155
2-157
ip arp inspection log-buffer
ip arp inspection trust
2-159
2-161
ip arp inspection validate
ip arp inspection vlan
2-162
2-164
ip arp inspection vlan logging
2-165
ip device tracking maximum
ip dhcp snooping
2-167
2-168
ip dhcp snooping binding
2-169
ip dhcp snooping database
2-171
ip dhcp snooping information option
2-173
ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted
ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id
ip dhcp snooping limit rate
ip dhcp snooping trust
2-175
2-177
2-178
2-179
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
ip dhcp snooping vlan
2-180
2-181
ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string
ip igmp filter
2-182
2-184
ip igmp max-groups
ip igmp profile
2-186
2-188
ip igmp snooping
2-190
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval
ip igmp snooping querier
2-194
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
ip igmp snooping tcn
2-196
2-198
ip igmp snooping tcn flood
2-199
ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
ip igmp snooping vlan static
ip sla responder twamp
ip sla server twamp
2-192
2-200
2-201
2-203
2-205
2-207
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
vi
OL-26663-01
Contents
ip source binding
ip ssh
2-209
2-211
ip sticky-arp (global configuration)
2-213
ip sticky-arp (interface configuration)
ip verify source
2-217
ipv6 access-list
2-219
ipv6 address dhcp
2-221
ipv6 dhcp client request vendor
ipv6 dhcp ping packets
ipv6 dhcp pool
2-215
2-222
2-223
2-224
ipv6 dhcp server
2-227
ipv6 mld snooping
2-229
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval
2-231
2-233
ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression
ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable
ipv6 mld snooping tcn
2-240
2-242
l2protocol-tunnel
2-244
l2protocol-tunnel cos
lacp port-priority
2-247
2-248
lacp system-priority
link state group
link state track
2-250
2-252
2-254
location (global configuration)
2-255
location (interface configuration)
logging event
logging file
2-236
2-238
ipv6 mld snooping vlan
ipv6 traffic-filter
2-235
2-257
2-259
2-260
mac access-group
2-262
mac access-list extended
2-264
mac address-table aging-time
2-266
mac address-table learning vlan
2-267
mac address-table move update
2-269
mac address-table notification
2-271
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
vii
Contents
mac address-table static
2-273
mac address-table static drop
macro apply
2-274
2-276
macro description
macro global
2-278
2-279
macro global description
macro name
2-281
2-282
match (access-map configuration)
match access-group
match cos
2-286
2-287
match dot1ad dei
match ip dscp
2-289
2-291
match ip precedence
match qos-group
match vlan
mdix auto
2-284
2-293
2-295
2-297
2-300
media-type
2-302
monitor session
2-304
mvr (global configuration)
2-308
mvr (interface configuration)
2-311
no authentication logging verbose
no dot1x logging verbose
2-315
no mab logging verbose
2-316
oam protocol cfm svlan
2-317
pagp learn-method
pagp port-priority
2-314
2-318
2-320
permit (ARP access-list configuration)
2-322
permit (IPv6 access-list configuration)
2-324
permit (MAC access-list configuration)
police
2-329
2-332
policer aggregate (global configuration)
2-337
police aggregate (policy-map class configuration)
policer cpu uni
policy-map
2-342
2-344
2-346
port-channel load-balance
2-349
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
viii
OL-26663-01
Contents
port-type
2-351
power-supply dual
priority
2-353
2-355
private-vlan
2-358
private-vlan mapping
queue-limit
2-361
2-363
remote-span
2-367
renew ip dhcp snooping database
rep admin vlan
2-370
rep block port
2-371
rep lsl-age-timer
2-375
rep preempt delay
2-377
rep preempt segment
rep segment
rep stcn
2-369
2-379
2-380
2-383
reserved-only
2-384
rmon collection stats
sdm prefer
2-385
2-386
service instance
2-389
service password-recovery
2-391
service-policy (interface configuration)
2-393
service-policy (policy-map class configuration)
set cos
2-397
set dot1ad dei
set dscp
2-399
2-401
set precedence
set qos-group
setup
2-395
2-403
2-405
2-407
shape average
2-410
show access-lists
2-412
show archive status
2-415
show arp access-list
2-416
show boot
2-417
show cable-diagnostics tdr
show class-map
2-419
2-421
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
ix
Contents
show controllers cpu-interface
2-422
show controllers ethernet-controller
show controllers tcam
2-431
show controllers utilization
show cpu traffic qos
show diagnostic
show env
2-433
2-435
2-437
show dot1q-tunnel
show dot1x
2-424
2-441
2-442
2-445
show errdisable detect
2-447
show errdisable flap-values
show errdisable recovery
show etherchannel
2-449
2-451
2-453
show ethernet loopback
2-456
show ethernet service evc
2-458
show ethernet service instance
2-459
show ethernet service interface
2-461
show flowcontrol
show idprom
show interfaces
2-463
2-465
2-467
show interfaces counters
show interfaces rep
2-475
2-477
show interfaces transceivers
show inventory
2-479
2-482
show ip arp inspection
2-483
show ip dhcp snooping
2-487
show ip dhcp snooping binding
2-488
show ip dhcp snooping database
2-490
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
2-492
show ip igmp profile
show ip igmp snooping
2-495
2-496
show ip igmp snooping groups
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
show ip igmp snooping querier
show ip sla standards
2-498
2-500
2-501
2-503
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
x
OL-26663-01
Contents
show ip sla twamp connection
show ip sla twamp session
show ip source binding
show ip verify source
show ipc
2-506
2-507
2-508
2-510
show ipv6 access-list
2-514
show ipv6 dhcp conflict
2-516
show ipv6 route updated
show l2protocol-tunnel
show lacp
2-504
2-517
2-519
2-521
show link state group
show location
2-525
2-527
show logging onboard
2-530
show mac access-group
2-534
show mac address-table
2-535
show mac address-table address
2-537
show mac address-table aging-time
show mac address-table count
2-538
2-540
show mac address-table dynamic
2-542
show mac address-table interface
2-544
show mac address-table learning
2-546
show mac address-table move update
show mac address-table notification
show mac address-table static
show mac address-table vlan
show monitor
show mvr
2-548
2-550
2-552
2-554
2-556
show mvr interface
2-558
show mvr members
2-560
show pagp
2-547
2-562
show parser macro
2-564
show policer aggregate
show policer cpu uni-eni
show policy-map
show port-security
2-566
2-567
2-570
2-575
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
xi
Contents
show port-type
2-578
show rep topology
2-580
show sdm prefer
2-583
show spanning-tree
2-585
show storm-control
2-591
show system mtu
2-593
show table-map
show udld
2-595
show version
show vlan
2-594
2-598
2-600
show vlan access-map
show vlan filter
2-606
show vlan mapping
show vmps
shutdown
2-605
2-607
2-609
2-611
shutdown vlan
2-612
snmp mib rep trap-rate
2-613
snmp-server enable traps
snmp-server host
2-614
2-618
snmp trap mac-notification change
spanning-tree
2-622
2-624
spanning-tree bpdufilter
2-626
spanning-tree bpduguard
spanning-tree cost
2-628
2-630
spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig
spanning-tree extend system-id
spanning-tree guard
2-634
2-636
spanning-tree link-type
2-638
spanning-tree loopguard default
spanning-tree mode
2-640
2-642
spanning-tree mst configuration
spanning-tree mst cost
2-632
2-644
2-646
spanning-tree mst forward-time
spanning-tree mst hello-time
spanning-tree mst max-age
2-648
2-649
2-651
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
xii
OL-26663-01
Contents
spanning-tree mst max-hops
2-653
spanning-tree mst port-priority
2-655
spanning-tree mst pre-standard
spanning-tree mst priority
spanning-tree mst root
2-657
2-658
2-660
spanning-tree port-priority
2-662
spanning-tree portfast (global configuration)
2-664
spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration)
spanning-tree vlan
speed
2-669
2-672
storm-control
switchport
2-674
2-677
switchport access vlan
2-679
switchport backup interface
switchport block
switchport host
2-681
2-685
2-687
switchport mode
2-688
switchport mode private-vlan
switchport port-security
2-691
2-694
switchport port-security aging
switchport private-vlan
switchport protected
switchport trunk
2-698
2-700
2-702
2-704
switchport vlan mapping
2-706
system env temperature threshold yellow
system mtu
2-709
2-710
table-map
2-713
test cable-diagnostics tdr
traceroute mac
traceroute mac ip
udld
2-667
2-715
2-717
2-720
2-722
udld port
udld reset
uni count
uni-vlan
2-724
2-726
2-727
2-729
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
xiii
Contents
violate-action
vlan
2-731
2-733
vlan access-map
2-736
vlan dot1q tag native
vlan filter
2-738
2-740
vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)
2-742
vmps reconfirm (global configuration)
vmps retry
2-744
vmps server
2-745
vrf upgrade-cli multi-af-mode
APPENDIX
A
2-743
2-747
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch
Boot Loader Commands A-1
arp
A-2
boot
cat
A-3
A-5
copy
A-6
delete
dir
A-7
A-8
flash_init
format
A-10
A-11
fsck
A-12
help
A-13
memory
A-14
mgmt_clr
A-15
mgmt_init
A-16
mgmt_show
mkdir
A-18
more
A-19
rename
A-20
reset
A-21
rmdir
A-22
set
A-17
A-23
type
unset
version
A-26
A-27
A-29
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
xiv
OL-26663-01
Contents
APPENDIX
B
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch
Debug Commands B-1
debug backup
B-2
debug dot1x
B-3
debug etherchannel
B-4
debug ethernet service
debug interface
B-5
B-7
debug ip dhcp snooping
debug ip igmp filter
B-8
B-9
debug ip igmp max-groups
debug ip igmp snooping
B-10
B-11
debug ip sla error twamp connection
B-12
debug ip sla error twamp control reflector
debug ip sla error twamp control server
debug ip sla error twamp session
B-16
B-18
debug ip sla trace twamp connection
B-20
debug ip sla trace twamp control reflector
debug ip sla trace twamp control server
debug ip sla trace twamp session
debug ip verify source packet
debug lacp
debug matm
B-24
B-26
B-28
B-30
B-31
debug matm move update
debug monitor
B-33
debug mvrdbg
B-34
debug pagp
B-22
B-29
debug mac-notification
debug nvram
B-14
B-32
B-35
B-36
debug platform acl
B-37
debug platform backup interface
debug platform cfm
B-39
debug platform cpu-queues
debug platform dot1ad
debug platform dot1x
B-38
B-40
B-42
B-43
debug platform etherchannel
debug platform forw-tcam
B-44
B-45
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
xv
Contents
debug platform ip arp inspection
debug platform ip dhcp
B-46
B-47
debug platform ip igmp snooping
debug platform ip multicast
B-48
B-50
debug platform ip source-guard
debug platform ip unicast
debug platform ipc
B-55
debug platform led
B-56
debug platform matm
B-52
B-53
B-57
debug platform messaging application
debug platform phy
B-59
debug platform pm
B-61
debug platform policer cpu uni-eni
debug platform port-asic
B-63
B-64
debug platform port-security
B-65
debug platform qos-acl-tcam
B-66
debug platform qos-manager
B-67
debug platform remote-commands
debug platform rep
debug platform snmp
B-71
debug platform span
B-72
debug platform supervisor-asic
debug platform sw-bridge
debug platform tcam
B-75
debug platform udld
B-77
debug platform vlan
B-78
B-70
B-73
B-74
B-79
debug port-security
debug rep
B-68
B-69
debug platform resource-manager
debug pm
B-58
B-81
B-82
debug qos-manager
debug spanning-tree
B-83
B-84
debug spanning-tree bpdu
B-86
debug spanning-tree bpdu-opt
debug spanning-tree mstp
B-87
B-88
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
xvi
OL-26663-01
Contents
debug spanning-tree switch
debug sw-vlan
B-90
B-92
debug sw-vlan ifs
B-93
debug sw-vlan notification
APPENDIX
C
debug udld
B-96
debug vqpc
B-98
B-94
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch
Show Platform Commands C-1
show platform acl
C-2
show platform backup interface
show platform cfm
C-4
show platform configuration
show platform dl
C-3
C-5
C-6
show platform etherchannel
show platform forward
C-7
C-8
show platform frontend-controller
show platform ip igmp snooping
show platform ip multicast
C-11
C-12
show platform ip unicast
C-13
show platform ipc trace
C-14
show platform ipv6 unicast
show platform l2pt dm
C-15
C-17
show platform layer4op
C-18
show platform mac-address-table
show platform messaging
show platform monitor
C-20
C-22
C-23
show platform policer cpu
show platform port-asic
C-24
C-28
show platform port-security
show platform qos
C-19
C-21
show platform mvr table
show platform pm
C-10
C-32
C-33
show platform resource-manager
show platform snmp counters
C-36
C-38
show platform spanning-tree synchronization
C-39
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
xvii
Contents
show platform status
C-40
show platform stp-instance
show platform tcam
show platform vlan
C-42
C-44
show platform vlan mapping
APPENDIX
D
C-41
C-45
Acknowledgments for Open-Source Software
D-1
INDEX
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
xviii
OL-26663-01
Preface
Audience
This guide is for the networking professional using the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) to
manage the Cisco Metro Ethernet (ME) 3400E Series Ethernet Access switch, hereafter referred to as
the switch. Before using this guide, you should have experience working with the Cisco IOS commands
and the switch software features. You should also have experience working with the concepts and
terminology of Ethernet and local area networking.
Purpose
The switch ships with one of these software images installed:
•
The metro access image includes additional features such as IEEE 802.1Q tunneling, Layer 2
protocol tunneling, dynamic ARP inspection, and IP source guard.
•
The metro IP access image adds Layer 3 functionality such as IP routing support for Routing
Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol, Border Gateway Protocol
(BGP), and Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP), multiple VPN
routing/forwarding on customer edge (multi-VRF-CE) devices, and IP multicast routing.
This guide provides the information you need about the Layer 2 and Layer 3 commands that have been
created or changed for use with the Cisco ME 3400EEthernet Access switch. For information about the
standard Cisco IOS Release 12.2 commands, see the Cisco IOS documentation set available from the
Cisco.com home page by selecting Service and Support > Technical Documents. On the Cisco Product
Documentation home page, select Release 12.2 from the Cisco IOS Software drop-down list.
This guide does not provide procedures for configuring your switch. For detailed configuration
procedures, see the software configuration guide for this release.
This guide does not describe system messages you might encounter. For more information, see the
system message guide for this release.
For the latest documentation updates, see the release notes for this release.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
xix
Preface
Conventions
This publication uses these conventions to convey instructions and information:
Command descriptions use these conventions:
•
Commands and keywords are in boldface text.
•
Arguments for which you supply values are in italic.
•
Square brackets ([ ]) means optional elements.
•
Braces ( ) group required choices, and vertical bars ( | ) separate the alternative elements.
•
Braces and vertical bars within square brackets ([{ | }]) mean a required choice within an optional
element.
Interactive examples use these conventions:
•
Terminal sessions and system displays are in screen font.
•
Information you enter is in boldface screen font.
•
Nonprinting characters, such as passwords or tabs, are in angle brackets (< >).
Notes, cautions, and warnings use these conventions and symbols:
Note
Caution
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in
this manual.
Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
Filtering show Command Output
The show commands have optional output modifiers to filter the command output.
•
| begin—Display begins with the line that matches the expression.
•
| exclude—Display excludes with the line that matches the expression.
•
| include—Display includes with the line that matches the expression.
•
expression—Expression in the output to use as a reference point.
Expressions are case sensitive. If you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output are not
displayed, but the lines that contain Output are displayed.
Related Publications
These documents provide complete information about the switch and are available from this Cisco.com
site:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9637/tsd_products_support_series_home.html
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
xx
OL-26663-01
Preface
Note
Before installing, configuring, or upgrading the switch, see these documents:
•
For initial configuration information, see the “Configuring the Switch with the CLI-Based Setup
Program” appendix in the hardware installation guide.
•
For upgrading information, see the “Downloading Software” section in the release notes.
•
Release Notes for the Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch
•
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Software Configuration Guide
•
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
•
Cisco ME 3400E, ME 3400, and ME 2400 Switch System Message Guide
•
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Hardware Installation Guide
•
Cisco ME 3400E Switch Getting Started Guide
•
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch
•
Cisco Small Form-Factor Pluggable Modules Installation Notes
•
Cisco CWDM GBIC and CWDM SFP Installation Note
•
These compatibility matrix documents are available from this Cisco.com site:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps5455/products_device_support_tables_list.html
– Cisco Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver Modules Compatibility Matrix
– Cisco 100-Megabit Ethernet SFP Modules Compatibility Matrix
– Cisco Small Form-Factor Pluggable Modules Compatibility Matrix
– Compatibility Matrix for 1000BASE-T Small Form-Factor Pluggable Modules
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free
service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2.0.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
xxi
Preface
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
xxii
OL-26663-01
CH A P T E R
1
Using the Command-Line Interface
The Cisco Metro Ethernet (ME) 3400E Series Ethernet Access switch is supported by Cisco IOS
software. This chapter describes how to use the switch command-line interface (CLI) to configure
software features.
For a complete description command descriptions, see these sections:
•
For the configuration and monitoring commands that support these features, see Chapter 2, “Cisco
ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands.”
•
For information on the boot loader commands, see Appendix A, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access
Switch Boot Loader Commands.”
•
For information on the debug commands, see Appendix B, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access
Switch Debug Commands.”
•
For information on the show platform commands, see Appendix C, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet
Access Switch Show Platform Commands.”
•
For more information on Cisco IOS Release 12.2, see the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command
Summary.
For task-oriented configuration steps, see the software configuration guide for this release.
In this document, unless otherwise specified, IP refers to IP version 4 (IPv4).
CLI Command Modes
This section describes the CLI command mode structure. Command modes support specific Cisco IOS
commands. For example, the interface interface-id command only works when entered in global
configuration mode.
These are the main command modes for the switch:
•
User EXEC
•
Privileged EXEC
•
Global configuration
•
Interface configuration
•
VLAN configuration
•
Line configuration
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
1-1
Chapter 1
Using the Command-Line Interface
CLI Command Modes
Table 1-1 lists the main command modes, how to access each mode, the prompt you see in that mode,
and how to exit that mode. The prompts listed use the default name Switch.
Table 1-1
Command Modes Summary
Command Mode
Access Method
Prompt
Exit or Access Next Mode
User EXEC
This is the first level of access.
Switch>
Enter the logout command.
Privileged EXEC
(For the switch) Change terminal
settings, perform basic tasks, and
list system information.
To enter privileged EXEC mode, enter
the enable command.
From user EXEC mode, enter the Switch#
enable command.
To exit to user EXEC mode, enter the
disable command.
To enter global configuration mode,
enter the configure command.
Global
configuration
From privileged EXEC mode,
enter the configure command.
Switch(config)#
To exit to privileged EXEC mode,
enter the exit or end command, or
press Ctrl-Z.
To enter interface configuration mode,
enter the interface configuration
command.
Interface
configuration
VLAN
configuration
From global configuration mode, Switch(config-if)#
specify an interface by entering
the interface command followed
by an interface identification.
To exit to privileged EXEC mode,
enter the end command, or press
Ctrl-Z.
Switch(config-vlan)#
In global configuration mode,
enter the vlan vlan-id command.
To exit to global configuration mode,
enter the exit command.
To exit to global configuration mode,
enter the exit command.
To return to privileged EXEC mode,
enter the end command, or press
Ctrl-Z.
Line configuration
From global configuration mode, Switch(config-line)#
specify a line by entering the line
command.
To exit to global configuration mode,
enter the exit command.
To return to privileged EXEC mode,
enter the end command, or press
Ctrl-Z.
User EXEC Mode
After you access the device, you are automatically in user EXEC command mode. The EXEC commands
available at the user level are a subset of those available at the privileged level. In general, use the user
EXEC commands to temporarily change terminal settings, perform basic tests, and list system
information.
The supported commands can vary depending on the version of software in use. To display a
comprehensive list of commands, enter a question mark (?) at the prompt.
Switch> ?
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
1-2
OL-26663-01
Chapter 1
Using the Command-Line Interface
CLI Command Modes
Privileged EXEC Mode
Because many of the privileged commands configure operating parameters, privileged access should be
password-protected to prevent unauthorized use. The privileged command set includes those commands
contained in user EXEC mode, as well as the configure privileged EXEC command through which you
access the remaining command modes.
If your system administrator has set a password, you are prompted to enter it before being granted access
to privileged EXEC mode. The password does not appear on the screen and is case sensitive.
The privileged EXEC mode prompt is the device name followed by the pound sign (#).
Switch#
Enter the enable command to access privileged EXEC mode:
Switch> enable
Switch#
The supported commands can vary depending on the version of software in use. To display a
comprehensive list of commands, enter a question mark (?) at the prompt.
Switch# ?
To return to user EXEC mode, enter the disable privileged EXEC command.
Global Configuration Mode
Global configuration commands apply to features that affect the device as a whole. Use the configure
privileged EXEC command to enter global configuration mode. The default is to enter commands from
the management console.
When you enter the configure command, a message prompts you for the source of the configuration
commands:
Switch# configure
Configuring from terminal, memory, or network [terminal]?
You can specify either the terminal or nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) as the source of configuration
commands.
This example shows you how to access global configuration mode:
Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
End with CNTL/Z.
The supported commands can vary depending on the version of software in use. To display a
comprehensive list of commands, enter a question mark (?) at the prompt.
Switch(config)# ?
To exit global configuration command mode and to return to privileged EXEC mode, enter the end or
exit command, or press Ctrl-Z.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
1-3
Chapter 1
Using the Command-Line Interface
CLI Command Modes
Interface Configuration Mode
Interface configuration commands modify the operation of the interface. Interface configuration
commands always follow a global configuration command, which defines the interface type.
Use the interface interface-id command to access interface configuration mode. The new prompt means
interface configuration mode.
Switch(config-if)#
The supported commands can vary depending on the version of software in use. To display a
comprehensive list of commands, enter a question mark (?) at the prompt.
Switch(config-if)# ?
To exit interface configuration mode and to return to global configuration mode, enter the exit command.
To exit interface configuration mode and to return to privileged EXEC mode, enter the end command,
or press Ctrl-Z.
VLAN Configuration Mode
Use this mode to configure normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005) or extended-range VLANs
(VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094). The VLAN configuration is saved in the running configuration file, and you
can save it to the switch startup configuration file by using the copy running-config startup-config
privileged EXEC command. The configurations of VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are saved in the VLAN
database. The extended-range VLAN configurations are not saved in the VLAN database.
Enter the vlan vlan-id global configuration command to access VLAN configuration mode:
Switch(config)# vlan 2000
Switch(config-vlan)#
To display a comprehensive list of available commands, enter a question mark (?) at the prompt.
Switch(config-vlan)# ?
For extended-range VLANs, many characteristics are not configurable and must remain at the default
setting.
To return to global configuration mode, enter exit; to return to privileged EXEC mode, enter end. All
the commands except shutdown take effect when you exit config-vlan mode.
Line Configuration Mode
Line configuration commands modify the operation of a terminal line. Line configuration commands
always follow a line command, which defines a line number. Use these commands to change terminal
parameter settings line-by-line or for a range of lines.
Use the line vty line_number [ending_line_number] command to enter line configuration mode. The
new prompt means line configuration mode. The following example shows how to enter line
configuration mode for virtual terminal line 7:
Switch(config)# line vty 0 7
The supported commands can vary depending on the version of software in use. To display a
comprehensive list of commands, enter a question mark (?) at the prompt.
Switch(config-line)# ?
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
1-4
OL-26663-01
Chapter 1
Using the Command-Line Interface
CLI Command Modes
To exit line configuration mode and to return to global configuration mode, use the exit command. To
exit line configuration mode and to return to privileged EXEC mode, enter the end command, or press
Ctrl-Z.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
1-5
Chapter 1
Using the Command-Line Interface
CLI Command Modes
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
1-6
OL-26663-01
CH A P T E R
2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch
Cisco IOS Commands
aaa accounting dot1x
Use the aaa accounting dot1x global configuration command to enable authentication, authorization,
and accounting (AAA) accounting and to create method lists defining specific accounting methods on a
per-line or per-interface basis for IEEE 802.1x sessions. Use the no form of this command to disable
IEEE 802.1x accounting.
aaa accounting dot1x {name | default} start-stop {broadcast group {name | radius | tacacs+}
[group {name | radius | tacacs+}... ] | group {name | radius | tacacs+} [group {name | radius
| tacacs+} ... ]}
no aaa accounting dot1x {name | default}
Syntax Description
name
Name of a server group. This is optional when you enter it after the
broadcast group and group keywords.
default
Use the accounting methods that follow as the default list for accounting
services.
start-stop
Send a start accounting notice at the beginning of a process and a stop
accounting notice at the end of a process. The start accounting record is sent
in the background. The requested-user process begins regardless of whether
or not the start accounting notice was received by the accounting server.
broadcast
Enable accounting records to be sent to multiple AAA servers and send
accounting records to the first server in each group. If the first server is
unavailable, the switch uses the list of backup servers to identify the first
server.
group
Specify the server group to be used for accounting services. These are valid
server group names:
•
name—Name of a server group.
•
radius—List of all RADIUS hosts.
•
tacacs+—List of all TACACS+ hosts.
The group keyword is optional when you enter it after the broadcast group
and group keywords. You can enter more than optional group keyword.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-1
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
aaa accounting dot1x
radius
(Optional) Enable RADIUS authorization.
tacacs+
(Optional) Enable TACACS+ accounting.
Defaults
AAA accounting is disabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Note
Examples
This command requires access to a RADIUS server.
We recommend that you enter the dot1x reauthentication interface configuration command before
configuring IEEE 802.1x RADIUS accounting on an interface.
This example shows how to configure IEEE 802.1x accounting:
Switch(config)# aaa accounting dot1x
Switch(config)# aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius
Switch(config)#
Note
Related Commands
The RADIUS authentication server must be properly configured to accept and log update or watchdog
packets from the AAA client.
Command
Description
aaa authentication
dot1x
Specifies one or more AAA methods for use on interfaces running
IEEE 802.1x.
aaa-new-model
Enables the AAA access control model. For syntax information, see the
Cisco IOS Security Command Reference, Release 12.2>
Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting > Authentication
Commands.
dot1x reauthentication
Enables or disables periodic re-authentication.
dot1x timeout reauth
period
Sets the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-2
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
aaa authentication dot1x
aaa authentication dot1x
Use the aaa authentication dot1x global configuration command to specify the authentication,
authorization, and accounting (AAA) method to use on ports complying with IEEE 802.1x. Use the no
form of this command to disable authentication.
aaa authentication dot1x {default} method1
no aaa authentication dot1x {default}
Syntax Description
Note
default
Use the listed authentication method that follows this argument as the default
method when a user logs in.
method1
Enter the group radius keywords to use the list of all RADIUS servers for
authentication.
Though other keywords are visible in the command-line help strings, only the default and group radius
keywords are supported.
Defaults
No authentication is performed.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The method argument identifies the method that the authentication algorithm tries in the given sequence
to validate the password provided by the client. The only method that is truly IEEE 802.1x-compliant is
the group radius method, in which the client data is validated against a RADIUS authentication server.
If you specify group radius, you must configure the RADIUS server by entering the radius-server host
global configuration command.
Use the show running-config privileged EXEC command to display the configured lists of
authentication methods.
Examples
This example shows how to enable AAA and how to create an IEEE 802.1x-compliant authentication
list. This authentication first tries to contact a RADIUS server. If this action returns an error, the user is
not allowed access to the network.
Switch(config)# aaa new-model
Switch(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default group radius
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-3
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
aaa authentication dot1x
Related Commands
Command
Description
aaa new-model
Enables the AAA access control model. For syntax information, see the
Cisco IOS Security Command Reference, Release 12.2 > Authentication,
Authorization, and Accounting > Authentication Commands.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this link to
the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_command_
reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate to
the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-4
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
action
action
Use the action access-map configuration command to set the action for the VLAN access map entry. Use
the no form of this command to set the action to the default value, which is to forward.
action {drop | forward}
no action
Syntax Description
drop
Drop the packet when the specified conditions are matched.
forward
Forward the packet when the specified conditions are matched.
Defaults
The default action is to forward packets.
Command Modes
Access-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You enter access-map configuration mode by using the vlan access-map global configuration command.
If the action is drop, you should define the access map, including configuring any access control list
(ACL) names in match clauses, before applying the map to a VLAN, or all packets could be dropped.
In access-map configuration mode, use the match access-map configuration command to define the
match conditions for a VLAN map. Use the action command to set the action that occurs when a packet
matches the conditions.
The drop and forward parameters are not used in the no form of the command.
Examples
This example shows how to identify and apply a VLAN access map vmap4 to VLANs 5 and 6 that causes
the VLAN to forward an IP packet if the packet matches the conditions defined in access list al2:
Switch(config)# vlan access-map vmap4
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address al2
Switch(config-access-map)# action forward
Switch(config-access-map)# exit
Switch(config)# vlan filter vmap4 vlan-list 5-6
You can verify your settings by entering the show vlan access-map privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-5
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
action
Related Commands
Command
Description
access-list {deny | permit}
Configures a standard numbered ACL. For syntax information, select
Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3:Addressing
and Services, Release 12.2 > IP Services Commands.
ip access-list
Creates a named access list. For syntax information, select Cisco
IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3:Addressing and
Services, Release 12.2 > IP Services Commands.
mac access-list extended
Creates a named MAC address access list.
match (access-map
configuration)
Defines the match conditions for a VLAN map.
show vlan access-map
Displays the VLAN access maps created on the switch.
vlan access-map
Creates a VLAN access map.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-6
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
alarm-contact
alarm-contact
Use the alarm-contact global configuration command to configure triggers and severity levels for
external alarms. Use the no form of this command to remove the configuration.
alarm-contact {contact-number {description string | severity {critical | major | minor} | trigger
{closed | open}} | all {severity {critical | major | minor} | trigger {closed | open}}
no alarm-contact {contact-number {description | severity | trigger} | all {severity | trigger}
contact-number
Configure a specific alarm contact number. The range is 1 to 4.
description
string
Add a description for the alarm contact number. The description string can be up to
80 alphanumeric characters in length and is included in the system message
generated when the alarm is triggered.
all
Configure all alarm contacts.
severity
Set the severity level that is set when the alarm is triggered. The severity is included
in the alarm notification. Entering no alarm-contact severity sets the severity to
minor.
critical
Set severity level as critical.
major
Set severity level as major.
minor
Set severity level as minor.
trigger
Set the state that triggers the alarm, whether the connected circuit is open or closed.
Entering no alarm-contact trigger sets the trigger to closed.
closed
Specify that the alarm is triggered when the contact is closed.
open
Specify that the alarm is triggered when the contact is open.
Defaults
No alarms are configured.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The no alarm-contact contact-number description sets the description to an empty string.
The no alarm-contact {contact-number | all} severity sets the alarm-contact severity to minor.
The no alarm-contact {contact-number | all} trigger sets the external alarm-contact trigger to closed.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-7
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
alarm-contact
Examples
This example shows how to configure alarm contact number 1 to report a critical alarm when the contact
is open.
Switch(config)# alarm-contact 1 description main_lab_door
Switch(config)# alarm-contact 1 severity critical
Switch(config)# alarm-contact 1 trigger open
Dec 4 10:34:09.049: %PLATFORM_ENV-1-EXTERNAL_ALARM_CONTACT_ASSERT: Alarm asserted:
main_lab_door
You can verify your settings by entering the show env alarm-contact or the show running-config
privileged EXEC command.
Switch# show env alarm-contact
ALARM CONTACT 1
Status:
asserted
Description: main_lab_door
Severity:
critical
Trigger:
open
This example shows how to configure clear alarm contact number 1 and the show command outputs.
Switch(config)# no alarm-contact 1 description
Dec 4 10:39:33.621: %PLATFORM_ENV-1-EXTERNAL_ALARM_CONTACT_CLEAR: Alarm cleared:
main_lab_door Dec 4 10:39:33.621: %PLATFORM_ENV-1-EXTERNAL_ALARM_CONTACT_ASSERT: Alarm
asserted: external alarm contact 1
Switch(config)# no alarm-contact 1 severity
Dec 4 10:39:46.774: %PLATFORM_ENV-1-EXTERNAL_ALARM_CONTACT_CLEAR: Alarm cleared: external
alarm contact 1 Dec 4 10:39:46.774: %PLATFORM_ENV-1-EXTERNAL_ALARM_CONTACT_ASSERT: Alarm
asserted: external alarm contact 1
Switch(config)# no alarm-contact 1 trigger open
Dec 4 10:39:56.547: %PLATFORM_ENV-1-EXTERNAL_ALARM_CONTACT_CLEAR: Alarm cleared: external
alarm contact 1
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show env alarm-contact
ALARM CONTACT 1
Status:
not asserted
Description: external alarm contact 1
Severity:
minor
Trigger:
closed
Switch# show hard led
SWITCH: 1
SYSTEM: GREEN
MGMT: GREEN
ALARM 1: BLACK
ALARM 2: BLACK
ALARM 3: BLACK
ALARM 4: BLACK
Related Commands
Command
Description
show env alarm-contact
Displays the alarm setting and status for the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-8
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
archive download-sw
archive download-sw
Use the archive download-sw privileged EXEC command to download a new image from a TFTP server
to the switch and to overwrite or keep the existing image.
archive download-sw {/force-reload | /imageonly | /leave-old-sw | /no-set-boot |
/no-version-check | /overwrite | /reload | /safe} source-url
Syntax Description
/force-reload
Unconditionally force a system reload after successfully downloading the
software image.
/imageonly
Download only the software image but not the HTML files associated with
the embedded device manager. The HTML files for the existing version are
deleted only if the existing version is being overwritten or removed.
/leave-old-sw
Keep the old software version after a successful download.
/no-set-boot
Do not alter the setting of the BOOT environment variable to point to the new
software image after it is successfully downloaded.
/no-version-check
Download the software image without checking to prevent installing an
incompatible image.
/overwrite
Overwrite the software image in flash memory with the downloaded one.
/reload
Reload the system after successfully downloading the image unless the
configuration has been changed and not been saved.
/safe
Keep the current software image; do not delete it to make room for the new
software image before the new image is downloaded. The current image is
deleted after the download.
source-url
The source URL alias for a local or network file system. These options are
supported:
•
The syntax for the local flash file system:
flash:
•
The syntax for the FTP:
ftp:[[//username[:password]@location]/directory]/image-name.tar
•
The syntax for an HTTP server:
http://[[username:password]@]{hostname |
host-ip}[/directory]/image-name.tar
•
The syntax for a secure HTTP server:
https://[[username:password]@]{hostname |
host-ip}[/directory]/image-name.tar
•
The syntax for the Remote Copy Protocol (RCP):
rcp:[[//username@location]/directory]/image-name.tar
•
The syntax for the TFTP:
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/image-name.tar
The image-name.tar is the software image to download and install on the
switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-9
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
archive download-sw
Defaults
The current software image is not overwritten with the downloaded image.
Both the software image and HTML files are downloaded.
The new image is downloaded to the flash: file system.
The BOOT environment variable is changed to point to the new software image on the flash: file system.
Image names are case sensitive; the image file is provided in tar format.
Compatibility of the version on the image to be downloaded is checked.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The /imageonly option removes the HTML files for the existing image if the existing image is being
removed or replaced. Only the Cisco IOS image (without the HTML files) is downloaded.
Using the /safe or /leave-old-sw option can cause the new image download to fail if there is insufficient
flash memory. If leaving the software in place prevents the new image from fitting in flash memory due
to space constraints, an error results.
If you used the /leave-old-sw option and did not overwrite the old image when you downloaded the new
one, you can remove the old image by using the delete privileged EXEC command. For more
information, see the “delete” section on page 2-80.
Note
Use the /no-version-check option with care. This option allows an image to be downloaded without first
confirming that it is not incompatible with the switch.
Use the /overwrite option to overwrite the image on the flash device with the downloaded one.
If you specify the command without the /overwrite option, the download algorithm verifies that the new
image is not the same as the one on the switch flash device. If the images are the same, the download
does not occur. If the images are different, the old image is deleted, and the new one is downloaded.
After downloading a new image, enter the reload privileged EXEC command to begin using the new
image, or specify the /reload or /force-reload option in the archive download-sw command.
Examples
This example shows how to download a new image from a TFTP server at 172.20.129.10 and overwrite
the image on the switch:
Switch# archive download-sw /overwrite tftp://172.20.129.10/test-image.tar
This example shows how to download only the software image from a TFTP server at 172.20.129.10 to
the switch:
Switch# archive download-sw /imageonly tftp://172.20.129.10/test-image.tar
This example shows how to keep the old software version after a successful download:
Switch# archive download-sw /leave-old-sw tftp://172.20.129.10/test-image.tar
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-10
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
archive download-sw
Related Commands
Command
Description
archive tar
Creates a tar file, lists the files in a tar file, or extracts the files from a tar file.
archive upload-sw
Uploads an existing image on the switch to a server.
delete
Deletes a file or directory on the flash memory device.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-11
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
archive tar
archive tar
Use the archive tar privileged EXEC command to create a tar file, list files in a tar file, or extract the
files from a tar file.
archive tar {/create destination-url flash:/file-url} | {/table source-url} | {/xtract source-url
flash:/file-url [dir/file...]}
Syntax Description
/create destination-url
flash:/file-url
Create a new tar file on the local or network file system.
For destination-url, specify the destination URL alias for the local or
network file system and the name of the tar file to create. These options
are supported:
•
The syntax for the local flash filesystem:
flash:
•
The syntax for the FTP:
ftp:[[//username[:password]@location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
•
The syntax for the Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) is:
rcp:[[//username@location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
•
The syntax for the TFTP:
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
The tar-filename.tar is the tar file to be created.
For flash:/file-url, specify the location on the local flash file system from
which the new tar file is created.
An optional list of files or directories within the source directory can be
specified to write to the new tar file. If none are specified, all files and
directories at this level are written to the newly created tar file.
/table source-url
Display the contents of an existing tar file to the screen.
For source-url, specify the source URL alias for the local or network file
system. These options are supported:
•
The syntax for the local flash file system:
flash:
•
The syntax for the FTP:
ftp:[[//username[:password]@location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
•
The syntax for the RCP:
rcp:[[//username@location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
•
The syntax for the TFTP:
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
The tar-filename.tar is the tar file to display.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-12
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
archive tar
/xtract source-url
flash:/file-url [dir/file...]
Extract files from a tar file to the local file system.
For source-url, specify the source URL alias for the local file system.
These options are supported:
•
The syntax for the local flash file system:
flash:
•
The syntax for the FTP:
ftp:[[//username[:password]@location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
•
The syntax for the RCP:
rcp:[[//username@location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
•
The syntax for the TFTP:
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
The tar-filename.tar is the tar file from which to extract.
For flash:/file-url [dir/file...], specify the location on the local flash file
system into which the tar file is extracted. Use the dir/file... option to
specify an optional list of files or directories within the tar file to be
extracted. If none are specified, all files and directories are extracted.
Defaults
None
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Filenames and directory names are case sensitive.
Image names are case sensitive.
Examples
This example shows how to create a tar file. The command writes the contents of the new-configs
directory on the local flash device to a file named saved.tar on the TFTP server at 172.20.10.30:
Switch# archive tar /create tftp:172.20.10.30/saved.tar flash:/new-configs
This example shows how to display the contents of the file that is in flash memory. The contents of the
tar file appear on the screen:
Switch# archive tar /table flash:image_name-mz.122-release.tar
info (219 bytes)
image_name-mz.122-release/(directory)
image_name-mz.122-release(610856 bytes)
image_name-mz.122-release/info (219 bytes)
info.ver (219 bytes)
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-13
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
archive tar
This example shows how to display only the html directory and its contents:
Switch# archive tar /table flash:image_name-mz.122-release.tar
image_name-mz.122-release/html
image_name-mz.122-release/html/ (directory)
image_name-mz.122-release/html/const.htm (556 bytes)
image_name-mz.122-release/html/xhome.htm (9373 bytes)
image_name-mz.122-release/html/menu.css (1654 bytes)
<output truncated>
This example shows how to extract the contents of a tar file on the TFTP server at 172.20.10.30. This
command extracts just the new-configs directory into the root directory on the local flash file system.
The remaining files in the saved.tar file are ignored.
Switch# archive tar /xtract tftp://172.20.10.30/saved.tar flash:/ new-configs
Related Commands
Command
Description
Command History
Downloads a new image from a TFTP server to the switch.
archive upload-sw
Uploads an existing image on the switch to a server.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-14
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
archive upload-sw
archive upload-sw
Use the archive upload-sw privileged EXEC command to upload an existing switch image to a server.
archive upload-sw [/version version_string] destination-url
Syntax Description
/version version_string
(Optional) Specify the specific version string of the image to be uploaded.
destination-url
The destination URL alias for a local or network file system. These options
are supported:
•
The syntax for the local flash file system:
flash:
•
The syntax for the FTP:
ftp:[[//username[:password]@location]/directory]/image-name.tar
•
The syntax for the Remote Copy Protocol (RCP):
rcp:[[//username@location]/directory]/image-name.tar
•
The syntax for the TFTP:
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/image-name.tar
The image-name.tar is the name of software image to be stored on the
server.
Defaults
Uploads the currently running image from the flash: file system.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the upload feature only if the HTML files associated with the embedded device manager have been
installed with the existing image.
The files are uploaded in this sequence: the Cisco IOS image, the HTML files, and info. After these files
are uploaded, the software creates the tar file.
Image names are case sensitive.
Examples
This example shows how to upload the currently running image to a TFTP server at 172.20.140.2:
Switch# archive upload-sw tftp://172.20.140.2/test-image.tar
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-15
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
archive upload-sw
Related Commands
Command
Description
Command History
Downloads a new image to the switch.
archive tar
Creates a tar file, lists the files in a tar file, or extracts the files from a tar file.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-16
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
arp access-list
arp access-list
Use the arp access-list global configuration command to define an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
access control list (ACL) or to add clauses to the end of a previously defined list. Use the no form of this
command to delete the specified ARP access list.
arp access-list acl-name
no arp access-list acl-name
Syntax Description
acl-name
Defaults
No ARP access lists are defined.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Name of the ACL.
After entering the arp access-list command, you enter ARP access-list configuration mode, and these
configuration commands are available:
•
default: returns a command to its default setting.
•
deny: specifies packets to reject. For more information, see the “deny (ARP access-list
configuration)” section on page 2-81.
•
exit: exits ARP access-list configuration mode.
•
no: negates a command or returns to the default settings.
•
permit: specifies packets to forward. For more information, see the “permit (ARP access-list
configuration)” section on page 2-322.
Use the permit and deny access-list configuration commands to forward and to drop ARP packets based
on the specified matching criteria.
When the ARP ACL is defined, you can apply it to a VLAN by using the ip arp inspection filter vlan
global configuration command. ARP packets containing only IP-to-MAC address bindings are compared
to the ACL. All other types of packets are bridged in the ingress VLAN without validation. If the ACL
permits a packet, the switch forwards it. If the ACL denies a packet because of an explicit deny
statement, the switch drops the packet. If the ACL denies a packet because of an implicit deny statement,
the switch compares the packet to the list of DHCP bindings (unless the ACL is static, which means that
packets are not compared to the bindings).
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-17
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
arp access-list
Examples
This example shows how to define an ARP access list and to permit both ARP requests and ARP
responses from a host with an IP address of 1.1.1.1 and a MAC address of 0000.0000.abcd:
Switch(config)# arp access-list static-hosts
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# permit ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 00001.0000.abcd
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show arp access-list privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
deny (ARP access-list
configuration)
Denies an ARP packet based on matches compared against the DHCP
bindings.
ip arp inspection filter Permits ARP requests and responses from a host configured with a static IP
vlan
address.
permit (ARP
access-list
configuration)
Permits an ARP packet based on matches compared against the DHCP
bindings.
show arp access-list
Displays detailed information about ARP access lists.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-18
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
bandwidth
bandwidth
Use the bandwidth policy-map class configuration command to configure class-based weighted fair
queuing (CBWFQ) by setting the output bandwidth for a policy-map class. Use the no form of this
command to remove the bandwidth setting for the class.
bandwidth {rate | percent value | remaining percent value}
no bandwidth [rate | percent value | remaining percent value]
Syntax Description
rate
Set the bandwidth rate for the class in kilobits per second (kbps).
The range is from 64 to 1000000.
percent value
Set the bandwidth for the class as a percent of the total bandwidth.
The range is from 1 to 100 percent.
remaining percent value
Set the bandwidth for the class as a percent of the remaining
bandwidth. The range is from 1 to 100 percent.
Defaults
No bandwidth is defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You use the bandwidth policy-map class command to control output traffic. The bandwidth command
specifies the bandwidth for traffic in that class. CBWFQ derives the weight for packets belonging to the
class from the bandwidth allocated to the class and uses the weight to ensure that the queue for that class
is serviced fairly. Bandwidth settings are not supported in input policy maps.
When you configure bandwidth for a class of traffic as an absolute rate (kbps) or a percentage of
bandwidth (percent value), it represents the minimum bandwidth guarantee or committed information
rate (CIR) for that traffic class. This means that the traffic class gets at least the bandwidth specified in
the command, but is not limited to that bandwidth. Any excess bandwidth on the port is allocated to each
class in the same ratio as the configured CIR rates.
When you enter the bandwidth remaining percent command, hard bandwidths are not guaranteed, and
only relative bandwidths are assured. Class bandwidths are always proportional to the specified
bandwidth percentages configured for the port.
When you configure bandwidth in an output policy, you must specify the same units in each bandwidth
configuration; that is, all absolute values (rates) or percentages.
The total rate of the minimum bandwidth guarantees for each queue of the policy cannot exceed the total
speed for the interface. If the percent keyword is used, the sum of the class bandwidth percentages
cannot exceed 100 percent.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-19
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
bandwidth
Using the queue-limit command to modify the default queue limit is especially important on
higher-speed interfaces so that they meet the minimum bandwidth guarantees required by the interface.
You cannot use the bandwidth policy-map class configuration command to configure CBWFQ and the
shape average command to configure class-based shaping for the same class in a policy map.
You cannot configure bandwidth in a class that includes priority queuing (configured with the priority
policy-map class configuration command).
Examples
This example shows how to set the precedence of output queues by setting bandwidth in kilobits per
second. The classes outclass1, outclass2, and outclass3 get a minimum of 50000, 20000, and 10000
kbps. The class class-default at a minimum gets the remaining bandwidth.
Switch(config)# policy-map out-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth 50000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth 20000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth 10000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output out-policy
Switch(config-if)# exit
This example shows how to set the precedence of output queues by allocating percentages of the total
available bandwidth to each traffic class.The classes outclass1, outclass2, and outclass3 get a minimum
of 50, 20, and 10 percent. The class class-default at a minimum gets 20 percent.
Switch(config)# policy-map out-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 50
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output out-policy
Switch(config-if)# exit
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-20
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
bandwidth
This example shows how to set outclass1 as a priority queue, with outclass2, and outclass3 getting 50
and 20 percent, respectively, of the bandwidth remaining after the priority queue is serviced. The class
class-default gets the remaining 30 percent with no guarantees.
Switch(config)# policy-map out-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth remaining percent 50
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth remaining percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output out-policy
Switch(config-if)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified class-map name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-21
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
boot buffersize
boot buffersize
Use the boot buffersize global configuration command to configure the NVRAM size. Use the no form
of this command to return to the default.
boot buffersize size
no boot buffersize
Syntax Description
size
The NVRAM buffer size in KB.
The valid range is from 4096 to 1048576.
Defaults
The default NVRAM buffer size is 512 KB.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(55)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The default NVRAM buffer size is 512 KB. In some cases, the configuration file might be too large to
save to NVRAM. You can configure the size of the NVRAM buffer to support larger configuration files.
After you configure the NVRAM buffer size, reload the switch.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the NVRAM buffer size:
Switch(config)# boot buffersize 524288
Switch(config)# end
Related Commands
Command
Description
show boot
Displays the settings of the boot environment variables.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-22
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
boot config-file
boot config-file
Use the boot config-file global configuration command to specify the filename that Cisco IOS uses to
read and write a nonvolatile copy of the system configuration. Use the no form of this command to return
to the default setting.
boot config-file flash:/file-url
no boot config-file
Syntax Description
flash:/file-url
Defaults
The default configuration file is flash:config.text.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The path (directory) and name of the configuration file.
Filenames and directory names are case sensitive.
This command changes the setting of the CONFIG_FILE environment variable. For more information,
see Appendix A, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Boot Loader Commands.”
Related Commands
Command
Description
show boot
Displays the settings of the boot environment variables.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-23
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
boot enable-break
boot enable-break
Use the boot enable-break global configuration command to enable interrupting the automatic boot
process. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
boot enable-break
no boot enable-break
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Disabled. The automatic boot process cannot be interrupted by pressing the Break key on the console.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When you enter this command, you can interrupt the automatic boot process by pressing the break key
on the console after the flash file system is initialized. The break key is different for each operating
system:
•
On a SUN work station running UNIX, Ctrl-C is the break key.
•
On a PC running Windows 2000, Ctrl-Break is the break key.
This command changes the setting of the ENABLE_BREAK environment variable. For more
information, see Appendix A, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Boot Loader Commands.”
Related Commands
Command
Description
show boot
Displays the settings of the boot environment variables.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-24
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
boot helper
boot helper
Use the boot helper global configuration command to dynamically load files during boot loader
initialization to extend or patch the functionality of the boot loader. Use the no form of this command
to return to the default.
boot helper filesystem:/file-url ...
no boot helper
Syntax Description
filesystem:
Alias for a flash file system. Use flash: for the system board flash device.
/file-url
The path (directory) and a list of loadable files to dynamically load during
loader initialization. Separate each image name with a semicolon.
Defaults
No helper files are loaded.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This variable is used only for internal development and testing.
Filenames and directory names are case sensitive.
This command changes the setting of the HELPER environment variable. For more information, see
Appendix A, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Boot Loader Commands.”
Related Commands
Command
Description
show boot
Displays the settings of the boot environment variables.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-25
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
boot helper-config-file
boot helper-config-file
Use the boot helper-config-file global configuration command to specify the name of the configuration
file to be used by the Cisco IOS helper image. If this is not set, the file specified by the CONFIG_FILE
environment variable is used by all versions of Cisco IOS that are loaded. Use the no form of this
command to return to the default setting.
boot helper-config-file filesystem:/file-url
no boot helper-config file
Syntax Description
filesystem:
Alias for a flash file system. Use flash: for the system board flash
device.
/file-url
The path (directory) and helper configuration file to load.
Defaults
No helper configuration file is specified.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This variable is used only for internal development and testing.
Filenames and directory names are case sensitive.
This command changes the setting of the HELPER_CONFIG_FILE environment variable. For more
information, see Appendix A, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Boot Loader Commands.”
Related Commands
Command
Description
show boot
Displays the settings of the boot environment variables.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-26
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
boot manual
boot manual
Use the boot manual global configuration command to enable manually booting the switch during the
next boot cycle. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
boot manual
no boot manual
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Manual booting is disabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The next time you reboot the system, the switch is in boot loader mode, which is shown by the switch:
prompt. To boot the system, use the boot boot loader command, and specify the name of the bootable
image.
This command changes the setting of the MANUAL_BOOT environment variable. For more
information, see Appendix A, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Boot Loader Commands.”
Related Commands
Command
Description
show boot
Displays the settings of the boot environment variables.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-27
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
boot private-config-file
boot private-config-file
Use the boot private-config-file global configuration command to specify the filename that Cisco IOS
uses to read and write a nonvolatile copy of the private configuration. Use the no form of this command
to return to the default setting.
boot private-config-file filename
no boot private-config-file
Syntax Description
filename
Defaults
The default configuration file is private-config.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
The name of the private configuration file.
Usage Guidelines
Filenames are case sensitive.
Examples
This example shows how to specify the name of the private configuration file to be pconfig:
Switch(config)# boot private-config-file pconfig
Related Commands
Command
Description
show boot
Displays the settings of the boot environment variables.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-28
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
boot system
boot system
Use the boot system global configuration command to specify the Cisco IOS image to load during the
next boot cycle. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
boot system filesystem:/file-url ...
no boot system
Syntax Description
filesystem:
Alias for a flash file system. Use flash: for the system board flash device.
/file-url
The path (directory) and name of a bootable image. Separate image names
with a semicolon.
Defaults
The switch attempts to automatically boot the system by using information in the BOOT environment
variable. If this variable is not set, the switch attempts to load and execute the first executable image it
can by performing a recursive, depth-first search throughout the flash file system. In a depth-first search
of a directory, each encountered subdirectory is completely searched before continuing the search in the
original directory.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Filenames and directory names are case sensitive.
If you are using the archive download-sw privileged EXEC command to maintain system images, you
never need to use the boot system command. The boot system command is automatically manipulated
to load the downloaded image.
This command changes the setting of the BOOT environment variable. For more information, see
Appendix A, “Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Boot Loader Commands.”
Related Commands
Command
Description
show boot
Displays the settings of the boot environment variables.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-29
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
channel-group
channel-group
Use the channel-group interface configuration command to assign an Ethernet port to an EtherChannel
group. Use the no form of this command to remove an Ethernet port from an EtherChannel group.
channel-group channel-group-number mode {active | {auto [non-silent] | desirable [non-silent]
| on} | passive}
no channel-group
PAgP modes:
channel-group channel-group-number mode {auto [non-silent] | {desirable [non-silent]}
LACP modes:
channel-group channel-group-number mode {active | passive}
On mode:
channel-group channel-group-number mode on
Note
Syntax Description
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP.) and Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) are available only
on network node interfaces (NNIs) or enhanced network interfaces (ENIs). The active, auto, desirable,
and passive keywords are not visible on user network interfaces (UNIs).
channel-group-number
Specify the channel group number. The range is 1 to 48.
mode
Specify the EtherChannel mode.
active
Unconditionally enable LACP
Active mode places a port into a negotiating state in which the port initiates
negotiations with other ports by sending LACP packets. A channel is
formed with another port group in either the active or passive mode.
auto
Enable the PAgP only if a PAgP device is detected.
Auto mode places a port into a passive negotiating state in which the port
responds to PAgP packets it receives but does not start PAgP packet
negotiation. A channel is formed only with another port group in desirable
mode. When auto is enabled, silent operation is the default.
desirable
Unconditionally enable PAgP.
Desirable mode places a port into an active negotiating state in which the
port starts negotiations with other ports by sending PAgP packets. A
channel is formed with another port group in either the desirable or auto
mode. When desirable is enabled, silent operation is the default.
non-silent
(Optional) Use in PAgP mode with the auto or desirable keyword when
traffic is expected from the other device.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-30
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
channel-group
on
Enable on mode.
In on mode, a usable EtherChannel exists only when both connected port
groups are in the on mode.
passive
Enable LACP only if a LACP device is detected.
Passive mode places a port into a negotiating state in which the port
responds to LACP packets it receives but does not initiate LACP packet
negotiation. A channel is formed only with another port group in active
mode.
Defaults
No channel groups are assigned.
No mode is configured.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
For Layer 2 EtherChannels, you do not have to create a port-channel interface first by using the interface
port-channel global configuration command before assigning a physical port to a channel group.
Instead, you can use the channel-group interface configuration command. It automatically creates the
port-channel interface when the channel group gets its first physical port if the logical interface is not
already created. If you create the port-channel interface first, the channel-group-number can be the same
as the port-channel-number, or you can use a new number. If you use a new number, the channel-group
command dynamically creates a new port channel.
If the port is a UNI or an ENI, you must use the no shutdown interface configuration command to enable
it before using the channel-group command. UNIs and ENIs are disabled by default. NNIs are enabled
by default.
You do not have to disable the IP address that is assigned to a physical port that is part of a channel group,
but we strongly recommend that you do so.
You create Layer 3 port channels by using the interface port-channel command followed by the no
switchport interface configuration command. You should manually configure the port-channel logical
interface before putting the interface into the channel group.
After you configure an EtherChannel, configuration changes that you make on the port-channel interface
apply to all the physical ports assigned to the port-channel interface. Configuration changes applied to
the physical port affect only the port where you apply the configuration. To change the parameters of all
ports in an EtherChannel, apply configuration commands to the port-channel interface, for example,
spanning-tree commands or commands to configure a Layer 2 EtherChannel as a trunk.
If you do not specify non-silent with the auto or desirable mode, silent is assumed. The silent mode is
used when the switch is connected to a device that is not PAgP-capable and seldom, if ever, sends
packets. A example of a silent partner is a file server or a packet analyzer that is not generating traffic.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-31
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
channel-group
In this case, running PAgP on a physical port prevents that port from ever becoming operational.
However, it allows PAgP to operate, to attach the port to a channel group, and to use the port for
transmission. Both ends of the link cannot be set to silent.
In the on mode, an EtherChannel exists only when a port group in the on mode is connected to another
port group in the on mode.
Caution
You should exercise care when setting the mode to on (manual configuration). All ports configured in
the on mode are bundled in the same group and are forced to have similar characteristics. If the group is
misconfigured, packet loss or spanning-tree loops might occur.
Do not configure an EtherChannel in both the PAgP and LACP modes. EtherChannel groups running
PAgP and LACP can coexist on the same switch. Individual EtherChannel groups can run either PAgP
or LACP, but they cannot interoperate.
Note
PAgP and LACP are available only on NNIs and ENIs.
If you set the protocol by using the channel-protocol interface configuration command, the setting is
not overridden by the channel-group interface configuration command.
Do not configure a port that is an active or a not-yet-active member of an EtherChannel as an
IEEE 802.1x port. If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on an EtherChannel port, an error message appears,
and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled.
Do not configure a secure port as part of an EtherChannel or an EtherChannel port as a secure port.
For a complete list of configuration guidelines, see the “Configuring EtherChannels” chapter in the
software configuration guide for this release.
Caution
Examples
Do not enable Layer 3 addresses on the physical EtherChannel ports. Do not assign bridge groups on the
physical EtherChannel ports because it creates loops.
This example shows how to configure an EtherChannel. It assigns two static-access ports in VLAN 10
to channel 5 with the PAgP mode desirable:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface range gigabitethernet0/1 -2
Switch(config-if-range)# switchport mode access
Switch(config-if-range)# switchport access vlan 10
Switch(config-if-range)# channel-group 5 mode desirable
Switch(config-if-range)# end
This example shows how to configure an EtherChannel. It assigns two static-access ports in VLAN 10
to channel 5 with the LACP mode active:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface range gigabitethernet0/1 -2
Switch(config-if-range)# switchport mode access
Switch(config-if-range)# switchport access vlan 10
Switch(config-if-range)# channel-group 5 mode active
Switch(config-if-range)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-32
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
channel-group
Related Commands
Command
Description
channel-protocol
Restricts the protocol used on a port to manage channeling.
interface port-channel
Accesses or creates the port channel.
show etherchannel
Displays EtherChannel information for a channel.
show lacp
Displays LACP channel-group information.
show pagp
Displays PAgP channel-group information.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use
this link to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing
page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_
command_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to
navigate to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-33
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
channel-protocol
channel-protocol
Use the channel-protocol interface configuration command to restrict the protocol used on a port to
manage channeling. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
channel-protocol {lacp | pagp}
no channel-protocol
Syntax Description
lacp
Configure an EtherChannel with the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
pagp
Configure an EtherChannel with the Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP).
Defaults
No protocol is assigned to the EtherChannel.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Note
Use the channel-protocol command only to restrict a channel to LACP or PAgP. If you set the protocol
by using the channel-protocol command, the setting is not overridden by the channel-group interface
configuration command.
PAgP and LACP are available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) and enhanced network interfaces
(ENIs).
If the port is a user network interface (UNI) or an ENI, you must use the no shutdown interface
configuration command to enable it before using the channel-protocol command. UNIs and ENIs are
disabled by default. NNIs are enabled by default.
You must use the channel-group interface configuration command to configure the EtherChannel
parameters. The channel-group command also can set the mode for the EtherChannel.
You cannot enable both the PAgP and LACP modes on an EtherChannel group.
PAgP and LACP are not compatible; both ends of a channel must use the same protocol.
Examples
This example shows how to specify LACP as the protocol that manages the EtherChannel:
Switch(config-if)# channel-protocol lacp
You can verify your settings by entering the show etherchannel [channel-group-number] protocol
privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-34
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
channel-protocol
Related Commands
Command
Description
channel-group
Assigns an Ethernet port to an EtherChannel group.
show etherchannel protocol
Displays protocol information the EtherChannel.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-35
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
class
class
Use the class policy-map configuration command to specify the name of the class whose policy you want
to create or to change or to specify the system default class before you configure a policy and to enter
policy-map class configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the class from a
policy map.
class {class-map-name| class-default}
no class {class-map-name| class-default}
Syntax Description
class-map-name
Name of a class map created by using the class-map global configuration
command.
class-default
The system default class. This class matches all unclassified traffic. You
cannot create or delete the default class.
Defaults
No policy map classes are defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Before using the class class-map-name command in policy-map configuration mode, you must create
the class by using the class-map class-map-name global configuration command. The class
class-default is the class to which traffic is directed if that traffic does not match any of the match criteria
in the configured class maps.
Use the policy-map global configuration command to identify the policy map and to enter policy-map
configuration mode. After specifying a policy map, you can configure a policy for new classes or modify
a policy for any existing classes in that policy map.
An input policy map can have a maximum of 64 classes, plus class-default.
You attach the policy map to a port by using the service-policy interface configuration command.
After entering the class command, you enter policy-map class configuration mode, and these
configuration commands are available:
•
bandwidth: specifies the bandwidth allocated for a class belonging to a policy map. For more
information, see the bandwidth command.
•
exit: exits policy-map class configuration mode and returns to policy-map configuration mode.
•
no: returns a command to its default setting.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-36
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
class
•
police: defines an individual policer or aggregate policer for the classified traffic. The policer
specifies the bandwidth limitations and the action to take when the limits are exceeded. For more
information, see the police and police aggregate (policy-map class configuration) policy-map
class commands.
•
priority: sets the strict scheduling priority for this class or, when used with the police keyword, sets
priority with police. For more information, see the priority policy-map class command.
•
queue-limit: sets the queue maximum threshold for Weighted Tail Drop (WTD). For more
information, see the queue-limit command.
•
service-policy: configures a QoS service policy to attach to a parent policy map for an input or
output policy. For more information, see the service-policy (policy-map class configuration)
command.
•
set: specifies a value to be assigned to the classified traffic. For more information, see the set
commands.
•
shape average: specifies the average traffic shaping rate. For more information, see the shape
average command.
To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode,
use the end command.
Examples
This example shows how to create a policy map called policy1, define a class class1, and enter
policy-map class configuration mode to set a criterion for the class.
Switch(config)# policy-map policy1
Switch(config-pmap)# class class1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose
name you specify.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
show policy-map
interface [interface-id]
Displays policy maps configured on the specified interface or on all
interfaces.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-37
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
class-map
class-map
Use the class-map global configuration command to create a class map to be used for matching packets
to a specified criteria and to enter class-map configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to
delete an existing class map.
class-map [match-all | match-any] class-map-name
no class-map [match-all | match-any] class-map-name
Syntax Description
Defaults
match-all
(Optional) Perform a logical-AND of all matching statements under this class
map. Packets must meet all of the match criteria.
match-any
(Optional) Perform a logical-OR of the matching statements under this class
map. Packets must meet one or more of the match criteria.
class-map-name
Name of the class map.
No class maps are defined.
If neither the match-all or the match-any keyword is specified, the default is match-all.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to specify the name of the class for which you want to create or to modify class-map
match criteria and to enter class-map configuration mode.
The switch supports a maximum of 1024 unique class maps.
You use the class-map command and class-map configuration mode to define packet classification as
part of a globally named service policy applied on a per-port basis. When you configure a class map, you
can use one or more match commands to specify match criteria. Packets arriving at either the input or
output interface (determined by how you configure the service-policy interface configuration command)
are checked against the class-map match criteria to determine if the packet belongs to that class.
A match-all class map means that the packet must match all entries and can have no other match
statements.
After you are in class-map configuration mode, these configuration commands are available:
•
description: describes the class map (up to 200 characters). The show class-map privileged EXEC
command displays the description and the name of the class map.
•
exit: exits QoS class-map configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-38
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
class-map
Examples
•
match: configures classification criteria. For more information, see the match class-map
configuration commands.
•
no: removes a match statement from a class map.
This example shows how to configure the class map called class1. By default, the class map is match-all
and therefore can contain no other match criteria.
Switch(config)# class-map class1
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
This example shows how to configure a match-any class map with one match criterion, which is an
access list called 103. This class map (matching an ACL) is supported only in an input policy map.
Switch(config)# class-map class2
Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 103
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
This example shows how to delete the class map class1:
Switch(config)# no class-map class1
You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified
class-map name.
match access-group
Configures the match criteria for a class map on the basis of the
specified access control list (ACL)
match cos
Configures the match criteria for a class map on the basis of the
Layer 2 class of service (CoS) marking,
match ip dscp
Configures the match criteria for a class map on the basis of a
specific IPv4 Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) value.
match ip precedence
Configures the match criteria for a class map on the basis of IPv4
precedence values.
match qos-group
Configures the match criteria for a class map on the basis of a
specific quality of service (QoS) group value.
match vlan
Configures the match criteria for a class map in the parent policy of
a hierarchical policy map based on a VLAN ID or range of VLAN
IDs.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple
ports to specify a service policy.
show class-map
Displays QoS class maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-39
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear ip arp inspection log
clear ip arp inspection log
Use the clear ip arp inspection log privileged EXEC command to clear the dynamic Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) inspection log buffer.
clear ip arp inspection log
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to clear the contents of the log buffer:
Switch# clear ip arp inspection log
You can verify that the log was cleared by entering the show ip arp inspection log privileged command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP access control list (ACL).
ip arp inspection log-buffer
Configures the dynamic ARP inspection logging buffer.
ip arp inspection vlan
logging
Controls the type of packets that are logged per VLAN.
show ip arp inspection log
Displays the configuration and contents of the dynamic ARP
inspection log buffer.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-40
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear ip arp inspection statistics
clear ip arp inspection statistics
Use the clear ip arp inspection statistics privileged EXEC command to clear the dynamic Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection statistics.
clear ip arp inspection statistics [vlan vlan-range]
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-range
(Optional) Clear statistics for the specified VLAN or VLANs.
You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of
VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma.
The range is 1 to 4094.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to clear the statistics for VLAN 1:
Switch# clear ip arp inspection statistics vlan 1
You can verify that the statistics were deleted by entering the show ip arp inspection statistics vlan 1
privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip arp inspection
statistics
Displays statistics for forwarded, dropped, MAC validation failure, and
IP validation failure packets for all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-41
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear ip dhcp snooping
clear ip dhcp snooping
Use the clear ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command to clear the DHCP binding database agent
statistics or the DHCP snooping statistics counters.
clear ip dhcp snooping {binding {* | ip-address | interface interface-id | vlan vlan-id} | database
statistics | statistics}
Syntax Description
binding
Clear the DHCP snooping binding database.
*
Clear all automatic bindings.
ip-address
Clear the binding entry IP address.
interface interface-id
Clear the binding input interface.
vlan vlan-id
Clear the binding entry VLAN.
database statistics
Clear the DHCP snooping binding database agent statistics.
database statistics
Clear the DHCP snooping binding database agent statistics.
statistics
Clear the DHCP snooping statistics counter.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When you enter the clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics command, the switch does not update
the entries in the binding database and in the binding file before clearing the statistics.
Examples
This example shows how to clear the DHCP snooping binding database agent statistics:
Switch# clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics
You can verify that the statistics were cleared by entering the show ip dhcp snooping database
privileged EXEC command.
This example shows how to clear the DHCP snooping statistics counters:
Switch# clear ip dhcp snooping statistics
You can verify that the statistics were cleared by entering the show ip dhcp snooping statistics user
EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-42
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear ip dhcp snooping
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping
Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
ip dhcp snooping database
Configures the DHCP snooping binding database agent or
the binding file.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the status of DHCP snooping database agent.
show ip dhcp snooping database
Displays the DHCP snooping binding database agent
statistics.
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
Displays the DHCP snooping statistics.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-43
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear ipc
clear ipc
Use the clear ipc privileged EXEC command to clear Interprocess Communications Protocol (IPC)
statistics.
clear ipc {queue-statistics | statistics}
Syntax Description
queue-statistics
Clear the IPC queue statistics.
statistics
Clear the IPC statistics.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can clear all statistics by using the clear ipc statistics command, or you can clear only the queue
statistics by using the clear ipc queue-statistics command.
Examples
This example shows how to clear all statistics:
Switch# clear ipc statistics
This example shows how to clear only the queue statistics:
Switch# clear ipc queue-statistics
You can verify that the statistics were deleted by entering the show ipc rpc or the show ipc session
privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ipc {rpc | session}
Displays the IPC multicast routing statistics.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-44
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear ipv6 dhcp conflict
clear ipv6 dhcp conflict
Use the clear ipv6 dhcp conflict privileged EXEC command to clear an address conflict from the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server database.
clear ipv6 dhcp conflict {* | IPv6-address}
Note
Syntax Description
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
*
Clear all address conflicts.
IPv6-address
Clear the host IPv6 address that contains the conflicting address.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default |
routing | vlan} global configuration command, and reload the switch.
When you configure the DHCPv6 server to detect conflicts, it uses ping. The client uses neighbor
discovery to detect clients and reports to the server through a DECLINE message. If an address conflict
is detected, the address is removed from the pool and is not assigned until the administrator removes the
address from the conflict list.
If you use the asterisk (*) character as the address parameter, DHCP clears all conflicts.
Examples
This example shows how to clear all address conflicts from the DHCPv6 server database:
Switch# clear ipv6 dhcp conflict *
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ipv6 dhcp
conflict
Displays address conflicts found by a DHCPv6 server, or reported through
a DECLINE message from a client.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-45
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear l2protocol-tunnel counters
clear l2protocol-tunnel counters
Use the clear l2protocol-tunnel counters privileged EXEC command to clear the protocol counters in
protocol tunnel ports.
clear l2protocol-tunnel counters [interface-id]
This command is supported only when the switch is running the metro IP access or metro access image.
Syntax Description
interface-id
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
(Optional) Specify interface (physical interface or port channel) for which
protocol counters are to be cleared.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to clear protocol tunnel counters on the switch or on the specified interface.
Examples
This example shows how to clear Layer 2 protocol tunnel counters on an interface:
Switch# clear l2protocol-tunnel counters gigabitethernet0/2
Related Commands
Command
Description
show l2protocol-tunnel
Displays information about ports configured for Layer 2 protocol
tunneling.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-46
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear lacp
clear lacp
Use the clear lacp privileged EXEC command to clear Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
channel-group counters.
clear lacp {channel-group-number counters | counters}
Note
Syntax Description
LACP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
channel-group-number
(Optional) Channel group number. The range is 1 to 48.
counters
Clear traffic counters.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can clear all counters by using the clear lacp counters command, or you can clear only the counters
for the specified channel group by using the clear lacp channel-group-number counters command.
Examples
This example shows how to clear all channel-group information:
Switch# clear lacp counters
This example shows how to clear LACP traffic counters for group 4:
Switch# clear lacp 4 counters
You can verify that the information was deleted by entering the show lacp counters or the show lacp 4
counters privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show lacp
Displays LACP channel-group information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-47
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear logging onboard
clear logging onboard
Use the clear logging onboard privileged EXEC command to clear all the on-board failure logging
(OBFL) data except for the uptime and CLI-command information stored in the flash memory.
clear logging onboard [module {slot-number | all}]
Syntax Description
module
(Optional) The slot number is always 1 and is not relevant for the ME-3400E.
{slot-number | all} Entering clear logging onboard module 1 or clear logging onboard all has the
same result as entering clear logging onboard.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
We recommend that you keep OBFL enabled and do not clear the data stored in the flash memory.
Examples
These examples show how to clear all the OBFL information except for the uptime and CLI-command
information:
Switch# clear logging onboard
Clear logging onboard buffer [confirm]
PID: ME-3400E-24TS-M
, VID: 03 , SN: FOC1225U4CY
Switch# clear logging onboard module all
Clear logging onboard buffer [confirm]
PID: ME-3400E-24TS-M
, VID: 03 , SN: FOC1225U4CY
You can verify that the information was cleared by entering the show logging onboard onboard
privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
hw-module module logging
onboard
Enables OBFL.
show logging onboard
Displays OBFL information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-48
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear mac address-table
clear mac address-table
Use the clear mac address-table privileged EXEC command to delete from the MAC address table a
specific dynamic address, all dynamic addresses on a particular interface, or all dynamic addresses on a
particular VLAN. This command also clears the MAC address notification global counters.
clear mac address-table {dynamic [address mac-addr | interface interface-id | vlan vlan-id] |
notification}
Syntax Description
dynamic
Delete all dynamic MAC addresses.
dynamic address
mac-addr
(Optional) Delete the specified dynamic MAC address.
dynamic interface
interface-id
(Optional) Delete all dynamic MAC addresses on the specified physical port
or port channel.
dynamic vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Delete all dynamic MAC addresses for the specified VLAN. The
range is 1 to 4096.
notification
Clear the notifications in the history table and reset the counters.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to remove a specific MAC address from the dynamic address table:
Switch# clear mac address-table dynamic address 0008.0070.0007
You can verify that the information was deleted by entering the show mac address-table privileged
EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
mac address-table notification
Enables the MAC address notification feature.
show mac address-table
Displays the MAC address table static and dynamic entries.
show mac address-table notification
Displays the MAC address notification settings for all
interfaces or the specified interface.
snmp trap mac-notification change
Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
MAC address notification trap on a specific interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-49
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear mac address-table move update
clear mac address-table move update
Use the clear mac address-table move update privileged EXEC command to clear the mac
address-table-move update-related counters.
clear mac address-table move update
This command is supported only when the switch is running the metro IP access or metro access image.
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to clear the mac address-table move update related counters.
Switch# clear mac address-table move update
You can verify that the information was cleared by entering the show mac address-table move update
privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
mac address-table move update
Configures MAC address-table move update on the switch.
show mac address-table move update Displays the MAC address-table move update information on
the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-50
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear pagp
clear pagp
Use the clear pagp privileged EXEC command to clear Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP)
channel-group information.
clear pagp {channel-group-number counters | counters}
Note
Syntax Description
PAgP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
channel-group-number
(Optional) Channel group number. The range is 1 to 48.
counters
Clear traffic counters.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can clear all counters by using the clear pagp counters command, or you can clear only the counters
for the specified channel group by using the clear pagp channel-group-number counters command.
Examples
This example shows how to clear all channel-group information:
Switch# clear pagp counters
This example shows how to clear PAgP traffic counters for group 10:
Switch# clear pagp 10 counters
You can verify that information was deleted by entering the show pagp privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show pagp
Displays PAgP channel-group information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-51
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear policer cpu uni-eni counters
clear policer cpu uni-eni counters
Use the clear policer cpu uni-eni counters privileged EXEC command to clear control-plane policer
statistics. The control-plane policer drops or rate-limits control packets from user network interfaces
(UNIs) and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs) to protect the CPU from overload.
clear policer cpu uni-eni counters {classification | drop}
Syntax Description
classification
Clear control-plane policer classification counters that maintain statistics by feature.
drop
Clear all frame drop statistics maintained by the control-plane policer.
Command Default
No default is defined.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can use this command to clear statistics maintained per feature or statistics about dropped frames.
You can enter the show platform policer cpu classification or show policer cpu uni drop command to
view feature statistics or dropped frames before and after you use the clear command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show platform policer cpu
classification
Displays CPU policer statistics per feature.
show policer cpu uni-eni
Displays CPU policer information for the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-52
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear port-security
clear port-security
Use the clear port-security privileged EXEC command to delete from the MAC address table all secure
addresses or all secure addresses of a specific type (configured, dynamic, or sticky) on the switch or on
an interface.
clear port-security {all | configured | dynamic | sticky} [[address mac-addr | interface
interface-id] [vlan {vlan-id | {access | voice}}]]
Syntax Description
all
Delete all secure MAC addresses.
configured
Delete configured secure MAC addresses.
dynamic
Delete secure MAC addresses auto-learned by hardware.
sticky
Delete secure MAC addresses, either auto-learned or configured.
address mac-addr
(Optional) Delete the specified dynamic secure MAC address.
interface interface-id
(Optional) Delete all the dynamic secure MAC addresses on the specified
physical port or VLAN.
vlan
(Optional) Delete the specified secure MAC address from the specified
VLAN. Enter one of these options after you enter the vlan keyword:
•
vlan-id—On a trunk port, specify the VLAN ID of the VLAN on which
this address should be cleared.
•
access—On an access port, clear the specified secure MAC address on
the access VLAN.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to clear all secure addresses from the MAC address table:
Switch# clear port-security all
This example shows how to remove a specific configured secure address from the MAC address table:
Switch# clear port-security configured address 0008.0070.0007
This example shows how to remove all the dynamic secure addresses learned on a specific interface:
Switch# clear port-security dynamic interface gigabitethernet0/1
This example shows how to remove all the dynamic secure addresses from the address table:
Switch# clear port-security dynamic
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-53
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear port-security
You can verify that the information was deleted by entering the show port-security privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
switchport port-security
Enables port security on an interface.
switchport port-security
mac-address mac-address
Configures secure MAC addresses.
switchport port-security maximum Configures a maximum number of secure MAC addresses on a
value
secure interface.
show port-security
Displays the port security settings defined for an interface or for
the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-54
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear rep counters
clear rep counters
Use the clear rep counters privileged EXEC command to clear Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP)
counters for the specified interface or all interfaces.
clear rep counters [interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
(Optional) Specify a REP interface whose counters should be cleared.
You can clear all REP counters by using the clear rep counters command, or you can clear only the
counters for the interface by using the clear rep counters interface interface-id command.
When you enter the clear rep counters command, only the counters visible in the output of the show
interface rep detail command are cleared. SNMP visible counters are not cleared as they are read-only.
Examples
This example shows how to clear all REP counters for all REP interfaces:
Switch# clear rep counters
You can verify that REP information was deleted by entering the show interfaces rep detail privileged
EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces rep detail
Displays detailed REP configuration and status information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-55
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear spanning-tree counters
clear spanning-tree counters
Use the clear spanning-tree counters privileged EXEC command to clear the spanning-tree counters.
clear spanning-tree counters [interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
(Optional) Clear all spanning-tree counters on the specified interface. Valid
interfaces include physical network node interfaces (NNIs), enhanced
network interfaces (ENIs) on which spanning tree has been enabled, VLANs,
and spanning-tree port channels. The VLAN range is 1 to 4094. The
port-channel range is 1 to 48.
Note
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is not supported on user network
interfaces (UNIs). Though visible in the command-line help, the
command has no effect on UNIs or on ENIs on which STP is not
enabled.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If the interface-id is not specified, spanning-tree counters are cleared for all STP ports.
Examples
This example shows how to clear spanning-tree counters for all STP ports:
Switch# clear spanning-tree counters
Related Commands
Command
Description
show spanning-tree
Displays spanning-tree state information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-56
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
Use the clear spanning-tree detected-protocols privileged EXEC command to restart the protocol
migration process (force the renegotiation with neighboring switches) on all spanning-tree interfaces or
on the specified interface.
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols [interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
(Optional) Restart the protocol migration process on the specified interface.
Valid interfaces include physical network node interfaces (NNIs), enhanced
network interfaces (ENIs) on which spanning tree is enabled, VLANs, and
port channels. The VLAN range is 1 to 4094. The port-channel range is 1
to 48.
Note
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is not supported on user network
interfaces (UNIs). Though visible in the command-line help, the
command has no effect on UNIs or on ENIs on which STP is not
enabled.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
A switch running the rapid per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (rapid-PVST+) protocol or the Multiple
Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports a built-in protocol migration mechanism that enables it to
interoperate with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. If a rapid-PVST+ switch or an MSTP switch receives a
legacy IEEE 802.1D configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) with the protocol version set to 0,
it sends only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on that port. A multiple spanning-tree (MST) switch can also detect
that a port is at the boundary of a region when it receives a legacy BPDU, an MST BPDU (Version 3)
associated with a different region, or a rapid spanning-tree (RST) BPDU (Version 2).
However, the switch does not automatically revert to the rapid-PVST+ or the MSTP mode if it no longer
receives IEEE 802.1D BPDUs. It cannot learn whether the legacy switch has been removed from the link
unless the legacy switch is the designated switch. Use the clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
command in this situation.
Examples
This example shows how to restart the protocol migration process on a port:
Switch# clear spanning-tree detected-protocols interface gigabitethernet0/1
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-57
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
Related Commands
Command
Description
show spanning-tree
Displays spanning-tree state information.
spanning-tree link-type
Overrides the default link-type setting and enables rapid spanning-tree
transitions to the forwarding state.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-58
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
clear vmps statistics
clear vmps statistics
Use the clear vmps statistics privileged EXEC command to clear the statistics maintained by the VLAN
Query Protocol (VQP) client.
clear vmps statistics
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to clear VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) statistics:
Switch# clear vmps statistics
You can verify that information was deleted by entering the show vmps statistics privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show vmps
Displays the VQP version, reconfirmation interval, retry count, VMPS IP
addresses, and the current and primary servers.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-59
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
conform-action
conform-action
Use the conform-action policy-map class police configuration command to set multiple actions for a
policy-map class for packets that conform to the committed information rate (CIR) or peak information
rate (PIR) by having a rate less than the conform burst. Use the no form of this command to cancel the
action or to return to the default action.
conform-action {drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]
[table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit]}
no conform-action {drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]
[table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit]}
Syntax Description
Defaults
drop
Drop the packet.
set-cos-transmit
new-cos-value
Set a new class of service (CoS) value for the packet and send the packet.
This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the new CoS
value is 0 to 7.
set-dscp-transmit
new-dscp-value
Set a new Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value for the packet
and send the packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The
range for the new DCSP value is 0 to 63.
set-prec-transmit
new-precedence-value
Set a new IP precedence value for the packet and send the packet. This
specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the new IP
precedence value is 0 to 7.
set-qos-transmit
qos-group-value
Set a new quality of service (QoS) group value for the packet and send the
packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the
new QoS value is 0 to 99.
cos
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the CoS value of the incoming packet, and send the packet. This specifies
the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
dscp
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the DSCP value of the incoming packet, and send the packet. This
specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
precedence
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the IP precedence value of the incoming packet, and send the packet. This
specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
table table-map name
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the preceding from-type keyword.
Specify the table map to be used for the enhanced packet marking. The
to-type of the action is marked based on the from-type parameter of the action
using this table map.
transmit
(Optional) Send the packet unmodified.
The default conform action is to send the packet.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-60
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
conform-action
Command Modes
Policy-map class police configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You configure conform actions for packets when the packet rate is less than the configured conform
burst.
If the conform action is set to drop, the exceed and violate actions are automatically set to drop.
You can configure conform-action marking by using enhanced packet marking to modify a QoS marking
based on any incoming QoS marking and table maps. The switch also supports simultaneously marking
multiple QoS parameters for the same class and configuring conform-action, exceed-action, and
violate-action marking.
Access policy-map class police configuration mode by entering the police policy-map class command.
See the police policy-map class configuration command for more information.
Use this command to set one or more conform actions for a traffic class.
Examples
This example shows how configure multiple conform actions in a policy map that sets a committed
information rate of 23000 bits per second (bps) and a conform burst rate of 10000 bps. The policy map
includes multiple conform actions (for DSCP and for Layer 2 CoS) and an exceed action.
Switch(config)# policy-map map1
Switch(config-pmap)# class cos-set-1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 23000 bc 10000
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# conform-action set-dscp-transmit 48
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# conform-action set-cos-transmit 5
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# exceed-action drop
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified
class-map name.
exceed-action
Defines the action to take on traffic that exceeds the CIR.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple
ports to specify a service policy.
police
Defines a policer for classified traffic.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
violate-action
Defines the action to take on traffic with a rate greater than the
conform rate plus the exceed burst.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-61
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
copy logging onboard module
copy logging onboard module
Use the copy logging onboard module privileged EXEC command to copy on-board failure logging
(OBFL) data to the local network or a specific file system.
copy logging onboard module [slot-number] destination
Syntax Description
slot-number
(Optional) The slot number is always 1 and is not relevant for the ME-3400E.
destination
Specify the location on the local network or file system to which the system
messages are copied.
For destination, specify the destination on the local or network file system and the
filename. These options are supported:
•
The syntax for the local flash file system:
flash:/filename
•
The syntax for the FTP:
ftp://username:password@host/filename
•
The syntax for an HTTP server:
http://[[username:password]@]{hostname | host-ip}[/directory]/filename
•
The syntax for the null file system:
null:/filename
•
The syntax for the NVRAM:
nvram:/filename
•
The syntax for the Remote Copy Protocol (RCP):
rcp://username@host/filename
•
The syntax for the switch file system:
system:filename
•
The syntax for the TFTP:
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/filename
•
The syntax for the temporary file system:
tmpsys:/filename
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-62
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
copy logging onboard module
Usage Guidelines
For information about OBFL, see the hw-module module logging onboard global configuration
command.
Examples
This example shows how to copy the OBFL data messages to the obfl_file file on the flash file system:
Switch# copy logging onboard module flash:obfl_file
OBFL copy successful
Related Commands
Command
Description
hw-module module logging onboard
Enables OBFL.
show logging onboard
Displays OBFL information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-63
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos cos
cpu traffic qos cos
Use the cpu traffic qos cos command in global configuration mode to configure quality of service (QoS)
marking based on class of service (CoS) for control plane traffic. To return to the default value, use the
no form of this command.
cpu traffic qos cos {cos_value | cos [table-map table-map-name] | dscp [table-map
table-map-name] | precedence [table-map table-map-name]}
no cpu traffic qos cos {cos_value | cos [table-map table-map-name] | dscp [table-map
table-map-name] | precedence [table-map table-map-name]}
Syntax Description
cos-value
Specify a CoS value. The range is from 0 to 7. If no CoS value is configured,
the protocol-specific default value for each packet is applied.
cos
Configure the CoS value based on the CoS value in the packet, using a
table-map.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic CoS based on the
CoS value in the packet.
dscp
Configure the CoS value based on the DSCP value in the packet using a
table-map.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic CoS based on the
DSCP value in the packet.
precedence
Configure the precedence value. The range is from 0 to 7.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic CoS based on the
IP-precedence value in the packet.
Command Default
Control plane (CPU) traffic is not marked for QoS.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Configure any desired table-maps before configuring marking or queuing of CPU traffic.
This feature must be configured globally for a switch; it cannot be configured per-port or per-protocol.
Enter each cpu traffic qos marking action on a separate line.
The cpu traffic qos cos global configuration command configures CoS marking for CPU-generated
traffic by using either a specific CoS value or a table map, but not both. A new configuration overwrites
the existing configuration.
When the cpu traffic qos cos global configuration command is configured with table maps, you can
configure two map from values at a time—CoS and either DSCP or precedence.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-64
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos cos
If the cpu traffic qos cos global configuration command is configured with only a map from value of
IP-DSCP or IP-precedence:
•
The CoS value of IP packets is mapped by using the IP-DSCP (or IP-precedence) value in the packet
and the configured table map. Packets can be classified and queued by an output policy map based
on the marked CoS value.
•
The CoS value of non-IP packets remains unchanged.
If the cpu traffic qos cos global configuration command is configured with a map from value of CoS:
•
The CoS value of IP packets is mapped by using the CoS value in the packet and the configured table
map. Packets can be classified and queued by an output policy map based on the marked CoS value.
•
The CoS value of non-IP packets is mapped by using the CoS value in the packet and the configured
table map. Packets can be classified and queued by an output policy map based on the marked CoS
value.
If the cpu traffic qos cos global configuration command is configured with a map from value of DSCP
or precedence and CoS:
Examples
•
The CoS value of IP packets is mapped by using the DSCP or precedence value in the packet and
the configured table map. Packets can be classified and queued by an output policy map based on
the marked CoS value.
•
The CoS value of non-IP packets is mapped by using the CoS value in the packet and the configured
table map. Packets can be classified and queued by an output policy map based on the marked CoS
value.
This example shows how to mark the CoS of CPU-generated IP traffic (including IP-SLA and TWAMP)
based on the DSCP value in the packet and to configure egress queuing based on the CoS value.
The sample configuration has these results:
•
All CPU-generated IP traffic is queued on the egress port based on the DSCP value and the
configured output policy map called output-policy.
•
All IP SLA or TWAMP probes with the DSCP value ef to simulate voice traffic are assigned to the
voice class.
•
All IP SLA or TWAMP probes with the DSCP values af41, af42 and af43 to simulate video traffic
are assigned to the video class.
•
All IP control protocol traffic with the DSCP values 48 and 56 are assigned to the
network-internetwork-control class.
•
The rest of the IP traffic is assigned to the default class.
•
All CPU-generated non-IP traffic with CoS 5 is assigned to the voice class.
•
All CPU-generated non-IP traffic with CoS 3 is assigned to the video class.
•
All CPU-generated non-IP traffic with CoS 6 and 7 is assigned to the network-internetwork-control
class.
•
All CFM traffic with CoS 5 is assigned to the voice class.
•
All CFM traffic with CoS 3 is assigned to the video class.
•
All CFM traffic with CoS 6 and 7 is assigned to the network-internetwork-control class.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-65
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos cos
Table Map:
Switch(config)# table-map dscp-to-cos
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 46 to 5
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 48 to 6
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 56 to 7
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from af41 to 3
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from af42 to 3
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from af43 to 3
Switch(config-tablemap)# default 0
Switch(config-tablemap)# end
CPU QoS:
Switch(config)# cpu traffic qos cos dscp table-map dscp-to-cos
Switch(config)# cpu traffic qos cos cos
Class:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any video
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 3
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any voice
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 5
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any network-internetwork-control
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 6 7
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Policy:
Switch(config)# policy-map output-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class voice
Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 10000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class video
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 40
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class network-internetwork-control
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 30
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Interface
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output output-policy
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Configures a class map to be used for matching packets to a specified criteria
and enters class-map configuration mode.
cpu traffic qos dscp
Configures quality of service (QoS) marking based on DSCP for control
plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos
precedence
Configure quality of service (QoS) marking based on precedence for control
plane traffic.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-66
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos cos
Command
Description
cpu traffic qos
qos-group
Maps all CPU-generated traffic to a single class in the output policy-maps
without changing the class of service (CoS), IP differentiated services code
point (DSCP), or IP-precedence packet markings.
policy-map
Configures a policy map that can be attached to multiple physical ports and
enters policy-map configuration mode.
show cpu traffic qos
Displays the QoS markings configured for CPU traffic.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy map information for the specified policy map name,
interface, input or output policy maps, or policy-map class.
show running-config
Displays the configured class maps, policy maps, table maps, and aggregate
policers.
Related Commands
Displays information for all configured table maps or the specified table
map.
table-map
Configures quality of service (QoS) mapping and enters table-map
configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-67
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos dscp
cpu traffic qos dscp
Use the cpu traffic qos dscp command in global configuration mode to configure quality of service
(QoS) marking based on a differentiated services code point (DSCP) value for control plane traffic. To
return to the default value, use the no form of this command.
cpu traffic qos dscp {dscp_value | cos [table-map table-map-name] | dscp [table-map
table-map-name] | precedence [table-map table-map-name]}
no cpu traffic qos dscp {dscp_value | cos [table-map table-map-name] | dscp [table-map
table-map-name] | precedence [table-map table-map-name]}
Syntax Description
dscp-value
Specify the IP-DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. If no IP-DSCP value
is configured, the protocol-specific default value for each packet is applied.
cos
Configure the IP-DSCP value based on the CoS value in the packet, using a
table map.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic IP-DSCP based on
the CoS value in the packet.
dscp
Configure the IP-DSCP value based on the IP-DSCP in the packet using a
table map.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic IP-DSCP based on
the IP-DSCP value in the packet.
precedence
Configure the IP-precedence value based on the IP-precedence value in the
packet using a table map.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic IP-DSCP value
based on the IP-precedence value in the packet.
Command Default
Control plane (CPU) traffic is not marked for QoS.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This feature must be configured globally for a switch; it cannot be configured per-port or per-protocol.
Enter each cpu traffic qos marking action on a separate line.
The cpu traffic qos dscp global configuration command configures IP-DSCP marking for
CPU-generated IP traffic by using either a specific DSCP value or a table map, but not both. A new
configuration overwrites the existing configuration.
The cpu traffic qos dscp and cpu traffic qos precedence global configuration commands are mutually
exclusive. A new configuration overwrites the existing configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-68
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos dscp
When the cpu traffic qos dscp global configuration command is configured with table maps, you can
configure only one map from value at a time—DSCP, precedence, or CoS. A new configuration
overwrites the existing configuration. Packets marked by this command can be classified and queued by
an output policy map based on the marked DSCP or precedence value.
You cannot configure a map from value of both DSCP and precedence. A new configuration overwrites
the existing configuration.
Examples
This example shows how to configure egress queuing based on the DSCP value of CPU-generated IP
packets.
The sample configuration has these results:
•
All CPU-generated IP traffic queues on the egress port, based on its IP DSCP value, and the
configured output policy map output-policy.
•
All IP SLA or TWAMP probes with the DSCP value ef to simulate voice traffic are assigned to the
voice class.
•
All IP SLA or TWAMP probes with the DSCP values af41, af42 and af43 to simulate video traffic
are assigned to the video class.
•
All IP control protocol traffic with the DSCP values 48 and 56 are assigned to the
network-internetwork-control class.
•
The rest of the IP traffic is assigned to the default class.
•
All CPU-generated non-IP traffic is statically mapped to a fixed queue on the egress port.
•
All CFM traffic is queued to the default class because there is no class based on CoS.
Switch(config)# cpu traffic qos dscp dscp
Class:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any video
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp af41 af42 af43
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any voice
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp ef
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any network-internetwork-control
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp 48 56
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Policy:
Switch(config)# policy-map output-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class voice
Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 10000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class video
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 40
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class network-internetwork-control
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 30
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-69
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos dscp
Interface
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output output-policy
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
This example shows how to:
•
Mark the DSCP value of CPU-generated IP traffic (including IP-SLA and TWAMP) based on the
DSCP value in the packet.
•
Mark the CoS of CPU-generated IP traffic (including IP-SLA and TWAMP) based on the DSCP
value in the packet.
•
Mark the CoS of CPU-generated non-IP traffic based on the CoS value in the packet.
•
Mark all CPU-generated traffic with the QoS group.
•
Configure egress queuing based on the QoS group.
The example has these results:
•
All CPU-generated IP traffic with the DSCP values 46, 48, and 56 retain the existing markings.
•
For all other CPU-generated IP packets, the DSCP value is reset to 0.
•
All CPU-generated IP traffic with the DSCP values 46, 48, and 56 are mapped to corresponding CoS
values of 5, 6, and 7, respectively.
•
For all other CPU-generated IP packets, the CoS value resets to 0.
•
All CPU-generated non-IP traffic with the CoS values of 5, 6, and 7 retain the existing markings.
•
For all other CPU-generated non-IP packets, the CoS value resets to 0.
•
All CPU-generated traffic goes through a single class called cpu-traffic. The user-voice classes
user-voice and user-video are reserved for user traffic. As a result, CPU traffic and user traffic are
separated into different queues on the egress port.
Table-map
Switch(config)# table-map dscp-to-cos
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 46 to 5
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 48 to 6
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 56 to 7
Switch(config-tablemap)# default 0
Switch(config-tablemap)# end
Switch(config)# table-map dscp-to-dscp
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 46 to 46
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 48 to 48
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 56 to 56
Switch(config-tablemap)# default 0
Switch(config-tablemap)# end
Switch(config)# table-map cos-to-cos
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 5 to 5
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 6 to 6
Switch(config-tablemap)# map from 7 to 7
Switch(config-tablemap)# default 0
Switch(config-tablemap)# end
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-70
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos dscp
CPU QoS:
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#
cpu
cpu
cpu
cpu
traffic
traffic
traffic
traffic
qos
qos
qos
qos
dscp dscp table-map dscp-to-dscp
cos dscp table dscp-to-cos
cos cos table cos-to-cos
qos-group 50
Class:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any cpu-traffic
Switch(config-cmap)# match qos-group 50
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any user-video
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 3
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any user-voice
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 5
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Policy:
Switch(config)# policy-map output-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class user-voice
Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 10000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class user-video
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 40
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class cpu-traffic
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 30
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Interface:
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output output-policy
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Configures a class map to be used for matching packets to a specified criteria
and enters class-map configuration mode.
cpu traffic qos cos
Configures class of service (CoS) marking for control plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos
precedence
Configure quality of service (QoS) marking based on precedence for control
plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos
qos-group
Maps all CPU-generated traffic to a single class in the output policy-maps
without changing the class of service (CoS), IP differentiated services code
point (DSCP), or IP-precedence packet markings.
policy-map
Configures a policy map that can be attached to multiple physical ports and
enters policy-map configuration mode.
show cpu traffic qos
Displays the QoS markings configured for CPU traffic.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy map information for the specified policy map name,
interface, input or output policy maps, or policy-map class.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-71
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos dscp
Command
Description
show running-config
Displays the configured class maps, policy maps, table maps, and aggregate
policers.
Related Commands
Displays information for all configured table maps or the specified table
map.
table-map
Configures quality of service (QoS) mapping and enters table-map
configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-72
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos precedence
cpu traffic qos precedence
Use the cpu traffic qos precedence command in global configuration mode to configure quality of
service (QoS) marking for control plane traffic. To return to the default value, use the no form of this
command.
cpu traffic qos precedence {precedence_value | cos [table-map table-map-name] | dscp
[table-map table-map-name] | precedence [table-map table-map-name]}
no cpu traffic qos precedence {precedence_value | cos [table-map table-map-name] | dscp
[table-map table-map-name] | precedence [table-map table-map-name]}
Syntax Description
precedence-value
Configure the precedence value. The range is from 0 to 7. If no
IP-precedence value is configured, the protocol-specific default value for
each packet is applied.
You can substitute the following keywords for the numbers 0 to 7:
Note
•
routine (0)
•
priority (1)
•
immediate (2)
•
flash (3)
•
flash-override (4)
•
critical (5)
•
internet (6)
•
network (7)
cos
Configure the CoS value based on the CoS value in the packet, using a
table-map.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic CoS based on the
CoS value in the packet.
dscp
Configure the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value based on the
IP-DSCP value in the packet, using a table-map.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic precedence based
on the DSCP value in the packet.
precedence
Configure the IP-precedence value based on the IP-precedence value in the
packet, using a table-map.
table-map
table-map-name
Specify the table-map to use for marking the CPU traffic precedence based
on the precedence value in the packet
Command Default
Control plane (CPU) traffic is not marked for QoS.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-73
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos precedence
Command History
Usage Guidelines
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
This feature must be configured globally for a switch; it cannot be configured per-port or per-protocol.
Enter each cpu traffic qos marking action on a separate line.
The cpu traffic qos dscp and cpu traffic qos precedence global configuration commands are mutually
exclusive. A new configuration overwrites the existing configuration.
When the cpu traffic qos precedence global configuration command is configured with table maps, you
can configure only one map from value at a time—DSCP, precedence, or CoS. A new configuration
overwrites the existing configuration. Packets marked by this command can be classified and queued by
an output policy map based on the marked precedence or DSCP value.
You cannot configure a map from value of both DSCP and precedence. A new configuration overwrites
the existing configuration.
Examples
The following example shows how to mark the precedence based on the DSCP value in the packet and
configure egress queuing based on the precedence value.
The example has these results:
•
Marks the CPU-generated IP traffic with the DSCP value 48 to the precedence value 7.
•
Marks the other CPU-generated IP traffic to the precedence value 0.
•
Allows all other CPU-generated non-IP traffic to be processed by the default class.
•
Queues CPU-generated IP traffic with precedence value 7 using class precedence 7.
•
Allows all other CPU-generated IP traffic to be processed by the default class.
Table-map:
switch(config)# table-map dscp-to-prec
switch(config-tablemap)# map from 48 to 7
switch(config-tablemap)# default 0
switch(config-tablemap)# end
CPU QoS:
switch(config)# cpu traffic qos precedence dscp table-map dscp-to-prec
Class-maps:
switch(config)# class-map prec7
switch(config-cmap)# match ip precedence 7
switch(config-cmap)# end
Policy-maps:
switch(config)# policy-map output-policy
switch(config-pmap)# class prec7
switch(config-pmap-c)# priority
switch(config-pmap-c)# end
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-74
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos precedence
Interface:
switch(config)# interface g1/0/1
switch(config-if)# service-policy output output-policy
switch(config-if)# exit
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Configures a class map to be used for matching packets to a specified criteria
and enters class-map configuration mode.
cpu traffic qos cos
Configures class of service (CoS) marking for control plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos dscp
Configures quality of service (QoS) marking based on DSCP for control
plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos
qos-group
Maps all CPU-generated traffic to a single class in the output policy-maps
without changing the class of service (CoS), IP differentiated services code
point (DSCP), or IP-precedence packet markings.
policy-map
Configures a policy map that can be attached to multiple physical ports and
enters policy-map configuration mode.
show cpu traffic qos
Displays the QoS markings configured for CPU traffic.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy map information for the specified policy map name,
interface, input or output policy maps, or policy-map class.
show running-config
Displays the configured class maps, policy maps, table maps, and aggregate
policers.
Related Commands
Displays information for all configured table maps or the specified table
map.
table-map
Configures quality of service (QoS) mapping and enters table-map
configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-75
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos qos-group
cpu traffic qos qos-group
Use the cpu traffic qos qos-group command in global configuration mode to map all CPU-generated
traffic to a single class in the output policy-maps without changing the class of service (CoS), IP
differentiated services code point (DSCP), or IP-precedence packet markings. To return to the default
settings, use the no form of this command.
cpu traffic qos qos-group qos-group-value
no cpu traffic qos qos-group qos-group-value
Syntax Description
qos-group-value
Command Default
Control plane (CPU) traffic is not marked for QoS.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Specify the QoS group number. Valid values are from 0 to 99.
This feature must be configured globally for a switch; it cannot be configured per-port or per-protocol.
Enter each cpu traffic qos marking action on a separate line.
The cpu traffic qos qos-group global configuration command can be used to configure QoS group
marking for CPU-generated traffic only for a specific QoS group. The table-map option is not available.
Examples
The following example shows how to mark all the CPU-generated traffic with a QoS-group and
configure egress queuing based on that QoS-group.
CPU QoS:
switch(config)# cpu traffic qos qos-group 40
Class-maps:
switch(config)# class-map group40
switch(config-cmap)# match qos-group 40
switch(config-cmap)# end
Policy-maps:
switch(config)# policy-map output-policy
switch(config-pmap)# class group40
switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 50
switch(config-pmap-c)# end
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-76
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
cpu traffic qos qos-group
Interface:
Switch(config)# interface g1/0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output output-policy
Switch(config-if)# exit
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Configures a class map to be used for matching packets to a specified criteria
and enters class-map configuration mode.
cpu traffic qos cos
Configures class of service (CoS) marking for control plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos dscp
Configures quality of service (QoS) marking based on DSCP for control
plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos
precedence
Configure quality of service (QoS) marking based on precedence for control
plane traffic.
policy-map
Configures a policy map that can be attached to multiple physical ports and
enters policy-map configuration mode.
show cpu traffic qos
Displays the QoS markings configured for CPU traffic.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy map information for the specified policy map name,
interface, input or output policy maps, or policy-map class.
show running-config
Displays the configured class maps, policy maps, table maps, and aggregate
policers.
Related Commands
Displays information for all configured table maps or the specified table
map.
table-map
Configures quality of service (QoS) mapping and enters table-map
configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-77
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
define interface-range
define interface-range
Use the define interface-range global configuration command to create an interface-range macro. Use
the no form of this command to delete the defined macro.
define interface-range macro-name interface-range
no define interface-range macro-name interface-range
Syntax Description
macro-name
Name of the interface-range macro; up to 32 characters.
interface-range
Interface range; for valid values for interface ranges, see “Usage Guidelines.”
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The macro name is a 32-character maximum character string.
A macro can contain up to five ranges.
All interfaces in a range must be the same type; that is, all Fast Ethernet ports, all Gigabit Ethernet ports,
all EtherChannel ports, or all VLANs, but you can combine multiple interface types in a macro.
When entering the interface-range, use this format:
•
type {first-interface} - {last-interface}
•
You must add a space between the first interface number and the hyphen when entering an
interface-range. For example, gigabitethernet 0/1 - 2 is a valid range; gigabitethernet 0/1-2 is not
a valid range
Valid values for type and interface:
•
vlan vlan-id, where vlan-id is from 1 to 4094
VLAN interfaces must have been configured with the interface vlan command (the show
running-config privileged EXEC command displays the configured VLAN interfaces). VLAN
interfaces not displayed by the show running-config command cannot be used in interface-ranges.
•
port-channel port-channel-number, where port-channel-number is from 1 to 48
•
fastethernet module/{first port} - {last port}
•
gigabitethernet module/{first port} - {last port}
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-78
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
define interface-range
For physical interfaces:
•
module is always 0.
•
the range is type 0/number - number (for example, gigabitethernet 0/1 - 2).
When you define a range, you must enter a space before the hyphen (-), for example:
gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
You can also enter multiple ranges. When you define multiple ranges, you must enter a space after the
first entry before the comma (,). The space after the comma is optional, for example:
fastethernet0/3, gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
fastethernet0/3 -4, gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
Examples
This example shows how to create a multiple-interface macro:
Switch(config)# define interface-range macro1 fastethernet0/1 - 2, gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
Related Commands
Command
Description
interface range
Executes a command on multiple ports at the same time.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this
link to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_com
mand_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to
navigate to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-79
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
delete
delete
Use the delete privileged EXEC command to delete a file or directory on the flash memory device.
delete [/force] [/recursive] filesystem:/file-url
Syntax Description
/force
(Optional) Suppress the prompt that confirms the deletion.
/recursive
(Optional) Delete the named directory and all subdirectories and the files contained in
it.
filesystem:
Alias for a flash file system.
The syntax for the local flash file system:
flash:
/file-url
The path (directory) and filename to delete.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If you use the /force keyword, you are prompted once at the beginning of the deletion process to confirm
the deletion.
If you use the /recursive keyword without the /force keyword, you are prompted to confirm the deletion
of every file.
The prompting behavior depends on the setting of the file prompt global configuration command. By
default, the switch prompts for confirmation on destructive file operations. For more information about
this command, see the Cisco IOS Command Reference for Release 12.1.
Examples
This example shows how to remove the directory that contains the old software image after a successful
download of a new image:
Switch# delete /force /recursive flash:/old-image
You can verify that the directory was removed by entering the dir filesystem: privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
archive download-sw
Downloads a new image to the switch and overwrites or keeps the existing
image.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-80
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (ARP access-list configuration)
deny (ARP access-list configuration)
Use the deny Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) access-list configuration command to deny an ARP
packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings. Use the no form of this command to remove the
specified access control entry (ACE) from the access list.
deny {[request] ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} mac {any | host sender-mac
| sender-mac sender-mac-mask} | response ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask}
[{any | host target-ip | target-ip target-ip-mask}] mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac
sender-mac-mask} [{any | host target-mac | target-mac target-mac-mask}]} [log]
no deny {[request] ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} mac {any | host
sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} | response ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip
sender-ip-mask} [{any | host target-ip | target-ip target-ip-mask}] mac {any | host sender-mac
| sender-mac sender-mac-mask} [{any | host target-mac | target-mac target-mac-mask}]} [log]
Syntax Description
request
(Optional) Define a match for the ARP request. When request is not
specified, matching is performed against all ARP packets.
ip
Specify the sender IP address.
any
Deny any IP or MAC address.
host sender-ip
Deny the specified sender IP address.
sender-ip sender-ip-mask
Deny the specified range of sender IP addresses.
mac
Deny the sender MAC address.
host sender-mac
Deny a specific sender MAC address.
sender-mac
sender-mac-mask
Deny the specified range of sender MAC addresses.
response ip
Define the IP address values for the ARP responses.
host target-ip
Deny the specified target IP address.
target-ip target-ip-mask
Deny the specified range of target IP addresses.
mac
Deny the MAC address values for the ARP responses.
host target-mac
Deny the specified target MAC address.
target-mac
target-mac-mask
Deny the specified range of target MAC addresses.
log
(Optional) Log a packet when it matches the ACE.
Defaults
There are no default settings. However, at the end of the ARP access list, there is an implicit deny ip any
mac any command.
Command Modes
ARP access-list configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-81
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (ARP access-list configuration)
Usage Guidelines
You can add deny clauses to drop ARP packets based on matching criteria.
Examples
This example shows how to define an ARP access list and to deny both ARP requests and ARP responses
from a host with an IP address of 1.1.1.1 and a MAC address of 0000.0000.abcd:
Switch(config)# arp access-list static-hosts
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# deny ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 0000.0000.abcd
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show arp access-list privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP access control list (ACL).
ip arp inspection filter vlan
Permits ARP requests and responses from a host configured with a
static IP address.
permit (ARP access-list
configuration)
Permits an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.
show arp access-list
Displays detailed information about ARP access lists.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-82
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (IPv6 access-list configuration)
deny (IPv6 access-list configuration)
Use the deny command in IPv6 access list configuration mode to set deny conditions for an IPv6 access
list. Use the no form of this command to remove the deny conditions.
deny {protocol} {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [dscp value] [fragments] [log] [log-input] [routing] [sequence
value] [time-range name]
no deny {protocol} {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [dscp value] [fragments] [log] [log-input] [routing] [sequence
value] [time-range name]
Internet Control Message Protocol
deny icmp {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [icmp-type [icmp-code] | icmp-message] [dscp value] [log]
[log-input] [routing] [sequence value] [time-range name]
Transmission Control Protocol
deny tcp {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [ack] [dscp value] [established] [fin] [log] [log-input] [neq {port |
protocol}] [psh] [range {port | protocol}] [rst] [routing] [sequence value] [syn] [time-range
name] [urg]
User Datagram Protocol
deny udp {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [dscp value] [log] [log-input] [neq {port | protocol}] [range {port |
protocol}] [routing] [sequence value] [time-range name]
Note
Syntax Description
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
protocol
Name or number of an Internet protocol. It can be one of the keywords ahp,
esp, icmp, ipv6, pcp, sctp, tcp, or udp, or an integer in the range from 0 to
255 representing an IPv6 protocol number.
source-ipv6-prefix/prefi The source IPv6 network or class of networks about which to set deny
x-length
conditions.
This argument must be in the form documented in RFC 2373 where the
address is specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons.
any
An abbreviation for the IPv6 prefix ::/0.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-83
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (IPv6 access-list configuration)
host
source-ipv6-address
The source IPv6 host address for which to set deny conditions.
This source-ipv6-address argument must be in the form documented in RFC
2373 where the address is specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values
between colons.
operator [port-number] (Optional) Specify an operator that compares the source or destination ports
of the specified protocol. Operators are lt (less than), gt (greater than), eq
(equal), neq (not equal), and range (inclusive range).
If the operator is positioned after the source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
argument, it must match the source port.
If the operator is positioned after the destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
argument, it must match the destination port.
The range operator requires two port numbers. All other operators require
one port number.
The optional port-number argument is a decimal number or the name of a
TCP or a UDP port. A port number is a number from 0 to 65535. TCP port
names can be used only when filtering TCP. UDP port names can be used
only when filtering UDP.
destination-ipv6-prefix/ The destination IPv6 network or class of networks for which to set deny
prefix-length
conditions.
This argument must be in the form documented in RFC 2373 where the
address is specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons.
The destination IPv6 host address for which to set deny conditions.
host
destination-ipv6-addres
This destination-ipv6-address argument must be in the form documented in
s
RFC 2373 where the address is specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values
between colons.
dscp value
(Optional) Match a differentiated services code point value against the
traffic class value in the Traffic Class field of each IPv6 packet header. The
acceptable range is from 0 to 63.
fragments
(Optional) Match non-initial fragmented packets where the fragment
extension header contains a non-zero fragment offset. The fragments
keyword is an option only if the protocol is ipv6 and the operator
[port-number] arguments are not specified.
log
(Optional) Send an informational logging message to the console about the
packet that matches the entry. (The level of messages sent to the console is
controlled by the logging console command.)
The message includes the access list name and sequence number, whether
the packet was denied; the protocol, whether it was TCP, UDP, ICMP, or a
number; and, if appropriate, the source and destination addresses and source
and destination port numbers. The message is generated for the first packet
that matches, and then at 5-minute intervals, including the number of
packets denied in the prior 5-minute interval.
Note
Logging is not supported for port ACLs.
log-input
(Optional) Provide the same function as the log keyword, but the logging
message also includes the receiving interface.
routing
(Optional) Match packets with the routing extension header.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-84
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (IPv6 access-list configuration)
Note
sequence value
(Optional) Specify the sequence number for the access list statement. The
acceptable range is from 1 to 4294967295.
time-range name
(Optional) Specify the time range that applies to the deny statement. The
name of the time range and its restrictions are specified by the time-range
and absolute or periodic commands, respectively.
icmp-type
(Optional) Specify an ICMP message type for filtering ICMP packets.
ICMP packets can be filtered by an ICMP message type. The type is a
number from 0 to 255.
icmp-code
(Optional) Specify an ICMP message code for filtering ICMP packets.
ICMP packets that are filtered by ICMP message type can also be filtered
by the ICMP message code. The code is a number from 0 to 255.
icmp-message
(Optional) Specify an ICMP message name for filtering ICMP packets.
ICMP packets can be filtered by an ICMP message name or an ICMP
message type and code. The possible names are listed in the “Usage
Guidelines” section.
ack
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Acknowledgment (ACK) bit set.
established
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Means the connection has been
established. A match occurs if the TCP datagram has the ACK or RST bits
set. The nonmatching case is that of the initial TCP datagram to form a
connection.
fin
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Fin bit set; no more data from sender.
neq {port | protocol}
(Optional) Match only packets that are not on a given port number.
psh
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Push function bit set.
range {port | protocol}
(Optional) Match only packets in the range of port numbers.
rst
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Reset bit set.
syn
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Synchronize bit set.
urg
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Urgent pointer bit set.
Although visible in the command-line help strings, the flow-label, routing, and
undetermined-transport keywords are not supported.
Defaults
No IPv6 access list is defined.
Command Modes
IPv6 access list configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The deny (IPv6 access-list configuration mode) command is similar to the deny (IPv4 access-list
configuration mode) command, but it is IPv6-specific.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-85
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (IPv6 access-list configuration)
Use the deny (IPv6) command after the ipv6 access-list command to enter IPv6 access list configuration
mode and to define the conditions under which a packet passes the access list.
Specifying IPv6 for the protocol argument matches the IPv6 header of the packet.
By default, the first statement in an access list is number 10, and the subsequent statements are numbered
in increments of 10.
You can add permit, deny, or remark statements to an existing access list without re-entering the entire
list. To add a new statement somewhere other than at the end of the list, create a new statement with an
appropriate entry number between two existing entry numbers to show where it belongs.
Note
Every IPv6 ACL has implicit permit icmp any any nd-na, permit icmp any any nd-ns, and deny ipv6
any any statements as its last match conditions. The two permit conditions allow ICMPv6 neighbor
discovery. To disallow ICMPv6 neighbor discovery and to deny icmp any any nd-na or icmp any any
nd-ns, there must be an explicit deny entry in the ACL. For the three implicit statements to take effect,
an IPv6 ACL must contain at least one entry.
The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses the IPv6 network layer service. Therefore, by default, IPv6
ACLs implicitly allow IPv6 neighbor discovery packets to be sent and received on an interface. In IPv4,
the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), which is equivalent to the IPv6 neighbor discovery process, uses
a separate data-link layer protocol. Therefore, by default, IPv4 ACLs implicitly allow ARP packets to
be sent and received on an interface.
Both the source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length and destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length arguments are used
for traffic filtering. (The source prefix filters traffic based upon its source; the destination prefix filters
traffic based upon its destination.)
The switch supports IPv6 address matching for a full range of prefix lengths.
The fragments keyword is an option only if the protocol is ipv6 and the operator [port-number]
arguments are not specified.
This is a list of ICMP message names:
beyond-scope
destination-unreachable
echo-reply
echo-request
header
hop-limit
mld-query
mld-reduction
mld-report
nd-na
nd-ns
next-header
no-admin
no-route
packet-too-big
parameter-option
parameter-problem
port-unreachable
reassembly-timeout
renum-command
renum-result
renum-seq-number
router-advertisement
router-renumbering
router-solicitation
time-exceeded
unreachable
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-86
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (IPv6 access-list configuration)
Examples
This example configures the IPv6 access list named CISCO and applies the access list to outbound traffic
on a Layer 3 interface. The first deny entry prevents all packets that have a destination TCP port number
greater than 5000 from leaving the interface. The second deny entry prevents all packets that have a
source UDP port number less than 5000 from leaving the interface. The second deny also logs all
matches to the console. The first permit entry permits all ICMP packets to leave the interface. The second
permit entry permits all other traffic to leave the interface. The second permit entry is necessary because
an implicit deny-all condition is at the end of each IPv6 access list.
Switch(config)# ipv6 access-list CISCO
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# deny tcp any any gt 5000
Switch config-ipv6-acl)# deny ::/0 lt 5000 ::/0 log
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit icmp any any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit any any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001::/64 eui-64
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 traffic-filter CISCO out
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 access-list
Defines an IPv6 access list and enters IPv6 access list configuration mode.
ipv6 traffic-filter
Filters incoming or outgoing IPv6 traffic on an interface.
permit (IPv6
access-list
configuration)
Sets permit conditions for an IPv6 access list.
show ipv6 access-list
Displays the contents of all current IPv6 access lists.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-87
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (MAC access-list configuration)
deny (MAC access-list configuration)
Use the deny MAC access-list configuration command to prevent non-IP traffic from being forwarded
if the conditions are matched. Use the no form of this command to remove a deny condition from the
named MAC access list.
{deny | permit} {any | host src-MAC-addr | src-MAC-addr mask} {any | host dst-MAC-addr |
dst-MAC-addr mask} [type mask | aarp | amber | cos cos | dec-spanning | decnet-iv |
diagnostic | dsm | etype-6000 | etype-8042 | lat | lavc-sca | lsap lsap mask |mop-console |
mop-dump | msdos | mumps | netbios | vines-echo | vines-ip | xns-idp]
no {deny | permit} {any | host src-MAC-addr | src-MAC-addr mask} {any | host dst-MAC-addr |
dst-MAC-addr mask} [type mask | aarp | amber | cos cos | dec-spanning | decnet-iv |
diagnostic | dsm | etype-6000 | etype-8042 | lat | lavc-sca | lsap lsap mask | mop-console |
mop-dump | msdos | mumps | netbios | vines-echo | vines-ip | xns-idp]
Syntax Description
any
Keyword to specify to deny any source or destination MAC address.
host src MAC-addr |
src-MAC-addr mask
Define a host MAC address and optional subnet mask. If the source
address for a packet matches the defined address, non-IP traffic from that
address is denied.
host dst-MAC-addr |
dst-MAC-addr mask
Define a destination MAC address and optional subnet mask. If the
destination address for a packet matches the defined address, non-IP
traffic to that address is denied.
type mask
(Optional) Use the Ethertype number of a packet with Ethernet II or
SNAP encapsulation to identify the protocol of the packet.
The type is 0 to 65535, specified in hexadecimal.
The mask is a mask of don’t care bits applied to the Ethertype before
testing for a match.
aarp
(Optional) Select Ethertype AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol that
maps a data-link address to a network address.
amber
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-Amber.
cos cos
(Optional) Select a class of service (CoS) number from 0 to 7 to set
priority. Filtering on CoS can be performed only in hardware. A warning
message reminds the user if the cos option is configured.
dec-spanning
(Optional) Select EtherType Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC)
spanning tree.
decnet-iv
(Optional) Select EtherType DECnet Phase IV protocol.
diagnostic
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-Diagnostic.
dsm
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-DSM.
etype-6000
(Optional) Select EtherType 0x6000.
etype-8042
(Optional) Select EtherType 0x8042.
lat
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-LAT.
lavc-sca
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-LAVC-SCA.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-88
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (MAC access-list configuration)
lsap lsap-number mask
(Optional) Use the LSAP number (0 to 65535) of a packet with
IEEE 802.2 encapsulation to identify the protocol of the packet.
mask is a mask of don’t care bits applied to the LSAP number before
testing for a match.
Note
mop-console
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-MOP Remote Console.
mop-dump
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-MOP Dump.
msdos
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-MSDOS.
mumps
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-MUMPS.
netbios
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC- Network Basic Input/Output System
(NETBIOS).
vines-echo
(Optional) Select EtherType Virtual Integrated Network Service (VINES)
Echo from Banyan Systems.
vines-ip
(Optional) Select EtherType VINES IP.
xns-idp
(Optional) Select EtherType Xerox Network Systems (XNS) protocol
suite (0 to 65535), an arbitrary Ethertype in decimal, hexadecimal, or
octal.
Though visible in the command-line help strings, appletalk is not supported as a matching condition.
To filter IPX traffic, you use the type mask or lsap lsap mask keywords, depending on the type of IPX
encapsulation being used. Filter criteria for IPX encapsulation types as specified in Novell terminology
and Cisco IOS terminology are listed in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1
IPX Filtering Criteria
IPX Encapsulation Type
Cisco IOS Name
Novel Name
Filter Criterion
arpa
Ethernet II
Ethertype 0x8137
snap
Ethernet-snap
Ethertype 0x8137
sap
Ethernet 802.2
LSAP 0xE0E0
novell-ether
Ethernet 802.3
LSAP 0xFFFF
Defaults
This command has no defaults. However; the default action for a MAC-named ACL is to deny.
Command Modes
MAC-access list configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-89
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
deny (MAC access-list configuration)
Usage Guidelines
You enter MAC-access list configuration mode by using the mac access-list extended global
configuration command.
If you use the host keyword, you cannot enter an address mask; if you do not use the host keyword, you
must enter an address mask.
When an access control entry (ACE) is added to an access control list, an implied deny-any-any
condition exists at the end of the list. That is, if there are no matches, the packets are denied. However,
before the first ACE is added, the list permits all packets.
Note
Examples
For more information about named MAC extended access lists, see the software configuration guide for
this release.
This example shows how to define the named MAC extended access list to deny NETBIOS traffic from
any source to MAC address 00c0.00a0.03fa. Traffic matching this list is denied.
Switch(config-ext-macl)# deny any host 00c0.00a0.03fa netbios.
This example shows how to remove the deny condition from the named MAC extended access list:
Switch(config-ext-macl)# no deny any 00c0.00a0.03fa 0000.0000.0000 netbios.
This example denies all packets with Ethertype 0x4321:
Switch(config-ext-macl)# deny any any 0x4321 0
You can verify your settings by entering the show access-lists privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
mac access-list extended
Creates an access list based on MAC addresses for non-IP traffic.
permit (MAC access-list
configuration)
Permits non-IP traffic to be forwarded if conditions are matched.
show access-lists
Displays access control lists configured on a switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-90
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
diagnostic monitor
diagnostic monitor
Use the diagnostic monitor global configuration command to configure health-monitoring diagnostic
testing. Use the no form of this command to disable testing and to return to the default settings.
diagnostic monitor interval test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all} hh:mm:ss milliseconds day
diagnostic monitor test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all}
diagnostic monitor syslog
diagnostic monitor threshold test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all} failure count count
no diagnostic monitor interval test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all}
no diagnostic monitor test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all}
no diagnostic monitor syslog
no diagnostic monitor threshold test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all} failure count count
Syntax Description
Defaults
interval test
Configure the interval between tests.
test
Specify the tests to be run.
name
Specify the test name. To display the test names in the test-ID list, enter the
show diagnostic content privileged EXEC command.
test-id
Specify the ID number of the test. The range is from 1 to 6. To display the test
numbers in the test-ID list, enter the show diagnostic content privileged
EXEC command.
test-id-range
Specify more than one test with the range of test ID numbers. Enter the range
as integers separated by a comma and a hyphen (for example, 1,3-6 specifies
test IDs 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6). To display the test numbers in the test-ID list, enter
the show diagnostic content privileged EXEC command.
all
Specify all of the diagnostic tests.
hh:mm:ss
Configure the monitoring interval in hours, minutes, and seconds.
•
hh—Enter the hours from 0 to 24.
•
mm—Enter the minutes from 0 to 60.
•
ss—Enter the seconds from 0 to 60.
milliseconds
Configure the monitoring interval (test time) in milliseconds (ms). The range
is from 0 to 999 ms.
day
Configure the monitoring interval in the number of days between tests. The
range is from 0 to 20 days.
syslog
Enable the generation of a syslog message when a health-monitoring test fails.
threshold test
Configure the failure threshold.
failure count count
Set the failure threshold count. The range for count is from 0 to 99.
Monitoring is disabled, and a failure threshold value is not set.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-91
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
diagnostic monitor
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
•
You must configure the failure threshold and the interval between tests before enabling diagnostic
monitoring.
•
Enter the diagnostic monitor test 1 command to enable diagnostic monitoring.
•
When you enter the diagnostic monitor test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all} command, you must
isolate network traffic by disabling all connected ports.
•
Do not send test packets during the test.
This example shows how to configure a health-monitoring test:
Switch(config)# diagnostic monitor threshold test 1 failure count 20
Switch(config)# diagnostic monitor interval test 1 12:30:00 750 5
Related Commands
Command
Description
show diagnostic
Displays online diagnostic test results.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-92
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
diagnostic schedule test
diagnostic schedule test
Use the diagnostic schedule test global configuration command to configure the diagnostic test schedule.
Use the no form of this command to remove the schedule.
diagnostic schedule test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all | basic | non-disruptive} {daily hh:mm
| on mm dd yyyy hh:mm | weekly day-of-week hh:mm}
no diagnostic schedule test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all | basic | non-disruptive} {daily
hh:mm | on mm dd yyyy hh:mm | weekly day-of-week hh:mm}
Syntax Description
name
Specify the name of the test. To display the test names in the test-ID list, enter
the show diagnostic content privileged EXEC command.
test-id
Specify the ID number of the test. The range is from 1 to 6. To display the test
numbers in the test-ID list, enter the show diagnostic content privileged EXEC
command.
test-id-range
Specify more than one test with the range of test ID numbers. Enter the range
as integers separated by a comma and a hyphen (for example, 1,3-6 specifies
test IDs 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6). To display the test numbers in the test-ID list, enter
the show diagnostic content privileged EXEC command.
all
Specify all of the diagnostic tests.
basic
Specify the basic on-demand diagnostic tests.
non-disruptive
Specify the nondisruptive health-monitoring tests.
daily hh:mm
Specify the daily scheduling of the diagnostic tests.
hh:mm—Enter the time as a 2-digit number (for a 24-hour clock) for
hours:minutes; the colon (:) is required, such as 12:30.
on mm dd yyyy
hh:mm
weekly day-of-week
hh:mm
Specify the scheduling of the diagnostic tests on a specific day and time.
For mm dd yyyy:
•
mm—Spell out the month, such as January, February, and so on, with
upper-case or lower-case characters.
•
dd—Enter the day as a 2-digit number, such as 03 or 16.
•
yyyy—Enter the year as a 4-digit number, such as 2008.
Specify the weekly scheduling of the diagnostic tests.
day-of-week—Spell out the day of the week, such as Monday, Tuesday, and so
on, with upper-case or lower-case characters.
Defaults
This command has no default settings.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-93
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
diagnostic schedule test
Command History
Examples
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
This example
how to schedule diagnostic testing for a specific day and time:
Switch(config)# diagnostic schedule test 1,2,4-6 on november 3 2006 23:10
This example shows how to schedule diagnostic testing to occur weekly at a specific time:
Switch(config)# diagnostic schedule test TestPortAsicMem weekly friday 09:23
Related Commands
Command
Description
show diagnostic
Displays online diagnostic test results.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-94
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
diagnostic start test
diagnostic start test
Use the diagnostic start test privileged EXEC command to run an online diagnostic test.
diagnostic start test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all | basic | non-disruptive}
Syntax Description
name
Specify the name of the test. To display the test names in the test-ID list, enter the
show diagnostic content privileged EXEC command.
test-id
Specify the ID number of the test. The range is from 1 to 6. To display the test
numbers in the test-ID list, enter the show diagnostic content privileged EXEC
command.
test-id-range
Specify more than one test with the range of test ID numbers. Enter the range as
integers separated by a comma and a hyphen (for example, 1,3-6 specifies test IDs
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6). To display the test numbers in the test-ID list, enter the show
diagnostic content privileged EXEC command.
all
Specify all the diagnostic tests.
basic
Specify the basic on-demand diagnostic tests.
non-disruptive
Specify the nondisruptive health-monitoring tests.
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
After you start the tests by using the diagnostic start command, you cannot stop the testing process.
The switch supports these tests:
ID
--1
2
3
4
5
6
---
Test Name [On-Demand Test Attributes]
------------------------------------------TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback
[B*N****]
TestPortAsicLoopback
[B*D*R**]
TestPortAsicCam
[B*D*R**]
TestPortAsicRingLoopback
[B*D*R**]
TestMicRingLoopback
[B*D*R**]
TestPortAsicMem
[B*D*R**]
-------------------------------------------
To identify a test name, use the show diagnostic content privileged EXEC command to display the test
ID list. To specify test 3 by using the test name, enter the diagnostic start switch number test
TestPortAsicCam privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-95
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
diagnostic start test
To specify more than one test, use the test-id-range parameter, and enter integers separated by a comma
and a hyphen. For example, to specify tests 2, 3, and 4, enter the diagnostic start test 2-4 command. To
specify tests 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6, enter the diagnostic start test 1,3-6 command.
Examples
This example shows how to start diagnostic test 1:
Switch# diagnostic start test 1
Switch#
06:27:50: %DIAG-6-TEST_RUNNING: Running TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback{ID=1} ...
06:27:51: %DIAG-6-TEST_OK: TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback{ID=1} has completed
successfully
This example shows how to start diagnostic test 2. Running this test disrupts the normal system operation
and then reloads the switch.
Switch# diagnostic start test 2
Running test(s) 2 will cause the switch under test to reload after completion of
the test list.
Running test(s) 2 may disrupt normal system operation
Do you want to continue? [no]: y
Switch#
00:00:25: %SPANTREE-5-EXTENDED_SYSID: Extended SysId enabled for type vlan
00:00:29: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from memory by console
00:00:30: %DIAG-6-TEST_RUNNING : Running TestPortAsicLoopback{ID=2} ...
00:00:30: %DIAG-6-TEST_OK: TestPortAsicLoopback{ID=2} has completed successfully
Related Commands
Command
Description
show diagnostic
Displays online diagnostic test results.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-96
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x default
dot1x default
Use the dot1x default interface configuration command to reset the configurable IEEE 802.1x
parameters to their default values.
dot1x default
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
These are the default values:
•
The per-port IEEE 802.1x protocol enable state is disabled (force-authorized).
•
The number of seconds between re-authentication attempts is 3600 seconds.
•
The periodic re-authentication is disabled.
•
The quiet period is 60 seconds.
•
The retransmission time is 30 seconds.
•
The maximum retransmission number is 2 times.
•
The host mode is single host.
•
The client timeout period is 30 seconds.
•
The authentication server timeout period is 30 seconds.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to reset the configurable IEEE 802.1x parameters on a port:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x default
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show dot1x [interface interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-97
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x host-mode
dot1x host-mode
Use the dot1x host-mode interface configuration command to allow a single host (client) or multiple
hosts on an IEEE 802.1x-authorized port that has the dot1x port-control interface configuration
command set to auto. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
dot1x host-mode {multi-host | single-host}
no dot1x host-mode [multi-host | single-host]
Note
Syntax Description
Although visible in the command-line interface help, the multi-domain keyword is not supported.
multi-host
Enable multiple-hosts mode on the switch.
single-host
Enable single-host mode on the switch.
Defaults
The default is single-host mode.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to limit an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to a single client or to attach multiple clients to
an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port. In multiple-hosts mode, only one of the attached hosts must be
successfully authorized for all hosts to be granted network access. If the port becomes unauthorized
(re-authentication fails or an Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN [EAPOL]-logoff message is
received), all attached clients are denied access to the network.
Before entering this command, make sure that the dot1x port-control interface configuration command
is set to auto for the specified port.
The dot1x host-mode multi-domain interface configuration command is not supported on the switch.
Configuring this command on an interface causes the interface to go into the error-disabled state.
Examples
This example shows how to enable IEEE 802.1x globally, to enable IEEE 802.1x on a port, and to enable
multiple-hosts mode:
Switch(config)# dot1x system-auth-control
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# dot1x port-control auto
Switch(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-host
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC
command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-98
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x host-mode
Related Commands
Command
Description
show dot1x [interface interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-99
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x initialize
dot1x initialize
Use the dot1x initialize privileged EXEC command to manually return the specified
IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to an unauthorized state before initiating a new authentication session on the
port.
dot1x initialize interface interface-id
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
Defaults
There is no default setting.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Port to be initialized.
Use this command to initialize the IEEE 802.1x state machines and to set up a fresh environment for
authentication. After you enter this command, the port status becomes unauthorized.
There is no no form of this command.
Examples
This example shows how to manually initialize a port:
Switch# dot1x initialize interface gigabitethernet0/2
You can verify the unauthorized port status by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id]
privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show dot1x [interface interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-100
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x max-reauth-req
dot1x max-reauth-req
Use the dot1x max-reauth-req interface configuration command to set the maximum number of times
that the switch restarts the authentication process before a port transitions to the unauthorized state. Use
the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
dot1x max-reauth-req count
no dot1x max-reauth-req
Syntax Description
count
Defaults
The default is 2 times.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Sets the number of times that switch retransmits EAPOL-Identity-Request
frames to start the authentication process before the port changes to the
unauthorized state. If a non-802.1x capable device is connected to a port, the
switch retries two authentication attempts by default. If a guest VLAN is
configured on the port, after two re-authentication attempts, the port is
authorized on the guest vlan by default. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 2.
Usage Guidelines
You should change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual circumstances such as
unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers.
Examples
This example shows how to set 4 as the number of times that the switch restarts the authentication
process before the port transitions to the unauthorized state:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x max-reauth-req 4
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
dot1x max-req
Sets the maximum number of times that the switch forwards an EAP
frame (assuming that no response is received) to the authentication
server before restarting the authentication process.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-101
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x max-reauth-req
Command
Description
dot1x timeout tx-period
Sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an
EAP-request/identity frame from the client before resending the
request.
show dot1x [interface
interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-102
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x max-req
dot1x max-req
Use the dot1x max-req interface configuration command to set the maximum number of times that the
switch sends an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) frame from the authentication server
(assuming that no response is received) to the client before restarting the authentication process. Use the
no form of this command to return to the default setting.
dot1x max-req count
no dot1x max-req
Syntax Description
count
Defaults
The default is 2 times.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Number of times that the switch attempts to retransmit EAPOL DATA packets
before restarting the authentication process. For example, if a problem occurs
on a supplicant during the authentication process, the authenticator will
re-transmit data requests two times before stopping the process. The range is 1
to 10; the default is 2
Usage Guidelines
You should change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual circumstances such as
unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers.
Examples
This example shows how to set 5 as the number of times that the switch sends an EAP frame from the
authentication server before restarting the authentication process:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x max-req 5
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
dot1x timeout tx-period
Sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an
EAP-request/identity frame from the client before resending the
request.
show dot1x [interface
interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-103
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x port-control
dot1x port-control
Use the dot1x port-control interface configuration command to enable manual control of the
authorization state of the port. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}
no dot1x port-control
Syntax Description
auto
Enable IEEE 802.1x authentication on the port and cause the port to change to
the authorized or unauthorized state based on the IEEE 802.1x authentication
exchange between the switch and the client.
force-authorized
Disable IEEE 802.1x authentication on the port and cause the port to change to
the authorized state without an authentication exchange. The port sends and
receives normal traffic without IEEE 802.1x-based authentication of the client.
force-unauthorized
Deny all access through this port by forcing the port to change to the
unauthorized state, ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate. The
switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the port.
Defaults
The default is force-authorized.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must globally enable IEEE 802.1x on the switch by using the dot1x system-auth-control global
configuration command before enabling IEEE 802.1x on a specific port.
The IEEE 802.1x protocol is supported on Layer 2 static-access ports and Layer 3 routed ports.
You can use the auto keyword only if the port is not configured as one of these:
•
Trunk port—If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a trunk port, an error message appears, and
IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to trunk,
an error message appears, and the port mode is not changed.
•
Dynamic-access ports—If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a dynamic-access (VLAN Query
Protocol [VQP]) port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to
change an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic VLAN assignment, an error message appears, and
the VLAN configuration is not changed.
•
EtherChannel port—Do not configure a port that is an active or a not-yet-active member of an
EtherChannel as an IEEE 802.1x port. If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on an EtherChannel port,
an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-104
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x port-control
•
Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) and Remote SPAN (RSPAN) destination ports—You can enable
IEEE 802.1x on a port that is a SPAN or RSPAN destination port. However, IEEE 802.1x is disabled
until the port is removed as a SPAN or RSPAN destination. You can enable IEEE 802.1x on a SPAN
or RSPAN source port.
To globally disable IEEE 802.1x on the switch, use the no dot1x system-auth-control global
configuration command. To disable IEEE 802.1x on a specific port, use the no dot1x port-control
interface configuration command.
Examples
This example shows how to enable IEEE 802.1x on a port:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# dot1x port-control auto
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show dot1x [interface interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-105
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x re-authenticate
dot1x re-authenticate
Use the dot1x re-authenticate privileged EXEC command to manually initiate a re-authentication of
the specified IEEE 802.1x-enabled port.
dot1x re-authenticate interface interface-id
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
Defaults
There is no default setting.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Module and port number of the interface to re-authenticate.
Usage Guidelines
You can use this command to re-authenticate a client without waiting for the configured number of
seconds between re-authentication attempts (re-authperiod) and automatic re-authentication.
Examples
This example shows how to manually re-authenticate the device connected to a port:
Switch# dot1x re-authenticate interface gigabitethernet0/1
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-106
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x reauthentication
dot1x reauthentication
Use the dot1x reauthentication interface configuration command to enable periodic re-authentication
of the client. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
dot1x reauthentication
no dot1x reauthentication
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Periodic re-authentication is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You configure the amount of time between periodic re-authentication attempts by using the dot1x
timeout reauth-period interface configuration command.
Examples
This example shows how to disable periodic re-authentication of the client:
Switch(config-if)# no dot1x reauthentication
This example shows how to enable periodic re-authentication and to set the number of seconds between
re-authentication attempts to 4000 seconds:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x reauthentication
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout reauth-period 4000
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
dot1x timeout reauth-period
Sets the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts.
show dot1x [interface
interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-107
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x supplicant force-multicast
dot1x supplicant force-multicast
Use the dot1x supplicant force-multicast global configuration command to force a supplicant switch
to send only multicast Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) packets whenever it
receives multicast or unicast EAPOL packets. Use the no form of this command to return to the default
setting.
dot1x supplicant force-multicast
no dot1x supplicant force-multicast
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
The supplicant switch sends unicast EAPoL packets when it receives unicast EAPOL packets. Similarly,
it sends multicast EAPOL packets when it receives multicast EAPOL packets.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Enable this command on the supplicant switch for Network Edge Access Topology (NEAT) to work in
all host modes.
Examples
This example shows how force a supplicant switch to send multicast EAPOL packets to authenticator
switch:
Switch(config)# dot1x supplicant force-multicast
Related Commands
Command
Description
cisp enable
Enable Client Information Signalling Protocol (CISP) on a switch so that it
acts as an authenticator to a supplicant switch.
dot1x credentials
Configure the 802.1x supplicant credentials on the port.
dot1x pae supplicant
Configure an interface to act only as a supplicant.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-108
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x system-auth-control
dot1x system-auth-control
Use the dot1x system-auth-control global configuration command to globally enable IEEE 802.1x. Use
the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
dot1x system-auth-control
no dot1x system-auth-control
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
IEEE 802.1x is disabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must enable authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) and specify the authentication
method list before globally enabling IEEE 802.1x. A method list describes the sequence and
authentication methods to be queried to authenticate a user.
Before globally enabling IEEE 802.1x on a switch, remove the EtherChannel configuration from the
interfaces on which IEEE 802.1x and EtherChannel are configured.
Examples
This example shows how to globally enable IEEE 802.1x on a switch:
Switch(config)# dot1x system-auth-control
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
dot1x port-control
Enables manual control of the authorization state of the port.
show dot1x [interface
interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-109
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x test eapol-capable
dot1x test eapol-capable
Use the dot1x test eapol-capable privileged EXEC command to monitor IEEE 802.1x activity on all the
switch ports and to display information about the devices that are connected to the ports that support
IEEE 802.1x.
dot1x test eapol-capable [interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
Defaults
There is no default setting.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
(Optional) Port to be queried.
Use this command to test the IEEE 802.1x capability of the devices connected to all ports or to specific
ports on a switch.
There is not a no form of this command.
Examples
This example shows how to enable the IEEE 802.1x readiness check on a switch to query a port. It also
shows the response received from the queried port verifying that the device connected to it is
IEEE 802.1x-capable:
switch# dot1x test eapol-capable interface gigabitethernet1/0/13
DOT1X_PORT_EAPOL_CAPABLE:DOT1X: MAC 00-01-02-4b-f1-a3 on gigabitethernet1/0/13 is EAPOL
capable
Related Commands
Command
Description
dot1x test timeout timeout
Configures the timeout used to wait for EAPOL response to
an IEEE 802.1x readiness query.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-110
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x test timeout
dot1x test timeout
Use the dot1x test timeout global configuration command to configure the timeout used to wait for
EAPOL response from a port being queried for IEEE 802.1x readiness.
dot1x test timeout timeout
Syntax Description
timeout
Defaults
The default setting is 10 seconds.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Time in seconds to wait for an EAPOL response. The range is from
1 to 65535 seconds.
Use this command to configure the timeout used to wait for EAPOL response.
There is not a no form of this command.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the switch to wait 27 seconds for an EAPOL response:
Switch# dot1x test timeout 27
You can verify the timeout configuration status by entering the show run privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
dot1x test eapol-capable [interface
interface-id]
Checks for IEEE 802.1x readiness on devices connected to
all or to specified IEEE 802.1x-capable ports.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-111
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x timeout
dot1x timeout
Use the dot1x timeout interface configuration command to set IEEE 802.1x timers. Use the no form of
this command to return to the default setting.
dot1x timeout {quiet-period seconds | reauth-period seconds | server-timeout seconds |
supp-timeout seconds | tx-period seconds}
no dot1x timeout {quiet-period | reauth-period | server-timeout | supp-timeout | tx-period}
Syntax Description
Defaults
quiet-period seconds
Number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a
failed authentication exchange with the client. The range is 1 to 65535.
reauth-period seconds
Number of seconds between re-authentication attempts. The range is 1 to
65535.
server-timeout seconds
Number of seconds that the switch waits for the retransmission of packets
by the switch to the authentication server. The range is 1 to 65535.
However, we recommend a minimum setting of 30.
supp-timeout seconds
Number of seconds that the switch waits for the retransmission of packets
by the switch to the IEEE 802.1x client. The range is 30 to 65535.
tx-period seconds
Number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an
EAP-request/identity frame from the client before retransmitting the
request. The range is 1 to 65535.
These are the default settings:
reauth-period is 3600 seconds.
quiet-period is 60 seconds.
tx-period is 30 seconds.
supp-timeout is 30 seconds.
server-timeout is 30 seconds.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You should change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual circumstances such as
unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers.
The dot1x timeout reauth-period interface configuration command affects the behavior of the switch
only if you have enabled periodic re-authentication by using the dot1x reauthentication interface
configuration command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-112
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x timeout
During the quiet period, the switch does not accept or initiate any authentication requests. If you want
to provide a faster response time to the user, enter a number smaller than the default.
Examples
This example shows how to enable periodic re-authentication and to set 4000 as the number of seconds
between re-authentication attempts:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x reauthentication
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout reauth-period 4000
This example shows how to set 30 seconds as the quiet time on the switch:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout quiet-period 30
This example shows how to set 45 seconds as the switch-to-authentication server retransmission time:
Switch(config)# dot1x timeout server-timeout 45
This example shows how to set 45 seconds as the switch-to-client retransmission time for the EAP
request frame:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout supp-timeout 45
This example shows how to set 60 as the number of seconds to wait for a response to an
EAP-request/identity frame from the client before re-transmitting the request:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout tx-period 60
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
dot1x max-req
Sets the maximum number of times that the switch sends an
EAP-request/identity frame before restarting the authentication process.
dot1x reauthentication
Enables periodic re-authentication of the client.
show dot1x
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for all ports.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-113
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
dot1x violation-mode
dot1x violation-mode
Use the dot1x violation-mode interface configuration command to configure the violation modes that
occur when a new device connects to a port or when a new device connects to a port after the maximum
number of devices are connected to that port.
dot1x violation-mode {shutdown | restrict | protect}
no dot1x violation-mode
Syntax Description
shutdown
Error disables the port or the virtual port on which a new unexpected MAC
address occurs.
restrict
Generates a syslog error when a violation error occurs.
protect
Silently discards packets from any new MAC addresses. This is the default
setting.
Defaults
By default dot1x violation-mode protect is enabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to configure an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port as error disabled and to shut down
when a new device connects to the port:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x violation-mode shutdown
This example shows how to configure an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to generate a system error message
and change the port to restricted mode when a new device connects to the port:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x violation-mode restrict
This example shows how to configure an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to ignore a new connected device
when it is connected to the port:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x violation-mode protect
You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show dot1x [interface interface-id]
Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-114
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
duplex
duplex
Use the duplex interface configuration command to specify the duplex mode of operation for a port. Use
the no form of this command to return the port to its default value.
duplex {auto | full | half}
no duplex
Syntax Description
Defaults
auto
Enable automatic duplex configuration; port automatically detects whether it
should run in full- or half-duplex mode, depending on the attached device mode.
full
Enable full-duplex mode.
half
Enable half-duplex mode (only for interfaces operating at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps).
You cannot configure half-duplex mode for interfaces operating at 1000 Mbps or
10,000 Mbps.
The default is auto for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports and for 1000BASE-T small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) modules.
The default is full for 100BASE-FX MMF SFP modules.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This command is only available when a 1000BASE-T SFP module or a 100BASE-FX MMF SFP module
is in the SFP module slot. All other SFP modules operate only in full-duplex mode.
When a 1000BASE-T SFP module is in the SFP module slot, you can configure duplex mode to auto or
full.
When a 100BASE-FX MMF SFP module is in the SFP module slot, you can configure duplex mode to
half or full. Although the auto keyword is available, it puts the interface in half-duplex mode (the
default) because the 100BASE-FX MMF SFP module does not support autonegotiation.
Certain ports can be configured to be either full duplex or half duplex. Applicability of this command
depends on the device to which the switch is attached.
For Fast Ethernet ports, setting the port to auto has the same effect as specifying half if the attached
device does not autonegotiate the duplex parameter.
For Gigabit Ethernet ports, setting the port to auto has the same effect as specifying full if the attached
device does not autonegotiate the duplex parameter.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-115
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
duplex
Note
Half-duplex mode is supported on Gigabit Ethernet interfaces if duplex mode is auto and the
connected device is operating at half duplex. However, you cannot configure these interfaces to
operate in half-duplex mode.
If both ends of the line support autonegotiation, we highly recommend using the default autonegotiation
settings. If one interface supports autonegotiation and the other end does not, configure duplex and speed
on both interfaces; do use the auto setting on the supported side.
If the speed is set to auto, the switch negotiates with the device at the other end of the link for the speed
setting and then forces the speed setting to the negotiated value. The duplex setting remains as
configured on each end of the link, which could result in a duplex setting mismatch.
You can configure the duplex setting when the speed is set to auto.
Caution
Note
Examples
Changing the interface speed and duplex mode configuration might shut down and re-enable the
interface during the reconfiguration.
For guidelines on setting the switch speed and duplex parameters, see the software configuration guide
for this release.
This example shows how to configure an interface for full duplex operation:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# duplex full
You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces
Displays the interface settings on the switch.
speed
Sets the speed on a 10/100 or 10/100/1000 Mbps interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-116
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
errdisable detect cause
errdisable detect cause
Use the errdisable detect cause global configuration command to enable error-disabled detection for a
specific cause or all causes. Use the no form of this command to disable the error-disabled detection
feature.
errdisable detect cause {all | arp-inspection | dhcp-rate-limit | gbic-invalid | l2ptguard |
link-flap | loopback | pagp-flap | small-frame}
no errdisable detect cause {all | arp-inspection | dhcp-rate-limit | gbic-invalid | l2ptguard |
link-flap | pagp-flap | small-frame}
Note
Syntax Description
Although visible in the command line interface, small-frame keyword is not needed on the switch
because the existing broadcast storm disable feature correctly handles small frames.
all
Enable error detection for all error-disable causes.
arp-inspection
Enable error detection for dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
inspection.
dhcp-rate-limit
Enable error detection for DHCP snooping.
gbic-invalid
Enable error detection for an invalid Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) module.
Note
This error refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module.
l2ptguard
Enable error detection for a Layer 2 protocol-tunnel error-disabled cause.
link-flap
Enable error detection for link-state flapping.
loopback
Enable error detection for detected loopbacks.
pagp-flap
Enable error detection for the Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) flap
error-disabled cause.
small-frame
This feature is not required on the switch.
Defaults
Detection is enabled for all causes. All causes, except for per-VLAN error disabling, are configured to
shut down the entire port.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
A cause (all, dhcp-rate-limit, and so forth) is the reason why the error-disabled state occurred. When a
cause is detected on an interface, the interface is placed in an error-disabled state, an operational state
that is similar to a link-down state.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-117
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
errdisable detect cause
When a port is error-disabled, it is effectively shut down, and no traffic is sent or received on the port. For the
BPDU guard and port-security features, you can configure the switch to shut down just the offending
VLAN on the port when a violation occurs, instead of shutting down the entire port.
If you set a recovery mechanism for the cause by entering the errdisable recovery global configuration
command for the cause, the interface is brought out of the error-disabled state and allowed to retry the
operation when all causes have timed out. If you do not set a recovery mechanism, you must enter the
shutdown and then the no shutdown commands to manually recover an interface from the
error-disabled state.
Examples
This example shows how to enable error-disabled detection for the link-flap error-disabled cause:
Switch(config)# errdisable detect cause link-flap
You can verify your setting by entering the show errdisable detect privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show errdisable detect
Displays errdisable detection information.
show interfaces status err-disabled
Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in the
error-disabled state.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-118
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
errdisable recovery
errdisable recovery
Use the errdisable recovery global configuration command to configure the recover mechanism
variables. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
errdisable recovery {cause {all | arp-inspection | bpduguard | channel-misconfig |
dhcp-rate-limit | gbic-invalid | l2ptguard | link-flap | loopback | pagp-flap |
psecure-violation | security-violation | small-frame | udld |unicast-flood | vmps} | {interval
interval}
no errdisable recovery {cause {all | arp-inspection | bpduguard | channel-misconfig |
dhcp-rate-limit | gbic-invalid | l2ptguard | link-flap | loopback | pagp-flap |
psecure-violation | security-violation | small-frame | udld |unicast-flood | vmps} | {interval
interval}
Note
Syntax Description
Although visible in the command-line help strings, the storm-control and unicast-flood keywords are
not supported. The small-frame keyword is not used because the broadcast-storm disable feature
processes small frames
cause
Enable the error-disabled mechanism to recover from a specific cause.
all
Enable the timer to recover from all error-disabled causes.
bpduguard
Enable the timer to recover from the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) guard
error-disabled state.
arp-inspection
Enable the timer to recover from the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
inspection error-disabled state.
channel-misconfig
Enable the timer to recover from the EtherChannel misconfiguration
error-disabled state.
dhcp-rate-limit
Enable the timer to recover from the DHCP snooping error-disabled state.
gbic-invalid
Enable the timer to recover from an invalid Gigabit Interface Converter
(GBIC) module error-disabled state.
Note
This error refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
error-disabled state.
l2ptguard
Enable the timer to recover from a Layer 2 protocol tunnel error-disabled
state.
link-flap
Enable the timer to recover from the link-flap error-disabled state.
loopback
Enable the timer to recover from a loopback error-disabled state.
pagp-flap
Enable the timer to recover from the Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP)-flap
error-disabled state.
psecure-violation
Enable the timer to recover from a port security violation disabled state.
security-violation
Enable the timer to recover from an IEEE 802.1x-violation disabled state.
small-frame
This keyword is not used.
udld
Enable the timer to recover from the UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD)
error-disabled state.
unicast-flood
Enable the timer to recover from the unicast flood disable state.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-119
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
errdisable recovery
vmps
Enable the timer to recover from the VLAN Membership Policy Server
(VMPS) error-disabled state.
interval interval
Specify the time to recover from the specified error-disabled state. The range
is 30 to 86400 seconds. The same interval is applied to all causes. The default
interval is 300 seconds.
Note
Defaults
The error-disabled recovery timer is initialized at a random
differential from the configured interval value. The difference
between the actual timeout value and the configured value can be up
to 15 percent of the configured interval.
Recovery is disabled for all causes.
The default recovery interval is 300 seconds.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
A cause (all, bpduguard and so forth) is defined as the reason that the error-disabled state occurred.
When a cause is detected on an interface, the interface is placed in error-disabled state, an operational
state similar to link-down state. If you do not enable errdisable recovery for the cause, the interface stays
in error-disabled state until you enter a shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration command.
If you enable the recovery for a cause, the interface is brought out of the error-disabled state and allowed
to retry the operation again when all the causes have timed out.
Otherwise, you must enter the shutdown then no shutdown commands to manually recover an interface
from the error-disabled state
Examples
This example shows how to enable the recovery timer for the BPDU guard error-disabled cause:
Switch(config)# errdisable recovery cause bpduguard
This example shows how to set the timer to 500 seconds:
Switch(config)# errdisable recovery interval 500
You can verify your settings by entering the show errdisable recovery privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show errdisable recovery
Displays errdisable recovery timer information.
show interfaces status
err-disabled
Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled
state.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-120
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet dot1ad
ethernet dot1ad
To configure an IEEE 802.1ad port, use the ethernet dot1ad interface configuration command. To
disable an 802.1ad port, use the no form of the command.
ethernet dot1ad {nni | uni {c-port | s-port | c-port isolate | s-port isolate}}
no ethernet dot1ad
Syntax Description
nni
Configures a network-network interface (NNI) port.
uni
Configures a user-network interface (UNI) port.
c-port
Configures a dot1ad UNI customer bridge port.
s-port
Configures a dot1ad UNI S-bridge port.
c-port isolate
Configures a split horizon by isolating a dot1ad C-UNI port.
s-port isolate
Configures a split horizon by isolating a dot1ad S-UNI port.
Defaults
No 802.ad ports are configured.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Usage Guidelines
Modification
12.2(54)SE
This command was introduced.
12.2(55)SE
The isolate keywords were added.
The 802.1ad UNI port commands are typically used on the provider-edge switch ports interfacing with
a customer device. For S-bridge UNI ports, you configure the customer device switch port as a trunk port
and the S-bridge UNI on the interfacing PE device as an access port. The 802.1ad S-bridge UNI port
provides an all-to-one bundling function for the set of customer C-VLANs in the provider network.
The 802.1ad C-bridge UNI ports provide selective bundling as well as all-to-one bundling capabilities
for customer VLANs.
You should configure an 802.1ad NNI on all the interconnecting trunk links in the 802.1ad provider
cloud to achieve end-to-end Layer 2 protocol tunneling.
You cannot configure a port as an isolated C-UNI or S-UNI port if the port is already configured as an
802.1ad port type. However, you can use the ethernet dot1ad interface command to change an isolated
dot1ad port to a nonisolated S-UNI or C-UNI port.
An S-UNI or isolated S-UNI port must be an access port. A C-UNI or isolated C-UNI port can be an
access port or a trunk port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-121
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet dot1ad
Related Commands
Command
Description
l2protocol
Configures a port to process or forward Layer 2 BPDUs.
show ethernet dot1ad
Displays 802.1ad port configuration on the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-122
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet evc
ethernet evc
Use the ethernet evc global configuration command to define an Ethernet virtual connection (EVC) and
to enter EVC configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete the EVC.
ethernet evc evc-id
no ethernet evc evc-id
Syntax Description
evc-id
Defaults
No EVCs are defined.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
The EVC identifier. This can be a string of from 1 to 100 characters.
After you enter the ethernet evc evc-id command, the switch enters EVC configuration mode, and these
configuration commands are available:
•
default: sets the EVC to its default states.
•
exit: exits EVC configuration mode and returns to global configuration mode.
•
no: negates a command or returns a command to its default setting.
•
oam protocol cfm svlan: configures the Ethernet operation, administration, and maintenance
(OAM) protocol as IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) and sets parameters. See
the oam protocol cfm svlan command.
•
uni count: configures a UNI count for the EVC. See the uni count command.
This example shows how to define an EVC and to enter EVC configuration mode:
Switch(config)# ethernet evc test1
Switch(config-evc)#
Related Commands
Command
Description
service instance id ethernet Configures an Ethernet service instance and attaches an EVC to it.
evc-id
show ethernet service evc
Displays information about configured EVCs.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-123
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet lmi
ethernet lmi
Use the ethernet lmi global configuration command to configure enable Ethernet Local Management
Interface (E-LMI) and to configure the switch as a provider-edge (PE) or customer-edge (CE) device.
Use the no form of this command to disable E-LMI globally or to disable E-LMI CE.
ethernet lmi {ce | global}
no ethernet lmi {ce | global}
Syntax Description
ce
Enable the switch as an E-LMI CE device.
Note
global
Ethernet LMI is disabled by default. You must enable it globally or
on an interface in addition to enabling it in CE mode.
Enable E-LMI globally on the switch. By default, the switch is a PE device.
Defaults
Ethernet LMI is disabled. When enabled with the global keyword, by default the switch is a PR device.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use ethernet lmi global command to enable E-LMI globally. Use ethernet lmi ce command to enable
the switch as E-LMI CE device.
Ethernet LMI is disabled by default on an interface and must be explicitly enabled by entering the
ethernet lmi interface interface configuration command. The ethernet lmi global command enables
Ethernet LMI in PE mode on all interfaces for an entire device. The benefit of this command is that you
can enable Ethernet LMI on all interfaces with one command instead of enabling Ethernet LMI
separately on each interface. To enable the interface in CE mode, you must also enter the ethernet lmi
ce global configuration command.
To disable Ethernet LMI on a specific interface after you have entered the ethernet lmi global command,
enter the no ethernet lmi interface interface configuration command.
The sequence in which you enter the ethernet lmi interface interface configuration and ethernet lmi
global global configuration commands is important. The latest command entered overrides the prior
command entered.
Note
For information about the ethernet lmi interface configuration command, see the Cisco IOS Carrier
Ethernet Command Reference at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/cether/command/reference/ce_book.html
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-124
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet lmi
To enable the switch as an Ethernet LMI CE device, you must enter both the ethernet lmi global and
ethernet lmi ce commands. By default Ethernet LMI is disabled, and, when enabled the switch is in
provider-edge mode unless you also enter the ethernet lmi ce command.
When the switch is configured as an Ethernet LMI CE device, these interface configuration commands
and keywords are visible, but not supported:
Examples
•
service instance
•
ethernet uni
•
ethernet lmi t392
This example shows how to configure the switch as an Ethernet LMI CE device:
Switch(config)# ethernet lmi global
Switch(config)# ethernet lmi ce
Related Commands
Command
Description
ethernet lmi interface
configuration command
Enables Ethernet LMI for a user-network interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-125
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet lmi ce-vlan map
ethernet lmi ce-vlan map
Use the ethernet lmi ce-vlan map Ethernet service configuration command to configure Ethernet Local
Management Interface (E-LMI) parameters. Use the no form of this command to remove the
configuration.
ethernet lmi ce-vlan map {vlan-id | any | default | untagged}
no ethernet lmi ce-vlan map {vlan-id | any | default | untagged}
Syntax Description
vlan-id
Enter the customer VLAN ID or VLAN IDs to map to. You can enter a single
VLAN ID (the range is 1 to 4094), a range of VLAN IDs separated by a
hyphen, or a series of VLAN IDs separated by commas.
any
Map all VLANs (untagged and VLANs 1 to 4094).
default
Map to the default service instance. You can use the default keyword only if
you have already mapped the service instance to a VLAN or a group of
VLANs.
untagged
Map only untagged VLANs.
Defaults
No E-LMI mapping parameters are defined.
Command Modes
Ethernet service configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to configure an E-LMI customer VLAN-to-EVC map for a particular user-network
interface (UNI).
On an ME-3400E interface configured for VLAN mapping, use the customer VLAN ID (C-VLAN) value
when entering the ethernet lmi ce-vlan map vlan-id service instance configuration mode command. Do
not use the service-provider VLAN ID (S-VLAN).
E-LMI mapping parameters are related to the bundling characteristics set by entering the ethernet uni
{bundle [all-to-one] | multiplex} interface configuration command.
•
Using the default UNI attribute (bundling and multiplexing) supports multiple EVCs and multiple
VLANs.
•
Entering the ethernet uni bundle command supports only one EVC with one or more VLANs.
•
Entering the ethernet uni bundle all-to-one command supports multiple VLANs but only one EVC.
If you use the ethernet lmi ce-vlan map any Ethernet service configuration command, you must
first configure all-to-one bundling on the interface.
•
Entering the ethernet uni multiplex command supports multiple EVCs with only one VLAN per
EVC.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-126
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet lmi ce-vlan map
Examples
This example shows how to configure an E-LMI customer VLAN-to-EVC map to map EVC test to
customer VLAN 101 in service instance 333 on the interface:
Switch(config-if)# service instance 333 ethernet test
Switch(config-if-srv)# ethernet lmi ce-vlan map 101
Related Commands
Command
Description
service instance id
ethernet
Defines an Ethernet service instance and enters Ethernet service
configuration mode.
show ethernet service
instance
Displays information about configured Ethernet service instances.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-127
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet loopback (interface configuration)
ethernet loopback (interface configuration)
Use the ethernet loopback facility interface configuration command to configure per-port loopbacks
for testing connectivity across multiple switches. Use the ethernet loopback terminal interface
configuration command to test quality of service (QoS). Use the no form of this command to remove the
configuration.
ethernet loopback facility [vlan vlan-list] [mac-address {swap | copy}] [timeout {seconds |
none}] supported
ethernet loopback terminal [mac-address {swap | copy}] [timeout {seconds | none}] supported
no ethernet loopback
Syntax Description
facility
Configure a facility loopback for connectivity testing.
vlan vlan-list
Configure VLAN loopback for nondisruptive loopback testing.
terminal
Configure a terminal loopback for QoS testing.
mac-address swap
Configure the switch to swap the MAC source and destination addresses for
the loopback action.
mac-address copy
Configure the switch to copy the MAC source and destination addresses for
the loopback action.
timeout seconds
Configure a loopback timeout period in seconds. The range is from 5 to 300
seconds. The default is 60 seconds.
timeout none
Configure the loop back to not timeout.
supported
Specify that the configured loopback is supported.
Defaults
No loopbacks are configured. If no mac-address option is configured, the default is to copy the source
and destination addresses.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(50)SE
The vlan and terminal keywords were added.
Usage Guidelines
You can configure Ethernet loopback only on physical ports, not on VLANs or port channels.
A facility loopback puts the port into a state where the link is up, but the line protocol is down for regular
traffic. The switch loops back all received traffic.
When you configure VLAN loopback by entering the vlan vlan-list keywords, the other VLANs on the
port continue to be switched normally, allowing non-disruptive loopback testing.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-128
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet loopback (interface configuration)
The loopback ends after a port event, such as a port shutdown or a change from a switchport to a routed
port.
For a terminal loopback, the software sees the port as up, but the link is down, and no packets are sent.
Any configuration changes on the port immediately affect the traffic being looped back.
You can configure one loopback per port, and a maximum of two loopbacks per switch. You can
configure only on terminal loopback per switch. Therefore, a switch could have one facility loopback
and one terminal loopback or two facility loopbacks.
Ethernet loopback interactions with other features:
•
You cannot configure SPAN and loopback on a switch at the same time. If you try to configure SPAN
on any port while loopback is configured on any port, you receive an error message.
•
The port loopback function shares hardware resources with the VLAN-mapping feature. If not
enough TCAM resources are available because of VLAN-mapping configuration, when you attempt
to configure loopback, you receive an error message, and the configuration is not allowed.
•
If loopback is active on a port, you cannot add that port to a Flex Link pair or to an Ether Channel.
After you have configured Ethernet loopback, you enter the ethernet loopback start interface-id
privileged EXEC command to begin the loopback. To stop loopback, enter the ethernet loopback stop
{interface-id | all} command.
Examples
This example shows how to configure an Ethernet loopback to swap the MAC source and destination
addresses, to time out after 30 seconds, to start the loopback process, and to verify the configuration.
You must confirm the action before configuring.
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# ethernet loopback facility mac-address swap timeout 30 supported
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# ethernet loopback start gigabitethernet 0/1
This is an intrusive loopback.
Therefore, while you test Ethernet connectivity,
you will be unable to pass traffic across that link.
Proceed with Local Loopback? [confirm]
Switch# show ethernet loopback
=====================================
Loopback Session 0 : Interface GI0/1
Direction
: facility
Type
: port
Status
: active
MAC Mode
: swap
Time out
: 30
Time remaining
: 25 seconds
This example shows how to also configure a nondisruptive loopback on a second interface:
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ethernet loop facility mac-address swap timeout none supported
Switch(config-if)# exit
Switch(config-if)# interface fastethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# ethernet loop facility vlan 3 mac-address copy timeout 100 supported
switch(config-if)# switch mode trunk
Switch(config-if)# exit
switch(config)# vlan 3
switch(config-vlan)# end
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-129
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet loopback (interface configuration)
Switch# show ethernet loopback
=====================================
Loopback Session 0 : Interface Fa0/1
Direction
: facility
Type
: port
Status
: configured
MAC Mode
: swap
Time out
: none
=====================================
Loopback Session 1 : Interface Fa0/2
Direction
: facility
Type
: vlan
Status
: configured
MAC Mode
: copy
Vlan
: 3
Time out
: 100
This example shows how to remove Ethernet loopback facility configuration on two interfaces and to
configure Ethernet terminal loopback on an interface.
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
switch(config-if)# no ethernet loopback
switch(config-if)# interface fastethernet 0/2
switch(config-if)# no ethernet loopback
switch(config-if)# exit
switch(config)# default interface range fastethernet 0/1-2
switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
switch(config-if)# ethernet loop terminal mad-address swap timeout 300 supported
switch(config-if)# end
Switch# show ethernet loopback
=====================================
Loopback Session 0 : Interface Fa0/1
Direction
: terminal
Type
: port
Status
: configured
MAC Mode
: swap
Time out
: 300
Related Commands
Command
Description
ethernet loopback
(privileged EXEC)
Starts or stops an Ethernet loopback operation on an interface.
show ethernet loopback Displays the Ethernet loopbacks configured on the switch or the specified
interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-130
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet loopback (privileged EXEC)
ethernet loopback (privileged EXEC)
Use the ethernet loopback privileged EXEC command to start or stop an Ethernet loopback function on
an interface.
ethernet loopback {start interface-id | stop {interface-id | all}}
Syntax Description
start
Start the Ethernet loopback operation configured on the interface.
stop
Stop the Ethernet loopback operation.
interface-id
Specify the interface on which to start or stop the loopback operation.
all
Stop all Ethernet loopback operations on the switch. This keyword is
available only after the stop keyword.
Defaults
There is no default.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Before starting or stopping an Ethernet loopback operation, you must configure it on an interface by
entering the ethernet loopback interface configuration command. When you start loopback, you see a
warning message.
You can configure Ethernet loopback and enter the ethernet loopback start or ethernet loopback stop
command only for physical ports, not for VLANs or port channels.
You cannot start VLAN loopback on nontrunk interfaces. You cannot start terminal loopback on routed
interfaces.
You can configure only one loopback per port and a maximum of two loopbacks per switch. You can
configure only one terminal loopback per switch.
Examples
This example shows how to start a facility port loopback process, to verify it, and then to stop it:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# ethernet loopback facility mac-address swap timeout 30 supported
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# ethernet loopback start gigabitethernet 0/1
This is an intrusive loopback.
Therefore, while you test Ethernet connectivity,
you will be unable to pass traffic across that link.
Proceed with Local Loopback? [confirm]
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-131
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet loopback (privileged EXEC)
Switch# show ethernet loopback
=====================================
Loopback Session 0 : Interface Gi0/1
Direction
: facility
Type
: port
Status
: active
MAC Mode
: swap
Time out
: 30
Time remaining
: 25 seconds
Switch# ethernet loop stop all
Dec 4 11:18:44.083: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface GigabitEthernet0/1,
changed state to up
Switch# show ethernet loopback
=====================================
Loopback Session 0 : Interface Gi0/1
Direction
: facility
Type
: port
Status
: configured
MAC Mode
: swap
Time out
: 30
This example shows how to start a VLAN non-intrusive loopback process:
Switch# ethernet loop start fastethernet 0/2
This is a non-intrusive loopback.
Therefore, while you test Ethernet connectivity on vlan 3, you will be unable to pass
traffic across it, however, other vlans will be unaffected.
Proceed with Local Loopback? [confirm]
Switch# show ethernet loopback
=====================================
Loopback Session 1 : Interface Fa0/2
Direction
: facility
Type
: vlan
Status
: active
MAC Mode
: copy
Vlan
: 3
Time out
: 100
Time remaining
: 94 seconds
Related Commands
Command
Description
ethernet loopback
Configures an Ethernet loopback operation on an interface.
(interface configuration)
show ethernet loopback
Displays the Ethernet loopbacks configured on the switch or the specified
interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-132
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet oam remote-failure
ethernet oam remote-failure
Use the ethernet oam remote-failure interface configuration or configuration template command to
configure Ethernet operations, maintenance, and administration (EOM) remote failure indication. Use
the no form of this command to remove the configuration.
ethernet oam remote-failure {critical-event | dying-gasp | link-fault} action
error-disable-interface
no ethernet oam remote-failure {critical-event | dying-gasp | link-fault} action
Syntax Description
Defaults
critical-event
Configure the switch to put an interface in error-disabled mode when an
unspecified critical event has occurred.
dying-gasp
Configure the switch to put an interface in error-disabled mode when an
unrecoverable condition has occurred.
link-fault
Configure the switch to put an interface in error-disabled mode when the
receiver detects a loss of power.
Configuration template
Interface configuration
Command Modes
Ethernet service configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can apply this command to an Ethernet OAM template and to an interface. The interface
configuration takes precedence over template configuration. To enter OAM template configuration
mode, use the template template-name global configuration command.
The Cisco ME switch does not generate Link Fault or Critical Event OAM PDUs. However, if these
PDUs are received from a link partner, they are processed. The switch supports generating and receiving
Dying Gasp OAM PDUs when Ethernet OAM is disabled, the interface is shut down, the interface enters
the error-disabled state, or the switch is reloading. The switch can also generate and receive Dying Gasp
PDUs based on loss of power. The PDU includes a reason code to indicate why it was sent.
You can configure an error-disable action to occur if the remote link goes down, if the remote device is
disabled, or if the remote device disables Ethernet OAM on the interface.
For complete command and configuration information for the Ethernet OAM protocol, see the Cisco IOS
Carrier Ethernet Configuration Guide at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/cether/configuration/guide/12_2sr/ce_12_2sr_book.html
For information about other CFM and Ethernet OAM commands, see the Cisco IOS Carrier Ethernet
Command Reference at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/cether/command/reference/ce_book.html
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-133
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet oam remote-failure
Examples
This example shows how to configure an Ethernet OAM template for remote-failure indication when an
unrecoverable error has occurred and how to apply it to an interface:
Switch(config)# template oam1
Switch(config-template)# ethernet oam remote-failure dying-gasp action error-disable
interface
Switch(config-template)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# source template oam1
Switch(config-if)# exit
This example shows how to configure an Ethernet OAM remote-failure indication on one interface for
unrecoverable errors:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# ethernet oam remote-failure dying-gasp action error-disable interface
Switch(config-if)# exit
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ethernet oam
status [interface
interface-id]
Displays configured Ethernet OAM remote failure conditions on all
interfaces or on the specified interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-134
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet uni
ethernet uni
Use the ethernet uni interface configuration command to set UNI bundling attributes. Use the no form
of this command to return to the default bundling configuration.
ethernet uni {bundle [all-to-one] | multiplex}
no ethernet uni {bundle | multiplex}
Syntax Description
bundle
Configure the UNI to support bundling without multiplexing. This service
supports only one Ethernet virtual connection (EVC) at the UNI with one or
multiple customer edge (CE)-VLAN IDs mapped to the EVC.
all-to-one
(Optional) Configure the UNI to support bundling with a single EVC at the
UNI and all CE VLANs mapped to that EVC.
multiplex
Configure the UNI to support multiplexing without bundling. The UNI can
have one or more EVCs with a single CE-VLAN ID mapped to each EVC.
Defaults
If bundling or multiplexing attributes are not configured, the default is bundling with multiplexing. The
UNI then has one or more EVCs with one or more CE VLANs mapped to each EVC.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The UNI attributes determine the functionality that the interface has regarding bundling VLANs,
multiplexing EVCs, and the combination of these.
If you want both bundling and multiplexing services for a UNI, you do not need to configure bundling
or multiplexing. If you want only bundling, or only multiplexing, you need to configure it appropriately.
When you configure, change, or remove a UNI service type, the EVC and CE-VLAN ID configurations
are checked to ensure that the configurations and the UNI service types match. If the configurations do
not match, the command is rejected.
If you intend to use the ethernet lmi ce-vlan map any service configuration command, you must first
configure all-to-one bundling on the interface. See the ethernet lmi ce-vlan map section for more
information.
Examples
This example shows how to configure bundling without multiplexing:
Switch(config-if)# ethernet uni bundle
To verify UNI service type, enter the show ethernet service interface detail privileged EXEC
command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-135
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet uni
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ethernet service
interface
Displays information about Ethernet service instances on an interface,
including service type.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-136
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ethernet uni id
ethernet uni id
Use the ethernet uni interface configuration command to create an Ethernet user-network interface
(UNI) ID. Use the no form of this command to remove the UNI ID.
ethernet uni id name
no ethernet uni id
Syntax Description
name
Defaults
No UNI IDs are created.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Identify an Ethernet UNI ID. The name should be unique for all UNIs that
are part of a given service instance and can be up to 64 characters in length.
When you configure a UNI ID on a port, that ID is used as the default name for all maintenance end
points (MEPs) configured on the port.
You must enter the ethernet uni id name command on all ports that are directly connected to
customer-edge (CE) devices. If the specified ID is not unique on the device, an error message appears.
Examples
This example shows how to identify a unique UNI:
Switch(config-if)# ethernet uni id test2
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ethernet service
interface
Displays information about Ethernet service instances on an interface,
including service type.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-137
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
exceed-action
exceed-action
Use the exceed-action policy-map class police configuration command to set multiple actions for a
policy-map class for packets with a rate between the committed information rate (CIR) or peak
information rate (PIR) conform rate and the conform rate plus the exceed burst. Use the no form of this
command to cancel the action or to return to the default action.
exceed-action {drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]
[table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit]}
no exceed-action {drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]
[table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit]}
Syntax Description
Defaults
drop
Drop the packet.
set-cos-transmit
new-cos-value
Set a new class of service (CoS) value for the packet and send the packet.
This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the new CoS
value is 0 to 7.
set-dscp-transmit
new-dscp-value
Set a new Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value for the packet
and send the packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The
range for the new DCSP value is 0 to 63.
set-prec-transmit
new-precedence-value
Set a new IP precedence value for the packet and send the packet. This
specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the new IP
precedence value is 0 to 7.
set-qos-transmit
qos-group-value
Set a new quality of service (QoS) group value for the packet and send the
packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the
new QoS value is 0 to 99.
cos
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the CoS value of the incoming packet, and send the packet. This specifies
the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
dscp
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the DSCP value of the incoming packet, and send the packet. This
specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
precedence
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the IP precedence value of the incoming packet, and send the packet. This
specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
table table-map name
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the preceding from-type keyword.
Specify the table map to be used for the enhanced packet marking. The
to-type of the action is marked based on the from-type parameter of the action
using this table map.
transmit
(Optional) Send the packet unmodified.
The default action is to drop the packet.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-138
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
exceed-action
Command Modes
Policy-map class police configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You configure exceed actions for packets when the packet rate is between the configured conform rate
and the conform rate plus the exceed burst.
If the conform action is set to drop, the exceed and violate actions are automatically set to drop. If the
exceed action is set to drop, the violate action is automatically set to drop.
You can configure exceed-action to send the packet unmodified, mark using explicit values, and use all
combinations of enhanced packet marking. Enhanced packet marking provides the ability to modify a
QoS marking based on any incoming QoS marking and table maps. The switch also supports the ability
to mark multiple QoS parameters for the same class and to simultaneously configure conform-action,
exceed-action, and violate-action marking.
Access policy-map class police configuration mode by entering the police policy-map class command.
See the police command for more information.
You can use this command to set one or more exceed actions for a traffic class.
Examples
This example shows how configure multiple actions in a policy map that sets an information rate of
23000 bits per second (b/s) and a burst rate of 10000 bps:
Switch(config)# policy-map map1
Switch(config-pmap)# class class1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 23000 10000
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# conform-action transmit
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# exceed-action set-prec-transmit prec table
policed-prec-table-map-name
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified
class-map name.
conform-action
Defines the action to take on traffic that conforms to the CIR.
police
Defines a policer for classified traffic.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple
ports to specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
violate-action
Defines the action to take on traffic with a rate greater than the
conform rate plus the exceed burst.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-139
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
flowcontrol
flowcontrol
Use the flowcontrol interface configuration command to set the receive flow-control state for an
interface. When flow control send is operable and on for a device and it detects any congestion at its
end, it notifies the link partner or the remote device of the congestion by sending a pause frame. When
flow control receive is on for a device and it receives a pause frame, it stops sending any data packets.
This prevents any loss of data packets during the congestion period.
Use the receive off keywords to disable flow control.
flowcontrol receive {desired | off | on}
Note
Syntax Description
The Cisco ME switch can only receive pause frames.
receive
Set whether the interface can receive flow-control packets from a remote device.
desired
Allow an interface to operate with an attached device that is required to send
flow-control packets or with an attached device that is not required to but can send
flow-control packets.
off
Turn off the ability of an attached device to send flow-control packets to an interface.
on
Allow an interface to operate with an attached device that is required to send
flow-control packets or with an attached device that is not required to but can send
flow-control packets.
Defaults
The default is flowcontrol receive off.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The switch does not support sending flow-control pause frames. If the port is a user network interface
(UNI) or enhanced network interface (ENI), you must use the no shutdown interface configuration
command to enable it before using the flowcontrol command. UNIs and ENIs are disabled by default.
Network node interfaces (NNIs) are enabled by default.
Note that the on and desired keywords have the same result.
When you use the flowcontrol command to set a port to control traffic rates during congestion, you are
setting flow control on a port to one of these conditions:
•
receive on or desired: The port cannot send out pause frames, but can operate with an attached
device that is required to or is able to send pause frames; the port is able to receive pause frames.
•
receive off: Flow control does not operate in either direction. In case of congestion, no indication is
given to the link partner and no pause frames are sent or received by either device.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-140
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
flowcontrol
Table 2-2 shows the flow control results on local and remote ports for a combination of settings. The
table assumes that receive desired has the same results as using the receive on keywords.
Table 2-2
Flow Control Settings and Local and Remote Port Flow Control Resolution
Flow Control Settings
Flow Control Resolution
Local Device
Remote Device
Local Device
Remote Device
send off/receive on
send on/receive on
Receives only
Sends and receives
send on/receive off
Receives only
Sends only
send desired/receive on
Receives only
Sends and receives
send desired/receive off
Receives only
Sends only
send off/receive on
Receives only
Receives only
send off/receive off
Does not send or receive
Does not send or receive
send on/receive on
Does not send or receive
Does not send or receive
send on/receive off
Does not send or receive
Does not send or receive
send desired/receive on
Does not send or receive
Does not send or receive
send desired/receive off
Does not send or receive
Does not send or receive
send off/receive on
Does not send or receive
Does not send or receive
send off/receive off
Does not send or receive
Does not send or receive
send off/receive off
Examples
This example shows how to configure the local port to not support flow control by the remote port:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# flowcontrol receive off
You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces
Displays the interface settings on the switch, including input and output flow
control.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-141
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
hw-module module logging onboard
hw-module module logging onboard
Use the hw-module module logging onboard global configuration command to enable on-board failure
logging (OBFL). Use the no form of this command to disable this feature.
hw-module module [slot-number] logging onboard [message level level]
no hw-module module [slot-number] logging onboard [message level]
Syntax Description
slot-number
(Optional) The slot number is always 1 and is not relevant for the ME-3400E.
message level
level
(Optional) Specify the severity of the hardware-related messages that are stored in
the flash memory. The range is from 1 to 7 with 1 being the most severe.
Defaults
OBFL is enabled, and all messages appear.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
We recommend that you keep OBFL enabled and do not clear the data stored in the flash memory.
To ensure that the time stamps in the OBFL data logs are accurate, manually set the system clock, or
configure it by using Network Time Protocol (NTP).
If you do not enter the message level level parameter, all the hardware-related messages generated by
the switch are stored in the flash memory.
The optional slot number is always 1. Entering the hw-module module [slot-number] logging onboard
[message level level] command has the same result as entering the hw-module module logging
onboard [message level level] command.
Examples
This example shows how to enable OBFL on a switch stack and to specify that all the hardware-related
messages are stored in the flash memory:
Switch(config)# hw-module module logging onboard
This example shows how to enable OBFL on a switch and to specify that only severity 1
hardware-related messages are stored in the flash memory:
Switch(config)# hw-module module logging onboard message level 1
You can verify your settings by entering the show logging onboard privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-142
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
hw-module module logging onboard
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear logging onboard
Removes the OBFL data in the flash memory.
show logging onboard
Displays OBFL information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-143
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
interface port-channel
interface port-channel
Use the interface port-channel global configuration command to access or create the port-channel
logical interface. Use the no form of this command to remove the port-channel.
interface port-channel port-channel-number
no interface port-channel port-channel-number
Syntax Description
port-channel-number
Defaults
No port-channel logical interfaces are defined.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Port-channel number. The range is 1 to 48.
For Layer 2 EtherChannels, you do not have to create a port-channel interface first before assigning a
physical port to a channel group. Instead, you can use the channel-group interface configuration
command. It automatically creates the port-channel interface when the channel group gets its first
physical port. If you create the port-channel interface first, the channel-group-number can be the same
as the port-channel-number, or you can use a new number. If you use a new number, the channel-group
command dynamically creates a new port channel.
You create Layer 3 port channels by using the interface port-channel command followed by the no
switchport interface configuration command. You should manually configure the port-channel logical
interface before putting the interface into the channel group.
Only one port channel in a channel group is allowed.
Caution
When using a port-channel interface as a routed port, do not assign Layer 3 addresses on the physical
ports that are assigned to the channel group.
Caution
Do not assign bridge groups on the physical ports in a channel group used as a Layer 3 port-channel
interface because it creates loops. You must also disable spanning tree.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-144
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
interface port-channel
Follow these guidelines when you use the interface port-channel command:
•
If you want to use the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), you must configure it only on the physical
port and not on the port-channel interface.
Note
CDP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) and enhanced network interfaces
(ENIs).
•
Do not configure a port that is an active member of an EtherChannel as an IEEE 802.1x port. If IEEE
802.1x is enabled on a not-yet active port of an EtherChannel, the port does not join the
EtherChannel.
For a complete list of configuration guidelines, see the “Configuring EtherChannels” chapter in the
software configuration guide for this release.
Examples
This example shows how to create a port-channel interface with a port channel number of 5:
Switch(config)# interface port-channel 5
You can verify your setting by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC or show
etherchannel channel-group-number detail privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
channel-group
Assigns an Ethernet port to an EtherChannel group.
show etherchannel
Displays EtherChannel information for a channel.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this link to
the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_command
_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate to
the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-145
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
interface range
interface range
Use the interface range global configuration command to enter interface range configuration mode and
to execute a command on multiple ports at the same time. Use the no form of this command to remove
an interface range.
interface range {port-range | macro name}
no interface range {port-range | macro name}
Syntax Description
port-range
Port range. For a list of valid values for port-range, see the “Usage Guidelines”
section.
macro name
Specify the name of a macro.
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When you enter interface range configuration mode, all interface parameters you enter are attributed to
all interfaces within the range.
For VLANs, you can use the interface range command only on existing VLAN switch virtual interfaces
(SVIs). To display VLAN SVIs, enter the show running-config privileged EXEC command. VLANs not
displayed cannot be used in the interface range command. The commands entered under interface
range command are applied to all existing VLAN SVIs in the range.
All configuration changes made to an interface range are saved to NVRAM, but the interface range itself
is not saved to NVRAM.
You can enter the interface range in two ways:
•
Specifying up to five interface ranges
•
Specifying a previously defined interface-range macro
All interfaces in a range must be the same type; that is, all Fast Ethernet ports, all Gigabit Ethernet ports,
all EtherChannel ports, or all VLANs. However, you can define up to five interface ranges with a single
command, with each range separated by a comma.
Valid values for port-range type and interface:
•
vlan vlan-ID - vlan-ID, where VLAN ID is from 1 to 4094
•
fastethernet module/{first port} - {last port}, where module is always 0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-146
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
interface range
•
gigabitethernet module/{first port} - {last port}, where module is always 0
For physical interfaces:
– module is always 0
– the range is type 0/number - number (for example, gigabitethernet0/1 - 2)
•
Note
port-channel port-channel-number - port-channel-number, where port-channel-number is from 1
to 48
When you use the interface range command with port channels, the first and last port channel number
in the range must be active port channels.
When you define a range, you must enter a space between the first entry and the hyphen (-):
interface range gigabitethernet0/1 -2
When you define multiple ranges, you must still enter a space after the first entry and before the
comma (,):
interface range fastethernet0/1 - 2, gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
You cannot specify both a macro and an interface range in the same command.
A single interface can also be specified in port-range (this would make the command similar to the
interface interface-id global configuration command).
Note
Examples
For more information about configuring interface ranges, see the software configuration guide for this
release.
This example shows how to use the interface range command to enter interface range configuration
mode to apply commands to two ports:
Switch(config)# interface range gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
Switch(config-if-range)#
This example shows how to use a port-range macro macro1 for the same function. The advantage is that
you can reuse macro1 until you delete it.
Switch(config)# define interface-range macro1 gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
Switch(config)# interface range macro macro1
Switch(config-if-range)#
Related Commands
Command
Description
define interface-range
Creates an interface range macro.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this link
to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_command
_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate to
the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-147
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
interface vlan
interface vlan
Use the interface vlan global configuration command to create or access a switch virtual interface (SVI)
and to enter interface configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete an SVI.
interface vlan vlan-id
no interface vlan vlan-id
Syntax Description
vlan-id
Defaults
The default VLAN interface is VLAN 1.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Note
VLAN number. The range is 1 to 4094.
SVIs are created the first time that you enter the interface vlan vlan-id command for a particular vlan.
The vlan-id corresponds to the VLAN-tag associated with data frames on an IEEE 802.1Q encapsulated
trunk or the VLAN ID configured for an access port.
When you create an SVI, it does not become active until it is associated with a physical port.
If you delete an SVI by entering the no interface vlan vlan-id command, the deleted interface is no
longer visible in the output from the show interfaces privileged EXEC command.
Note
You cannot delete the VLAN 1 interface.
You can reinstate a deleted SVI by entering the interface vlan vlan-id command for the deleted
interface. The interface comes back up, but much of the previous configuration will be gone.
The interrelationship between the number of SVIs configured on a switch and the number of other
features being configured might have an impact on CPU utilization due to hardware limitations. You can
use the sdm prefer global configuration command to reallocate system hardware resources based on
templates and feature tables. For more information, see the sdm prefer command.
Examples
This example shows how to create VLAN ID 23 and enter interface configuration mode:
Switch(config)# interface vlan 23
Switch(config-if)#
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-148
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
interface vlan
You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces and show interfaces vlan vlan-id privileged
EXEC commands.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces vlan vlan-id
Displays the administrative and operational status of all
interfaces or the specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-149
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip access-group
ip access-group
Use the ip access-group interface configuration command to control access to a Layer 2 or Layer 3
interface. Use the no form of this command to remove all access groups or the specified access group
from the interface. If the switch is running the metro IP access image, you can also control access to
Layer 3 interfaces.
ip access-group {access-list-number | name} {in | out}
no ip access-group [access-list-number | name] {in | out}
Syntax Description
access-list-number
The number of the IP access control list (ACL). The range is 1 to 199 or
1300 to 2699.
name
The name of an IP ACL, specified in the ip access-list global configuration
command.
in
Specify filtering on inbound packets.
out
Specify filtering on outbound packets. This keyword is valid only on
Layer 3 interfaces.
Defaults
No access list is applied to the interface.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can apply named or numbered standard or extended IP access lists to an interface. To define an
access list by name, use the ip access-list global configuration command. To define a numbered access
list, use the access list global configuration command. You can used numbered standard access lists
ranging from 1 to 99 and 1300 to 1999 or extended access lists ranging from 100 to 199 and 2000 to
2699.
The switch must be running the metro IP access image for Layer 3 support.
You can use this command to apply an access list to a Layer 2 interface (port ACL) or Layer 3 interface.
However, note these limitations for port ACLs:
•
You can only apply ACLs in the inbound direction; the out keyword is not supported for Layer 2
interfaces.
•
You can only apply one IP ACL and one MAC ACL per interface.
•
Port ACLs do not support logging; if the log keyword is specified in the IP ACL, it is ignored.
•
An IP ACL applied to a Layer 2 interface only filters IP packets. To filter non-IP packets, use the
mac access-group interface configuration command with MAC extended ACLs.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-150
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip access-group
You can use router ACLs, input port ACLs, and VLAN maps on the same switch. However, a port ACL
always takes precedence. When both an input port ACL and a VLAN map are applied, incoming packets
received on ports with the port ACL applied are filtered by the port ACL. Other packets are filtered by
the VLAN map.
•
When an input port ACL is applied to an interface and a VLAN map is applied to a VLAN that the
interface is a member of, incoming packets received on ports with the ACL applied are filtered by
the port ACL. Other packets are filtered by the VLAN map.
•
When an input router ACL and input port ACLs exist in an switch virtual interface (SVI), incoming
packets received on ports to which a port ACL is applied are filtered by the port ACL. Incoming
routed IP packets received on other ports are filtered by the router ACL. Other packets are not
filtered.
•
When an output router ACL and input port ACLs exist in an SVI, incoming packets received on the
ports to which a port ACL is applied are filtered by the port ACL. Outgoing routed IP packets are
filtered by the router ACL. Other packets are not filtered.
•
When a VLAN map, input router ACLs, and input port ACLs exist in an SVI, incoming packets
received on the ports to which a port ACL is applied are only filtered by the port ACL. Incoming
routed IP packets received on other ports are filtered by both the VLAN map and the router ACL.
Other packets are filtered only by the VLAN map.
•
When a VLAN map, output router ACLs, and input port ACLs exist in an SVI, incoming packets
received on the ports to which a port ACL is applied are only filtered by the port ACL. Outgoing
routed IP packets are filtered by both the VLAN map and the router ACL. Other packets are filtered
only by the VLAN map.
You can apply IP ACLs to both outbound or inbound Layer 3 interfaces.
A Layer 3 interface can have one IP ACL applied in each direction.
You can configure only one VLAN map and one router ACL in each direction (input/output) on a VLAN
interface.
For standard inbound access lists, after the switch receives a packet, it checks the source address of the
packet against the access list. IP extended access lists can optionally check other fields in the packet,
such as the destination IP address, protocol type, or port numbers. If the access list permits the packet,
the switch continues to process the packet. If the access list denies the packet, the switch discards the
packet. If the access list has been applied to a Layer 3 interface, discarding a packet (by default) causes
the generation of an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Host Unreachable message. ICMP Host
Unreachable messages are not generated for packets discarded on a Layer 2 interface.
For standard outbound access lists, after receiving a packet and sending it to a controlled interface, the
switch checks the packet against the access list. If the access list permits the packet, the switch sends the
packet. If the access list denies the packet, the switch discards the packet and, by default, generates an
ICMP Host Unreachable message.
If the specified access list does not exist, all packets are passed.
Examples
This example shows how to apply IP access list 101 to inbound packets on a port:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group 101 in
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip interface, show access-lists, or show ip
access-lists privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-151
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip access-group
Related Commands
Command
Description
access list
Configures a numbered ACL.
ip access-list
Configures a named ACL.
show access-lists
Displays ACLs configured on the switch.
show ip access-lists
Displays IP ACLs configured on the switch.
show ip interface
Displays information about interface status and configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-152
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip address
ip address
Use the ip address interface configuration command to set an IP address for the Layer 2 switch or to set
an IP address for each switch virtual interface (SVI) or routed port on the Layer 3 switch. Use the no
form of this command to remove an IP address or to disable IP processing.
ip address ip-address subnet-mask [secondary]
no ip address [ip-address subnet-mask] [secondary]
Note
Syntax Description
You can configure routed ports and SVIs only when the switch is running the metro IP access image.
ip-address
IP address.
subnet-mask
Mask for the associated IP subnet.
secondary
(Optional) Specifies that the configured address is a secondary IP address. If
this keyword is omitted, the configured address is the primary IP address.
Defaults
No IP address is defined.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If you remove the switch IP address through a Telnet session, your connection to the switch will be lost.
Hosts can find subnet masks using the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Mask Request
message. Routers respond to this request with an ICMP Mask Reply message.
You can disable IP processing on a particular interface by removing its IP address with the no ip address
command. If the switch detects another host using one of its IP addresses, it will send an error message
to the console.
You can use the optional keyword secondary to specify an unlimited number of secondary addresses.
Secondary addresses are treated like primary addresses, except the system never generates datagrams
other than routing updates with secondary source addresses. IP broadcasts and ARP requests are handled
properly, as are interface routes in the IP routing table.
Note
If any router on a network segment uses a secondary address, all other devices on that same segment
must also use a secondary address from the same network or subnet. Inconsistent use of secondary
addresses on a network segment can very quickly cause routing loops.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-153
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip address
When you are routing Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), ensure that all secondary addresses of an
interface fall into the same OSPF area as the primary addresses.
If your switch receives its IP address from a Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) or a DHCP server and you
remove the switch IP address by using the no ip address command, IP processing is disabled, and the
BOOTP or the DHCP server cannot reassign the address.
A Layer 3 switch can have an IP address assigned to each routed port and SVI. The number of routed
ports and SVIs that you can configure is not limited by software; however, the interrelationship between
this number and the number of other features being configured might have an impact on CPU utilization
due to hardware limitations. You can use the sdm prefer global configuration command to reallocate
system hardware resources based on templates and feature tables. For more information, see the sdm
prefer command.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the IP address for the Layer 2 switch on a subnetted network:
Switch(config)# interface vlan 1
Switch(config-if)# ip address 172.20.128.2 255.255.255.0
This example shows how to configure the IP address for a Layer 3 port on the switch:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip address 172.20.128.2 255.255.255.0
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this
link to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_comma
nd_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate
to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-154
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection filter vlan
ip arp inspection filter vlan
Use the ip arp inspection filter vlan global configuration command to permit or deny Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) requests and responses from a host configured with a static IP address when
dynamic ARP inspection is enabled. Use the no form of this command to return to the default settings.
ip arp inspection filter arp-acl-name vlan vlan-range [static]
no ip arp inspection filter arp-acl-name vlan vlan-range [static]
Syntax Description
arp-acl-name
ARP access control list (ACL) name.
vlan-range
VLAN number or range.
You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of
VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma.
The range is 1 to 4094.
static
(Optional) Specify static to treat implicit denies in the ARP ACL as explicit
denies and to drop packets that do not match any previous clauses in the
ACL. DHCP bindings are not used.
If you do not specify this keyword, it means that there is no explicit deny in
the ACL that denies the packet, and DHCP bindings determine whether a
packet is permitted or denied if the packet does not match any clauses in the
ACL.
Defaults
No defined ARP ACLs are applied to any VLAN.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When an ARP ACL is applied to a VLAN for dynamic ARP inspection, only the ARP packets with
IP-to-MAC address bindings are compared against the ACL. If the ACL permits a packet, the switch
forwards it. All other packet types are bridged in the ingress VLAN without validation.
If the switch denies a packet because of an explicit deny statement in the ACL, the packet is dropped. If
the switch denies a packet because of an implicit deny statement, the packet is then compared against
the list of DHCP bindings (unless the ACL is static, which means that packets are not compared against
the bindings).
Use the arp access-list acl-name global configuration command to define the ARP ACL or to add
clauses to the end of a predefined list.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-155
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection filter vlan
Examples
This example shows how to apply the ARP ACL static-hosts to VLAN 1 for dynamic ARP inspection:
Switch(config)# ip arp inspection filter static-hosts vlan 1
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip arp inspection vlan 1 privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP ACL.
deny (ARP access-list
configuration)
Denies an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.
permit (ARP
access-list
configuration)
Permits an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.
show arp access-list
Displays detailed information about ARP access lists.
show ip arp inspection Displays the configuration and the operating state of dynamic ARP
vlan vlan-range
inspection for the specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-156
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection limit
ip arp inspection limit
Use the ip arp inspection limit interface configuration command to limit the rate of incoming Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) requests and responses on an interface. It prevents dynamic ARP inspection
from using all of the switch resources if a denial-of-service attack occurs. Use the no form of this
command to return to the default settings.
ip arp inspection limit {rate pps [burst interval seconds] | none}
no ip arp inspection limit
Syntax Description
Defaults
rate pps
Specify an upper limit for the number of incoming packets processed per
second. The range is 0 to 2048 packets per second (pps).
burst interval seconds
(Optional) Specify the consecutive interval in seconds, over which the
interface is monitored for a high rate of ARP packets.The range is 1 to 15
seconds.
none
Specify no upper limit for the rate of incoming ARP packets that can be
processed.
The rate is 15 pps on untrusted interfaces, assuming that the network is a switched network with a host
connecting to as many as 15 new hosts per second.
The rate is unlimited on all trusted interfaces.
The burst interval is 1 second.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The rate applies to both trusted and untrusted interfaces. Configure appropriate rates on trunks to process
packets across multiple dynamic ARP inspection-enabled VLANs, or use the none keyword to make the
rate unlimited.
After a switch receives more than the configured rate of packets every second consecutively over a
number of burst seconds, the interface is placed into an error-disabled state.
Unless you explicitly configure a rate limit on an interface, changing the trust state of the interface also
changes its rate limit to the default value for that trust state. After you configure the rate limit, the
interface retains the rate limit even when its trust state is changed. If you enter the no ip arp inspection
limit interface configuration command, the interface reverts to its default rate limit.
You should configure trunk ports with higher rates to reflect their aggregation. When the rate of
incoming packets exceeds the user-configured rate, the switch places the interface into an error-disabled
state. The error-disable recovery feature automatically removes the port from the error-disabled state
according to the recovery setting.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-157
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection limit
The rate of incoming ARP packets on EtherChannel ports equals the sum of the incoming rate of ARP
packets from all the channel members. Configure the rate limit for EtherChannel ports only after
examining the rate of incoming ARP packets on all the channel members.
Examples
This example shows how to limit the rate of incoming ARP requests on a port to 25 pps and to set the
interface monitoring interval to 5 consecutive seconds:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
Switch(config-if)# ip arp inspection limit rate 25 burst interval 5
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip arp inspection interfaces interface-id privileged
EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip arp inspection Displays the trust state and the rate limit of ARP packets for the specified
interfaces
interface or all interfaces.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-158
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection log-buffer
ip arp inspection log-buffer
Use the ip arp inspection log-buffer global configuration command to configure the dynamic Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection logging buffer. Use the no form of this command to return to the
default settings.
ip arp inspection log-buffer {entries number | logs number interval seconds}
no ip arp inspection log-buffer {entries | logs}
Syntax Description
entries number
Number of entries to be logged in the buffer. The range is 0 to 1024.
logs number
interval seconds
Number of entries needed in the specified interval to generate system messages.
For logs number, the range is 0 to 1024. A 0 value means that the entry is placed
in the log buffer, but a system message is not generated.
For interval seconds, the range is 0 to 86400 seconds (1 day). A 0 value means
that a system message is immediately generated (and the log buffer is always
empty).
Defaults
When dynamic ARP inspection is enabled, denied or dropped ARP packets are logged.
The number of log entries is 32.
The number of system messages is limited to 5 per second.
The logging-rate interval is 1 second.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
A value of 0 is not allowed for both the logs and the interval keywords.
The logs and interval settings interact. If the logs number X is greater than interval seconds Y, X
divided by Y (X/Y) system messages are sent every second. Otherwise, one system message is sent every
Y divided by X (Y/X) seconds. For example, if the logs number is 20 and the interval seconds is 4, the
switch generates system messages for five entries every second while there are entries in the log buffer.
A log buffer entry can represent more than one packet. For example, if an interface receives many
packets on the same VLAN with the same ARP parameters, the switch combines the packets as one entry
in the log buffer and generates a system message as a single entry.
If the log buffer overflows, it means that a log event does not fit into the log buffer, and the output display
for the show ip arp inspection log privileged EXEC command is affected. A -- in the output display
appears in place of all data except the packet count and the time. No other statistics are provided for the
entry. If you see this entry in the display, increase the number of entries in the log buffer, or increase the
logging rate.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-159
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection log-buffer
Examples
This example shows how to configure the logging buffer to hold up to 45 entries:
Switch(config)# ip arp inspection log-buffer entries 45
This example shows how to configure the logging rate to 20 log entries per 4 seconds. With this
configuration, the switch generates system messages for five entries every second while there are entries
in the log buffer.
Switch(config)# ip arp inspection log-buffer logs 20 interval 4
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip arp inspection log privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP access control list (ACL).
clear ip arp inspection log
Clears the dynamic ARP inspection log buffer.
ip arp inspection vlan logging
Controls the type of packets that are logged per VLAN.
show ip arp inspection log
Displays the configuration and contents of the dynamic ARP
inspection log buffer.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-160
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection trust
ip arp inspection trust
Use the ip arp inspection trust interface configuration command to configure an interface trust state
that determines which incoming Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packets are inspected. Use the no
form of this command to return to the default setting.
ip arp inspection trust
no ip arp inspection trust
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
The interface is untrusted.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The switch does not check ARP packets that it receives on the trusted interface; it simply forwards the
packets.
For untrusted interfaces, the switch intercepts all ARP requests and responses. It verifies that the
intercepted packets have valid IP-to-MAC address bindings before updating the local cache and before
forwarding the packet to the appropriate destination. The switch drops invalid packets and logs them in
the log buffer according to the logging configuration specified with the ip arp inspection vlan logging
global configuration command.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a port to be trusted:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ip arp inspection trust
You can verify your setting by entering the show ip arp inspection interfaces interface-id privileged
EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip arp inspection log-buffer
Configures the dynamic ARP inspection logging buffer.
show ip arp inspection
interfaces
Displays the trust state and the rate limit of ARP packets for the
specified interface or all interfaces.
show ip arp inspection log
Displays the configuration and contents of the dynamic ARP
inspection log buffer.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-161
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection validate
ip arp inspection validate
Use the ip arp inspection validate global configuration command to perform specific checks for
dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection. Use the no form of this command to return to
the default settings.
ip arp inspection validate {[src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip [allow zeros]]}
no ip arp inspection validate [src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip [allow zeros]]
Syntax Description
src-mac
Compare the source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender MAC
address in the ARP body. This check is performed on both ARP requests and
responses.
When enabled, packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are
dropped.
dst-mac
Compare the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the target MAC
address in ARP body. This check is performed for ARP responses.
When enabled, packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are
dropped.
ip
Compare the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP addresses. Addresses include
0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, and all IP multicast addresses.
Sender IP addresses are compared in all ARP requests and responses. Target IP
addresses are checked only in ARP responses.
allow-zeros
Modifies the IP validation test so that ARPs with a sender address of 0.0.0.0 (ARP
probes) are not denied.
Defaults
No checks are performed.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must specify at least one of the keywords. Each command overrides the configuration of the
previous command; that is, if a command enables src-mac and dst-mac validations, and a second
command enables IP validation only, the src-mac and dst-mac validations are disabled as a result of the
second command.
The allow-zeros keyword interacts with ARP access control lists (ACLs) in this way:
•
If you configure an ARP ACL to deny ARP probes, they are dropped even if the allow-zero keyword
is specified.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-162
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection validate
•
If you configure an ARP ACL that specifically permits ARP probes and configure the ip arp
inspection validate ip command, ARP probes are dropped unless you enter the allow-zeros
keyword.
The no form of the command disables only the specified checks. If none of the options are enabled, all
checks are disabled.
Examples
This example show how to enable source MAC validation:
Switch(config)# ip arp inspection validate src-mac
You can verify your setting by entering the show ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip arp inspection Displays the configuration and the operating state of dynamic ARP
vlan vlan-range
inspection for the specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-163
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection vlan
ip arp inspection vlan
Use the ip arp inspection vlan global configuration command to enable dynamic Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) inspection on a per-VLAN basis. Use the no form of this command to return to the
default setting.
ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range
no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range
Syntax Description
vlan-range
VLAN number or range.
You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of
VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma.
The range is 1 to 4094.
Defaults
ARP inspection is disabled on all VLANs.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must specify the VLANs on which to enable dynamic ARP inspection.
Dynamic ARP inspection is supported on access ports, trunk ports, EtherChannel ports, or private VLAN
ports.
Examples
This example shows how to enable dynamic ARP inspection on VLAN 1:
Switch(config)# ip arp inspection vlan 1
You can verify your setting by entering the show ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP access control list (ACL).
show ip arp inspection Displays the configuration and the operating state of dynamic ARP
vlan vlan-range
inspection for the specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-164
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection vlan logging
ip arp inspection vlan logging
Use the ip arp inspection vlan logging global configuration command to control the type of packets that
are logged per VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable this logging control.
ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range logging {acl-match {matchlog | none} | dhcp-bindings {all |
none | permit} | arp-probe}
no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range logging {acl-match | dhcp-bindings | arp-probe}
Syntax Description
vlan-range
Specify the VLANs configured for logging.
You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of
VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma.
The range is 1 to 4094.
acl-match {matchlog | Specify that the logging of packets is based on access control list (ACL)
none}
matches.
The keywords have these meanings:
dhcp-bindings
{permit | all | none}
•
matchlog—Log packets based on the logging configuration specified in
the access control entries (ACE). If you specify the matchlog keyword in
this command and the log keyword in the permit or deny ARP access-list
configuration command, Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packets
permitted or denied by the ACL are logged.
•
none—Do not log packets that match ACLs.
Specify the logging of packets is based on Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) binding matches.
The keywords have these meanings:
arp-probe
•
all—Log all packets that match DHCP bindings.
•
none—Do not log packets that match DHCP bindings.
•
permit—Log DHCP-binding permitted packets.
Specify logging of packets permitted specifically because they are ARP
probes.
Defaults
All denied or all dropped packets are logged. ARP probe packets are not logged.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-165
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip arp inspection vlan logging
Usage Guidelines
The term logged means that the entry is placed into the log buffer and that a system message is generated.
The acl-match and dhcp-bindings keywords merge with each other; that is, when you configure an ACL
match, the DHCP bindings configuration is not disabled. Use the no form of the command to reset the
logging criteria to their defaults. If neither option is specified, all types of logging are reset to log when
ARP packets are denied. These are the options:
•
acl-match—Logging on ACL matches is reset to log on deny.
•
dhcp-bindings—Logging on DHCP binding matches is reset to log on deny.
If neither the acl-match or the dhcp-bindings keywords are specified, all denied packets are logged.
The implicit deny at the end of an ACL does not include the log keyword. This means that when you use
the static keyword in the ip arp inspection filter vlan global configuration command, the ACL
overrides the DHCP bindings. Some denied packets might not be logged unless you explicitly specify
the deny ip any mac any log ACE at the end of the ARP ACL.
Examples
This example shows how to configure ARP inspection on VLAN 1 to log packets that match the permit
commands in the ACL:
Switch(config)# arp access-list test1
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# permit request ip any mac any log
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# permit response ip any any mac any any log
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# exit
Switch(config)# ip arp inspection vlan 1 logging acl-match matchlog
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP ACL.
clear ip arp inspection log
Clears the dynamic ARP inspection log buffer.
ip arp inspection log-buffer
Configures the dynamic ARP inspection logging buffer.
show ip arp inspection log
Displays the configuration and contents of the dynamic ARP
inspection log buffer.
show ip arp inspection vlan
vlan-range
Displays the configuration and the operating state of dynamic ARP
inspection for the specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-166
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip device tracking maximum
ip device tracking maximum
Use the ip device tracking maximum command to enable IP port security binding tracking on a
Layer 2 port. Use the no form of this command to disable IP port security on untrusted Layer 2
interfaces.
ip device tracking maximum {number}
no ip device tracking maximum {number}
Syntax Description
number
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Interface configuration mode
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Examples
Specify the number of bindings created in the IP device tracking table for a port. valid
values are from 0 to 2048.
This example shows how to enable IP port security with IP-MAC filters on a Layer 2 access port:
Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip device tracking
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/3
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access
Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1
Switch(config-if)# ip device tracking maximum 5
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 5
Switch(config-if)# ip verify source tracking port-security
Switch(config-if)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip verify source privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip verify source
Enables IP source guard on untrusted Layer 2 interfaces.
show ip verify source
Displays the IP source guard configuration and filters on a
particular interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-167
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping
ip dhcp snooping
Use the ip dhcp snooping global configuration command to globally enable DHCP snooping. Use the
no form of this command to return to the default setting.
ip dhcp snooping
no ip dhcp snooping
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
DHCP snooping is disabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
For any DHCP snooping configuration to take effect, you must globally enable DHCP snooping.
DHCP snooping is not active until you enable snooping on a VLAN by using the ip dhcp snooping vlan
vlan-id global configuration command.
Examples
This example shows how to enable DHCP snooping:
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping vlan
Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-168
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping binding
ip dhcp snooping binding
Use the ip dhcp snooping binding privileged EXEC command to configure the DHCP snooping binding
database and to add binding entries to the database. Use the no form of this command to delete entries
from the binding database.
ip dhcp snooping binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface interface-id expiry
seconds
no ip dhcp snooping binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface interface-id
Syntax Description
mac-address
Specify a MAC address.
vlan vlan-id
Specify a VLAN number. The range is from 1 to 4904.
ip-address
Specify an IP address.
interface interface-id
Specify an interface on which to add or delete a binding entry.
expiry seconds
Specify the interval (in seconds) after which the binding entry is no longer
valid. The range is from 1 to 4294967295.
Defaults
No default database is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command when you are testing or debugging the switch.
In the DHCP snooping binding database, each database entry, also referred to a binding, has an IP
address, an associated MAC address, the lease time (in hexadecimal format), the interface to which the
binding applies, and the VLAN to which the interface belongs. The database can have up to 8192
bindings.
Use the show ip dhcp snooping binding privileged EXEC command to display only the dynamically
configured bindings. Use the show ip source binding privileged EXEC command to display the
dynamically and statically configured bindings.
Examples
This example shows how to generate a DHCP binding configuration with an expiration time of
1000 seconds on a port in VLAN 1:
Switch# ip dhcp snooping binding 0001.1234.1234 vlan 1 172.20.50.5 interface
gigabitethernet0/1 expiry 1000
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping binding or the show ip dhcp source
binding privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-169
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping binding
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping
Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the dynamically configured bindings in the DHCP
snooping binding database and the configuration information.
show ip source binding
Displays the dynamically and statically configured bindings in
the DHCP snooping binding database.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-170
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping database
ip dhcp snooping database
Use the ip dhcp snooping database global configuration command to configure the DHCP snooping
binding database agent. Use the no form of this command to disable the agent, to reset the timeout value,
or to reset the write-delay value.
ip dhcp snooping database {{flash:/filename | ftp://user:password@host/filename |
http://[[username:password]@]{hostname | host-ip}[/directory]/image-name.tar |
rcp://user@host/filename | tftp://host/filename} | timeout seconds | write-delay seconds}
no ip dhcp snooping database [timeout | write-delay]
Syntax Description
flash:/filename
Specify that the database agent or the binding file is in the flash
memory.
ftp://user:password@host/filename
Specify that the database agent or the binding file is on an FTP
server.
http://[[username:password]@]
{hostname | host-ip}[/directory]
/image-name.tar
Specify that the database agent or the binding file is on an FTP
server.
rcp://user@host/filename
Specify that the database agent or the binding file is on a
Remote Control Protocol (RCP) server.
tftp://host/filename
Specify that the database agent or the binding file is on a TFTP
server.
timeout seconds
Specify (in seconds) when to stop the database transfer process
after the DHCP snooping binding database changes.
The default is 300 seconds. The range is from 0 to 86400. Use
0 to define an infinite duration.
write-delay seconds
Defaults
Specify (in seconds) the duration for which the transfer should
be delayed after the binding database changes. The default is
300 seconds. The range is from 15 to 86400.
The URL for the database agent or binding file is not defined.
The timeout value is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
The write-delay value is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-171
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping database
Usage Guidelines
The DHCP snooping binding database can have up to 8192 bindings.
To ensure that the lease time in the database is accurate, we recommend that Network Time Protocol
(NTP) is enabled and configured for these features:
•
NTP authentication
•
NTP peer and server associations
•
NTP broadcast service
•
NTP access restrictions
•
NTP packet source IP address
If NTP is configured, the switch writes binding changes to the binding file only when the switch system
clock is synchronized with NTP.
Because both NVRAM and the flash memory have limited storage capacity, we recommend that you
store a binding file on a TFTP server. You must create an empty file at the configured URL on
network-based URLs (such as TFTP and FTP) before the switch can write bindings to the binding file at
that URL for the first time.
Use the no ip dhcp snooping database command to disable the agent.
Use the no ip dhcp snooping database timeout command to reset the timeout value.
Use the no ip dhcp snooping database write-delay command to reset the write-delay value.
Examples
This example shows how to store a binding file at an IP address of 10.1.1.1 that is in a directory called
directory. A file named file must be present on the TFTP server.
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping database tftp://10.1.1.1/directory/file
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping database privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping
Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
ip dhcp snooping binding
Configures the DHCP snooping binding database.
show ip dhcp snooping database
Displays the status of DHCP snooping database agent.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-172
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping information option
ip dhcp snooping information option
Use the ip dhcp snooping information option global configuration command to enable DHCP
option-82 data insertion. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP option-82 data insertion.
ip dhcp snooping information option
no ip dhcp snooping information option
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
DHCP option-82 data insertion is enabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must globally enable DHCP snooping by using the ip dhcp snooping global configuration
command for any DHCP snooping configuration to take effect.
When the option-82 feature is enabled and a switch receives a DHCP request from a host, it adds the
option-82 information in the packet. The option-82 information contains the switch MAC address (the
remote ID suboption) and the port identifier, vlan-mod-port, from which the packet is received (circuit
ID suboption). The switch forwards the DHCP request that includes the option-82 field to the DHCP
server.
When the DHCP server receives the packet, it can use the remote ID, the circuit ID, or both to assign IP
addresses and implement policies, such as restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to
a single remote ID or a circuit ID. Then the DHCP server echoes the option-82 field in the DHCP reply.
The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the switch if the request was relayed to the server by the switch.
When the client and server are on the same subnet, the server broadcasts the reply. The switch inspects
the remote ID and possibly the circuit ID fields to verify that it originally inserted the option-82 data.
The switch removes the option-82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the
DHCP host that sent the DHCP request.
Examples
This example shows how to enable DHCP option-82 data insertion:
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-173
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping information option
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-174
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted
ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted
Use the ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted global configuration command on an
aggregation switch to configure it to accept DHCP packets with option-82 information that are received
on untrusted ports that might be connected to an edge switch. Use the no form of this command to
configure the switch to drop these packets from the edge switch.
ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted
no ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
The switch drops DHCP packets with option-82 information that are received on untrusted ports that
might be connected to an edge switch.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You might want an edge switch to which a host is connected to insert DHCP option-82 information at
the edge of your network. You might also want to enable DHCP security features, such as DHCP
snooping, IP source guard, or dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection, on an
aggregation switch. However, if DHCP snooping is enabled on the aggregation switch, the switch drops
packets with option-82 information that are received on an untrusted port and does not learn DHCP
snooping bindings for connected devices on a trusted interface.
If the edge switch to which a host is connected inserts option-82 information and you want to use DHCP
snooping on an aggregation switch, enter the ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted
command on the aggregation switch. The aggregation switch can learn the bindings for a host even
though the aggregation switch receives DHCP snooping packets on an untrusted port. You can also
enable DHCP security features on the aggregation switch. The port on the edge switch to which the
aggregation switch is connected must be configured as a trusted port.
Note
Examples
Do not enter the ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted command on an aggregation
switch to which an untrusted device is connected. If you enter this command, an untrusted device might
spoof the option-82 information.
This example shows how to configure an access switch to not check the option-82 information in
untrusted packets from an edge switch and to accept the packets:
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-175
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-176
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id
ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id
Use the ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id global configuration command to
configure the option-82 remote-ID suboption. Use the no form of this command to configure the default
remote-ID suboption.
ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id [string ASCII-string | hostname]
no ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id
Syntax Description
string ASCII-string
Specify a remote ID, using from 1 to 63 ASCII characters (no spaces).
hostname
Specify the switch hostname as the remote ID.
Defaults
The switch MAC address is the remote ID.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must globally enable DHCP snooping by using the ip dhcp snooping global configuration
command for any DHCP snooping configuration to take effect.
When the option-82 feature is enabled, the default remote-ID suboption is the switch MAC address. This
command allows you to configure either the switch hostname or a string of up to 63 ASCII characters
(but no spaces) to be the remote ID.
Note
Examples
If the hostname exceeds 63 characters, it is truncated to 63 characters in the remote-ID configuration.
This example shows how to configure the option-82 remote-ID suboption:
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id hostname
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping user EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping vlan information Configures the option-82 circuit-ID suboption.
option format-type circuit-id string
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-177
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping limit rate
ip dhcp snooping limit rate
Use the ip dhcp snooping limit rate interface configuration command to configure the number of DHCP
messages an interface can receive per second. Use the no form of this command to return to the default
setting.
ip dhcp snooping limit rate rate
no ip dhcp snooping limit rate
Syntax Description
rate
Defaults
DHCP snooping rate limiting is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Number of DHCP messages an interface can receive per second. The range is 1 to
2048.
Normally, the rate limit applies to untrusted interfaces. If you want to configure rate limiting for trusted
interfaces, keep in mind that trusted interfaces might aggregate DHCP traffic on multiple VLANs (some
of which might not be snooped) in the switch, and you will need to adjust the interface rate limits to a
higher value.
If the rate limit is exceeded, the interface is error-disabled. If you enabled error recovery by entering the
errdisable recovery dhcp-rate-limit global configuration command, the interface retries the operation
again when all the causes have timed out. If the error-recovery mechanism is not enabled, the interface
stays in the error-disabled state until you enter the shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration
commands.
Examples
This example shows how to set a message rate limit of 150 messages per second on an interface:
Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping limit rate 150
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
errdisable recovery
Configures the recover mechanism.
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-178
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping trust
ip dhcp snooping trust
Use the ip dhcp snooping trust interface configuration command to configure a port as trusted for
DHCP snooping purposes. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
ip dhcp snooping trust
no ip dhcp snooping trust
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
DHCP snooping trust is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Configure as trusted ports those that are connected to a DHCP server or to other switches or routers.
Configure as untrusted ports those that are connected to DHCP clients.
Examples
This example shows how to enable DHCP snooping trust on a port:
Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping trust
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-179
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
Use the ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address global configuration command to configure the switch
to verify on an untrusted port that the source MAC address in a DHCP packet matches the client
hardware address. Use the no form of this command to configure the switch to not verify the MAC
addresses.
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
no ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
The switch verifies the source MAC address in a DHCP packet that is received on untrusted ports
matches the client hardware address in the packet.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
In a service-provider network, when a switch receives a packet from a DHCP client on an untrusted port,
it automatically verifies that the source MAC address and the DHCP client hardware address match. If
the addresses match, the switch forwards the packet. If the addresses do not match, the switch drops the
packet.
Examples
This example shows how to disable the MAC address verification:
Switch(config)# no ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-180
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping vlan
ip dhcp snooping vlan
Use the ip dhcp snooping vlan global configuration command to enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range
no ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-range
Specify a VLAN ID or a range of VLANs on which to enable DHCP snooping. The
range is 1 to 4094.
You can enter a single VLAN ID identified by VLAN ID number, a series of VLAN
IDs separated by commas, a range of VLAN IDs separated by hyphens, or a range
of VLAN IDs separated by entering the starting and ending VLAN IDs separated
by a space.
Defaults
DHCP snooping is disabled on all VLANs.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must first globally enable DHCP snooping before enabling DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
Examples
This example shows how to enable DHCP snooping on VLAN 10:
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 10
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-181
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string
ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id
string
Use the ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string interface
configuration command to configure the option-82 circuit-ID suboption. Use the no form of this
command to configure the default circuit-ID suboption.
ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan information option format-type circuit-id [override] string
ASCII-string
no ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan information option format-type circuit-id [override] string
Syntax Description
vlan vlan
Specify the VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094.
override
(Optional) Specify an override string, using from 3 to 63 ASCII
characters (no spaces).
string ASCII-string
Specify a circuit ID, using from 3 to 63 ASCII characters (no
spaces).
Defaults
The switch VLAN and the port identifier, in the format vlan-mod-port, is the default circuit ID.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(52)SE
The override keyword was added.
Usage Guidelines
You must globally enable DHCP snooping by using the ip dhcp snooping global configuration
command for any DHCP snooping configuration to take effect.
When the option-82 feature is enabled, the default circuit-ID suboption is the switch VLAN and the port
identifier, in the format vlan-mod-port. This command allows you to configure a string of ASCII
characters to be the circuit ID. When you want to override the vlan-mod-port format type and instead
use the circuit-ID to define subscriber information, use the override keyword.
Note
Examples
When configuring a large number of circuit IDs on a switch, consider the impact of lengthy character
strings on the NVRAM or flash memory. If the circuit-ID configurations, combined with other data,
exceed the capacity of the NVRAM or the flash memory, an error message appears.
This example shows how to configure the option-82 circuit-ID suboption:
Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 250 information option format-type circuit-id
string customerABC-250-0-0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-182
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string
This example shows how to configure the option-82 circuit-ID override suboption:
Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 250 information option format-type circuit-id
override string testcustomer
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping user EXEC command.
Note
Related Commands
The show ip dhcp snooping user EXEC command only displays the global command output, including
a remote-ID configuration. It does not display any per-interface, per-VLAN string that you have
configured for the circuit ID.
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping information
option format remote-id
Configures the option-82 remote-ID suboption.
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-183
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp filter
ip igmp filter
Use the ip igmp filter interface configuration command to control whether or not all hosts on a Layer 2
interface can join one or more IP multicast groups by applying an Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP) profile to the interface. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified profile from
the interface.
ip igmp filter profile number
no ip igmp filter
Syntax Description
profile number
Defaults
No IGMP filters are applied.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The IGMP profile number to be applied. The range is 1 to 4294967295.
You can apply IGMP filters only to Layer 2 physical interfaces.
You cannot apply IGMP filters to routed ports, switch virtual interfaces (SVIs), or ports that belong to
an EtherChannel group.
An IGMP profile can be applied to one or more switch port interfaces, but one port can have only one
profile applied to it.
Examples
This example shows how to apply IGMP profile 22 to a port.
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# ip igmp filter 22
You can verify your setting by using the show running-config privileged EXEC command and by
specifying an interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-184
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp filter
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp profile
Configures the specified IGMP profile number.
show ip dhcp snooping
statistics
Displays the characteristics of the specified IGMP profile.
show running-config interface Displays the running configuration on the switch interface, including
interface-id
the IGMP profile (if any) that is applied to an interface. For syntax
information, select Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals
Command Reference, Release 12.2 > File Management Commands
> Configuration File Management Commands.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-185
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp max-groups
ip igmp max-groups
Use the ip igmp max-groups interface configuration command to set the maximum number of Internet
Group Management Protocol (IGMP) groups that a Layer 2 interface can join or to configure the IGMP
throttling action when the maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table. Use the no form of this
command to set the maximum back to the default, which is to have no maximum limit, or to return to the
default throttling action, which is to drop the report.
ip igmp max-groups {number | action {deny | replace}}
no ip igmp max-groups {number | action}
Syntax Description
Defaults
number
The maximum number of IGMP groups that an interface can join. The range is 0 to
4294967294. The default is no limit.
action deny
When the maximum number of entries is in the IGMP snooping forwarding table, drop
the next IGMP join report. This is the default action.
action
replace
When the maximum number of entries is in the IGMP snooping forwarding table,
replace the existing group with the new group for which the ICMP report was received.
The default maximum number of groups is no limit.
After the switch learns the maximum number of IGMP group entries on an interface, the default
throttling action is to drop the next IGMP report that the interface receives and to not add an entry for
the IGMP group to the interface.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can use this command only on Layer 2 physical interfaces and on logical EtherChannel interfaces.
You cannot set IGMP maximum groups for routed ports, switch virtual interfaces (SVIs), or ports that
belong to an EtherChannel group.
Follow these guidelines when configuring the IGMP throttling action:
•
If you configure the throttling action as deny and set the maximum group limitation, the entries that
were previously in the forwarding table are not removed but are aged out. After these entries are
aged out, when the maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table, the switch drops the next
IGMP report received on the interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-186
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp max-groups
Examples
•
If you configure the throttling action as replace and set the maximum group limitation, the entries
that were previously in the forwarding table are removed. When the maximum number of entries is
in the forwarding table, the switch replaces a randomly-selected multicast entry with the received
IGMP report.
•
When the maximum group limitation is set to the default (no maximum), entering the ip igmp
max-groups {deny | replace} command has no effect.
This example shows how to limit to 25 the number of IGMP groups that a port can join.
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# ip igmp max-groups 25
This example shows how to configure the switch to replace the existing group with the new group for
which the IGMP report was received when the maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ip igmp max-groups action replace
You can verify your setting by using the show running-config privileged EXEC command and by
specifying an interface.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show running-config interface Displays the running configuration on the switch interface, including
interface-id
the maximum number of IGMP groups that an interface can join and
the throttling action. For syntax information, select Cisco IOS
Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2 >
File Management Commands > Configuration File Management
Commands.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-187
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp profile
ip igmp profile
Use the ip igmp profile global configuration command to create an Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) profile and enter IGMP profile configuration mode. From this mode, you can specify
the configuration of the IGMP profile to be used for filtering IGMP membership reports from a
switchport. Use the no form of this command to delete the IGMP profile.
ip igmp profile profile number
no ip igmp profile profile number
Syntax Description
profile number
Defaults
No IGMP profiles are defined. When configured, the default action for matching an IGMP profile is to
deny matching addresses.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The IGMP profile number being configured. The range is 1 to 4294967295.
When you are in IGMP profile configuration mode, you can create the profile by using these commands:
•
deny: specifies that matching addresses are denied; this is the default condition.
•
exit: exits from igmp-profile configuration mode.
•
no: negates a command or resets to its defaults.
•
permit: specifies that matching addresses are permitted.
•
range: specifies a range of IP addresses for the profile. This can be a single IP address or a range
with a start and an end address.
When entering a range, enter the low IP multicast address, a space, and the high IP multicast address.
You can apply an IGMP profile to one or more Layer 2 interfaces, but each interface can have only one
profile applied to it.
Examples
This example shows how to configure IGMP profile 40 that permits the specified range of IP multicast
addresses.
Switch(config)# ip igmp profile 40
Switch(config-igmp-profile)# permit
Switch(config-igmp-profile)# range 233.1.1.1 233.255.255.255
You can verify your settings by using the show ip igmp profile privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-188
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp profile
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp filter
Applies the IGMP profile to the specified interface.
show ip dhcp snooping
statistics
Displays the characteristics of all IGMP profiles or the specified
IGMP profile number.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-189
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping
ip igmp snooping
Use the ip igmp snooping global configuration command to globally enable Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the switch or to enable it on a per-VLAN basis. Use the no
form of this command to return to the default setting.
ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id]
no ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-id
Defaults
IGMP snooping is globally enabled on the switch.
(Optional) Enable IGMP snooping on the specified VLAN. The range is 1 to
1001 and 1006 to 4094.
IGMP snooping is enabled on VLAN interfaces.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When IGMP snooping is enabled globally, it is enabled in all the existing VLAN interfaces. When IGMP
snooping is disabled globally, it is disabled on all the existing VLAN interfaces.
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
Examples
This example shows how to globally enable IGMP snooping:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping
This example shows how to enable IGMP snooping on VLAN 1:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 1
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-190
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Enables IGMP report suppression.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the snooping configuration.
show ip igmp snooping groups
Displays IGMP snooping multicast information.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Displays the IGMP snooping router ports.
show ip igmp snooping querier detail
Displays the configuration and operation information for
the IGMP querier configured on a switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-191
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval
Use the ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval global configuration command to enable the
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) configurable-leave timer globally or on a per-VLAN
basis. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-member-query-interval time
no ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-member-query-interval
Syntax Descriptiont
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Enable IGMP snooping and the leave timer on the specified
VLAN. The range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
time
Interval time out in seconds. The range is 100 to 32768 milliseconds.
Defaults
The default timeout setting is 1000 milliseconds.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When IGMP snooping is globally enabled, IGMP snooping is enabled on all the existing VLAN
interfaces. When IGMP snooping is globally disabled, IGMP snooping is disabled on all the existing
VLAN interfaces.
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
Configuring the leave timer on a VLAN overrides the global setting.
The IGMP configurable leave time is only supported on devices running IGMP Version 2.
The configuration is saved in NVRAM.
Examples
This example shows how to globally enable the IGMP leave timer for 2000 milliseconds:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval 2000
This example shows how to configure the IGMP leave timer for 3000 milliseconds on VLAN 1:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 1 last-member-query-interval 3000
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-192
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping
Enables IGMP snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.
ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave
Enables IGMP Immediate-Leave processing.
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
Configures a Layer 2 port as a multicast router port.
ip igmp snooping vlan static
Configures a Layer 2 port as a member of a group.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the IGMP snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-193
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping querier
ip igmp snooping querier
Use the ip igmp snooping querier global configuration command to globally enable the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) querier function in Layer 2 networks. Use the command with keywords
to enable and configure the IGMP querier feature on a VLAN interface. Use the no form of this
command to return to the default settings.
ip igmp snooping querier [vlan vlan-id] [address ip-address | max-response-time response-time
| query-interval interval-count | tcn query [count count | interval interval] | timer expiry |
version version]
no ip igmp snooping querier [vlan vlan-id] [address | max-response-time | query-interval | tcn
query { count count | interval interval} | timer expiry | version]
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Enable IGMP snooping and the IGMP querier function on the
specified VLAN. The range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
address ip-address
(Optional) Specify a source IP address. If you do not specify an IP address,
the querier tries to use the global IP address configured for the IGMP querier.
max-response-time
response-time
(Optional) Set the maximum time to wait for an IGMP querier report. The range
is 1 to 25 seconds.
query-interval
interval-count
(Optional) Set the interval between IGMP queriers. The range is 1 to 18000
seconds.
tcn query [count count (Optional) Set parameters related to Topology Change Notifications (TCNs).
| interval interval]
The keywords have these meanings:
Defaults
•
count count—Set the number of TCN queries to be executed during the
TCN interval time. The range is 1 to 10.
•
interval interval—Set the TCN query interval time. The range is 1 to
255.
timer expiry
(Optional) Set the length of time until the IGMP querier expires. The range
is 60 to 300 seconds.
version version
(Optional) Select the IGMP version number that the querier feature uses.
Select 1 or 2.
The IGMP snooping querier feature is globally disabled on the switch.
When enabled, the IGMP snooping querier disables itself if it detects IGMP traffic from a
multicast-enabled device.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-194
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping querier
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to enable IGMP snooping to detect the IGMP version and IP address of a device that
sends IGMP query messages, which is also called a querier.
By default, the IGMP snooping querier is configured to detect devices that use IGMP Version 2
(IGMPv2) but does not detect clients that are using IGMP Version 1 (IGMPv1). You can manually
configure the max-response-time value when devices use IGMPv2. You cannot configure the
max-response-time when devices use IGMPv1. (The value cannot be configured and is set to zero).
Non-RFC compliant devices running IGMPv1 might reject IGMP general query messages that have a
non-zero value as the max-response-time value. If you want the devices to accept the IGMP general query
messages, configure the IGMP snooping querier to run IGMPv1.
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
Examples
This example shows how to globally enable the IGMP snooping querier feature:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier maximum response time to 25 seconds:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier max-response-time 25
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier interval time to 60 seconds:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier query-interval 60
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier TCN query count to 25:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier tcn count 25
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier timeout to 60 seconds:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier timeout expiry 60
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier feature to version 2:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier version 2
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Enables IGMP report suppression.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the IGMP snooping configuration.
show ip igmp snooping groups
Displays IGMP snooping multicast information.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Displays the IGMP snooping router ports.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-195
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Use the ip igmp snooping report-suppression global configuration command to enable Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) report suppression. Use the no form of this command to disable IGMP
report suppression and to forward all IGMP reports to multicast routers.
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
no ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
IGMP report suppression is enabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
IGMP report suppression is supported only when the multicast query has IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports.
This feature is not supported when the query includes IGMPv3 reports.
The switch uses IGMP report suppression to forward only one IGMP report per multicast router query
to multicast devices. When IGMP router suppression is enabled (the default), the switch sends the first
IGMP report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers. The switch does not send the
remaining IGMP reports for the group to the multicast routers. This feature prevents duplicate reports
from being sent to the multicast devices.
If the multicast router query includes requests only for IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports, the switch
forwards only the first IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers.
If the multicast router query also includes requests for IGMPv3 reports, the switch forwards all IGMPv1,
IGMPv2, and IGMPv3 reports for a group to the multicast devices.
If you disable IGMP report suppression by entering the no ip igmp snooping report-suppression
command, all IGMP reports are forwarded to all the multicast routers.
Examples
This example shows how to disable report suppression:
Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping report-suppression
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-196
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping
Enables IGMP snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the IGMP snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-197
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping tcn
ip igmp snooping tcn
Use the ip igmp snooping tcn global configuration command to configure the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) Topology Change Notification (TCN) behavior. Use the no form of this
command to return to the default settings.
ip igmp snooping tcn {flood query count count | query solicit}
no ip igmp snooping tcn {flood query count | query solicit}
Syntax Description
flood query count count Specify the number of IGMP general queries for which the multicast traffic
is flooded. The range is 1 to 10.
query solicit
Defaults
Send an IGMP leave message (global leave) to speed the process of
recovering from the flood mode caused during a TCN event.
The TCN flood query count is 2.
The TCN query solicitation is disabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can prevent the loss of the multicast traffic that might occur because of a topology change by using
this command. If you set the TCN flood query count to 1 by using the ip igmp snooping tcn flood query
count command, the flooding stops after receiving one general query. If you set the count to 7, the
flooding of multicast traffic due to the TCN event lasts until seven general queries are received. Groups
are relearned based on the general queries received during the TCN event.
Examples
This example shows how to specify 7 as the number of IGMP general queries for which the multicast
traffic is flooded:
Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping tcn flood query count 7
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping
Enables IGMP snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.
ip igmp snooping tcn flood
Specifies flooding on an interface as the IGMP snooping spanning-tree
TCN behavior.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the IGMP snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-198
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping tcn flood
ip igmp snooping tcn flood
Use the ip igmp snooping tcn flood interface configuration command to specify multicast flooding as
the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping spanning-tree Topology Change Notification
(TCN) behavior. Use the no form of this command to disable the multicast flooding.
ip igmp snooping tcn flood
no ip igmp snooping tcn flood
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Multicast flooding is enabled on an interface during a spanning-tree TCN event.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When the switch receives a TCN, multicast traffic is flooded to all the ports until two general queries are
received. If the switch has many ports with attached hosts that are subscribed to different multicast
groups, this flooding behavior might not be desirable because the flooded traffic might exceed the
capacity of the link and cause packet loss.
You can change the flooding query count by using the ip igmp snooping tcn flood query count count
global configuration command.
Examples
This example shows how to disable the multicast flooding on an interface:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# no ip igmp snooping tcn flood
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping
Enables IGMP snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.
ip igmp snooping tcn
Configures the IGMP TCN behavior on the switch.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the IGMP snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-199
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave
ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave
Use the ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id immediate-leave global configuration command to enable
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping immediate-leave processing on a per-VLAN
basis. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id immediate-leave
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id immediate-leave
Syntax Description
vlan-id
Defaults
IGMP immediate-leave processing is disabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Enable IGMP snooping and the Immediate-Leave feature on the specified
VLAN. The range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
You should only configure the Immediate Leave feature when there is a maximum of one receiver on
every port in the VLAN. The configuration is saved in NVRAM.
The Immediate Leave feature is supported only with IGMP Version 2 hosts.
Examples
This example shows how to enable IGMP immediate-leave processing on VLAN 1:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 1 immediate-leave
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Enables IGMP report suppression.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the snooping configuration.
show ip igmp snooping groups
Displays IGMP snooping multicast information.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Displays the IGMP snooping router ports.
show ip igmp snooping querier detail
Displays the configuration and operation information for
the IGMP querier configured on a switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-200
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
Use the ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter global configuration command to add a multicast router
port or to configure the multicast learning method. Use the no form of this command to return to the
default settings.
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter {interface interface-id | learn pim-dvmrp}
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter {interface interface-id | learn pim-dvmrp}
Syntax Description
Defaults
vlan-id
Enable IGMP snooping, and add the port in the specified VLAN as the
multicast router port. The range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
interface interface-id
Specify the next-hop interface to the multicast router. Valid interfaces are
physical interfaces and port channels. The port-channel range is 1 to 48.
learn pim-dvmrp
Specify the multicast router learning method. The only learning method
supported on the Cisco ME switch is pim-dvmrp, which sets the switch to
learn multicast router ports by snooping on IGMP queries and
Protocol-Independent Multicast-Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
(PIM-DVMRP) packets.
By default, there are no multicast router ports.
The default learning method is pim-dvmrp—to snoop IGMP queries and PIM-DVMRP packets.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
The configuration is saved in NVRAM.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a port as a multicast router port:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter interface gigabitethernet0/2
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-201
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Enables IGMP report suppression.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the snooping configuration.
show ip igmp snooping groups
Displays IGMP snooping multicast information.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Displays the IGMP snooping router ports.
show ip igmp snooping querier detail
Displays the configuration and operation information for
the IGMP querier configured on a switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-202
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping vlan static
ip igmp snooping vlan static
Use the ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static global configuration command to enable Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping and to statically add a Layer 2 port as a member of a multicast
group. Use the no form of this command to remove ports specified as members of a static multicast
group.
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface interface-id
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface interface-id
Syntax Description
vlan-id
Enable IGMP snooping on the specified VLAN. The range is 1 to 1001 and
1006 to 4094.
ip-address
Add a Layer 2 port as a member of a multicast group with the specified group
IP address.
interface interface-id
Specify the interface of the member port. The keywords have these
meanings:
•
fastethernet interface number—a Fast Ethernet IEEE 802.3 interface.
•
gigabitethernet interface number—a Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3z
interface.
•
port-channel interface number—a channel interface. The range is 0
to 48.
Defaults
By default, there are no ports statically configures as members of a multicast group.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
The configuration is saved in NVRAM.
Examples
This example shows how to statically configure a port as a multicast router port:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter interface gigabitethernet0/2
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip igmp snooping privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-203
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip igmp snooping vlan static
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Enables IGMP report suppression.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the snooping configuration.
show ip igmp snooping groups
Displays IGMP snooping multicast information.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Displays the IGMP snooping router ports.
show ip igmp snooping querier detail
Displays the configuration and operation information for
the IGMP querier configured on a switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-204
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip sla responder twamp
ip sla responder twamp
Use the ip sla responder twamp global configuration command to configure the switch as a Two-Way
Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) responder. Use the no form of this command to disable the IP
SLA TWAMP responder.
ip sla responder twamp [timeout seconds]
no ip sla responder twamp [timeout seconds]
Syntax
Description
timeout seconds
Defaults
No IP SLA TWAMP responder is configured.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
(Optional) Specify the number of seconds a TWAMP session can be inactive
before the session ends. The range is 1-604800 seconds. The default is 900
seconds.
After entering the ip sla responder twamp command, you enter IP SLA TWAMP reflector configuration
mode, and these configuration commands are available:
•
default: sets a command to its defaults.
•
exit: exits from IP SLA TWAMP reflector configuration mode.
•
no: negates a command or resets to its defaults.
•
timeout seconds: specifies the maximum time the session can be inactive before the session ends.
The range is 1-604800 seconds. The default is 900 seconds.
For the TWAMP server and reflector to function, you must also configure a TWAMP control device,
which serves as the client and session sender. These functions are not configured on a Cisco device.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a switch as an IP SLA TWAMP responder:
Switch(config)# ip sla responder twamp
Switch(config-twamp-ref)# timeout inactivity 900
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-205
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip sla responder twamp
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip sla responder
Enables the Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements (SLAs) responder for
general IP SLAs operations.
ip sla server twamp
Configures the switch as a Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol
(TWAMP) server.
show ip sla standards
(Optional) Display the IP SLAs standards configured on the switch.
show ip sla twamp
connection {detail |
requests}
(Optional) Displays the current Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements
(SLAs) Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) connections
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-206
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip sla server twamp
ip sla server twamp
Use the ip sla server twamp global configuration command to configure the switch as a Two-Way
Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) server. Use the no form of this command to disable the IP SLA
TWAMP server.
ip sla server twamp
no ip sla server twamp
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
No IP SLA TWAMP server is configured.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
After entering the ip sla server twamp command, you enter IP SLA TWAMP server configuration mode,
and these configuration commands are available:
•
default: sets a command to its defaults.
•
exit: exits from IP SLA TWAMP server configuration mode.
•
no: negates a command or resets to its defaults.
•
port port-number: specifies the source port for TWAMP control traffic. Valid port numbers are
from 1 to 65535.
•
timer inactivity seconds: specifies the maximum time the session can be inactive before the session
ends. The range is 1-6000 seconds. The default is 900 seconds.
For the TWAMP server and reflector to function, you must also configure a TWAMP control device,
which serves as the client and session sender. These functions are not configured on a Cisco device.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a switch as an IP SLA TWAMP server:
Switch(config)# ip sla server twamp
Switch(config-twamp-srvr)# port 862
Switch(config-twamp-srvr)# timer inactivity 540
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-207
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip sla server twamp
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip sla responder
Enables the Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements (SLAs) responder for
general IP SLAs operations.
ip sla responder
twamp
Configures the switch as a Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol
(TWAMP) responder.
show ip sla standards
(Optional) Displays the IP SLAs standards configured on the switch.
show ip sla twamp
connection {detail |
requests}
(Optional) Displays the current Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements
(SLAs) Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) connections.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-208
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip source binding
ip source binding
Use the ip source binding global configuration command to configure static IP source bindings on the
switch. Use the no form of this command to delete static bindings.
ip source binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface interface-id
no source binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface interface-id
Syntax Description
mac-address
Specify a MAC address.
vlan vlan-id
Specify a VLAN number. The range is from 1 to 4094.
ip-address
Specify an IP address.
interface interface-id
Specify an interface on which to add or delete an IP source binding.
Defaults
No IP source bindings are configured.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
A static IP source binding entry has an IP address, its associated MAC address, and its associated VLAN
number. The entry is based on the MAC address and the VLAN number. If you modify an entry by
changing only the IP address, the switch updates the entry instead creating a new one.
This example shows how to add a static IP source binding:
Switch(config)# ip source binding 0001.1234.1234 vlan 1 172.20.50.5 interface
gigabitethernet0/1
This example shows how to add a static binding and then modify the IP address for it:
Switch(config)# ip source binding 0001.1357.0007 vlan 1 172.20.50.25 interface
gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config)# ip source binding 0001.1357.0007 vlan 1 172.20.50.30 interface
gigabitethernet0/1
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip source binding privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-209
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip source binding
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip verify source
Enables IP source guard on an interface.
show ip source binding Displays the IP source bindings on the switch.
show ip verify source
Displays the IP source guard configuration on the switch or on a specific
interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-210
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip ssh
ip ssh
Use the ip ssh global configuration command to configure the switch to run Secure Shell (SSH)
Version 1 or SSH Version 2. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
ip ssh version [1 | 2]
no ip ssh version [1 | 2]
This command is available only when your switch is running the cryptographic (encrypted) software
image.
Syntax Description
1
(Optional) Configure the switch to run SSH Version 1 (SSHv1).
2
(Optional) Configure the switch to run SSH Version 2 (SSHv1).
Defaults
The default version is the latest SSH version supported by the SSH client.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If you do not enter this command or if you do not specify a keyword, the SSH server selects the latest
SSH version supported by the SSH client. For example, if the SSH client supports SSHv1 and SSHv2,
the SSH server selects SSHv2.
The switch supports an SSHv1 or an SSHv2 server. It also supports an SSHv1 client. For more
information about the SSH server and the SSH client, see the software configuration guide for this
release.
A Rivest, Shamir, and Adelman (RSA) key pair generated by an SSHv1 server can be used by an SSHv2
server and the reverse.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the switch to run SSH Version 2:
Switch(config)# ip ssh version 2
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip ssh or show ssh privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-211
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip ssh
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip ssh
Displays if the SSH server is enabled and displays the version and
configuration information for the SSH server. For syntax information, select
Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Configuration Guides and Command References >
Cisco IOS Security Command Reference, Release 12.2 > Other Security
Features > Secure Shell Commands.
show ssh
Displays the status of the SSH server. For syntax information, select Cisco IOS
Release 12.2 Configuration Guides and Command References > Cisco IOS
Security Command Reference, Release 12.2 > Other Security Features >
Secure Shell Commands.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-212
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip sticky-arp (global configuration)
ip sticky-arp (global configuration)
Use the ip sticky-arp global configuration command to enable sticky Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) on a switch virtual interface (SVI) that belongs to a private VLAN. Use the no form of this
command to disable sticky ARP.
ip sticky-arp
no ip sticky-arp
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Sticky ARP is enabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Sticky ARP entries are those learned on private-VLAN SVIs. These entries do not age out.
The ip sticky-arp global configuration command is supported only on SVIs belonging to private
VLANs.
•
When you configure a private VLAN, sticky ARP is enabled on the switch (the default).
If you enter the ip sticky-arp interface configuration command, it does not take effect.
If you enter the no ip sticky-arp interface configuration command, you do not disable sticky ARP
on an interface.
Note
We recommend that you use the show arp privileged EXEC command to display and verify
private-VLAN interface ARP entries.
•
If you disconnect the switch from a device and then connect it to another device with a different
MAC address but with the same IP address, the ARP entry is not created, and this message appears:
*Mar 2 00:26:06.967: %IP-3-STCKYARPOVR: Attempt to overwrite Sticky ARP entry:
20.6.2.1, hw: 0000.0602.0001 by hw: 0000.0503.0001
•
If a MAC address of a device changes, you must use the no arp ip-address global configuration
command to manually remove the private-VLAN interface ARP entries.
•
Use the arp ip-address hardware-address type global configuration command to add a
private-VLAN ARP entry.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-213
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip sticky-arp (global configuration)
Examples
•
Use the no sticky-arp global configuration command to disable sticky ARP on the switch.
•
Use the no sticky-arp interface configuration command to disable sticky ARP on an interface when
sticky ARP is disabled on the switch.
To disable sticky ARP:
Switch(config)# no ip sticky-arp
You can verify your settings by using the show arp privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp
Adds a permanent entry in the ARP table. For syntax information,
see the Cisco IOS IP Addressing Services Command Reference,
Release 12.4 > ARP Commands.
show arp
Displays the entries in the ARP table. For syntax information, see the
Cisco IOS IP Addressing Services Command Reference,
Release 12.4 > ARP Commands.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-214
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip sticky-arp (interface configuration)
ip sticky-arp (interface configuration)
Use the ip sticky-arp interface configuration command to enable sticky Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) on a switch virtual interface (SVI) or a Layer 3 interface. Use the no form of this command to
disable sticky ARP.
ip sticky-arp
no ip sticky-arp
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Sticky ARP is enabled on private-VLAN SVIs.
Sticky ARP is disabled on Layer 3 interfaces and normal SVIs.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Sticky ARP entries are those learned on SVIs and Layer 3 interfaces. These entries do not age out.
The ip sticky-arp interface configuration command is only supported on
•
Layer 3 interfaces
•
SVIs belonging to normal VLANs
•
SVIs belonging to private VLANs
On a Layer 3 interface or on an SVI belonging to a normal VLAN
•
Use the sticky-arp interface configuration command to enable sticky ARP.
•
Use the no sticky-arp interface configuration command to disable sticky ARP.
On private-VLAN SVIs
•
When you configure a private VLAN, sticky ARP is enabled on the switch (the default).
If you enter the ip sticky-arp interface configuration command, it does not take effect.
If you enter the no ip sticky-arp interface configuration command, you do not disable sticky ARP
on an interface.
Note
We recommend that you use the show arp privileged EXEC command to display and verify
private-VLAN interface ARP entries.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-215
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip sticky-arp (interface configuration)
•
If you disconnect the switch from a device and then connect it to another device with a different
MAC address but with the same IP address, the ARP entry is not created, and this message appears:
*Mar 2 00:26:06.967: %IP-3-STCKYARPOVR: Attempt to overwrite Sticky ARP entry:
20.6.2.1, hw: 0000.0602.0001 by hw: 0000.0503.0001
Examples
•
If a MAC address of a device changes, you must use the no arp ip-address global configuration
command to manually remove the private-VLAN interface ARP entries.
•
Use the arp ip-address hardware-address type global configuration command to add a
private-VLAN ARP entry.
•
Use the no sticky-arp global configuration command to disable sticky ARP on the switch.
•
Use the no sticky-arp interface configuration command to disable sticky ARP on an interface.
To enable sticky ARP on a normal SVI:
Switch(config-if)# ip sticky-arp
To disable sticky ARP on a Layer 3 interface or an SVI:
Switch(config-if)# no ip sticky-arp
You can verify your settings by using the show arp privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp
Adds a permanent entry in the ARP table. For syntax information,
see the Cisco IOS IP Addressing Services Command Reference,
Release 12.4 > ARP Commands.
show arp
Displays the entries in the ARP table. For syntax information, see the
Cisco IOS IP Addressing Services Command Reference,
Release 12.4 > ARP Commands.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-216
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip verify source
ip verify source
Use the ip verify source interface configuration command to enable IP source guard on an interface. Use
the no form of this command to disable IP source guard.
ip verify source {vlan dhcp-snooping | tracking} [port-security]
no ip verify source {vlan dhcp-snooping | tracking} [port-security]
Syntax Description
vlan dhcp-snooping
Enable IP source guard on an untrusted Layer 2 DHCP snooping interfaces.
tracking
Enable IP port security to learn static IP address learning on a port.
port-security
(Optional) Enable IP source guard with IP and MAC address filtering.
If you do not enter the port-security keyword, IP address filtering is
enabled.
Defaults
IP source guard is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(52)SE
The vlan dhcp-snooping and tracking keywords were added.
Usage Guidelines
To enable IP source guard with source IP address filtering, use the ip verify source interface
configuration command.
To enable IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering, use the ip verify source
port-security interface configuration command.
To enable IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering, you must enable port security on
the interface.
Examples
This example shows how to enable IP source guard with source IP address filtering:
Switch(config-if)# ip verify source
This example shows how to enable IP source guard on VLANs 10 through 20 on a per-port basis:
Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 10 20
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk native vlan 10
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-217
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ip verify source
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan 11-20
Switch(config-if)# no ip dhcp snooping trust
Switch(config-if)# ip verify source vlan dhcp-snooping
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show ip verify source interface gigabitethernet0/1
Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address
Mac-address
--------- ----------- ----------- --------------- ----------------Gi0/1
ip-mac
active
10.0.0.1
Gi0/1
ip-mac
active
deny-all
Switch#
Vlan
---------10
11-20
This example shows how to enable IP port security with IP-MAC filters on a Layer 2 access port:
Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip device tracking
Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet0/3
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access
Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1
Switch(config-if)# ip device tracking maximum 5
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 5
Switch(config-if)# ip verify source tracking port-security
Switch(config-if)# end
Verify your settings by entering the show ip verify source privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip device tracking maximum
Enable IP port security binding tracking on a Layer 2 port.
ip dhcp snooping
Globally enable DHCP snooping.
ip dhcp snooping limit rate
Configure the number of the DHCP messages that an interface
can receive per second.
ip dhcp snooping information
option
Enable DHCP option-82 data insertion.
ip dhcp snooping trust
Enable DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.
ip source binding
Configure static bindings on the switch.
show ip dhcp snooping
Display the DHCP snooping configuration.
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Display the DHCP snooping binding entries.
show ip verify source
Display the IP source guard configuration on the switch or on a
specific interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-218
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 access-list
ipv6 access-list
Use the ipv6 access-list global configuration command to define an IPv6 access list and to place the
switch in IPv6 access list configuration mode. To remove the access list, use the no form of this
command.
ipv6 access-list access-list-name
no ipv6 access-list access-list-name
Note
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Syntax Description
access-list-name
Defaults
No IPv6 access list is defined.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Name of the IPv6 access list. Names cannot contain a space or quotation
mark or begin with a number.
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default |
routing | vlan) global configuration command, and reload the switch.
The ipv6 access-list command is similar to the ip access-list command, but it is IPv6-specific.
IPv6 ACLs are defined by a unique name (IPv6 does not support numbered ACLs). An IPv4 ACL and
an IPv6 ACL cannot share the same name.
See the deny (IPv6 access-list configuration) and permit (IPv6 access-list configuration) commands
for more information on filtering IPv6 traffic based on IPv6 option headers and optional, upper-layer
protocol-type information. See the “Examples” section for an example of a translated IPv6 ACL
configuration.
Every IPv6 ACL has implicit permit icmp any any nd-na, permit icmp any any nd-ns, and deny ipv6
any any statements as its last match conditions. The two permit conditions allow ICMPv6 neighbor
discovery. To disallow ICMPv6 neighbor discovery and to deny icmp any any nd-na or icmp any any
nd-ns, there must be an explicit deny entry in the ACL. For the implicit deny ipv6 any any statement
to take effect, an IPv6 ACL must contain at least one entry.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-219
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 access-list
The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses the IPv6 network layer service; therefore, by default, IPv6
ACLs implicitly allow IPv6 neighbor discovery packets to be sent and received on an interface. In IPv4,
the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), which is equivalent to the IPv6 neighbor discovery process, uses
a separate data-link layer protocol; therefore, by default, IPv4 ACLs implicitly allow ARP packets to be
sent and received on an interface.
Use the ipv6 traffic-filter interface configuration command with the access-list-name argument to apply
an IPv6 ACL to an IPv6 interface. You can apply inbound and outbound IPv6 ACLs to Layer 3 physical
interfaces or to switch virtual interfaces for routed ACLs, but only inbound IPv6 ACLs to Layer 2
interfaces for port ACLs.
Note
Examples
An IPv6 ACL applied to an interface with the ipv6 traffic-filter command filters traffic that is forwarded
by the switch and does not filter traffic generated by the switch.
This example puts the switch in IPv6 access list configuration mode, configures the IPv6 ACL named
list2, and applies the ACL to outbound traffic on an interface. The first ACL entry prevents all packets
from the network FE80:0:0:2::/64 (packets that have the link-local prefix FE80:0:0:2 as the first 64 bits
of their source IPv6 address) from leaving the interface. The second entry in the ACL permits all other
traffic to leave the interface. The second entry is necessary because an implicit deny-all condition is at
the end of each IPv6 ACL.
Switch(config)# ipv6 access-list list2
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# deny FE80:0:0:2::/64 any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit any any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/3
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001::/64 eui-64
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 traffic-filter list2 out
Note
Related Commands
IPv6 ACLs that rely on the implicit deny condition or specify a deny any any statement to filter traffic
should contain permit statements for link-local addresses to avoid the filtering of protocol packets.
Additionally IPv6 ACLs that use deny statements to filter traffic should also use a permit any any
statement as the last statement in the list.
Command
Description
deny (IPv6 access-list
configuration)
Sets deny conditions for an IPv6 access list.
ipv6 traffic-filter
Filters incoming or outgoing IPv6 traffic on an interface.
permit (IPv6
access-list
configuration)
Sets permit conditions for an IPv6 access list.
show ipv6 access-list
Displays the contents of all current IPv6 access lists.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-220
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 address dhcp
ipv6 address dhcp
Use the ipv6 address dhcp interface configuration command to acquire an IPv6 address on an interface
from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server. To remove the address from
the interface, use the no form of this command.
ipv6 address dhcp [rapid-commit]
no ipv6 address dhcp [rapid-commit]
Note
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Syntax Description
rapid-commit
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
(Optional) Allow two-message exchange method for address assignment.
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default |
routing | vlan} global configuration command, and reload the switch.
The ipv6 address dhcp interface configuration command allows any interface to dynamically learn its
IPv6 address by using DHCP.
The rapid-commit keyword enables the use of the two-message exchange for address allocation and
other configuration. If it is enabled, the client includes the rapid-commit option in a solicit message.
Examples
This example shows how to acquire an IPv6 address and to enable the rapid-commit option:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address dhcp rapid-commit
You can verify your settings by using the show ipv6 dhcp interface privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ipv6 dhcp
interface
Displays DHCPv6 interface information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-221
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 dhcp client request vendor
ipv6 dhcp client request vendor
Use the ipv6 dhcp client request interface configuration command to configure an IPv6 client to request
an option from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server. To remove the
request, use the no form of this command.
ipv6 dhcp client request vendor
no ipv6 dhcp client request vendor
Note
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default |
routing | vlan} global configuration command, and reload the switch.
Use the ipv6 dhcp client request vendor interface configuration to request a vendor-specific option.
When enabled, the command is verified only when an IPv6 address is acquired from DHCP. If you enter
the command after the interface has an IPv6 address, the command does not take effect until the next
time the client acquires an IPv6 address from DHCP.
Examples
This example shows how to enable the request vendor-specific option.
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 dhcp client request vendor-specific
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 address dhcp
Acquires an IPv6 address on an interface from DHCP.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-222
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 dhcp ping packets
ipv6 dhcp ping packets
Use the ipv6 dhcp ping packets global configuration command to specify the number of packets a
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server sends to a pool address as part of a
ping operation. To prevent the server from pinging pool addresses, use the no form of this command.
ipv6 dhcp ping packets number
no ipv6 dhcp ping packets
Note
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Syntax Description
number
Defaults
The default is 0.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The number of ping packets sent before the address is assigned to a
requesting client. The range is 0 to 10.
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default | vlan}
global configuration command, and reload the switch.
The DHCPv6 server pings a pool address before assigning it to a requesting client. An unanswered ping
indicates that the address is not in use and the server assigns the address to the requesting client.
Setting the number argument to 0 turns off the DHCPv6 server ping operation.
Examples
This example specifies two ping attempts by the DHCPv6 server before further ping attempts stop:
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp ping packets 2
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear ipv6 dhcp
conflict
Clears an address conflict from the DHCPv6 server database.
show ipv6 dhcp
conflict
Displays address conflicts found by a DHCPv6 server or reported through
a DECLINE message from a client.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-223
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 dhcp pool
ipv6 dhcp pool
Use the ipv6 dhcp pool global configuration command to enter Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
for IPv6 (DHCPv6) pool configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to return to the default
settings.
ipv6 dhcp pool poolname
no ipv6 dhcp pool poolname
Note
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Syntax Description
poolname
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
User-defined name for the DHCPv6 pool. The pool name can be a symbolic
string (such as Engineering) or an integer (such as 0).
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default |
vlan} global configuration command, and reload the switch.
DHCPv6 pool configuration mode commands:
•
address prefix IPv6-prefix: sets an address prefix for address assignment. This address must be in
hexadecimal, using 16-bit values between colons.
•
lifetime t1 t2: sets a valid and a preferred time interval (in seconds) for the IPv6 address. The range
is 5 to 4294967295 seconds. The valid default is 2 days. The preferred default is 1 day. The valid
lifetime must be greater than or equal to the preferred lifetime. Specify infinite for no time interval.
•
link-address IPv6-prefix: sets a link-address IPv6 prefix. When an address on the incoming
interface or a link-address in the packet matches the specified IPv6-prefix, the server uses the
configuration information pool. This address must be in hexadecimal, using 16-bit values between
colons.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-224
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 dhcp pool
•
vendor-specific: enables the DHCPv6 vendor-specific configuration mode with these configuration
commands:
– vendor-id: enter a vendor-specific identification number. This number is the vendor IANA
Private Enterprise Number. The range is 1 to 4294967295.
– suboption number: sets vendor-specific suboption number. The range is 1 to 65535. Enter an
IPv6 address, ASCII text, or a hexadecimal string as defined by the suboption parameters.
After you create the DHCPv6 configuration information pool, use the ipv6 dhcp server interface
configuration command to associate the pool with a server on an interface. However, if you do not
configure an information pool, you still need to use the ipv6 dhcp server interface configuration
command to enable the DHCPv6 server function on an interface.
When you associate a DHCPv6 pool with an interface, only that pool services requests on the associated
interface. The pool also services other interfaces. If you do not associate a DHCPv6 pool with an
interface, it can service requests on any interface.
Not using any IPv6 address prefix means that the pool only returns configured options.
The link-address keyword allows matching of a link-address without necessarily allocating an address.
You can match the pool from multiple relays by using multiple link-address configuration commands
inside a pool.
Because a longest match is performed on either the address pool information or the link information, you
can configure one pool to allocate addresses and another pool on a subprefix that only returns configured
options.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a pool called engineering with an IPv6 address prefix:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool engineering
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# address prefix 2001:1000::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# end
This example shows how to configure a pool called testgroup with three link-address prefixes and an
IPv6 address prefix:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool testgroup
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# link-address 2001:1001::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# link-address 2001:1002::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# link-address 2001:2000::0/48
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# address prefix 2001:1003::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# end
This example shows how to configure a pool called 350 with vendor-specific options:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool 350
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# vendor-specific 9
Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# suboption 1 address 1000:235D::1
Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# suboption 2 ascii "IP-Phone"
Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# end
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-225
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 dhcp pool
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 dhcp server
Enables DHCPv6 service on an interface.
show ipv6 dhcp pool
Displays DHCPv6 configuration pool information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-226
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 dhcp server
ipv6 dhcp server
Use the ipv6 dhcp server interface configuration command to enable Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) service on an interface. To disable DHCPv6 service on an interface, use the
no form of this command.
ipv6 dhcp server [poolname | automatic] [allow-hint] [rapid-commit] [preference value]
no ipv6 dhcp server
Note
Syntax Description
This command is available only if the is running the metro IP access image and you have configured a
dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
poolname
(Optional) User-defined name for the IPv6 DHCP pool. The pool name can
be a symbolic string (such as Engineering) or an integer (such as 0).
automatic
(Optional) Enable the server to automatically determine which pool to use
when allocating addresses for a client.
allow-hint
(Optional) Specify whether the server should consider client suggestions in
the SOLICIT message. By default, the server ignores client suggestions.
preference value
(Optional) The preference value carried in the preference option in the
advertise message sent by the server. The range is from 0 to 255. The default
is 0.
rapid-commit
(Optional) Allow two-message exchange method.
Defaults
By default, no DHCPv6 packets are serviced on the interface.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
The automatic keyword was added to the command.
Usage Guidelines
The ipv6 dhcp server interface configuration command enables DHCPv6 service on a specified
interface.
If you enter the automatic keyword, the system automatically determine which pool to use when
allocating addresses for a client. When the server receives an IPv6 DHCP packet, the server determines
if it was received from a DHCP relay or if it was directly received from the client. If the packet was
received from a relay, the server verifies the link-address field inside the packet associated with the first
relay that is closest to the client. The server matches this link-address against all address prefix and
link-address configurations in IPv6 DHCP pools to find the longest prefix match. The server selects the
pool associated with the longest match.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-227
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 dhcp server
If the packet was received directly from the client, the server performs this same matching, but it uses
all the IPv6 addresses configured on the incoming interface when performing the match. Once again, the
server selects the longest prefix match.
If you enter the allow-hint keyword, the server allocates a valid client-suggested address in the solicit
and request messages. The prefix address is valid if it is in the associated local prefix address pool and
it is not assigned to a device. If the allow-hint keyword is not specified, the server ignores the client hint,
and an address is allocated from the free list in the pool.
If you configure the preference keyword with a value other than 0, the server adds a preference option
to carry the preference value for the advertise messages. This action affects the selection of a server by
the client. Any advertise message that does not include a preference option is considered to have a
preference value of 0. If the client receives an advertise message with a preference value of 255, the
client immediately sends a request message to the server from which the message was received.
Entering the rapid-commit keyword enables the use of the two-message exchange.
The DHCPv6 client, server, and relay functions are mutually exclusive on an interface. When one of
these functions is already enabled and you try to configure a different function on the same interface, the
switch returns one of these messages:
Interface is in DHCP client mode
Interface is in DHCP server mode
Interface is in DHCP relay mode
Examples
This example enables DHCPv6 for the pool named testgroup:
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 dhcp server testgroup
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 dhcp pool
Configures a DHCPv6 pool and enters DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.
show ipv6 dhcp
interface
Displays DHCPv6 interface information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-228
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping
ipv6 mld snooping
Use the ipv6 mld snooping global configuration command without keywords to enable IP version 6
(IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping globally or on the specified VLAN. Use the no
form of this command to disable MLD snooping on the switch or switch stack or the VLAN.
ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id]
no ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id]
Note
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-id
Defaults
MLD snooping is globally disabled on the switch.
(Optional) Enable or disable IPv6 MLD snooping on the specified VLAN.
The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
MLD snooping is enabled on all VLANs. However, MLD snooping must be globally enabled before
VLAN snooping will take place.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global
configuration command and reload the switch.
When MLD snooping is globally disabled, it is disabled on all the existing VLAN interfaces. When you
globally enable MLD snooping, it is enabled on all VLAN interfaces that are in the default state
(enabled). VLAN configuration will override global configuration on interfaces on which MLD
snooping has been disabled.
If MLD snooping is globally disabled, you cannot enable it on a VLAN. If MLD snooping is globally
enabled, you can disable it on individual VLANs.
When the IPv6 multicast router is a Catalyst 6500 switch and you are using extended VLANs (in the
range 1006 to 4094), IPv6 MLD snooping must be enabled on the extended VLAN on the Catalyst 6500
switch in order for the switch to receive queries on the VLAN. For normal-range VLANs (1 to 1005), it
is not necessary to enable IPv6 MLD snooping on the VLAN on the Catalyst 6500 switch.
VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used
in MLD snooping.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-229
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping
Examples
This example shows how to globally enable MLD snooping:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping
This example shows how to disable MLD snooping on a VLAN:
Switch(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping vlan 11
You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 mld snooping user EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
sdm prefer
Configures an SDM template to optimize system
resources based on how the switch is being used.
show ipv6 mld snooping
Displays MLD snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-230
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count
Use the ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count global configuration command to configure IP
version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery Mulitcast Address Specific Queries (MASQs) or that will
be sent before aging out a client. Use the no form of this command to reset the query count to the default
settings.
ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-listener-query-count integer_value
no ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-listener-query-count
Note
Syntax Description
Command Default
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Configure last-listener query count on the specified VLAN. The
VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
integer_value
The range is 1 to 7.
The default global count is 2.
The default VLAN count is 0 (the global count is used).
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global
configuration command and reload the switch.
In MLD snooping, the IPv6 multicast router periodically sends out queries to hosts belonging to the
multicast group. If a host wants to leave a multicast group, it can silently leave or it can respond to the
query with a Multicast Listener Done message (equivalent to an IGMP Leave message). When
Immediate Leave is not configured (which it should not be if multiple clients for a group exist on the
same port), the configured last-listener query count determines the number of MASQs that are sent
before an MLD client is aged out.
When the last-listener query count is set for a VLAN, this count overrides the value configured
globally.When the VLAN count is not configured (set to the default of 0), the global count is used.
VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used
in MLD snooping.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-231
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count
Examples
This example shows how to globally set the last-listener query count:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count 1
This example shows how to set the last-listener query count for VLAN 10:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 10 last-listener-query-count 3
You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval
Sets IPv6 MLD snooping last-listener query
interval.
sdm prefer
Configures an SDM template to optimize system
resources based on how the switch is being used.
show ipv6 mld snooping querier
Displays MLD snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-232
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval
Use the ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval global configuration command to configure IP
version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping last-listener query interval on the switch
or on a VLAN. This time interval is the maximum time that a multicast router waits after issuing a
Mulitcast Address Specific Query (MASQ) before deleting a port from the multicast group. Use the no
form of this command to reset the query time to the default settings.
ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-listener-query-interval integer_value
no ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-listener-query-interval
Note
Syntax Description
Command Default
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Configure last-listener query interval on the specified VLAN. The
VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
integer_value
Set the time period (in thousands of a second) that a multicast router to wait
after issuing a MASQ before deleting a port from the multicast group. The
range is 100 to 32,768. The default is 1000 (1 second),
The default global query interval (maximum response time) is 1000 (1 second).
The default VLAN query interval (maximum response time) is 0 (the global count is used).
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global
configuration command and reload the switch.
In MLD snooping, when the IPv6 multicast router receives an MLD leave message, it sends out queries
to hosts belonging to the multicast group. If there are no responses from a port to a MASQ for a length
of time, the router deletes the port from the membership database of the multicast address. The last
listener query interval is the maximum time that the router waits before deleting a nonresponsive port
from the multicast group.
When a VLAN query interval is set, this overrides the global query interval. When the VLAN interval
is set at 0, the global value is used.
VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used
in MLD snooping.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-233
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval
Examples
This example shows how to globally set the last-listener query interval to 2 seconds:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval 2000
This example shows how to set the last-listener query interval for VLAN 1 to 5.5 seconds:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 last-listener-query-interval 5500
You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 MLD snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count
Sets IPv6 MLD snooping last-listener query count.
sdm prefer
Configures an SDM template to optimize system
resources based on how the switch is being used.
show ipv6 mld snooping querier
Sets IPv6 MLD snooping last-listener query
interval.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-234
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression
ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression
Use the ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression global configuration command to enable IP
version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping listener message suppression. Use the
no form of this command to disable MLD snooping listener message suppression.
ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression
no ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression
Note
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Command Default
The default is for MLD snooping listener message suppression to be disabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global
configuration command and reload the switch.
MLD snooping listener message suppression is equivalent to IGMP snooping report suppression. When
enabled, received MLDv1 reports to a group are forwarded to IPv6 multicast routers only once in every
report-forward time. This prevents the forwarding of duplicate reports.
Examples
This example shows how to enable MLD snooping listener-message-suppression:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression
This example shows how to disable MLD snooping listener-message-suppression:
Switch(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression
You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 mld snooping
Enables IPv6 MLD snooping.
sdm prefer
Configures an SDM template to optimize system
resources based on how the switch is being used.
show ipv6 mld snooping
Displays MLD snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-235
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable
ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable
Use the ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable global configuration command to configure the
number of IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) queries that the switch sends before
deleting a listener that does not respond, or enter a VLAN ID to configure on a per-VLAN basis. Use the
no form of this command to reset the variable to the default settings.
ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] robustness-variable integer_value
no ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] robustness-variable
Note
Syntax Description
Command Default
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Configure the robustness variable on the specified VLAN. The
VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
integer_value
The range is 1 to 3.
The default global robustness variable (number of queries before deleting a listener) is 2.
The default VLAN robustness variable (number of queries before aging out a multicast address) is 0,
which means that the system uses the global robustness variable for aging out the listener.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global
configuration command and reload the switch.
Robustness is measured in terms of the number of MLDv1 queries sent with no response before a port
is removed from a multicast group. A port is deleted when there are no MLDv1 reports received for the
configured number of MLDv1 queries. The global value determines the number of queries that the
switch waits before deleting a listener that does not respond and applies to all VLANs that do not have
a VLAN value set.
The robustness value configured for a VLAN overrides the global value. If the VLAN robustness value
is 0 (the default), the global value is used.
VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used
in MLD snooping.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-236
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable
Examples
This example shows how to configure the global robustness variable so that the switch sends out three
queries before it deletes a listener port that does not respond:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable 3
This example shows how to configure the robustness variable for VLAN 1. This value overrides the
global configuration for the VLAN:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 robustness-variable 1
You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 MLD snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count
Sets IPv6 MLD snooping last-listener query count.
sdm prefer
Configures an SDM template to optimize system
resources based on how the switch is being used.
show ipv6 mld snooping
Displays MLD snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-237
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping tcn
ipv6 mld snooping tcn
Use the ipv6 mld snooping tcn global configuration commands to configure IP version 6 (IPv6)
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Topology Change Notifications (TCNs). Use the no form of the
commands to reset the default settings.
ipv6 mld snooping tcn {flood query count integer_value | query solicit}
no ipv6 mld snooping tcn {flood query count integer_value | query solicit}
Note
Syntax Description
Command Default
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
flood query count
integer_value
Set the flood query count, which is the number of queries that are sent before
forwarding multicast data to only those ports requesting to receive it. The
range is 1 to 10.
query solicit
Enable soliciting of TCN queries.
TCN query soliciting is disabled.
When enabled, the default flood query count is 2.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global
configuration command and reload the switch.
Examples
This example shows how to enable TCN query soliciting:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping tcn query solicit.
This example shows how to set the flood query count to 5:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping tcn flood query count 5.
You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 MLD snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC
command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-238
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping tcn
Related Commands
Command
Description
sdm prefer
Configures an SDM template to optimize system
resources based on how the switch is being used.
show ipv6 mld snooping
Displays MLD snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-239
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping vlan
ipv6 mld snooping vlan
Use the ipv6 mld snooping vlan global configuration command to configure IP version 6 (IPv6)
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping parameters on the VLAN interface. Use the no form of
this command to reset the parameters to the default settings.
ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id [immediate-leave | mrouter interface interface-id | static
ipv6-multicast-address interface interface-id]
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id [immediate-leave | mrouter interface interface-id | static
ip-address interface interface-id]
Note
Syntax Description
Command Default
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
vlan vlan-id
Specify a VLAN number. The range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
immediate-leave
(Optional) Enable MLD Immediate-Leave processing on a VLAN
interface. Use the no form of the command to disable the Immediate
Leave feature on the interface.
mrouter interface
(Optional) Configure a multicast router port. The no form of the
command removes the configuration.
static ipv6-multicast-address
(Optional) Configure a multicast group with the specified IPv6
multicast address.
interface interface-id
Add a Layer 2 port to the group. The mrouter or static interface can be
a physical port or a port-channel interface in the range of 1 to 48.
MLD snooping Immediate-Leave processing is disabled.
By default, there are no static IPv6 multicast groups.
By default, there are no multicast router ports.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global
configuration command and reload the switch.
You should only configure the Immediate-Leave feature when there is only one receiver on every port in
the VLAN. The configuration is saved in NVRAM.
The static keyword is used for configuring the MLD member ports statically.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-240
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 mld snooping vlan
The configuration and the static ports and groups are saved in NVRAM.
When the IPv6 multicast router is a Catalyst 6500 switch and you are using extended VLANs (in the
range 1006 to 4094), IPv6 MLD snooping must be enabled on the extended VLAN on the Catalyst 6500
switch in order for the switch to receive queries on the VLAN. For normal-range VLANs (1 to 1005), it
is not necessary to enable IPv6 MLD snooping on the VLAN on the Catalyst 6500 switch.
VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used
in MLD snooping.
Examples
This example shows how to enable MLD Immediate-Leave processing on VLAN 1:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 immediate-leave
This example shows how to disable MLD Immediate-Leave processing on VLAN 1:
Switch(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 immediate-leave
This example shows how to configure a port as a multicast router port:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 mrouter interface gigabitethernet1/01/2
This example shows how to configure a static multicast group:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 2 static FF12::34 interface gigabitethernet1/01/2
You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id user EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 mld snooping
Enables IPv6 MLD snooping.
ipv6 mld snooping vlan
Configures IPv6 MLD snooping on the VLAN.
sdm prefer
Configures an SDM template to optimize system
resources based on how the switch is being used.
show ipv6 mld snooping
Displays IPv6 MLD snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-241
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 traffic-filter
ipv6 traffic-filter
Use the ipv6 traffic-filter interface configuration command to filter IPv6 traffic on an interface. Use the
no form of this command to disable the filtering of IPv6 traffic on an interface.
ipv6 traffic-filter access-list-name {in | out}
no ipv6 traffic-filter {in | out}
Note
Syntax Description
This command is available only if you have configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database
Management (SDM) template on the switch.
access-list-name
Specify an IPv6 access name.
in
Specify incoming IPv6 traffic.
out
Specify outgoing IPv6 traffic.
Note
The out keyword is not supported for Layer 2 interfaces (port
ACLs). The out keyword is supported for Layer 3 interfaces only
when the switch is running the metro IP access image.
Defaults
Filtering of IPv6 traffic on an interface is not configured.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default |
routing | vlan) global configuration command, and reload the switch.
You can use the ipv6 traffic-filter command on physical interfaces (Layer 2 or Layer 3 ports), Layer 3
port channels, or switch virtual interfaces (SVIs).
If the switch is running the metro IP access image, you can apply an ACL to outbound or inbound traffic
on Layer 3 interfaces (router ACLs), or to inbound traffic on Layer 2 interfaces (port ACLs). If the
switch is running the metro access image, you can apply ACLs only to inbound management traffic on
Layer 2 interfaces. These images do not support router ACLs.
If any port ACL (IPv4, IPv6, or MAC) is applied to an interface, that port ACL filters packets, and any
router ACLs attached to the SVI of the port VLAN are ignored.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-242
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
ipv6 traffic-filter
Examples
This example filters inbound IPv6 traffic on an IPv6-configured interface as defined by the access list
named cisco:
Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001::/64 eui-64
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 traffic-filter cisco in
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 access-list
Defines an IPv6 access list and sets deny or permit conditions for the
defined access list.
show ipv6 access-list
Displays the contents of all current IPv6 access lists.
show ipv6 interface
Displays the usability status of interfaces configured for IPv6.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-243
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
l2protocol-tunnel
l2protocol-tunnel
To enable tunneling of Layer 2 protocols on an access or 802.1Q tunnel port, use the l2protocol-tunnel
command in interface configuration mode. You can enable tunneling for Cisco Discovery Protocol
(CDP), Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), or VLAN Trunking
Protocol (VTP) packets, or configure the maximum number of incoming Layer 2 protocol packets to be
received before the port is disabled or the interface drops packets. You can also enable point-to-point
tunneling for Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), or
UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) packets. To disable tunneling on the interface, to return to
having no shutdown threshold, or to return to having no drop threshold, use the no form of this command.
l2protocol-tunnel [cdp | lldp | stp | vtp] [point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] |
[shutdown-threshold [cdp | lldp | stp | vtp] [point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] value] |
[drop-threshold [cdp | lldp | stp | vtp] [point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] value]
no l2protocol-tunnel [cdp | lldp | stp | vtp] [point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] |
[shutdown-threshold [cdp | lldp | stp | vtp] [point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] value] |
[drop-threshold [cdp | lldp | stp | vtp] [point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] value]
Syntax Description
Defaults
l2protocol-tunnel
Enable point-to-multipoint tunneling of CDP, STP, and VTP packets.
cdp
(Optional) Enable tunneling of CDP, specify a shutdown threshold for CDP, or
specify a drop threshold for CDP.
lldp
(Optional) Enables tunneling of LLDP, specify a shutdown threshold for
LLDP, or specify a drop threshold for LLDP.
stp
(Optional) Enable tunneling of STP, specify a shutdown threshold for STP, or
specify a drop threshold for STP.
vtp
(Optional) Enable tunneling or VTP, specify a shutdown threshold for VTP, or
specify a drop threshold for VTP.
drop-threshold
(Optional) Set a drop threshold for the maximum rate of Layer 2 protocol
packets per second to be received before an interface drops packets.
point-to-point
(Optional) Enable point-to point tunneling of PAgP, LACP, and UDLD packets.
pagp
(Optional) Enable point-to-point tunneling of PAgP, specify a shutdown
threshold for PAgP, or specify a drop threshold for PAgP.
lacp
(Optional) Enable point-to-point tunneling of LACP, specify a shutdown
threshold for LACP, or specify a drop threshold for LACP.
udld
(Optional) Enable point-to-point tunneling of UDLD, specify a shutdown
threshold for UDLD, or specify a drop threshold for UDLD.
shutdown-threshold
(Optional) Set a shutdown threshold for the maximum rate of Layer 2 protocol
packets per second to be received before an interface is shut down.
value
Specify a threshold in packets per second to be received for encapsulation
before the interface shuts down, or specify the threshold before the interface
drops packets. The range is 1 to 4096. The default is no threshold.
The default is that no Layer 2 protocol packets are tunneled. If you enter the command with no keyword,
tunneling is enabled for all CDP, LLDP, STP, and VTP packets.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-244
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
l2protocol-tunnel
If you enable point-to-point protocol tunneling with no keyword is entered, tunneling is enabled for all
three point-to-point protocols.
The default is no shutdown threshold for the number of Layer 2 protocol packets.
The default is no drop threshold for the number of Layer 2 protocol packets.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(58)SE
Support was added for LLDP tunneling.
Usage Guidelines
You must enter this command, with or without protocol types, to tunnel Layer 2 packets.
If you enter this command for a port channel, all ports in the channel must have the same configuration.
Layer 2 protocol tunneling across a service-provider network ensures that Layer 2 information is
propagated across the network to all customer locations. When protocol tunneling is enabled, protocol
packets are encapsulated with a well-known Cisco multicast address for transmission across the network.
When the packets reach their destination, the well-known MAC address is replaced by the Layer 2
protocol MAC address.
You can enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling individually for CDP, LLDP, STP, VTP, or for all these
protocols.
Note
The switch does not support VTP. CDP and STP are enabled by default network node interfaces (NNIs)
and disabled by default but can be enabled on enhanced network interfaces (ENIs). User network
interfaces (UNIs) do not support any of these protocols.
In a service-provider network, you can use Layer 2 protocol tunneling to enhance the creation of
EtherChannels by emulating a point-to-point network topology. When protocol tunneling is enabled on
the service-provider switch for PAgP or LACP, remote customer switches receive the protocol data units
(PDUs) and can negotiate automatic creation of EtherChannels.
Note
Only NNIs and ENIs support PAgP and LACP.
To enable tunneling of PAgP, LACP, and UDLD packets, you must have a point-to-point network
topology. To decrease the link-down detection time, you should also enable UDLD on the interface when
you enable tunneling of PAgP or LACP packets.
You can enable point-to-point protocol tunneling for PAgP, LACP, and UDLD individually or for all
three protocols.
Caution
PAgP, LACP, and UDLD tunneling is only intended to emulate a point-to-point topology. An erroneous
configuration that sends tunneled packets to many ports could lead to a network failure.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-245
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
l2protocol-tunnel
Enter the shutdown-threshold keyword to control the number of protocol packets per second that are
received on an interface before it shuts down. When no protocol option is specified with the keyword,
the threshold is applied to each of the tunneled Layer 2 protocol types. If you also set a drop threshold
on the interface, the shutdown-threshold value must be greater than or equal to the drop-threshold value.
When the shutdown threshold is reached, the interface is error-disabled. If you enable error recovery by
entering the errdisable recovery cause l2ptguard global configuration command, the interface is
brought out of the error-disabled state and allowed to retry the operation again when all the causes have
timed out. If the error recovery mechanism is not enabled for l2ptguard, the interface stays in the
error-disabled state until you enter the shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration commands.
Enter the drop-threshold keyword to control the number of protocol packets per second that are received
on an interface before it drops packets. When no protocol option is specified with a keyword, the
threshold is applied to each of the tunneled Layer 2 protocol types. If you also set a shutdown threshold
on the interface, the drop-threshold value must be less than or equal to the shutdown-threshold value.
When the drop threshold is reached, the interface drops Layer 2 protocol packets until the rate at which
they are received is below the drop threshold.
The configuration is saved in NVRAM.
Note
Examples
For more information about Layer 2 protocol tunneling, see the software configuration guide for this
release.
This example shows how to enable protocol tunneling for CDP packets and to configure the shutdown
threshold as 50 packets per second:
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel cdp
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold cdp 50
This example shows how to enable protocol tunneling for STP packets and to configure the drop
threshold as 400 packets per second:
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel stp
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold stp 400
This example shows how to enable point-to-point protocol tunneling for PAgP and UDLD packets and
to configure the PAgP drop threshold as 1000 packets per second:
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel point-to-point pagp
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel point-to-point udld
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold point-to-point pagp 1000
Related Commands
Command
Description
l2protocol-tunnel cos
Configures a class of service (CoS) value for all tunneled Layer 2
protocol packets.
show errdisable recovery
Displays errdisable recovery timer information.
show l2protocol-tunnel
Displays information about ports configured for Layer 2 protocol
tunneling, including port, protocol, CoS, and threshold.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-246
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
l2protocol-tunnel cos
l2protocol-tunnel cos
Use the l2protocol-tunnel cos global configuration command to configure class of service (CoS) value
for all tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets. Use the no form of this command to return to the default
setting.
l2protocol-tunnel cos value
no l2protocol-tunnel cos
Syntax Description
value
Defaults
The default is to use the CoS value configured for data on the interface. If no CoS value is configured,
the default is 5 for all tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Specify CoS priority value for tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets. If a CoS
value is configured for data packets for the interface, the default is to use
this CoS value. If no CoS value is configured for the interface, the default is
5. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the highest priority.
When enabled, the tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets use this CoS value.
The value is saved in NVRAM.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a Layer-2 protocol-tunnel CoS value of 7:
Switch(config)# l2protocol-tunnel cos 7
Related Commands
Command
Description
show l2protocol-tunnel
Displays information about ports configured for Layer 2 protocol
tunneling, including CoS.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-247
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
lacp port-priority
lacp port-priority
Use the lacp port-priority interface configuration command to configure the port priority for the Link
Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
lacp port-priority priority
no lacp port-priority
Note
LACP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
Syntax Description
priority
Defaults
The default is 32768.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Port priority for LACP. The range is 1 to 65535.
The lacp port-priority interface configuration command determines which ports are bundled and which
ports are put in hot-standby mode when there are more than eight ports in an LACP channel group. This
command takes effect only on EtherChannel ports that are already configured for LACP. If the interface
is a user network interface (UNI), you must use the port-type nni or port-type eni interface
configuration command to change the interface to an NNI or ENI before configuring lacp port-priority.
In priority comparisons, numerically lower values have higher priority. The switch uses the priority to
decide which ports should be put in standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all
compatible ports from being active. If two or more ports have the same LACP port priority (for example,
they are configured with the default setting of 65535), an internal value for the port number determines
the priority.
Note
The LACP port priorities are only effective if the ports are on the switch that controls the LACP link.
See the lacp system-priority global configuration command for information about determining which
switch controls the link.
Use the show lacp internal privileged EXEC command to display LACP port priorities and internal port
number values.
For information about configuring LACP on physical ports, see the “Configuring EtherChannels”
chapter in the software configuration guide for this release.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-248
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
lacp port-priority
Examples
This example shows how to configure the LACP port priority on a port:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# lacp port-priority 1000
You can verify your settings by entering the show lacp [channel-group-number] internal privileged
EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
channel-group
Assigns an Ethernet port to an EtherChannel group.
lacp system-priority
Configures the LACP system priority.
show lacp [channel-group-number]
internal
Displays internal information for all channel groups or for
the specified channel group.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-249
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
lacp system-priority
lacp system-priority
Use the lacp system-priority global configuration command to configure the system priority for the
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). Use the no form of this command to return to the default
setting.
lacp system-priority priority
no lacp system-priority
Note
LACP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
Syntax Description
priority
Defaults
The default is 32768.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
System priority for LACP. The range is 1 to 65535.
The lacp system-priority command determines which switch in an LACP link controls port priorities.
Although this is a global configuration command, the priority only takes effect on EtherChannels that
have physical ports that are already configured for LACP.
An LACP channel group can have up to 16 Ethernet ports of the same type. Up to eight ports can be
active, and up to eight ports can be in standby mode. When there are more than eight ports in an LACP
channel group, the switch on the controlling end of the link uses port priorities to determine which ports
are bundled into the channel and which ports are put in hot-standby mode. Port priorities on the other
switch (the noncontrolling end of the link) are ignored.
In priority comparisons, numerically lower values have higher priority. Therefore, the switch with the
numerically lower system value (higher priority value) for LACP system priority becomes the
controlling switch. If both switches have the same LACP system priority (for example, they are both
configured with the default setting of 32768), the LACP system ID (the switch MAC address) determines
which switch is in control.
The lacp system-priority command applies to all LACP EtherChannels on the switch.
Use the show etherchannel summary privileged EXEC command to see which ports are in the
hot-standby mode (denoted with an H port-state flag).
For more information about configuring LACP on physical ports, see the “Configuring EtherChannels”
chapter in the software configuration guide for this release.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-250
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
lacp system-priority
Examples
This example shows how to set the LACP system priority:
Switch(config)# lacp system-priority 20000
You can verify your settings by entering the show lacp sys-id privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
channel-group
Assigns an Ethernet port to an EtherChannel group.
lacp port-priority
Configures the LACP port priority.
show lacp sys-id
Displays the system identifier that is being used by LACP.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-251
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
link state group
link state group
Use the link state group interface configuration command to configure a port as a member of a link-state
group. Use the no form of this command to remove the port from the link-state group.
link state group [number] {upstream | downstream}
no link state group [number] {upstream | downstream}
Syntax Description
number
(Optional) Specify the link-state group number. The group number can
be 1 to 2.The default is 1.
upstream
Configure a port as an upstream port for a specific link-state group.
downstream
Configure a port as a downstream port for a specific link-state group.
Defaults
The default group is group 1.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the link state group interface configuration command to configure a port as an upstream or
downstream port for a specific link-state group. If the group number is omitted, the default group is
assumed.
An interface can be an aggregation of ports (an EtherChannel), a single switch port in access or trunk
mode, or a routed port. Each downstream interface can be associated with one or more upstream
interfaces. Upstream interfaces can be bundled together, and each downstream interface can be
associated with a single group consisting of multiple upstream interfaces, referred to as link-state
groups.
The link state of the downstream interfaces are dependent on the link state of the upstream interfaces in
the associated link-state group. If all of the upstream interfaces in a link-state group are in a link-down
state, the associated downstream interfaces are forced into a link-down state. If any one of the upstream
interfaces in the link-state group is in a link-up state, the associated downstream interfaces are allowed
to change to, or remain in, a link-up state.
Follow these guidelines to avoid configuration problems:
•
An interface that is defined as an upstream interface cannot also be defined as a downstream
interface in the same or a different link-state group. The reverse is also true.
•
An interface cannot be a member of more than one link-state group.
•
You can configure only two link-state groups per switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-252
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
link state group
Examples
This example shows how to configure the interfaces as upstream in group 2:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface range gigabitethernet0/11 - 14
Switch(config-if-range)# link state group 2 downstream
Switch(config-if-range)# end
Switch(config-if)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
link state track
Enables a link-state group.
show link state group
Displays the link-state group information.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this link to
the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_command
_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate to
the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-253
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
link state track
link state track
Use the link state track user EXEC command to enable a link-state group. Use the no form of this
command to disable a link-state group.
link state track [number]
no link state track [number]
Syntax Description
number
Defaults
Link-state tracking is disabled for all groups.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
(Optional) Specify the link-state group number. The group number can
be 1 to 2. The default is 1.
Usage Guidelines
Use the link state track global configuration command to enable a link-state group.
Examples
This example shows how enable link-state group 2:
Switch(config)# link state track 2
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
link state group
Configures an interface as a member of a link-state group.
show link state group
Displays the link-state group information.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this
link to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_comm
and_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate
to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-254
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
location (global configuration)
location (global configuration)
Use the location global configuration command to configure location information for an endpoint. Use
the no form of this command to remove the location information.
location {admin-tag string | civic-location identifier id | elin-location string identifier id}
no location {admin-tag string | civic-location identifier id | elin-location string identifier id}
Syntax Description
admin-tag
Configure administrative tag or site information.
civic-location
Configure civic location information.
elin-location
Configure emergency location information (ELIN).
identifier id
Specify the ID for the civic location or the elin location. The ID range
is 1 to 4095.
Note
string
The identifier for the civic location in the LLDP-MED TLV is
limited to 250 bytes or less. To avoid error messages about
available buffer space during switch configuration, be sure that
the total length of all civic-location information specified for
each civic-location identifier does not exceed 250 bytes.
Specify the site or location information in alphanumeric format.
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
After entering the location civic-location identifier id global configuration command, you enter civic
location configuration mode. In this mode, you can enter the civic location and the postal location
information.
The civic-location identifier must not exceed 250 bytes.
Use the no lldp med-tlv-select location information interface configuration command to disable the
location TLV. The location TLV is enabled by default. For more information, see the “Configuring LLDP
and LLDP-MED” chapter of the software configuration guide for this release.
Examples
This example shows how to configure civic location information on the switch:
Switch(config)# location civic-location identifier 1
Switch(config-civic)# number 3550
Switch(config-civic)# primary-road-name "Cisco Way"
Switch(config-civic)# city "San Jose"
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-255
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
location (global configuration)
Switch(config-civic)#
Switch(config-civic)#
Switch(config-civic)#
Switch(config-civic)#
Switch(config-civic)#
Switch(config-civic)#
state CA
building 19
room C6
county "Santa Clara"
country US
end
You can verify your settings by entering the show location civic-location privileged EXEC command.
This example shows how to configure the emergency location information location on the switch:
Switch (config)# location elin-location 14085553881 identifier 1
You can verify your settings by entering the show location elin privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
location (interface configuration)
Configures the location information for an interface.
show location
Displays the location information for an endpoint.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-256
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
location (interface configuration)
location (interface configuration)
Use the location interface command to enter location information for an interface. Use the no form of
this command to remove the interface location information.
location {additional-location-information word | civic-location-id id | elin-location-id id}
no location {additional-location-information word | civic-location-id id | elin-location-id id}
Syntax Description
additional-location-information
Configure additional information for a location or place.
word
Specify a word or phrase that provides additional location
information.
civic-location-id
Configure global civic location information for an interface.
elin-location-id
Configure emergency location information for an interface.
id
Specify the ID for the civic location or the elin location. The ID
range is 1 to 4095.
Note
The identifier for the civic location in the LLDP-MED
TLV is limited to 250 bytes or less. To avoid error
messages about available buffer space during switch
configuration, be sure that the total length of all
civic-location information specified for each
civic-location identifier does not exceed 250 bytes.
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
After entering the location civic-location-id id interface configuration command, you enter civic
location configuration mode. In this mode, you can enter the additional location information.
The civic-location identifier must not exceed 250 bytes.
Examples
These examples show how to enter civic location information for an interface:
Switch(config-if)# int g1/0/1
Switch(config-if)# location civic-location-id 1
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch(config-if)# int g2/0/1
Switch(config-if)# location civic-location-id 1
Switch(config-if)# end
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-257
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
location (interface configuration)
You can verify your settings by entering the show location civic interface privileged EXEC command.
This example shows how to enter emergency location information for an interface:
Switch(config)# int g2/0/2
Switch(config-if)# location elin-location-id 1
Switch(config-if)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show location elin interface privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
location (global configuration)
Configures the location information for an endpoint.
show location
Displays the location information for an endpoint.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-258
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
logging event
logging event
Use the logging event interface configuration command to enable notification of interface link status
changes. Use the no form of this command to disable notification.
logging event {bundle-status | link-status | spanning-tree | status | trunk status}
no logging event {bundle-status | link-status | spanning-tree | status | trunk status}
Syntax Description
bundle-status
Enable notification of BUNDLE and UNBUNDLE messages.
link-status
Enable notification of interface data link status changes.
spanning-tree
Enable notification of spanning-tree events.
status
Enable notification of spanning-tree state change messages.
trunk-status
Enable notification of trunk-status messages.
Defaults
Event logging is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to enable spanning-tree logging:
Switch(config-if)# logging event spanning-tree
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-259
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
logging file
logging file
Use the logging file global configuration command to set logging file parameters. Use the no form of
this command to return to the default setting.
logging file filesystem:filename [max-file-size [min-file-size]] [severity-level-number | type]
no logging file filesystem:filename [severity-level-number | type]
Syntax Description
filesystem:filename
Alias for a flash file system. Contains the path and name of the file that
contains the log messages.
The syntax for the local flash file system:
flash:
Defaults
max-file-size
(Optional) Specify the maximum logging file size. The range is 4096 to
2147483647.
min-file-size
(Optional) Specify the minimum logging file size. The range is 1024 to
2147483647.
severity-level-number
(Optional) Specify the logging severity level. The range is 0 to 7. See the type
option for the meaning of each level.
type
(Optional) Specify the logging type. These keywords are valid:
•
emergencies—System is unusable (severity 0).
•
alerts—Immediate action needed (severity 1).
•
critical—Critical conditions (severity 2).
•
errors—Error conditions (severity 3).
•
warnings—Warning conditions (severity 4).
•
notifications—Normal but significant messages (severity 5).
•
information—Information messages (severity 6).
•
debugging—Debugging messages (severity 7).
The minimum file size is 2048 bytes; the maximum file size is 4096 bytes.
The default severity level is 7 (debugging messages and numerically lower levels).
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-260
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
logging file
Usage Guidelines
The log file is stored in ASCII text format in an internal buffer on the switch. You can access logged
system messages by using the switch command-line interface (CLI) or by saving them to a properly
configured syslog server. If the switch fails, the log is lost unless you had previously saved it to flash
memory by using the logging file flash:filename global configuration command.
After saving the log to flash memory by using the logging file flash:filename global configuration
command, you can use the more flash:filename privileged EXEC command to display its contents.
The command rejects the minimum file size if it is greater than the maximum file size minus 1024; the
minimum file size then becomes the maximum file size minus 1024.
Specifying a level causes messages at that level and numerically lower levels to be displayed.
Examples
This example shows how to save informational log messages to a file in flash memory:
Switch(config)# logging file flash:logfile informational
You can verify your setting by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this
link to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_comma
nd_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate
to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-261
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac access-group
mac access-group
Use the mac access-group interface configuration command to apply a MAC access control list (ACL)
to a Layer 2 interface. Use the no form of this command to remove all MAC ACLs or the specified MAC
ACL from the interface. You create the MAC ACL by using the mac access-list extended global
configuration command.
mac access-group {name} in
no mac access-group {name}
Syntax Description
name
Specify a named MAC access list.
in
Specify that the ACL is applied in the ingress direction. Outbound ACLs are not
supported on Layer 2 interfaces.
Defaults
No MAC ACL is applied to the interface.
Command Modes
Interface configuration (Layer 2 interfaces only)
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can apply MAC ACLs only to ingress Layer 2 interfaces. You cannot apply MAC ACLs to Layer 3
interfaces.
On Layer 2 interfaces, you can filter IP traffic by using IP access lists and non-IP traffic by using MAC
access lists. You can filter both IP and non-IP traffic on the same Layer 2 interface by applying both an
IP ACL and a MAC ACL to the interface. You can apply no more than one IP access list and one MAC
access list to the same Layer 2 interface.
If a MAC ACL is already configured on a Layer 2 interface and you apply a new MAC ACL to the
interface, the new ACL replaces the previously configured one.
If you apply an ACL to a Layer 2 interface on a switch, and the switch has an input Layer 3 ACL or a
VLAN map applied to a VLAN that the interface is a member of, the ACL applied to the Layer 2
interface takes precedence.
When an inbound packet is received on an interface with a MAC ACL applied, the switch checks the
match conditions in the ACL. If the conditions are matched, the switch forwards or drops the packet,
according to the ACL.
If the specified ACL does not exist, the switch forwards all packets.
Note
For more information about configuring MAC extended ACLs, see the “Configuring Network Security
with ACLs” chapter in the software configuration guide for this release.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-262
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac access-group
Examples
This example shows how to apply a MAC extended ACL named macacl2 to an interface:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# mac access-group macacl2 in
You can verify your settings by entering the show mac access-group privileged EXEC command. You
can see configured ACLs on the switch by entering the show access-lists privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show access-lists
Displays the ACLs configured on the switch.
show mac access-group
Displays the MAC ACLs configured on the switch.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this
link to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_com
mand_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to
navigate to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-263
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac access-list extended
mac access-list extended
Use the mac access-list extended global configuration command to create an access list based on MAC
addresses for non-IP traffic. Using this command puts you in the extended MAC access-list
configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
Note
You cannot apply named MAC extended ACLs to Layer 3 interfaces.
mac access-list extended name
no mac access-list extended name
Syntax Description
name
Defaults
By default, there are no MAC access lists created.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Assign a name to the MAC extended access list.
MAC named extended lists are used with VLAN maps and class maps.
You can apply named MAC extended ACLs to VLAN maps or to Layer 2 interfaces.
You cannot apply named MAC extended ACLs to Layer 3 interfaces.
Entering the mac access-list extended command enables the MAC access-list configuration mode.
These configuration commands are available:
Note
•
default: sets a command to its default.
•
deny: specifies packets to reject. For more information, see the deny (MAC access-list
configuration) MAC access-list configuration command.
•
exit: exits from MAC access-list configuration mode.
•
no: negates a command or sets its defaults.
•
permit: specifies packets to forward. For more information, see the permit (MAC access-list
configuration) command.
For more information about MAC extended access lists, see the software configuration guide for this
release.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-264
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac access-list extended
Examples
This example shows how to create a MAC named extended access list named mac1 and to enter extended
MAC access-list configuration mode:
Switch(config)# mac access-list extended mac1
Switch(config-ext-macl)#
This example shows how to delete MAC named extended access list mac1:
Switch(config)# no mac access-list extended mac1
You can verify your settings by entering the show access-lists privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
deny (MAC access-list
configuration)
Configures the MAC ACL (in extended MAC-access list configuration
mode).
permit (MAC access-list
configuration)
show access-lists
Displays the access lists configured on the switch.
vlan access-map
Defines a VLAN map and enters access-map configuration mode where
you can specify a MAC ACL to match and the action to be taken.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-265
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table aging-time
mac address-table aging-time
Use the mac address-table aging-time global configuration command to set the length of time that a
dynamic entry remains in the MAC address table after the entry is used or updated. Use the no form of
this command to return to the default setting. The aging time applies to all VLANs or a specified VLAN.
mac address-table aging-time {0 | 10-1000000} [vlan vlan-id]
no mac address-table aging-time {0 | 10-1000000} [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax DescriptionI
0
This value disables aging. Static address entries are never aged or removed from
the table.
10-1000000
Aging time in seconds. The range is 10 to 1000000 seconds.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Specify the VLAN ID to which to apply the aging time. The range is
1 to 4094.
Defaults
The default is 300 seconds.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If hosts do not send continuously, increase the aging time to record the dynamic entries for a longer time.
Increasing the time can reduce the possibility of flooding when the hosts send again.
If you do not specify a specific VLAN, this command sets the aging time for all VLANs.
Examples
This example shows how to set the aging time to 200 seconds for all VLANs:
Switch(config)# mac address-table aging-time 200
You can verify your setting by entering the show mac address-table aging-time privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show mac address-table aging-time
Displays the MAC address table aging time for all VLANs
or the specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-266
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table learning vlan
mac address-table learning vlan
Use the mac address-table learning global configuration command to enable MAC address learning on
a VLAN. This is the default state. Use the no form of this command to disable MAC address learning
on a VLAN to control which VLANs can learn MAC addresses.
mac address-table learning vlan vlan-id
no mac address-table learning vlan vlan-id
Syntax Description
vlan-id
Defaults
By default, MAC address learning is enabled on all VLANs.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Specify a single VLAN ID or a range of VLAN IDs separated by a hyphen or
comma. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094. It cannot be an internal VLAN.
Customers in a service provider network can tunnel a large number of MAC addresses through the
network and fill the available MAC address table space. When you control MAC address learning on a
VLAN, you can manage the available MAC address table space by controlling which VLANs, and
therefore which ports, can learn MAC addresses.
You can disable MAC address learning on a single VLAN (for example, no mac address-table learning
vlan 223) or on a range of VLANs (for example, mac address-table learning vlan 1-10, 15).
Before you disable MAC address learning, be sure that you are familiar with the network topology and
the switch system configuration. Disabling MAC address learning on a VLAN could cause flooding in
the network. For example, if you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN with a configured switch
virtual interface (SVI), the switch floods all IP packets in the Layer 2 domain. If you disable MAC
address learning on a VLAN that includes more than two ports, every packet entering the switch is
flooded in that VLAN domain. We recommend that you disable MAC address learning only in VLANs
that contain two ports and that you use caution before disabling MAC address learning on a VLAN with
an SVI.
You cannot disable MAC address learning on a VLAN that the switch uses internally. If the VLAN ID
that you enter in the no mac address-table learning vlan vlan-id command is an internal VLAN, the
switch generates an error message and rejects the command. To view used internal VLANs, enter the
show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC command.
If you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN configured as a private VLAN primary or a secondary
VLAN, the MAC addresses are still learned on the other VLAN (primary or secondary) that belongs to
the private VLAN.
You cannot disable MAC address learning on an RSPAN VLAN. The configuration is not allowed.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-267
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table learning vlan
If you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN that includes a secure port, MAC address learning is
not disabled on the secure port. If you later disable port security on the interface, the disabled MAC
address learning state is enabled.
To display MAC address learning status of all VLANs or a specified VLAN, enter the show
mac-address-table learning [vlan vlan-id command].
Examples
This example shows how to disable MAC address learning on VLAN 2003:
Switch(config)# no mac address-table learning vlan 2003
To display MAC address learning status of all VLANs or a specified VLAN, enter the show mac
address-table learning [vlan vlan-id] command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show mac address-table learning
Displays the MAC address learning status on all VLANs or
on the specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-268
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table move update
mac address-table move update
Use the mac address-table move update global configuration command to enable the MAC
address-table move update feature. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
mac address-table move update {receive | transmit}
no mac address-table move update {receive | transmit}
Syntax Description
receive
Specify that the switch processes MAC address-table move update messages.
transmit
Specify that the switch sends MAC address-table move update messages to
other switches in the network if the primary link goes down and the standby
link comes up.
Command Modes
Global configuration.
Defaults
By default, the MAC address-table move update feature is disabled.
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The MAC address-table move update feature allows the switch to provide rapid bidirectional
convergence if a primary (forwarding) link goes down and the standby link begins forwarding traffic.
You can configure the access switch to send the MAC address-table move update messages if the primary
link goes down and the standby link comes up. You can configure the uplink switches to receive and
process the MAC address-table move update messages.
Examples
This example shows how to configure an access switch to send MAC address-table move update
messages:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(conf)# mac address-table move update transmit
Switch(conf)# end
This example shows how to configure an uplink switch to get and process MAC address-table move
update messages:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(conf)# mac address-table move update receive
Switch(conf)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show mac address-table move update privileged EXEC
command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-269
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table move update
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear mac address-table move
update
Clears the MAC address-table move update global counters.
debug matm move update
Debugs the MAC address-table move update message
processing.
show mac address-table move
update
Displays the MAC address-table move update information on
the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-270
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table notification
mac address-table notification
Use the mac address-table notification global configuration command to enable the MAC address
notification feature on the switch. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
mac address-table notification {change [history-size value | interval value] | mac-move |
threshold [[limit percentage] interval time]}
no mac address-table notification {change [history-size value | interval value] | mac-move |
threshold [[limit percentage] interval time]}
Syntax Description
Defaults
change
Enable or disable the MAC notification on the switch.
history-size value
(Optional) Configure the maximum number of entries in the MAC
notification history table. The range is 1 to 500 entries. The default is 1.
interval value
(Optional) Set the notification trap interval. The switch sends the notification
traps when this amount of time has elapsed. The range is 0 to 2147483647
seconds. The default is 1 second.
mac-move
Enable MAC move notification.
threshold
Enable MAC threshold notification.
limit percentage
(Optional) Enter the MAC utilization threshold percentage. The range is 1 to
100 percent. The default is 50 percent.
interval time
(Optional) Enter the time between MAC threshold notifications. The range is
120 to 1000000 seconds. The default is 120 seconds.
By default, the MAC address notification, MAC move, and MAC threshold monitoring are disabled.
The default MAC change trap interval is 1 second.
The default number of entries in the history table is 1.
The default MAC utilization threshold is 50 percent.
The default time between MAC threshold notifications is 120 seconds.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The MAC address notification change feature sends Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
traps to the network management system (NMS) whenever a new MAC address is added or an old
address is deleted from the forwarding tables. MAC change notifications are generated only for dynamic
and secure MAC addresses and are not generated for self addresses, multicast addresses, or other static
addresses.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-271
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table notification
When you configure the history-size option, the existing MAC address history table is deleted, and a
new table is created.
You enable the MAC address notification change feature by using the mac address-table notification
change command. You must also enable MAC address notification traps on an interface by using the
snmp trap mac-notification change interface configuration command and configure the switch to send
MAC address traps to the NMS by using the snmp-server enable traps mac-notification change global
configuration command.
You can also enable traps whenever a MAC address is moved from one port to another in the same VLAN
by entering the mac address-table notification mac-move command and the snmp-server enable
traps mac-notification move global configuration command.
To generate traps whenever the MAC address table threshold limit is reached or exceeded, enter the mac
address-table notification threshold [limit percentage] | [interval time] command and the snmp-server
enable traps mac-notification threshold global configuration command.
Examples
This example shows how to enable the MAC address-table change notification feature, set the interval
time to 60 seconds, and set the history-size to 100 entries:
Switch(config)# mac address-table notification change
Switch(config)# mac address-table notification change interval 60
Switch(config)# mac address-table notification change history-size 100
You can verify your settings by entering the show mac address-table notification privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear mac address-table notification
Clears the MAC address notification global counters.
show mac address-table notification
Displays the MAC address notification settings on all
interfaces or on the specified interface.
snmp-server enable traps
Sends the SNMP MAC notification traps when the
mac-notification keyword is appended.
snmp trap mac-notification change
Enables the SNMP MAC notification trap on a specific
interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-272
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table static
mac address-table static
Use the mac address-table static global configuration command to add static addresses to the MAC
address table. Use the no form of this command to remove static entries from the table.
mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface interface-id
no mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id [interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
mac-addr
Destination MAC address (unicast or multicast) to add to the address
table. Packets with this destination address received in the specified
VLAN are forwarded to the specified interface.
vlan vlan-id
Specify the VLAN for which the packet with the specified MAC address
is received. The range is 1 to 4094.
interface interface-id
Interface to which the received packet is forwarded. Valid interfaces
include physical ports and port channels.
Defaults
No static addresses are configured.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This example shows how to add the static address c2f3.220a.12f4 to the MAC address table. When a
packet is received in VLAN 4 with this MAC address as its destination, the packet is forwarded to the
specified interface:
Switch(config)# mac address-table static c2f3.220a.12f4 vlan 4 interface
gigabitethernet0/1
You can verify your setting by entering the show mac address-table privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-273
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table static drop
mac address-table static drop
Use the mac address-table static drop global configuration command to enable unicast MAC address
filtering and to configure the switch to drop traffic with a specific source or destination MAC address.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id drop
no mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id
Syntax Description
mac-addr
Unicast source or destination MAC address. Packets with this MAC address are
dropped.
vlan vlan-id
Specify the VLAN for which the packet with the specified MAC address is
received. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094.
Defaults
Unicast MAC address filtering is disabled. The switch does not drop traffic for specific source or
destination MAC addresses.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Follow these guidelines when using this feature:
•
Multicast MAC addresses, broadcast MAC addresses, and router MAC addresses are not supported.
Packets that are forwarded to the CPU are also not supported.
•
If you add a unicast MAC address as a static address and configure unicast MAC address filtering,
the switch either adds the MAC address as a static address or drops packets with that MAC address,
depending on which command was entered last. The second command that you entered overrides the
first command.
For example, if you enter the mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface
interface-id global configuration command followed by the mac address-table static mac-addr
vlan vlan-id drop command, the switch drops packets with the specified MAC address as a source
or destination.
If you enter the mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id drop global configuration
command followed by the mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface interface-id
command, the switch adds the MAC address as a static address.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-274
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mac address-table static drop
Examples
This example shows how to enable unicast MAC address filtering and to configure the switch to drop
packets that have a source or destination address of c2f3.220a.12f4. When a packet is received in
VLAN 4 with this MAC address as its source or destination, the packet is dropped:
Switch(config)# mac address-table static c2f3.220a.12f4 vlan 4 drop
This example shows how to disable unicast MAC address filtering:
Switch(config)# no mac address-table static c2f3.220a.12f4 vlan 4
You can verify your setting by entering the show mac address-table static privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show mac address-table static
Displays only static MAC address table entries.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-275
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
macro apply
macro apply
Use the macro apply interface configuration command to apply a macro to an interface or to apply and
trace a macro configuration on an interface.
macro {apply | trace} macro-name [parameter {value}] [parameter {value}]
[parameter {value}]
Syntax Description
apply
Apply a macro to the specified interface.
trace
Use the trace keyword to apply a macro to an interface and to debug the macro.
macro-name
Specify the name of the macro.
parameter value (Optional) Specify unique parameter values that are specific to the interface. You
can enter up to three keyword-value pairs. Parameter keyword matching is case
sensitive. All matching occurrences of the keyword are replaced with the
corresponding value.
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can use the macro trace macro-name interface configuration command to apply and show the
macros running on an interface or to debug the macro to find any syntax or configuration errors.
If a command fails because of a syntax error or a configuration error when you apply a macro, the macro
continues to apply the remaining commands to the interface.
When creating a macro that requires the assignment of unique values, use the parameter value keywords
to designate values specific to the interface.
Keyword matching is case sensitive. All matching occurrences of the keyword are replaced with the
corresponding value. Any full match of a keyword, even if it is part of a larger string, is considered a
match and is replaced by the corresponding value.
Some macros might contain keywords that require a parameter value. You can use the macro apply
macro-name ? command to display a list of any required values in the macro. If you apply a macro
without entering the keyword values, the commands are invalid and are not applied.
When you apply a macro to an interface, the macro name is automatically added to the interface. You
can display the applied commands and macro names by using the show running-configuration
interface interface-id user EXEC command.
A macro applied to an interface range behaves the same way as a macro applied to a single interface.
When you use an interface range, the macro is applied sequentially to each interface within the range. If
a macro command fails on one interface, it is still applied to the remaining interfaces.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-276
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
macro apply
You can delete a macro-applied configuration on an interface by entering the default interface
interface-id interface configuration command.
Examples
After you have created a macro by using the macro name global configuration command, you can apply
it to an interface. This example shows how to apply a user-created macro called duplex to an interface:
Switch(config-if)# macro apply duplex
To debug a macro, use the macro trace interface configuration command to find any syntax or
configuration errors in the macro as it is applied to an interface. This example shows how troubleshoot
the user-created macro called duplex on an interface:
Switch(config-if)# macro trace duplex
Applying command...‘duplex auto’
%Error Unknown error.
Applying command...‘speed nonegotiate’
Related Commands
Command
Description
macro description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to an interface.
macro global
Applies a macro on a switch or applies and traces a macro on a switch.
macro global description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.
macro name
Creates a macro.
show parser macro
Displays the macro definition for all macros or for the specified macro.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-277
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
macro description
macro description
Use the macro description interface configuration command to enter a description about which macros
are applied to an interface. Use the no form of this command to remove the description.
macro description text
no macro description text
Syntax Description
description text
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Enter a description about the macros that are applied to the specified interface.
Use the description keyword to associate comment text, or the macro name, with an interface. When
multiple macros are applied on a single interface, the description text will be from the last applied macro.
This example shows how to add a description to an interface:
Switch(config-if)# macro description duplex settings
You can verify your settings by entering the show parser macro description privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
macro apply
Applies a macro on an interface or applies and traces a macro on an
interface.
macro global
Applies a macro on a switch or applies and traces a macro on a switch
macro global description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.
macro name
Creates a macro.
show parser macro
Displays the macro definition for all macros or for the specified
macro.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-278
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
macro global
macro global
Use the macro global global configuration command to apply a macro to a switch or to apply and trace
a macro configuration on a switch.
macro global {apply | trace} macro-name [parameter {value}] [parameter {value}]
[parameter {value}]
Syntax Description
apply
Apply a macro to the switch.
trace
Apply a macro to a switch and to debug the macro.
macro-name
Specify the name of the macro.
parameter value (Optional) Specify unique parameter values that are specific to the switch. You can
enter up to three keyword-value pairs. Parameter keyword matching is case
sensitive. All matching occurrences of the keyword are replaced with the
corresponding value.
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can use the macro trace macro-name global configuration command to apply and to show the
macros running on a switch or to debug the macro to find any syntax or configuration errors.
If a command fails because of a syntax error or a configuration error when you apply a macro, the macro
continues to apply the remaining commands to the switch.
When creating a macro that requires the assignment of unique values, use the parameter value keywords
to designate values specific to the switch.
Keyword matching is case sensitive. All matching occurrences of the keyword are replaced with the
corresponding value. Any full match of a keyword, even if it is part of a larger string, is considered a
match and is replaced by the corresponding value.
Some macros might contain keywords that require a parameter value. You can use the macro global
apply macro-name ? command to display a list of any required values in the macro. If you apply a macro
without entering the keyword values, the commands are invalid and are not applied.
When you apply a macro to a switch, the macro name is automatically added to the switch. You can
display the applied commands and macro names by using the show running-configuration user EXEC
command.
You can delete a global macro-applied configuration on a switch only by entering the no version of each
command contained in the macro.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-279
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
macro global
Examples
After you have created a new macro by using the macro name global configuration command, you can
apply it to a switch. This example shows how see the snmp macro and how to apply the macro and set
the hostname to test-server and set the IP precedence value to 7:
Switch# show parser macro name snmp
Macro name : snmp
Macro type : customizable
#enable port security, linkup, and linkdown traps
snmp-server enable traps port-security
snmp-server enable traps linkup
snmp-server enable traps linkdown
#set snmp-server host
snmp-server host ADDRESS
#set SNMP trap notifications precedence
snmp-server ip precedence VALUE
-------------------------------------------------Switch(config)# macro global apply snmp ADDRESS test-server VALUE 7
To debug a macro, use the macro global trace global configuration command to find any syntax or
configuration errors in the macro when it is applied to a switch. In this example, the ADDRESS parameter
value was not entered, causing the snmp-server host command to fail while the remainder of the macro
is applied to the switch:
Switch(config)# macro global trace snmp VALUE 7
Applying command...‘snmp-server enable traps port-security’
Applying command...‘snmp-server enable traps linkup’
Applying command...‘snmp-server enable traps linkdown’
Applying command...‘snmp-server host’
%Error Unknown error.
Applying command...‘snmp-server ip precedence 7’
Related Commands
Command
Description
macro apply
Applies a macro on an interface or applies and traces a macro on an
interface.
macro description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to an interface.
macro global description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.
macro name
Creates a macro.
show parser macro
Displays the macro definition for all macros or for the specified
macro.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-280
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
macro global description
macro global description
Use the macro global description global configuration command to enter a description about the
macros that are applied to the switch. Use the no form of this command to remove the description.
macro global description text
no macro global description text
Syntax Description
description text
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Enter a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.
Use the description keyword to associate comment text, or the macro name, with a switch. When
multiple macros are applied on a switch, the description text will be from the last applied macro.
This example shows how to add a description to a switch:
Switch(config)# macro global description udld aggressive mode enabled
You can verify your settings by entering the show parser macro description privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
macro apply
Applies a macro on an interface or applies and traces a macro on an
interface.
macro description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to an interface.
macro global
Applies a macro on a switch or applies and traces a macro on a switch.
macro name
Creates a macro.
show parser macro
Displays the macro definition for all macros or for the specified macro.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-281
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
macro name
macro name
Use the macro name global configuration command to create a configuration macro. Use the no form
of this command to delete the macro definition.
macro name macro-name
no macro name macro-name
Syntax Description
macro-name
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Name of the macro.
A macro can contain up to 3000 characters. Enter one macro command per line. Use the @ character to
end the macro. Use the # character at the beginning of a line to enter comment text within the macro.
You can define mandatory keywords within a macro by using a help string to specify the keywords. Enter
# macro keywords word to define the keywords that are available for use with the macro. You can enter
up to three help string keywords separated by a space. If you enter more than three macro keywords, only
the first three are shown.
Macro names are case sensitive. For example, the commands macro name Sample-Macro and macro
name sample-macro will result in two separate macros.
When creating a macro, do not use the exit or end commands or change the command mode by using
interface interface-id. This could cause commands that follow exit, end, or interface interface-id to
execute in a different command mode.
The no form of this command only deletes the macro definition. It does not affect the configuration of
those interfaces on which the macro is already applied. You can delete a macro-applied configuration on
an interface by entering the default interface interface-id interface configuration command.
Alternatively, you can create an anti-macro for an existing macro that contains the no form of all the
corresponding commands in the original macro. Then apply the anti-macro to the interface.
You can modify a macro by creating a new macro with the same name as the existing macro. The newly
created macro overwrites the existing macro but does not affect the configuration of those interfaces on
which the original macro was applied.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-282
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
macro name
Examples
This example shows how to create a macro that defines the duplex mode and speed:
Switch(config)# macro name duplex
Enter macro commands one per line. End with the character ‘@’.
duplex full
speed auto
@
This example shows how create a macro with # macro keywords:
Switch(config)# macro name test
switchport access vlan $VLANID
switchport port-security maximum $MAX
#macro keywords $VLANID $MAX
@
This example shows how to display the mandatory keyword values before you apply the macro to an
interface:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# macro apply test ?
WORD keyword to replace with a value e.g $VLANID,$MAX
<cr>
Switch(config-if)# macro apply test $VLANID ?
WORD Value of first keyword to replace
Switch(config-if)# macro apply test $VLANID 2
WORD keyword to replace with a value e.g $VLANID,$MAX
<cr>
Switch(config-if)# macro apply test $VLANID 2 $MAX ?
WORD Value of second keyword to replace
Related Commands
Command
Description
macro apply
Applies a macro on an interface or applies and traces a macro on an
interface.
macro description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to an interface.
macro global
Applies a macro on a switch or applies and traces a macro on a switch
macro global description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.
show parser macro
Displays the macro definition for all macros or for the specified macro.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-283
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match (access-map configuration)
match (access-map configuration)
Use the match access-map configuration command to set the VLAN map to match packets against one
or more access lists. Use the no form of this command to remove the match parameters.
match {ip address {name | number} [name | number] [name | number]...} | {mac address {name}
[name] [name]...}
no match {ip address {name | number} [name | number] [name | number]...} | {mac address
{name} [name] [name]...}
Syntax Description
ip address
Set the access map to match packets against an IP address access list.
mac address
Set the access map to match packets against a MAC address access list.
name
Name of the access list to match packets against.
number
Number of the access list to match packets against. This option is not valid for MAC
access lists.
Defaults
The default action is to have no match parameters applied to a VLAN map.
Command Modes
Access-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You enter access-map configuration mode by using the vlan access-map global configuration command.
You must enter one access list name or number; others are optional. You can match packets against one
or more access lists. Matching any of the lists counts as a match of the entry.
In access-map configuration mode, use the match command to define the match conditions for a VLAN
map applied to a VLAN. Use the action command to set the action that occurs when the packet matches
the conditions.
Packets are matched only against access lists of the same protocol type; IP packets are matched against
IP access lists, and all other packets are matched against MAC access lists.
Both IP and MAC addresses can be specified for the same map entry.
Examples
This example shows how to define and apply a VLAN access map vmap4 to VLANs 5 and 6 that will
cause the interface to drop an IP packet if the packet matches the conditions defined in access list al2.
Switch(config)# vlan access-map vmap4
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address al2
Switch(config-access-map)# action drop
Switch(config-access-map)# exit
Switch(config)# vlan filter vmap4 vlan-list 5-6
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-284
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match (access-map configuration)
You can verify your settings by entering the show vlan access-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
access-list
Configures a standard numbered ACL. For syntax information, select
Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3:Addressing and
Services, Release 12.2 > IP Services Commands.
action
Specifies the action to be taken if the packet matches an entry in an
access control list (ACL).
ip access list
Creates a named access list. For syntax information, select Cisco IOS
IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3:Addressing and Services,
Release 12.2 > IP Services Commands.
mac access-list extended
Creates a named MAC address access list.
show vlan access-map
Displays the VLAN access maps created on the switch.
vlan access-map
Creates a VLAN access map.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-285
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match access-group
match access-group
Use the match access-group class-map configuration command to configure the match criteria for a
class map on the basis of the specified access control list (ACL). Use the no form of this command to
remove the ACL match criteria.
match access-group acl-index-or-name
no match access-group acl-index-or-name
Syntax Description
acl-index-or-name
Defaults
No match criteria are defined.
Command Modes
Class-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Number or name of an IP standard or extended access control list (ACL) or
MAC ACL. For an IP standard ACL, the ACL index range is 1 to 99 and 1300
to 1999. For an IP extended ACL, the ACL index range is 100 to 199
and 2000 to 2699.
The match access-group command specifies a numbered or named ACL to use as the match criteria to
determine if packets belong to the class specified by the class map.
Before using the match access-group command, you must enter the class-map global configuration
command to specify the name of the class whose match criteria you want to establish.
You can use the match access-group classification only on input policy maps.
Examples
This example shows how to create a class map called inclass, which uses the access control list acl1 as
the match criterion:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any inclass
Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group acl1
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name
you specify.
show class-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) class maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-286
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match cos
match cos
Use the match cos class-map configuration command to match a packet based on a Layer 2 class of
service (CoS) marking. Use the no form of this command to remove the CoS match criteria.
match cos [inner] cos-list
no match cos inner cos-list
Syntax Description
inner
(Optional) Match a packet based on the C-CoS, the inner (customer) CoS
value of an 802.1Q tunnel. If you do not enter the inner keyword, the packet
is matched based on service-provider CoS value (S-CoS).
cos-list
List of up to four CoS values to match against incoming packets. Separate
each value with a space. The range is 0 to 7.
Defaults
No match criteria are defined.
Command Modes
Class-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(53)SE
The inner keyword was added.
Usage Guidelines
The match cos command specifies a CoS value to use as the match criteria to determine if packets belong
to the class specified by the class map.
Before using the match cos command, you must enter the class-map global configuration command to
specify the name of the class whose match criteria you want to establish.
•
Enter cos cos-list to match a packet based on the service-provider CoS value (S-CoS). For QinQ,
where an incoming packet is tunneled into an S-tag, this is the CoS value in the imposed S-tag. For
all other cases, this is the CoS value in the incoming packet.
•
Enter cos inner cos-list to match a packet based on the C-CoS, the inner (customer) CoS value of
an 802.1Q tunnel. For QinQ, where an incoming packet is tunneled into an S-tag, this is the CoS
value in the incoming customer packet. For all other cases, this command has no effect.
You can specify up to four Layer 2 CoS values to match against the packet. Separate each value with a
space. The range is 0 to 7.
Matching of CoS values is supported only on ports carrying Layer 2 VLAN-tagged traffic. That is, you
can use the cos classification only on IEEE 802.1Q trunk ports.
You can use match cos classification in input and output policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-287
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match cos
Examples
This example shows how to create a class map called inclass, which matches all the incoming traffic with
service provider CoS values of 1 and 4:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any in-class
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 1 4
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
This example shows how to create a class map called video-L2, which matches all the incoming traffic
with customer CoS value of 3:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any video-L2
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos inner 3
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name
you specify.
show class-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) class maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-288
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match dot1ad dei
match dot1ad dei
Use the match dot1ad dei class-map configuration command to match a packet based on the drop
eligibility indicator (DEI) in an IEEE 802.1ad frame. Use the no form of this command to remove the
DEI match criteria.
match dot1ad dei dei_value
no match dot1ad dei
Syntax Description
dei-value
Defaults
No match criteria are defined.
Command Modes
Class-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(55)SE
The inner keyword was added.
Usage Guidelines
Match a packet based on the DEI bit in the 802.1ad packet. The range
is 0 to 1.
The match dot1ad dei command specifies using the DEI bit of the incoming packet as the match criteria
to determine if packets belong to the class specified by the class map.
You can use the command with match-any or match-all options.
You can use this match criteria for per-port and per-port, per-VLAN policies within a child policy map.
Matching on the DEI bit is supported for both ingress and egress classification, but only 802.1ad S-NNI
ports can match on the DEI bit.
You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.
Examples
This example shows how to create a class map called class1, which matches traffic on the DEI bit and
the CoS value:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any class1
Switch(config-cmap)# match dot1ad dei 0
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 0
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name
you specify.
ethernet dot1ad
Configures an interface as an 802.1ad C-port or S-port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-289
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match dot1ad dei
Command
Description
set dot1ad dei
Defines a policy map set criteria as using the DEI bit.
show class-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) class maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-290
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match ip dscp
match ip dscp
Use the match ip dscp class-map configuration command to identify a specific IPv4 Differentiated
Service Code Point (DSCP) value as match criteria for a class. Use the no form of this command to
remove the match criteria.
match ip dscp dscp-list
no match ip dscp dscp-list
Syntax Description
ip-dscp-list
List of up to eight IPv4 DSCP values to match against incoming packets.
Separate each value with a space. The range is 0 to 63. You can also enter a
mnemonic name for a commonly used value.
See the “Configuring QoS” chapter in the software configuration guide for
this release for information about other options for specifying DSCP values.
Defaults
No match criteria are defined.
Command Modes
Class-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The match ip dscp command specifies a DSCP value to use as the match criteria to determine if packets
belong to the class specified by the class map.
This command is used by the class map to identify a specific DSCP value marking on a packet. In this
context, DSCP values are used as markings only and have no mathematical significance. For example,
the DSCP value of 2 is not greater than 1, but merely indicates that a packet marked with a value of 2 is
different than one marked with a value of 1. You define the treatment of these marked packets by setting
QoS policies in policy-map class configuration mode.
Before using the match ip dscp command, you must enter the class-map global configuration command
to specify the name of the class whose match criteria you want to establish.
You can enter up to eight DSCP values in one match statement. For example, if you wanted the DCSP
values of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7, enter the match ip dscp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 command. The packet must
match only one (not all) of the specified IPv4 DSCP values to belong to the class.
You can use match ip dscp classification in input and output policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-291
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match ip dscp
Examples
This example shows how to create a class map called inclass, which matches all the incoming traffic with
DSCP values of 10, 11, and 12:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any in-class
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp 10 11 12
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name
you specify.
show class-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) class maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-292
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match ip precedence
match ip precedence
Use the match ip precedence class-map configuration command to identify IPv4 precedence values as
match criteria for a class. Use the no form of this command to remove the match criteria.
match ip precedence ip-precedence-list
no match ip precedence ip-precedence-list
Syntax Description
ip precedence
ip-precedence-list
Defaults
No match criteria are defined.
Command Modes
Class-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
List of up to four IPv4 precedence values to match against incoming packets.
Separate each value with a space. The range is 0 to 7.
The match ip precedence command specifies an IPv4 precedence value to use as the match criteria to
determine if packets belong to the class specified by the class map.
The precedence values are used as marking only. In this context, the IP precedence values have no
mathematical significance. For example, the precedence value of 2 is not greater than 1, but merely
indicates that a packet marked with a value of 2 is different than one marked with a value of 1. You define
the treatment of these marked packets by setting QoS policies in policy-map class configuration mode.
Before using the match ip precedence command, you must enter the class-map global configuration
command to specify the name of the class whose match criteria you want to establish.
You can enter up to four IPv4 precedence values in one match statement. For example, if you wanted the
IP precedence values of 0, 1, 2, or 7, enter the match ip precedence 0 1 2 7 command. The packet must
match only one (not all) of the specified IP precedence values to belong to the class.
You can use match ip precedence classification in input and output policy maps.
Examples
This example shows how to create a class map called class, which matches all the incoming traffic with
IP-precedence values of 5, 6, and 7:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any in-class
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip precedence 5 6 7
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-293
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match ip precedence
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name
you specify.
show class-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) class maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-294
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match qos-group
match qos-group
Use the match qos-group class-map configuration command to identify a specific quality of service
(QoS) group value as a match criterion for a class. Use the no form of this command to remove the match
criterion.
match qos-group value
no match qos-group value
Syntax Description
qos-group value
Defaults
No match criterion are defined.
Command Modes
Class-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
A quality of service group value. The range is from 0 to 99.
The match qos-group command specifies a QoS group value to use as the match criterion to determine
if packets belong to the class specified by the class map.
The QoS-group values are used as marking only and have no mathematical significance. For example,
the precedence value of 2 is not greater than 1, but merely indicates that a packet marked with a value
of 2 is different than one marked with a value of 1. You define the treatment of these marked packets by
setting QoS policies in policy-map class configuration mode.
The QoS-group value is local to the switch, meaning that the QoS-group value marked on a packet does
not leave the switch when the packet leaves the switch. If you require a marking that remains with the
packet, use IP Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) values, IP precedence values, or another
method of packet marking.
Before using the match qos-group command, you must enter the class-map global configuration
command to specify the name of the class whose match criteria you want to establish.
You can use the match qos-group classification only on output policy maps.
There can be no more than 100 QoS groups on the switch (0 to 99).
Examples
This example shows how to classify traffic by using QoS group 13 as the match criterion:
Switch(config)# class-map match-any inclass
Switch(config-cmap)# match qos-group 13
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-295
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match qos-group
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name
you specify.
show class-map
Displays QoS class maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-296
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match vlan
match vlan
Use the match vlan class-map configuration command in the parent policy of a hierarchical policy map
to apply QoS policies to frames carried on a user-specified VLAN for a given interface. You can use
hierarchical policy maps for per-VLAN classification on trunk ports Use the no form of this command
to remove the match criteria.
match vlan [inner] vlan-list
no match vlan [inner] vlan-list
Syntax Description
inner
(Optional) Match a packet based on the C-VLAN, the inner customer VLAN
ID of an 802.1Q tunnel. If you do not enter the inner keyword, the packet is
matched based on the service-provider VLAN ID (S-VLAN).
vlan-list
Specify a VLAN ID or a range of VLANs to match against incoming packets
in a parent policy map for per-port, per-VLAN QoS on a trunk port. You can
enter up to 30 VLAN IDs. Use a hyphen for a range of VLANs. A VLAN
range is counted as two VLAN IDs. Use a space to separate individual
VLANs. The range is 1 to 4094.
Defaults
No match criteria are defined.
Command Modes
Class-map configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(53)SE
This inner keyword was added.
Usage Guidelines
The feature is supported only using a 2-level hierarchical input policy map, where the parent-level
defines the VLAN-based classification, and the child-level defines the QoS policy to be applied to the
corresponding VLAN(s).
You can configure multiple service classes at the parent-level to match different combinations of
VLANs, and you can apply independent QoS policies to each parent-service class using any child-policy
map
A policy is considered a parent policy map when it has one or more of its classes associated with a child
policy-map. Each class within a parent policy map is called a parent class. You can configure only the
match vlan command in parent classes. You cannot configure the match vlan command in classes
within the child policy map.
•
Enter vlan vlan-id to match a packet based on the service-provider VLAN ID (S-VLAN). For QinQ,
where an incoming customer packet is tunneled into an S-tag, this is the VLAN value in the imposed
S-tag. For all other cases, this is the VLAN value in the incoming packet.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-297
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match vlan
•
Enter vlan inner vlan-id to match a packet based on the C-VLAN, the inner customer VLAN ID of
an 802.1Q tunnel. For QinQ, where an incoming customer packet is tunneled into an S-tag, this is
the VLAN value in the incoming customer packet. For all other cases, this command has no effect.
A per-port, per-VLAN parent-level class map supports only a child-policy association; it does not allow
any actions to be configured. In addition, for a parent-level class map, you cannot configure an action or
a child-policy association for the class class-default.
You cannot configure a mixture of Layer 2 and Layer 3 class maps in a child policy map. When you
attempt to associate such a child policy map with a parent policy, the configuration is rejected. However,
you can associate Layer 2 child policies and Layer 3 child policies with different parent-level class maps.
Per-port, per-VLAN QoS is supported only on IEEE 802.1Q trunk ports.
Once a per-port, per-vlan hierarchical policy-map is attached to an interface, a parent-class with
vlan-based classification can not be dynamically added or removed. The service policy needs to be
detached from the interface before making this configuration change.
When the child policy map attached to a VLAN or set of VLANs contains only Layer 3 classification
(match ip dscp, match ip precedence, match IP ACL), you must be careful to ensure that these VLANs
are not carried on any port other than the one on which this per-port, per-VLAN policy is attached. Not
following this restriction could result in improper QoS behavior for traffic ingressing the switch on these
VLANs.
We also recommend that you restrict VLAN membership on the trunk ports to which the per-port,
per-VLAN is applied by using the switchport trunk allowed vlan interface configuration command.
Overlapping VLAN membership between trunk ports that have per-port, per-VLAN policies with Layer
3 classification could also result in unexpected QoS behavior.
Before using the match vlan command, you must enter the class-map global configuration command to
specify the name of the class whose match criteria you want to establish.
Examples
In this example, the class maps in the child-level policy map specify matching criteria for voice and
video traffic, and the child policy map sets the action for input policing each type of traffic. The
parent-level policy map specifies the VLANs to which the child policy maps are applied on the specified
port.
Switch(config)# class-map match-any dscp-23 video
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp 23
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any dscp-63 voice
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp-63
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any customer-1-vlan
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan 100
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan 200
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan 300
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Note
You can also enter the match criteria as match vlan 100 200 300 with the same result.
Switch(config)# policy-map child policy-1
Switch(config-pmap)# class dscp-63 voice
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 10000000 bc 50000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# conform-action set-cos-transmit 5
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exceed-action drop
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class dscp-23 video
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos 4
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-298
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
match vlan
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set ip precedence 4
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config)# policy-map parent-customer-1
Switch(config-pmap)# class customer-1-vlan
Switch(config-pmap-c)# service-policy ingress-policy-1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
In this example, all packets with an S-VLAN of 100 and a C-VLAN of 200 (packets with C-VLAN 200
tunneled into S-VLAN 100) are classified by the class L2-vpn and packets with an S-VLAN of 110 and
a C-VLAN in the range of 210 to 220 (packets with C-VLANs 210 to 220 tunneled into S-VLAN 110)
are classified by the class voice-gateway.
Switch(config)# class-map match-all L2-vpn
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan 100
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan inner 200
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-all voice-gateway
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan 110
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan inner 210-220
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to a specified class name.
show class-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) class maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-299
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mdix auto
mdix auto
Use the mdix auto interface configuration command to enable the automatic medium-dependent
interface crossover (auto-MDIX) feature on the interface. When auto-MDIX is enabled, the interface
automatically detects the required cable connection type (straight-through or crossover) and configures
the connection appropriately. Use the no form of this command to disable auto-MDIX.
mdix auto
no mdix auto
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Auto-MDIX is enabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When you enable auto-MDIX on an interface, you must also set the speed and duplex on the interface to
auto so that the feature operates correctly. If the port is a user network interface (UNI) or enhanced
network interfaces (ENI), you must use the no shutdown interface configuration command to enable it
before using the mdix auto command. UNIs and ENIs are disabled by default. Network node interfaces
(NNIs) are enabled by default.
When auto-MDIX (along with autonegotiation of speed and duplex) is enabled on one or both of
connected interfaces, link up occurs, even if the required cable type (straight-through or crossover) is
not present.
Auto-MDIX is supported on all 10/100-Mbps interfaces and on 10/100/1000BASE-T/BASE-TX small
form-factor pluggable (SFP)-module interfaces. It is not supported on 1000BASE-SX or -LX SFP
module interfaces.
Examples
This example shows how to enable auto-MDIX on a port:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# speed auto
Switch(config-if)# duplex auto
Switch(config-if)# mdix auto
Switch(config-if)# end
You can verify the operational state of auto-MDIX on the interface by entering the show controllers
ethernet-controller interface-id phy privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-300
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mdix auto
Related Commands
Command
Description
show controllers
ethernet-controller
interface-id phy
Displays general information about internal registers of an interface,
including the operational state of auto-MDIX.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-301
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
media-type
media-type
Use the media-type interface configuration command to manually select the interface and type of a
dual-purpose port or to enable the switch to dynamically select the type that first links up. Use the no
form of this command to return to the default setting.
media-type {auto-select | rj45 | sfp}
no media-type
Syntax Description
auto-select
Enable the switch to dynamically select the type based on the first to link up.
rj45
Select the RJ-45 interface.
sfp
Select the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module interface.
Defaults
The default is that the switch dynamically selects the link (auto-select)
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You cannot use the RJ-45 interface and the SFP interface of the dual-purpose ports simultaneously to
provide redundant links.
When you select auto-select, the switch dynamically selects the type that first links up. This is the
default mode. The switch disables the other media type until the active link goes down. When the active
link goes down, the switch enables both types until one of them links up. If there are active links on both
media, the SFP link has priority. In auto-select mode, the switch configures both types with
autonegotiation of speed and duplex (the default).
When you select rj45, the switch disables the SFP module interface. If you connect a cable to the SFP
port, it cannot attain a linkup even if the RJ-45 side is down or is not connected. In this mode, the
dual-purpose port behaves like a 10/100/1000BASE-TX interface. You can configure the speed and
duplex settings consistent with this interface type.
When you select sfp, the switch disables the RJ-45 interface. If you connect a cable to this port, it cannot
attain a linkup even if the SFP module side is down or if the SFP module is not present. Based on the
type of installed SFP module, you can configure the speed and duplex settings consistent with this
interface type.
To configure speed or duplex settings on a dual-purpose port, you must first select the media type. If you
configure auto-select, you cannot configure the speed and duplex interface configuration commands.
When you change the interface type, the speed and duplex configurations are removed. The switch
configures both types to autonegotiate speed and duplex (the default).
When the media type ia auto-select, the switch uses these criteria to select the media type:
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-302
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
media-type
Examples
Note
An SFP is not installed until it has a fiber or copper cable plugged into the SFP module.
•
If only one media type is installed, that interface is active and remains active until the media is
removed or the switch is reloaded.
•
If you install both media types in a dual-purpose port that is enabled, the switch selects the active
link based on which type is installed first.
•
When the switch powers on with both cables connected, or when you enable a dual-purpose port
through the shutdown and the no shutdown interface configuration commands, the switch gives
preference to the SFP module interface. In all other situations, the switch selects the active link
based on the type that first links up.
This example shows how to select the SFP interface:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# media-type sfp
You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces interface-id capabilities or the show
interfaces interface-id transceiver properties privileged EXEC commands.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces
capabilities
Displays the capabilities of all interfaces or the specified interface.
show interfaces
transceiver properties
Displays speed, duplex, and media-type settings on all interfaces or the
specified interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-303
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
monitor session
monitor session
Use the monitor session global configuration command to start a new Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN)
session or Remote SPAN (RSPAN) source or destination session, to enable incoming traffic on the
destination port for a network security device (such as a Cisco IDS Sensor Appliance), to add or delete
interfaces or VLANs to or from an existing SPAN or RSPAN session, and to limit (filter) SPAN source
traffic to specific VLANs. Use the no form of this command to remove the SPAN or RSPAN session or
to remove source or destination interfaces or filters from the SPAN or RSPAN session. For destination
interfaces, the encapsulation dot1q or encapsulation replicate keywords are ignored with the no form
of the command.
monitor session session_number destination {interface interface-id [, | -] [encapsulation {dot1q
| replicate}] [ingress {[dot1q | untagged] vlan vlan-id}] | {remote vlan vlan-id}
monitor session session_number filter vlan vlan-id [, | -]
monitor session session_number source {interface interface-id [, | -] [both | rx | tx]} | {vlan
vlan-id [, | -] [both | rx | tx]}| {remote vlan vlan-id}
no monitor session {session_number | all | local | remote}
no monitor session session_number destination {interface interface-id [, | -] [encapsulation
{dot1q | replicate}] [ingress {[dot1q | untagged] vlan vlan-id}] | {remote vlan vlan-id}
no monitor session session_number filter vlan vlan-id [, | -]
no monitor session session_number source {interface interface-id [, | -] [both | rx | tx]} | {vlan
vlan-id [, | -] [both | rx | tx]} | {remote vlan vlan-id}
Syntax Description
session_number
Specify the session number identified with the SPAN or RSPAN session.
The range is 1 to 66.
interface interface-id
Specify the destination or source interface for a SPAN or RSPAN session.
Valid interfaces are physical ports (including type and port number). For
source interface, port channel is also a valid interface type, and the valid
range is 1 to 48.
destination
Specify the SPAN or RSPAN destination. A destination must be a physical
port.
encapsulation replicate
(Optional) Specify the encapsulation method. If not selected, the default is
to send packets in native form (untagged).
•
dot1q—Specify IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation.
•
replicate—Specify that the destination interface replicates the source
interface encapsulation method.
Note
Entering these keywords is valid only for local SPAN. For RSPAN,
the RSPAN VLAN ID overwrites the original VLAN ID; therefore
packets are always sent untagged.
ingress
(Optional) Enable ingress traffic forwarding.
dot1q vlan vlan-id
Specify ingress forwarding using IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation with the
specified VLAN as the default VLAN for ingress traffic.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-304
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
monitor session
untagged vlan vlan-id
Specify ingress forwarding using untagged encapsulation with the specified
VLAN as the default VLAN for ingress traffic
vlan vlan-id
When used with only the ingress keyword, set default VLAN for ingress
traffic.
remote vlan vlan-id
Specify the remote VLAN for an RSPAN source or destination session. The
range is 2 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
Note
Defaults
The RSPAN VLAN cannot be VLAN 1 (the default VLAN) or
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 (reserved for Token Ring and FDDI
VLANs).
,
(Optional) Specify a series of interfaces or VLANs, or separate a range of
interfaces or VLANs from a previous range. Enter a space before and after
the comma.
-
(Optional) Specify a range of interfaces or VLANs. Enter a space before
and after the hyphen.
filter vlan vlan-id
Specify a list of VLANs as filters on trunk source ports to limit SPAN
source traffic to specific VLANs. The vlan-id range is 1 to 4094.
source
Specify the SPAN or RSPAN source. A source can be a physical port, a port
channel, or a VLAN.
both, rx, tx
(Optional) Specify the traffic direction to monitor. If you do not specify a
traffic direction, the source interface sends both transmitted and received
traffic.
source vlan vlan-id
Specify the SPAN source interface as a VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094.
all, local, remote
Specify all, local, or remote with the no monitor session command to clear
all SPAN and RSPAN, all local SPAN, or all RSPAN sessions.
No monitor sessions are configured.
On a source interface, the default is to monitor both received and transmitted traffic.
On a trunk interface used as a source port, all VLANs are monitored.
If encapsulation dot1q or encapsulation replicate is not specified on a local SPAN destination port,
packets are sent in native form with no encapsulation tag.
Ingress forwarding is disabled on destination ports.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Traffic that enters or leaves source ports or source VLANs can be monitored by using SPAN or RSPAN.
Traffic routed to source ports or source VLANs cannot be monitored.
You can set a combined maximum of two local SPAN sessions and RSPAN source sessions. You can have
a total of 66 SPAN and RSPAN sessions on a switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-305
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
monitor session
You can have a maximum of 64 destination ports on a switch.
Each session can include multiple ingress or egress source ports or VLANs, but you cannot combine
source ports and source VLANs in a single session. Each session can include multiple destination ports.
When you use VLAN-based SPAN (VSPAN) to analyze network traffic in a VLAN or set of VLANs, all
active ports in the source VLANs become source ports for the SPAN or RSPAN session. Trunk ports are
included as source ports for VSPAN, and only packets with the monitored VLAN ID are sent to the
destination port.
You can monitor traffic on a single port or VLAN or on a series or range of ports or VLANs. You select
a series or range of interfaces or VLANs by using the [, | -] options.
If you specify a series of VLANs or interfaces, you must enter a space before and after the comma. If
you specify a range of VLANs or interfaces, you must enter a space before and after the hyphen (-).
EtherChannel ports cannot be configured as SPAN or RSPAN destination ports. A physical port that is
a member of an EtherChannel group can be used as a destination port, but it cannot participate in the
EtherChannel group while it is as a SPAN destination.
A private-VLAN port cannot be configured as a SPAN destination port.
You can monitor individual ports while they participate in an EtherChannel, or you can monitor the
entire EtherChannel bundle by specifying the port-channel number as the RSPAN source interface.
A port used as a destination port cannot be a SPAN or RSPAN source, nor can a port be a destination
port for more than one session at a time.
You can enable IEEE 802.1x on a port that is a SPAN or RSPAN destination port; however, IEEE 802.1x
is disabled until the port is removed as a SPAN destination. (If IEEE 802.1x is not available on the port,
the switch returns an error message.) You can enable IEEE 802.1x on a SPAN or RSPAN source port.
VLAN filtering refers to analyzing network traffic on a selected set of VLANs on trunk source ports. By
default, all VLANs are monitored on trunk source ports. You can use the monitor session
session_number filter vlan vlan-id command to limit SPAN traffic on trunk source ports to only the
specified VLANs.
VLAN monitoring and VLAN filtering are mutually exclusive. If a VLAN is a source, VLAN filtering
cannot be enabled. If VLAN filtering is configured, a VLAN cannot become a source.
If ingress traffic forwarding is enabled for a network security device, the destination port forwards traffic
at Layer 2.
Destination ports can be configured to act in these ways:
•
When you enter monitor session session_number destination interface interface-id with no other
keywords, egress encapsulation is untagged, and ingress forwarding is not enabled.
•
When you enter monitor session session_number destination interface interface-id encapsulation
replicate with no other keywords, egress encapsulation replicates the source interface
encapsulation; ingress forwarding is not enabled. (This applies to local SPAN only; RSPAN does
not support encapsulation replication.)
•
When you enter monitor session session_number destination interface interface-id encapsulation
replicate ingress, egress encapsulation replicates the source interface encapsulation; ingress
encapsulation depends on the keywords that follow—dot1q or untagged. (This applies to local
SPAN only; RSPAN does not support encapsulation replication.)
•
When you enter monitor session session_number destination interface interface-id ingress, egress
encapsulation is untagged; ingress encapsulation depends on the keywords that follow—dot1q or
untagged.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-306
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
monitor session
Examples
This example shows how to create a local SPAN session 1 to monitor both sent and received traffic on
source port 1 to destination port 2:
Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source interface gigabitethernet0/1 both
Switch(config)# monitor session 1 destination interface gigabitethernet0/2
This example shows how to delete a destination port from an existing local SPAN session:
Switch(config)# no monitor session 2 destination gigabitethernet0/2
This example shows how to limit SPAN traffic in an existing session only to specific VLANs:
Switch(config)# monitor session 1 filter vlan 100 - 110
This example shows how to configure RSPAN source session 1 to monitor multiple source interfaces and
to configure the destination RSPAN VLAN 900.
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#
monitor session 1 source interface gigabitethernet0/1
monitor session 1 source interface port-channel 2 tx
monitor session 1 destination remote vlan 900
end
This example shows how to configure an RSPAN destination session 10 in the switch receiving the
monitored traffic.
Switch(config)# monitor session 10 source remote vlan 900
Switch(config)# monitor session 10 destination interface gigabitethernet0/2
This example shows how to configure the destination port for ingress traffic on VLAN 5 by using a
security device that supports IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. Egress traffic replicates the source; ingress
traffic uses IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation.
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 destination interface gigabitethernet0/2 encapsulation
replicate ingress dot1q vlan 5
This example shows how to configure the destination port for ingress traffic on VLAN 5 by using a
security device that does not support encapsulation. Egress traffic and ingress traffic are untagged.
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 destination interface gigabitethernet0/2 ingress
untagged vlan 5
You can verify your settings by entering the show monitor privileged EXEC command. You can display
SPAN and RSPAN configuration on the switch by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC
command. SPAN information appears near the end of the output.
Related Commands
Command
Description
remote-span
Configures an RSPAN VLAN in vlan configuration mode.
show monitor
Displays SPAN and RSPAN session information.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use
this link to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing
page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_co
mmand_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to
navigate to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-307
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mvr (global configuration)
mvr (global configuration)
Use the mvr global configuration command without keywords to enable the multicast VLAN registration
(MVR) feature on the switch. Use the command with keywords to set the MVR mode for a switch, to
configure the MVR IP multicast address, to set the maximum time to wait for a query reply before
removing a port from group membership, and to specify the MVR multicast VLAN. Use the no form of
this command to return to the default settings.
mvr [group ip-address [count] | mode [compatible | dynamic] | querytime value | ringmode flood
| vlan vlan-id]
no mvr [group ip-address | mode [compatible | dynamic] | querytime | ringmode flood | vlan
vlan-id]
Syntax Description
group ip-address
Statically configure an MVR group IP multicast address on the switch.
Use the no form of this command to remove a statically configured IP
multicast address or contiguous addresses or, when no IP address is entered,
to remove all statically configured MVR IP multicast addresses.
count
(Optional) Configure multiple contiguous MVR group addresses. The range
is 1 to 2000. However, if the mode is compatible, the switch allows only 512
groups, even if you enter a value greater than 512. Dynamic mode supports
2000 groups. The default is 1.
mode
(Optional) Specify the MVR mode of operation.
The default is compatible mode.
compatible
Set MVR mode to provide compatibility with Catalyst 2900 XL and
Catalyst 3500 XL switches. This mode does not allow dynamic membership
joins on source ports.
dynamic
Set MVR mode to allow dynamic MVR membership on source ports.
querytime value
(Optional) Set the maximum time to wait for IGMP report memberships on
a receiver port. This time applies only to receiver-port leave processing.
When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port, the switch waits for the
default or configured MVR querytime for an IGMP group membership
report before removing the port from multicast group membership.
The value is the response time in units of tenths of a second. The range is 1
to 100; the default is 5 tenths (one-half) second.
Use the no form of the command to return to the default setting.
Defaults
ringmode flood
(Optional) Enable MVR ring mode flooding for access rings. Entering this
command controls traffic flow in egress ports in a ring environment to
prevent the dropping of unicast traffic.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is to be
received. This is also the VLAN to which all the source ports belong. The
range is 1 to 4094. The default is VLAN 1.
MVR is disabled by default.
The default MVR mode is compatible mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-308
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mvr (global configuration)
No IP multicast addresses are configured on the switch by default.
The default group ip address count is 0.
The default query response time is 5 tenths (one-half) second.
The default multicast VLAN for MVR is VLAN 1.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(52)SE
The ringmode flood keywords were added.
Usage Guidelines
Use the mvr group command to statically set up all the IP multicast addresses that will take part in
MVR. Any multicast data sent to a configured multicast address is sent to all the source ports on the
switch and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data on that IP multicast address.
When MVR mode is compatible (the default), you can configure 512 multicast entries (MVR group
addresses). Although the range appears in the command line help as 1 to 2000, the switch allows only
512 groups.
When MVR mode is dynamic, you can configure a maximum of 2000 MVR group addresses on the
switch. The maximum number of simultaneous active multicast streams (that is, the maximum number
of television channels that can be receiving) is 512. When this limit is reached, a message is generated
that the Maximum hardware limit of groups had been reached. Note that a hardware entry occurs when
there is an IGMP join on a port or when you configure a port to join a group by entering the mvr vlan
vlan-id group ip-address interface configuration command.
MVR supports aliased IP multicast addresses on the switch. However, if the switch is interoperating with
Catalyst 3550 or 3500 XL switches, you should not configure IP addresses that alias between themselves
or with the reserved IP multicast addresses (in the range 224.0.0.xxx).
The mvr querytime command applies only to receiver ports.
If the switch MVR is interoperating with Catalyst 2900 XL or 3500 XL switches, set the multicast mode
to compatible.
When operating in compatible mode, MVR does not support IGMP dynamic joins on MVR source ports.
MVR can coexist with IGMP snooping on a switch.
Multicast routing and MVR cannot coexist on a switch. If you enable multicast routing and a multicast
routing protocol while MVR is enabled, MVR is disabled and a warning message appears. If you try to
enable MVR while multicast routing and a multicast routing protocol are enabled, the operation to
enable MVR is cancelled with an Error message.
Starting with Cisco IOS release 12.2(52)SE, you can enter the mvr ringmode flood global configuration
command to ensure that data forwarding in a ring topology is limited to membership detected ports and
excludes forwarding to multicast router ports. This prevents unicast traffic from being dropped in a ring
environment when MVR multicast traffic is flowing in one direction and unicast traffic is flowing in the
other direction.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-309
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mvr (global configuration)
Examples
This example shows how to enable MVR:
Switch(config)# mvr
Use the show mvr privileged EXEC command to display the current setting for maximum multicast
groups.
This example shows how to configure 228.1.23.4 as an IP multicast address:
Switch(config)# mvr group 228.1.23.4
This example shows how to configure ten contiguous IP multicast groups with multicast addresses from
228.1.23.1 to 228.1.23.10:
Switch(config)# mvr group 228.1.23.1 10
Use the show mvr members privileged EXEC command to display the configured IP multicast group
addresses.
This example shows how to set the maximum query response time as one second (10 tenths):
Switch(config)# mvr querytime 10
This example shows how to set VLAN 2 as the multicast VLAN:
Switch(config)# mvr vlan 2
You can verify your settings by entering the show mvr privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
mvr (interface configuration)
Configures MVR ports.
show mvr
Displays MVR global parameters or port parameters.
show mvr interface
Displays the configured MVR interfaces with their type, mode,
VLAN, status and Immediate Leave configuration, and can also
displays all MVR groups of which the interface is a member.
show mvr members
Displays all ports that are members of an MVR multicast group;
if the group has no members, its status is shown as Inactive.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-310
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mvr (interface configuration)
mvr (interface configuration)
Use the mvr interface configuration command to configure a Layer 2 port as a multicast VLAN
registration (MVR) receiver or source port, to set the Immediate Leave feature, and to statically assign
a port to an IP multicast VLAN and IP address. Use the no form of this command to return to the default
settings.
mvr {immediate | type {receiver | source} | vlan vlan-id {[group ip-address] [receiver vlan
vlan-id]}}
no mvr {immediate | type {receiver | source} | vlan vlan-id {[group ip-address] [receiver vlan
vlan-id]}}
Syntax Description
immediate
(Optional) Enable the Immediate Leave feature of MVR on a port. Use
the no mvr immediate command to disable the feature.
type
(Optional) Configure the port as an MVR receiver port or a source port.
The default port type is neither an MVR source nor a receiver port. The
no mvr type command resets the port as neither a source or a receiver
port.
receiver
Configure the port as a subscriber port that can only receive multicast
data. Receiver ports cannot belong to the multicast VLAN.
source
Configure the port as an uplink port that can send and receive multicast
data for the configured multicast groups. All source ports on a switch
belong to a single multicast VLAN.
Note
Defaults
When you are configuring a trunk port as an MVR receiver port,
we recommend that the source port is configured as a network
node interface (NNI) and the MVR trunk receiver port is
configured as a user node interface (UNI) or an enhanced
network interface (ENI).
vlan vlan-id
Specify the mvr vlan for the system.
group ip-address
(Optional) Statically configure the specified MVR IP multicast group
address for the specified multicast VLAN ID. This is the IP address of the
multicast group that the port or VLAN is joining.
receiver vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Specify a receiver VLAN.
A port is configured as neither a receiver nor a source.
The Immediate Leave feature is disabled on all ports.
No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-311
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mvr (interface configuration)
Usage Guidelines
Configure a port as a source port if that port should be able to both send and receive multicast data bound
for the configured multicast groups. Multicast data is received on all ports configured as source ports.
Receiver ports on a switch can be in different VLANs, but should not belong to the multicast VLAN.
A port that is not taking part in MVR should not be configured as an MVR receiver port or a source port.
A non-MVR port is a normal switch port, able to send and receive multicast data with normal switch
behavior.
When Immediate Leave is enabled, a receiver port leaves a multicast group more quickly. Without
Immediate Leave, when the switch receives an IGMP leave message from a group on a receiver port, it
sends out an IGMP MAC-based query on that port and waits for IGMP group membership reports. If no
reports are received in a configured time period, the receiver port is removed from multicast group
membership. With Immediate Leave, an IGMP MAC-based query is not sent from the receiver port on
which the IGMP leave was received. As soon as the leave message is received, the receiver port is
removed from multicast group membership, which speeds up leave latency.
The Immediate Leave feature should be enabled only on receiver ports to which a single receiver device
is connected.
The mvr vlan group command statically configures ports to receive multicast traffic sent to the IP
multicast address. A port statically configured as a member of group remains a member of the group until
statically removed. In compatible mode, this command applies only to receiver ports; in dynamic mode,
it can also apply to source ports. Receiver ports can also dynamically join multicast groups by using
IGMP join messages.
When operating in compatible mode, MVR does not support IGMP dynamic joins on MVR source ports.
An MVR port cannot be a private-VLAN port.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a port as an MVR receiver port:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# mvr type receiver
Use the show mvr interface privileged EXEC command to display configured receiver ports and source
ports.
This example shows how to enable Immediate Leave on a port:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# mvr immediate
This example shows how to add a port on VLAN 1 as a static member of IP multicast group 228.1.23.4:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan1 group 230.1.23.4
This example shows how to add a port 2 on VLAN 100 as a static member of IP multicast group
228.1.23.4. In this example, the receive port is an access port:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan 100 group 228.1.23.4
This example shows how to add on port 5 the receiver VLAN 201 with an MVR VLAN of 100.
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/5
Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan 100 receiver vlan 201
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-312
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
mvr (interface configuration)
This example shows how to add on port 5 the receiver VLAN 201 as a static member of the IP multicast
group 239.1.1.1, with an MVR VLAN of 100:
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/5
Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan 100 group 239.1.1.1 receiver vlan 201
You can verify your settings by entering the show mvr members privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
mvr (global
configuration)
Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.
show mvr
Displays MVR global parameters or port parameters.
show mvr interface
Displays the configured MVR interfaces or displays the multicast groups
to which a receiver port belongs. Also displays all MVR groups of which
the interface is a member.
show mvr members
Displays all receiver ports that are members of an MVR multicast group.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-313
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
no authentication logging verbose
no authentication logging verbose
Use the no authentication logging verbose global configuration command on the switch stack or on a
standalone switch to filter detailed information from authentication system messages.
no authentication logging verbose
Defaults
All details are displayed in the system messages.
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(55)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This command filters details, such as anticipated success, from authentication system messages.
Examples
To filter verbose authentication system messages:
Switch(config)# no authentication logging verbose
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
no authentication
logging verbose
Filters details from authentication system messages.
no dot1x logging
verbose
Filters details from 802.1x system messages.
no mab logging
verbose
Filters details from MAC authentication bypass (MAB) system messages.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-314
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
no dot1x logging verbose
no dot1x logging verbose
Use the no dot1x logging verbose global configuration command on the switch stack or on a standalone
switch to filter detailed information from 802.1x system messages.
no dot1x logging verbose
Defaults
All details are displayed in the system messages.
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(55)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This command filters details, such as anticipated success, from 802.1x system messages.
Examples
To filter verbose 802.1x system messages:
Switch(config)# no dot1x logging verbose
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
no authentication
logging verbose
Filters details from authentication system messages.
no dot1x logging
verbose
Filters details from 802.1x system messages.
no mab logging
verbose
Filters details from MAC authentication bypass (MAB) system messages.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-315
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
no mab logging verbose
no mab logging verbose
Use the no mab logging verbose global configuration command on the switch stack or on a standalone
switch to filter detailed information from MAC authentication bypass (MAB) system messages.
no mab logging verbose
Defaults
All details are displayed in the system messages.
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(55)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This command filters details, such as anticipated success, from MAC authentication bypass (MAB)
system messages.
Examples
To filter verbose MAB system messages:
Switch(config)# no mab logging verbose
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
no authentication
logging verbose
Filters details from authentication system messages.
no dot1x logging
verbose
Filters details from 802.1x system messages.
no mab logging
verbose
Filters details from MAC authentication bypass (MAB) system messages.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-316
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
oam protocol cfm svlan
oam protocol cfm svlan
Use the oam protocol cfm svlan EVC configuration command to configure the Ethernet virtual
connection (EVC) operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) protocol as IEEE 801.2ag
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) and to identify the service provider VLAN-ID for a CFM
domain level. Use the no form of this command to remove the OAM protocol configuration for the EVC.
oam protocol cfm svlan vlan-id domain domain-name
no oam protocol
Syntax Description
vlan-id
Service provider VLAN ID for CFM. The range is 1 to 4094.
domain domain-name
Identify the CFM domain for the service provider VLAN ID. If the CFM
domain does not exist, the command is rejected, and an error message
appears.
Defaults
There are no service provider VLANs identified for an EVC.
Command Modes
EVC configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When you enter domain domain-name, the CFM domain must have already been created by entering the
ethernet cfm domain domain-name level level-id global configuration command. If the CFM domain
does not exist, the command is rejected, and an error message appears.
Examples
This example shows how to enter EVC configuration mode and to configure the OAM protocol as CFM:
Switch(config)# ethernet evc test1
Switch(config-evc)# oam protocol cfm svlan 22 domain Operator
Related Commands
Command
Description
ethernet evc evc-id
Defines an EVC and enters EVC configuration mode.
ethernet cfm domain
Defines a CFM domain and sets the domain level.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-317
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
pagp learn-method
pagp learn-method
Use the pagp learn-method interface configuration command to learn the source address of incoming
packets received from an EtherChannel port. Use the no form of this command to return to the default
setting.
pagp learn-method {aggregation-port | physical-port}
no pagp learn-method
Note
Syntax Description
PAgP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
aggregation-port
Specify address learning on the logical port-channel. The switch sends
packets to the source using any of the ports in the EtherChannel. This setting
is the default. With aggregate-port learning, it is not important on which
physical port the packet arrives.
physical-port
Specify address learning on the physical port within the EtherChannel. The
switch sends packets to the source using the same port in the EtherChannel
from which it learned the source address. The other end of the channel uses
the same port in the channel for a particular destination MAC or IP address.
Defaults
The default is aggregation-port (logical port channel).
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Note
If the interface is a user network interface (UNI), you must enter the port-type nni or port-type eni
interface configuration command before configuring pagp learn-method. Learn must be configured to
the same method at both ends of the link.
The Cisco ME switch supports address learning only on aggregate ports even though the physical-port
keyword is provided in the command-line interface (CLI). The pagp learn-method and the pagp
port-priority interface configuration commands have no effect on the switch hardware, but they are
required for PAgP interoperability with devices that only support address learning by physical ports.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-318
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
pagp learn-method
Note
Examples
When the link partner to the Cisco ME switch is a physical learner, we recommend that you configure
the switch as a physical-port learner. Use the pagp learn-method physical-port interface configuration
command, and set the load-distribution method based on the source MAC address by using the
port-channel load-balance src-mac global configuration command. Only use the pagp learn-method
interface configuration command in this situation.
This example shows how to set the learning method to learn the address on the physical port within the
EtherChannel:
Switch(config-if)# pagp learn-method physical-port
This example shows how to set the learning method to learn the address on the port-channel within the
EtherChannel:
Switch(config-if)# pagp learn-method aggregation-port
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command or the
show pagp channel-group-number internal privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
pagp port-priority
Selects a port over which all traffic through the EtherChannel is sent.
show pagp
Displays PAgP channel-group information.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this link to
the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_command_
reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate to
the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-319
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
pagp port-priority
pagp port-priority
Use the pagp port-priority interface configuration command to select a port over which all Port
Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) traffic through the EtherChannel is sent. If all unused ports in the
EtherChannel are in hot-standby mode, they can be placed into operation if the currently selected port
and link fails. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
pagp port-priority priority
no pagp port-priority
Note
PAgP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
Syntax Description
priority
Defaults
The default is 128.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
A priority number ranging from 0 to 255.
If the interface is a user network interface (UNI), you must enter the port-type nni or port-type eni
interface configuration command before configuring pagp port-priority.
The physical port with the highest operational priority and that has membership in the same
EtherChannel is the one selected for PAgP transmission.
Note
The Cisco ME switch supports address learning only on aggregate ports even though the physical-port
keyword is provided in the command-line interface (CLI). The pagp learn-method and the pagp
port-priority interface configuration commands have no effect on the switch hardware, but they are
required for PAgP interoperability with devices that only support address learning by physical ports.
When the link partner to the Cisco ME switch is a physical learner, we recommend that you configure
the switch as a physical-port learner by using the pagp learn-method physical-port interface
configuration command and to set the load-distribution method based on the source MAC address by
using the port-channel load-balance src-mac global configuration command. Use the pagp
learn-method interface configuration command only in this situation.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-320
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
pagp port-priority
Examples
This example shows how to set the port priority to 200:
Switch(config-if)# pagp port-priority 200
You can verify your setting by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command or the
show pagp channel-group-number internal privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
pagp learn-method
Provides the ability to learn the source address of incoming packets.
show pagp
Displays PAgP channel-group information.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this link to
the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_command_r
eference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate to
the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-321
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (ARP access-list configuration)
permit (ARP access-list configuration)
Use the permit Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) access-list configuration command to permit an
ARP packet based on matches against the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) bindings. Use
the no form of this command to remove the specified access control entry (ACE) from the access control
list.
permit {[request] ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} mac {any | host sender-mac
| sender-mac sender-mac-mask} | response ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask}
[{any | host target-ip | target-ip target-ip-mask}] mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac
sender-mac-mask} [{any | host target-mac | target-mac target-mac-mask}]} [log]
no permit {[request] ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} mac {any | host
sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} | response ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip
sender-ip-mask} [{any | host target-ip | target-ip target-ip-mask}] mac {any | host sender-mac
| sender-mac sender-mac-mask} [{any | host target-mac | target-mac target-mac-mask}]} [log]
Syntax Description
request
(Optional) Requests a match for the ARP request. When request is not
specified, matching is performed against all ARP packets.
ip
Specify the sender IP address.
any
Accept any IP or MAC address.
host sender-ip
Accept the specified sender IP address.
sender-ip
sender-ip-mask
Accept the specified range of sender IP addresses.
mac
Specify the sender MAC address.
host sender-mac
Accept the specified sender MAC address.
sender-mac
sender-mac-mask
Accept the specified range of sender MAC addresses.
response ip
Define the IP address values for the ARP responses.
host target-ip
(Optional) Accept the specified target IP address.
target-ip target-ip-mask
(Optional) Accept the specified range of target IP addresses.
mac
Specify the MAC address values for the ARP responses.
host target-mac
(Optional) Accept the specified target MAC address.
target-mac
target-mac-mask
(Optional) Accept the specified range of target MAC addresses.
log
(Optional) Log a packet when it matches the ACE. Matches are logged if
you also configure the matchlog keyword in the ip arp inspection vlan
logging global configuration command.
Defaults
There are no default settings.
Command Modes
ARP access-list configuration
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-322
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (ARP access-list configuration)
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can add permit clauses to forward ARP packets based on some matching criteria.
Examples
This example shows how to define an ARP access list and to permit both ARP requests and ARP
responses from a host with an IP address of 1.1.1.1 and a MAC address of 0000.0000.abcd:
Switch(config)# arp access-list static-hosts
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# permit ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 0000.0000.abcd
Switch(config-arp-nacl)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show arp access-list privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP access control list (ACL).
deny (ARP access-list
configuration)
Denies an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.
ip arp inspection filter vlan
Permits ARP requests and responses from a host configured with a
static IP address.
show arp access-list
Displays detailed information about ARP access lists.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-323
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (IPv6 access-list configuration)
permit (IPv6 access-list configuration)
Use the permit IPv6 access list configuration command to set permit conditions for an IPv6 access list.
Use the no form of this command to remove the permit conditions.
permit {protocol} {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [dscp value] [fragments] [log] [log-input] [routing] [sequence
value] [time-range name]
no permit {protocol} {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [dscp value] [fragments] [log] [log-input] [routing] [sequence
value] [time-range name]
Note
Although visible in the command-line help strings, the flow-label and reflect keywords are not
supported.
Internet Control Message Protocol
permit icmp {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [icmp-type [icmp-code] | icmp-message] [dscp value] [log]
[log-input] [routing] [sequence value] [time-range name]
Transmission Control Protocol
permit tcp {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [ack] [dscp value] [established] [fin] [log] [log-input] [neq {port |
protocol}] [psh] [range {port | protocol}] [rst] [routing] [sequence value] [syn] [time-range
name] [urg]
User Datagram Protocol
permit udp {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host source-ipv6-address} [operator
[port-number]] {destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | any | host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [dscp value] [log] [log-input] [neq {port | protocol}] [range {port |
protocol}] [routing] [sequence value] [time-range name]
Note
Although visible in the command-line help strings, the flow-label and reflect keywords are not
supported.
This command is available only if your switch has a switch database management (SDM) dual IPv4 and
IPv6 template configured.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-324
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (IPv6 access-list configuration)
Syntax Description
protocol
Name or number of an Internet protocol. It can be one of the keywords
ahp, esp, icmp, ipv6, pcp, sctp, tcp, or udp, or an integer in the range
from 0 to 255 representing an IPv6 protocol number.
source-ipv6-prefix/prefix- The source IPv6 network or class of networks for which to set permit
length
conditions.
This argument must be in the form documented in RFC 2373 where the
address is specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons.
any
An abbreviation for the IPv6 prefix ::/0.
host source-ipv6-address The source IPv6 host address for which to set permit conditions.
This source-ipv6-address argument must be in the form documented in
RFC 2373 where the address is specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit
values between colons.
operator [port-number]
(Optional) Specify an operator that compares the source or destination
ports of the specified protocol. Operators are lt (less than), gt (greater
than), eq (equal), neq (not equal), and range (inclusive range).
If the operator is positioned after the source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
argument, it must match the source port.
If the operator is positioned after the destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
argument, it must match the destination port.
The range operator requires two port numbers. All other operators require
one port number.
The optional port-number argument is a decimal number or the name of a
TCP or a UDP port. A port number is a number from 0 to 65535. TCP port
names can be used only when filtering TCP. UDP port names can be used
only when filtering UDP.
destination-ipv6-prefix/
prefix-length
The destination IPv6 network or class of networks for which to set permit
conditions.
This argument must be in the form documented in RFC 2373 where the
address is specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons.
host
destination-ipv6-address
The destination IPv6 host address for which to set permit conditions.
dscp value
(Optional) Match a differentiated services codepoint value against the
traffic class value in the Traffic Class field of each IPv6 packet header. The
acceptable range is from 0 to 63.
fragments
(Optional) Match noninitial fragmented packets where the fragment
extension header contains a nonzero fragment offset. The fragments
keyword is an option only if the protocol is ipv6 and the operator
[port-number] arguments are not specified.
This destination-ipv6-address argument must be in the form documented
in RFC 2373 where the address is specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit
values between colons.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-325
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (IPv6 access-list configuration)
log
(Optional) Send an informational logging message to the console about
the packet that matches the entry. (The level of messages logged to the
console is controlled by the logging console command.)
The message includes the access list name and sequence number; whether
the packet was permitted; the protocol, whether it was TCP, UDP, ICMP,
or a number; and, if appropriate, the source and destination addresses and
source and destination port numbers. The message is generated for the
first packet that matches, and then at 5-minute intervals, including the
number of packets permitted in the prior 5-minute interval.
log-input
(Optional) Provide the same function as the log keyword, but the logging
message also includes the receiving interface.
routing
(Optional) Match packets with the routing extension header.
sequence value
(Optional) Specify the sequence number for the access list statement. The
acceptable range is from 1 to 4294967295.
time-range name
(Optional) Specify the time range that applies to the permit statement. The
name of the time range and its restrictions are specified by the time-range
and absolute or periodic commands, respectively.
icmp-type
(Optional) Specify an ICMP message type for filtering ICMP packets.
ICMP packets can be filtered by the ICMP message type. The type is a
number from 0 to 255.
icmp-code
(Optional) Specify an ICMP message code for filtering ICMP packets.
ICMP packets that are filtered by the ICMP message type can also be
filtered by the ICMP message code. The code is a number from 0 to 255.
icmp-message
(Optional) Specify an ICMP message name for filtering ICMP packets.
ICMP packets can be filtered by an ICMP message name or ICMP
message type and code. The possible names are listed in the “Usage
Guidelines” section.
ack
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: acknowledgment (ACK) bit set.
established
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Means the connection has been
established. A match occurs if the TCP datagram has the ACK or RST bits
set. The nonmatching case is that of the initial TCP datagram to form a
connection.
fin
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Fin bit set; no more data from
sender.
neq {port | protocol}
(Optional) Match only packets that are not on a given port number.
psh
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Push function bit set.
range {port | protocol}
(Optional) Match only packets in the range of port numbers.
rst
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Reset bit set.
syn
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Synchronize bit set.
urg
(Optional) Only for the TCP protocol: Urgent pointer bit set.
Defaults
No IPv6 access list is defined.
Command Modes
IPv6 access-list configuration
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-326
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (IPv6 access-list configuration)
Command History
Usage Guidelines
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
The permit (IPv6 access-list configuration mode) command is similar to the permit (IPv4 access-list
configuration mode) command, but it is IPv6-specific.
Use the permit (IPv6) command after the ipv6 access-list command to enter IPv6 access-list
configuration mode and to define the conditions under which a packet passes the access list.
Specifying IPv6 for the protocol argument matches against the IPv6 header of the packet.
By default, the first statement in an access list is number 10, and the subsequent statements increment
by 10.
You can add permit, deny, or remark statements to an existing access list without re-entering the entire
list. To add a new statement somewhere other than at the end of the list, create a new statement with an
appropriate entry number that falls between two existing entry numbers to show where it belongs.
See the ipv6 access-list command for more information on defining IPv6 ACLs.
Every IPv6 ACL has implicit permit icmp any any nd-na, permit icmp any any nd-ns, and deny ipv6
any any statements as its last match conditions. The two permit conditions allow ICMPv6 neighbor
discovery. To disallow ICMPv6 neighbor discovery and to deny icmp any any nd-na or icmp any any
nd-ns, there must be an explicit deny entry in the ACL. For the three implicit statements to take effect,
an IPv6 ACL must contain at least one entry.
The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses the IPv6 network layer service. Therefore, by default, IPv6
ACLs implicitly allow IPv6 neighbor discovery packets to be sent and received on an interface. In IPv4,
the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), which is equivalent to the IPv6 neighbor discovery process, uses
a separate data link layer protocol. Therefore, by default, IPv4 ACLs implicitly allow ARP packets to be
sent and received on an interface.
Both the source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length and destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length arguments are used
for traffic filtering (the source prefix filters traffic based upon its source; the destination prefix filters
traffic based upon its destination).
The switch supports IPv6 address matching for a full range of prefix-lengths.
The fragments keyword is an option only if the operator [port-number] arguments are not specified.
This is a list of ICMP message names:
beyond-scope
destination-unreachable
echo-reply
echo-request
header
hop-limit
mld-query
mld-reduction
mld-report
nd-na
nd-ns
next-header
no-admin
no-route
packet-too-big
parameter-option
parameter-problem
port-unreachable
reassembly-timeout
renum-command
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-327
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (IPv6 access-list configuration)
renum-result
renum-seq-number
router-advertisement
router-renumbering
router-solicitation
time-exceeded
unreachable
Examples
This example configures two IPv6 access lists named OUTBOUND and INBOUND and applies both
access lists to outbound and inbound traffic on a Layer 3 interface. The first and second permit entries
in the OUTBOUND list permit all TCP and UDP packets from network 2001:ODB8:0300:0201::/64 to
leave the interface. The deny entry in the OUTBOUND list prevents all packets from the network
FE80:0:0:0201::/64 (packets that have the link-local prefix FE80:0:0:0201 as the first 64 bits of their
source IPv6 address) from leaving the interface. The third permit entry in the OUTBOUND list permits
all ICMP packets to leave the interface.
The permit entry in the INBOUND list permits all ICMP packets to enter the interface.
Switch(config)#ipv6 access-list OUTBOUND
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit tcp 2001:0DB8:0300:0201::/64 any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit udp 2001:0DB8:0300:0201::/64 any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# deny FE80:0:0:0201::/64 any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit icmp any any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# exit
Switch(config)#ipv6 access-list INBOUND
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit icmp any any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/3
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001::/64 eui-64
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 traffic-filter OUTBOUND out
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 traffic-filter INBOUND in
Note
Related Commands
Given that a permit any any statement is not included as the last entry in the OUTBOUND or the
INBOUND access list, only TCP, UDP, and ICMP packets can leave or enter the interface (the implicit
deny-all condition at the end of the access list denies all other packet types on the interface).
Command
Description
ipv6 access-list
Defines an IPv6 access list and enters IPv6 access list configuration mode.
ipv6 traffic-filter
Filters incoming or outgoing IPv6 traffic on an interface.
deny (IPv6 access-list
configuration)
Sets deny conditions for an IPv6 access list.
show ipv6 access-list
Displays the contents of all current IPv6 access lists.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-328
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (MAC access-list configuration)
permit (MAC access-list configuration)
Use the permit MAC access-list configuration command to allow non-IP traffic to be forwarded if the
conditions are matched. Use the no form of this command to remove a permit condition from the
extended MAC access list.
{permit | deny} {any | host src-MAC-addr | src-MAC-addr mask} {any | host dst-MAC-addr |
dst-MAC-addr mask} [type mask | cos cos | aarp | amber | dec-spanning | decnet-iv |
diagnostic | dsm | etype-6000 | etype-8042 | lat | lavc-sca | lsap lsap mask | mop-console |
mop-dump | msdos | mumps | netbios | vines-echo | vines-ip | xns-idp]
no {permit | deny} {any | host src-MAC-addr | src-MAC-addr mask} {any | host dst-MAC-addr |
dst-MAC-addr mask} [type mask | cos cos | aarp | amber | dec-spanning | decnet-iv |
diagnostic | dsm | etype-6000 | etype-8042 | lat | lavc-sca | lsap lsap mask | mop-console |
mop-dump | msdos | mumps | netbios | vines-echo |vines-ip | xns-idp]
Note
Syntax Description
Though visible in the command-line help strings, appletalk is not supported as a matching condition.
any
Keyword to specify to deny any source or destination MAC address.
host src-MAC-addr |
src-MAC-addr mask
Define a host MAC address and optional subnet mask. If the source
address for a packet matches the defined address, non-IP traffic from that
address is denied.
host dst-MAC-addr |
dst-MAC-addr mask
Define a destination MAC address and optional subnet mask. If the
destination address for a packet matches the defined address, non-IP
traffic to that address is denied.
type mask
(Optional) Use the Ethertype number of a packet with Ethernet II or
SNAP encapsulation to identify the protocol of the packet.
•
type is 0 to 65535, specified in hexadecimal.
•
mask is a mask of don’t care bits applied to the Ethertype before
testing for a match.
aarp
(Optional) Select Ethertype AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol that
maps a data-link address to a network address.
amber
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-Amber.
cos cos
(Optional) Select an arbitrary class of service (CoS) number from 0 to 7
to set priority. Filtering on CoS can be performed only in hardware. A
warning message appears if the cos option is configured.
dec-spanning
(Optional) Select EtherType Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC)
spanning tree.
decnet-iv
(Optional) Select EtherType DECnet Phase IV protocol.
diagnostic
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-Diagnostic.
dsm
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-DSM.
etype-6000
(Optional) Select EtherType 0x6000.
etype-8042
(Optional) Select EtherType 0x8042.
lat
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-LAT.
lavc-sca
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-LAVC-SCA.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-329
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (MAC access-list configuration)
lsap lsap-number mask
(Optional) Use the LSAP number (0 to 65535) of a packet with 802.2
encapsulation to identify the protocol of the packet.
The mask is a mask of don’t care bits applied to the LSAP number before
testing for a match.
mop-console
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-MOP Remote Console.
mop-dump
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-MOP Dump.
msdos
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-MSDOS.
mumps
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC-MUMPS.
netbios
(Optional) Select EtherType DEC- Network Basic Input/Output System
(NETBIOS).
vines-echo
(Optional) Select EtherType Virtual Integrated Network Service (VINES)
Echo from Banyan Systems.
vines-ip
(Optional) Select EtherType VINES IP.
xns-idp
(Optional) Select EtherType Xerox Network Systems (XNS) protocol
suite.
To filter IPX traffic, you use the type mask or lsap lsap mask keywords, depending on the type of IPX
encapsulation being used. Filter criteria for IPX encapsulation types as specified in Novell terminology
and Cisco IOS terminology are listed in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3
IPX Filtering Criteria
IPX Encapsulation Type
Cisco IOS Name
Novell Name
Filter Criterion
arpa
Ethernet II
Ethertype 0x8137
snap
Ethernet-snap
Ethertype 0x8137
sap
Ethernet 802.2
LSAP 0xE0E0
novell-ether
Ethernet 802.3
LSAP 0xFFFF
Defaults
This command has no defaults. However, the default action for a MAC-named ACL is to deny.
Command Modes
MAC access-list configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You enter MAC access-list configuration mode by using the mac access-list extended global
configuration command.
If you use the host keyword, you cannot enter an address mask; if you do not use the any or host
keywords, you must enter an address mask.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-330
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
permit (MAC access-list configuration)
After an access control entry (ACE) is added to an access control list, an implied deny-any-any
condition exists at the end of the list. That is, if there are no matches, the packets are denied. However,
before the first ACE is added, the list permits all packets.
Note
Examples
For more information about MAC-named extended access lists, see the software configuration guide for
this release.
This example shows how to define the MAC-named extended access list to allow NETBIOS traffic from
any source to MAC address 00c0.00a0.03fa. Traffic matching this list is allowed.
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit any host 00c0.00a0.03fa netbios
This example shows how to remove the permit condition from the MAC-named extended access list:
Switch(config-ext-macl)# no permit any 00c0.00a0.03fa 0000.0000.0000 netbios
This example permits all packets with Ethertype 0x4321:
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit any any 0x4321 0
You can verify your settings by entering the show access-lists privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
deny (MAC access-list
configuration)
Denies non-IP traffic to be forwarded if conditions are matched.
mac access-list extended
Creates an access list based on MAC addresses for non-IP traffic.
show access-lists
Displays access control lists configured on a switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-331
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
police
police
Use the police policy-map class configuration command to define an individual policer for classified
traffic and to enter policy-map class police configuration mode. A policer defines a maximum
permissible rate of transmission, a maximum burst size and an excess burst size for transmissions, and
an action to take if a maximum is exceeded. In policy-map class police configuration mode, you can
specify multiple actions for a packet. Use the no form of this command to remove a policer.
Note
Although visible in the command-line help, the police rate and percent keywords are not supported.
police {cir cir-bps | rate-bps} [burst-bytes] | bc [burst-value] | pir pir-bps [be burst-bytes]
[conform-action [drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit {new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]
[table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit] [exceed action [drop
| set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} |
set-dot1ad-dei-transmit {new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} |
set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} |
set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]}
| set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit] [violate-action [drop | set-cos-transmit
{new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit
{new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit
{new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit
{new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit
qos-group-value | transmit]]
no police {cir cir-bps | rate-bps} [burst-bytes] | bc [burst-value] | pir pir-bps [be burst-bytes]
[conform-action [drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit {new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]
[table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit] [exceed action [drop
| set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} |
set-dot1ad-dei-transmit {new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} |
set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} |
set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]}
| set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit] [violate-action [drop | set-cos-transmit
{new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit
{new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit
{new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit
{new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit
qos-group-value | transmit]]
Note
When police is used with the priority policy-map class command for unconditionally rate-limiting the
priority queue, burst size values are not supported, and the rate-bps range is smaller. Only the default
conform-action of transmit and the default exceed-action of drop are supported.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-332
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
police
Syntax Description
cir
Committed information rate (CIR) used for policing traffic.
cir-bps
CIR rate in bps. The range is 8000 to 1000000000 bps.
Note
rate-bps
The range for police with the priority command for output service
policies is 64000 to 1000000000.
Specify the average traffic rate in b/s. The range is 8000 to 1000000000.
Note
The range for police with the priority command for output service
policies is 64000 to 1000000000.
burst-bytes
(Optional) Specify the normal burst size in bytes. The range is 8000 to
1000000.
bc [burst- value]
(Optional) Conform burst. The number of acceptable burst bytes. The range
is 8000 to 1000000 bytes.
If no burst value is entered, the system calculates a burst value that equals
the number of bytes that can be sent in 250 milliseconds (ms) at the CIR
rate. In most cases, the automatically calculated value is appropriate; enter
a new value only if you are aware of all implications.
pir pir-bps
(Optional) Peak information rate (PIR) used for policing traffic. The range
is from 8000 to 1000000000 b/s.
be burst-bytes
(Optional) Exceed burst. The number of acceptable exceed burst bytes.
The range is 8000 to 1000000 bytes.
conform-action
(Optional) Action to be taken for packets that conform to (are less than or
equal to) the CIR.
drop
(Optional) Drop the packet.
Note
set-cos-transmit
new-cos-value
If the conform action is set to drop, the exceed and violate actions
are automatically set to drop. If the exceed action is set to drop, the
violate action is automatically set to drop.
Set a new class of service (CoS) value for the packet and send the packet.
This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the new CoS
value is 0 to 7.
set-dot1ad-dei-transmit Set a new drop eligibility indicator (DEI) value in the IEEE 802.1ad frame
new-dei-value
for the packet, and send the packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking
action. The range for the new DEI value is 0 to 1. The DEI value applies
only to 802.1ad ports.
set-dscp-transmit
new-dscp-value
Set a new Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value for the packet,
and send the packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The
range for the new DCSP value is 0 to 63.
set-prec-transmit
new-precedence-value
Set a new IP precedence value for the packet, and send the packet. This
specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the new IP
precedence value is 0 to 7.
set-qos-transmit
qos-group-value
Set a new quality of service (QoS) group value for the packet, and send the
packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the
new QoS value is 0 to 99.
cos
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the CoS value of the incoming packet, and send the packet. This specifies
the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-333
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
police
dscp
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the DSCP value of the incoming packet, and send the packet. This
specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
precedence
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword based
on the IP precedence value of the incoming packet, and send the packet.
This specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
table table-map name
(Optional) Used with the preceding from-type keyword. Specify the table
map to be used for the enhanced packet marking. The to-type of the action
is marked based on the from-type parameter of the action using this table
map.
transmit
(Optional) Send the packet unmodified.
exceed-action
(Optional) Action to be taken for packets that exceed the CIR but are less
than or equal to the PIR.
violate-action
(Optional) Action to be taken for packets exceed the PIR.
Defaults
No policers are defined. Conform burst (bc) is automatically configured to 250 ms at the configured CIR.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(55)SE
The set-dot1ad-dei-transmit keywords were added.
Usage Guidelines
You can configure conform-action marking by using enhanced packet marking and configure
exceed-action to send the packet unmodified, mark using explicit values, and use all combinations of
enhanced packet marking. Enhanced packet marking modifies a QoS marking based on any incoming
QoS marking and table maps. The switch also supports marking multiple QoS parameters for the same
class and simultaneously configuring conform-action, exceed-action, and violate-action marking.
If the conform action is set to drop, the exceed and violate actions are automatically set to drop. If the
exceed action is set to drop, the violate action is automatically set to drop.
The switch supports a maximum of 254 policer profiles. The number of supported policer instances is
1024 minus 1 more than the total number of interfaces on the switch. You can apply the same profile in
multiple instances.
•
You can specify 256 unique VLAN classification criteria within a per-port, per-VLAN policy-map,
across all ports on the switch. Any policy attachment or change that causes this limit to be exceeded
fails with a VLAN label resources exceeded error message.
•
You can attach per-port and per-port, per-VLAN policy-maps across all ports on the switch until
QoS ACE classification resource limitations are reached. Any policy attachment or change that
causes this limit to be exceeded fails with a TCAM resources exceeded error message.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-334
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
police
•
When CPU protection is enabled, you can configure only 45 policers per port. You can configure up
to 64 policers per port by disabling CPU protection by entering the no policer cpu uni all global
configuration command, and reloading the switch allows. You can enter the show policer cpu uni-eni
{drop | rate} privileged EXEC command to see if CPU protection is enabled. For more information,
see the policer cpu uni command.
•
Note these limitations when you disable CPU protection:
– When CPU protection is disabled, you can configure a maximum of 63 policers per port (62 on
every fourth port) for user-defined classes and one for class-default for all switches. Any policy
attachment or change that causes this limit to be exceeded fails with a policer resources
exceeded error message.
– When CPU protection is disabled, you can configure 255 policers on the switch for platform.
Any policy attachment or change that causes this limit to be exceeded fails with a policer
resources exceeded error message.
– If you disable CPU protection and attach a policy map with more than 45 policers, and enable
CPU protection again, and then reload, 19 policers per port are again required for CPU
protection. During reload, the policers 46 and above will reach the policer resources exceeded
error condition, and no policers are attached to those classes.
Policing is only supported in input policies or in output policies that were configured with the priority
policy-map class configuration command to reduce bandwidth in the priority queue.
Note
When used with the priority command in an output policy, the police rate range is 64000 to
1000000000 bps, even though the range that appears in the command-line interface help is 8000 to
1000000000. You cannot attach an output service policy with an out-of-range rate.
An output policy map should match only the modified values of the out-of-profile traffic and not the
original values.
Only 802.1ad S-UNI and S-NNI ports can use policers marking the DEI bit.
To configure multiple conform-actions or multiple exceed-actions, enter policy-map class police
configuration mode, and use the conform-action, exceed-action, and violate-action policy-map class
police configuration commands.
If you do not configure a violate-action, by default the violate class is assigned the same action as the
exceed action.
When you define the policer and press Enter, you enter policy-map class police configuration mode, in
which you can configure multiple policing actions:
•
conform-action: the action to be taken on packets that conform to (are less than or equal to) the
CIR. The default action is to transmit the packet. For more information, see the conform-action
policy-map class police command.
•
exceed-action: the action to be taken on packets that exceed the CIR but are less than or equal to
the PIR. The default action is to drop the packet. For more information, see the exceed-action
policy-map class police command.
•
violate-action: the action to be taken on packets that exceed the PIR. The default action is to drop
the packet. For more information, see the violate-action policy-map class police command.
•
exit: exits from QoS policy-map class police configuration mode. If you do not want to set multiple
actions, you can enter exit without entering any other policy-map class police commands.
•
no: negates or sets the default values of a command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-335
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
police
Examples
This example shows how to configure a policer with a 1-Mb/s average rate with a burst size of 20 KB.
The policer sets a new DSCP precedence value if the packets conform to the rate and drops the packet if
traffic exceeds the rate.
Switch(config)# policy-map policy1
Switch(config-pmap)# class inclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 1000000 20000 conform-action set-dscp-transmit 46
exceed-action drop
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
This example shows how to configure 2-rate, 3-color policing by using policy-map configuration mode.
Switch(config)# class-map cos-4
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 4
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# policy-map in-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class cos-4
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 5000000 pir 8000000 conform-action transmit
exceed-action set-dscp-transmit 24 violate-action drop
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy input in-policy
Switch(config-if)# exit
This example shows how to create the same configuration by using policy-map class police configuration
mode.
Switch(config)# class-map cos-4
Switch(config-cmap)# match cos 4
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# policy-map in-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class cos-4
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 5000000 pir 8000000
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# conform-action transmit
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# exceed-action set-dscp-transmit 24
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# violate-action drop
Switch(config-pmap-c-police)# end
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified
class-map name.
conform-action
Defines multiple actions for a policy-map class for packets that meet
the CIR or PIR and have a rate less than the conform burst.
exceed-action
Defines multiple actions for a policy-map class for packets that
exceed the CIR or PIR and with a rate between the conform value and
the exceed burst.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple
ports to specify a service policy.
violate-action
Defines multiple actions for a policy-map class for packets that
exceed the CIR and PIR with a rate that exceeds the conform rate plus
the exceed burst.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-336
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policer aggregate (global configuration)
policer aggregate (global configuration)
Use the policer aggregate global configuration command to create an aggregate policer to police all
traffic across multiple classes in an input policy map. An aggregate policer can be shared by multiple
classes in the same policy map. A policer defines a maximum permissible rate of transmission or
committed information rate, a maximum burst size for transmissions, and an action to take if the
maximum is met or exceeded. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified policer.
policer aggregate aggregate-policer-name {rate-bps | cir cir-bps} [bc burst- value]| [pir pir-bps
[be burst-bytes]] [conform-action [drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp |
precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit {new-dei-value | [cos | dscp |
precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp |
precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp
| precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit]
[exceed-action [drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit {new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]
[table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit] [violate-action [drop
| set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit
{new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit
{new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos
| dscp | precedence]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit]]
no policer aggregate aggregate-policer-name {rate-bps | cir cir-bps} [bc burst- value]| [pir pir-bps
[be burst-bytes]] [conform-action [drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp |
precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit {new-dei-value | [cos | dscp |
precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp |
precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp
| precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit]
[exceed-action [drop | set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit {new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit {new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table
table-map name]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]
[table table-map name]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit] [violate-action [drop
| set-cos-transmit {new-cos-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]} | set-dot1ad-dei-transmit
{new-dei-value | [cos | dscp | precedence] [table table-map name]} | set-dscp-transmit
{new-dscp-value | [cos | dscp | precedence]} | set-prec-transmit {new-precedence-value | [cos
| dscp | precedence]} | set-qos-transmit qos-group-value | transmit]]
Syntax Description
aggregate-policer-name
Name of the aggregate policer.
rate-bps
Specify the average traffic rate in bits per second (b/s). The range is
8000 to 1000000000.
cir cir-bps
Committed information rate (CIR) in bits/ second. The range is 8000
to 1000000000 b/s.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-337
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policer aggregate (global configuration)
bc burst- value
(Optional) Conform burst. The number of acceptable burst bytes. The
range is 8000 to 1000000 bytes.
If no burst value is entered, the system calculates a burst value that
equals the number of bytes that can be sent in 250 milliseconds (ms)
at the CIR rate. In most cases, the automatically calculated value is
appropriate. Enter a new value only if you are aware of all
implications.
pir pir-bps
(Optional) Peak information rate (PIR) used for policing traffic. The
range is from 8000 to 1000000000 b/s.
be burst-bytes
(Optional) Exceed burst. The number of acceptable exceed burst
bytes. The range is 8000 to 1000000 bytes.
conform-action
(Optional) Action to be taken on packets that meet (are less than or
equal to) the CIR.
drop
(Optional) Drop the packet.
Note
If the conform action is set to drop, the exceed and violate
actions are automatically set to drop. If the exceed action is
set to drop, the violate action is automatically set to drop.
set-cos-transmit cos-value
Set a new class of service (CoS) value for the packet, and send the
packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for
the new CoS value is 0 to 7.
set-dot1ad-dei-transmit
new-dei-value
Set a new drop eligibility indicator (DEI) value in the IEEE 802.1ad
frame for the packet, and send the packet. This specifies the to-type of
the marking action. The range for the new DEI value is 0 to 1. The
DEI value applies only to 802.1ad ports.
set-dscp-transmit dscp-value
Set a new Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value for the
packet, and send the packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking
action. The range for the new DCSP value is 0 to 63.
set-prec-transmit
precedence-value
Set a new IP precedence value for the packet and send the packet. This
specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range for the new IP
precedence value is 0 to 7.
set-qos-transmit
qos-group-value
Set a new quality of service (QoS) group value for the packet and send
the packet. This specifies the to-type of the marking action. The range
for the new QoS value is 0 to 99.
cos
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword
based on the CoS value of the incoming packet, and send the packet.
This specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
dscp
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword
based on the DSCP value of the incoming packet, and send the packet.
This specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking action.
precedence
(Optional) Set the packet marking specified in the preceding keyword
based on the IP precedence value of the incoming packet, and send the
packet. This specifies the from-type of the enhanced packet-marking
action.
table table-map name
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the preceding from-type
keyword. Specify the table map to be used for the enhanced packet
marking. The to-type of the action is marked based on the from-type
parameter of the action using this table map.
Table maps are not supported for violate-actions.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-338
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policer aggregate (global configuration)
Defaults
transmit
(Optional) Send the packet unmodified.
exceed-action
(Optional) Action to be taken for packets that exceed the CIR but are
less than or equal to the PIR.
violate-action
(Optional) Action to be taken for packets that exceed the PIR.
No aggregate policers are defined.
When you configure an aggregate policer, conform burst (bc) is automatically configured at 250 ms at
the configured CIR.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(55)SE
The set-dot1ad-dei-transmit keywords were added.
Usage Guidelines
You can configure conform-action marking using enhanced packet marking and configure exceed-action
and violate-action to send the packet unmodified, mark using explicit values, and use all combinations
of enhanced packet marking. Enhanced packet marking modifies a QoS marking based on any incoming
QoS marking and table maps. The switch also supports marking multiple QoS parameters for the same
class, and simultaneously configuring conform-action, exceed-action, and violate-action marking.
If the conform action is set to drop, the exceed and violate actions are automatically set to drop. If the
exceed action is set to drop, the violate action is automatically set to drop.
If you do not configure a violate-action, by default the violate class is assigned the same action as the
exceed-action.
The switch supports a maximum of 254 unique aggregate policers.
Aggregate policing is supported only in input policy maps.
Table maps are not supported for violate-action for aggregate policing unless a table map is configured
for exceed-action and no explicit action is configured for violate action.
You can simultaneously configure multiple conform, exceed, and violate actions for an aggregate policer
as parameters in the policer aggregate global configuration command, but you must enter the actions in
this order:
•
conform-action must be followed by drop or transmit or by set actions in this order:
set-qos-transmit
set-dscp-transmit or set-prec-transmit
set-cos-transmit
•
exceed-action must be followed by drop or transmit or by set actions in this order:
set-qos-transmit
set-dscp-transmit or set-prec-transmit
set-cos-transmit
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-339
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policer aggregate (global configuration)
•
violate-action must be followed by drop or transmit or by set actions in this order:
set-qos-transmit
set-dscp-transmit or set-prec-transmit
set-cos-transmit
An output policy map should match only the modified values of the out-of-profile traffic and not the
original values.
Only 802.1ad S-UNI and S-NNI ports can use policers marking the DEI bit.
When you configure an aggregate policer, you can configure specific burst sizes and conform and exceed
actions. If burst size (bc) is not specified, the system calculates an appropriate burst size value that
equals the number of bytes that can be sent in 250 ms at the CIR rate. In most cases, the automatically
calculated value is appropriate. Enter a new value only if you are aware of all implications.
Examples
This example shows how to configure an aggregate policer named agg-pol-1 and attach it to multiple
classes within a policy map:
Switch(config)# policer aggregate agg-pol-1 10900000 80000 exceed-action drop
Switch(config)# class-map test1
Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 1
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map test2
Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 2
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# policy map testexample
Switch(config-pmap)# class test1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate agg-pol-1
Switch(config-cmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class test2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate agg-pol-1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-9map)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy input testexample
Switch(config-if)# exit
This example shows how to create a 2-rate, 3-color aggregate policer and attach it to multiple classes
within a policy map. The policy map is attached to an ingress port.
Switch(config)# policer aggregate example cir 10900000 pir 80000000 conform-action
transmit exceed-action drop violate-action drop
Switch(config)# class-map testclass1
Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 1
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map testclass2
Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 2
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# policy-map testexample
Switch(config-pmap)# class testclass
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate example
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class testclass2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate example
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy input testexample
Switch(config-if)# exit
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-340
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policer aggregate (global configuration)
You can verify your settings by entering the show aggregate-policer privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified class-map
name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policer aggregate Displays the aggregate policer configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-341
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
police aggregate (policy-map class configuration)
police aggregate (policy-map class configuration)
Use the police aggregate policy-map class configuration command to apply an aggregate policer to
multiple classes in the same policy map. A policer defines a maximum permissible rate of transmission,
a maximum burst size for transmissions, and an action to take if either maximum is exceeded. Use the
no form of this command to remove the specified policer.
police aggregate aggregate-policer-name
no police aggregate aggregate-policer-name
Syntax Description
aggregate-policer-name
Defaults
No aggregate policers are defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Name of the aggregate policer.
The switch supports a maximum of 229 policer instances associated with ports (228 user-configurable
policers and 1 policer reserved for internal use). When CPU protection is enabled (the default), you can
configure 45 ingress policers per port. If you disable CPU protection by entering the no policer cpu uni
all global configuration command and reloading the switch, you can configure up to 64 ingress policers
per port (63 policers on every fourth port). For more information, see the policer cpu uni command.
Aggregate policing applies only to input policy maps.
An aggregate policer differs from an individual policer in that it is shared by multiple traffic classes
within a policy map. You use an aggregate policer to police traffic streams across multiple classes in a
policy map attached to an interface. You cannot use aggregate policing to aggregate traffic streams across
multiple interfaces.
Only one policy map can use any specific aggregate policer.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the aggregate policing with default actions and apply it across all
classes on the same port:
Switch(config)# policy-map inpolicy
Switch(config-pmap)# class in-class1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate agg_policer1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class in-class2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate agg_policer1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class in-class3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate agg_policer1
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-342
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
police aggregate (policy-map class configuration)
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show aggregate policer privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified
class-map name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple
ports to specify a service policy.
show policer aggregate
Displays the aggregate policer configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-343
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policer cpu uni
policer cpu uni
Use the policer cpu uni global configuration command to enable or disable CPU protection and to
configure the CPU policing threshold for all user network interfaces (UNIs) and enhanced network
interfaces (ENIs) on the switch. Use the no form of this command to return to the default rate or to
disable CPU protection.
policer cpu uni {all | rate-bps}
no policer cpu uni {all | rate-bps}
Syntax Description
all
Enter this keyword to enable or disable CPU protection. Disabling CPU
protection allows 64 policers per port instead of 45.
rate-bps
Specify the CPU policing threshold in bits per second (b/s). The range is
8000 to 409500.
Defaults
CPU protection is enabled. The default policing threshold is 160000 b/s.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(50)SE
The all keyword was added for disabling or enabling CPU protection.
Usage Guidelines
To protect against accidental or intentional CPU overload, the switch automatically provides CPU
protection or control-plane security by dropping or rate-limiting a predefined set of Layer 2 control
packets and some Layer 3 control packets for UNIs and ENIs. The switch pre-allocates 27 control-plane
security policers for CPU protection, numbered 0 to 26. A policer of 26 means a drop policer. A policer
value of 0 to 25 means that the port uses a rate-limiting policer for the control protocol.
CPU policers are pre-allocated. You can configure only the rate-limiting threshold by using the policer
cpu uni rate-bps command. The configured threshold applies to all control protocols and all UNIs and
ENIs.
CPU protection policing uses 19 policers per port, which allows attaching a maximum of 45 ingress
policers to a port. If you need more than 45 policers on a port, you can disable CPU protection by
entering the no cpu policer uni all global configuration command before you attach a policy map with
more than 45 policers. When CPU protection is disabled, you can attach up to 64 ingress policers to a
port.
Note these limitations when you disable CPU protection:
•
When CPU protection is disabled, you can configure a maximum of 63 policers per port (62 on every
4th port) for user-defined classes, and one for class-default for all switches. Any policy attachment
or change that causes this limit to be exceeded fails with a policer resources exceeded error message.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-344
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policer cpu uni
Note
•
When CPU protection is disabled, you can configure a maximum of 255 policers on the
ME3400E-24TS switch. Any policy attachment or change that causes this limit to be exceeded fails
with a policer resources exceeded error message.
•
If you disable CPU protection and attach a policy map with more than 45 policers, and then enable
CPU protection again, and reload, 19 policers per port are again required for CPU protection. During
reload, the policers 46 and above will reach the policer resources exceeded error condition and no
policers are attached to those classes.
For every four ports on a switch (port 1-4, 5-8, etc.), the first three ports support 64 policers, but the
fourth port can support only 63 policers.
When you disable or enable the CPU protection feature, you must reload the switch by entering the
reload privileged EXEC command before the configuration takes effect.
Note
When CPU protection is turned off, protocol packets can reach the CPU, which could cause CPU
processing overload and storm control through software.
You can enter the show policer cpu uni-eni {drop | rate} privileged EXEC command to see if CPU
protection is enabled.
For more information about control-plane security, see the software configuration guide for this release.
Examples
This example shows how to set CPU protection threshold to 10000 b/s and to verify the configuration.
Switch# config t
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Switch(config)# policer cpu uni 10000
Switch(config)# end
End with CNTL/Z.
You can verify your settings by entering the show policer cpu uni-eni rate privileged EXEC command.
This example shows how to disable CPU protection and to reload the switch.
Switch(config)# no policer cpu uni all
Switch(config)# end
Switch# reload
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
This is an example of the output from the show policer cpu uni-eni rate privileged EXEC command
when CPU protection is disabled:
Switch# show policer cpu uni-eni rate
CPU Protection feature is not enabled
Related Commands\
Command
Description
show policer cpu uni-eni rate
Displays configured policer threshold for control-plane security.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-345
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policy-map
policy-map
Use the policy-map global configuration command to create or to modify a policy map that can be
attached to multiple physical ports and to enter policy-map configuration mode. Use the no form of this
command to delete an existing policy map.
policy-map policy-map-name
no policy-map policy-map-name
Syntax Description
policy-map-name
Defaults
No policy maps are defined. By default, packets are sent unmodified.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Name of the policy map.
The switch supports a maximum of 256 unique policy maps.
Before configuring policies for classes whose match criteria are defined in a class map, use the
policy-map command to specify the name of the policy map to be created or modified. Entering the
policy-map command also enables the policy-map configuration mode, in which you can configure or
modify the class policies for that policy map.
After entering the policy-map command, you enter policy-map configuration mode, and these
configuration commands are available:
Note
•
class: the specified traffic classification for which the policy actions are applied. The classification
is defined in the class-map global configuration command. For more information, see the class-map
command.
•
description: describes the policy map (up to 200 characters).
•
exit: exits policy-map configuration mode and returns to global configuration mode.
•
no: removes a previously defined policy map.
If you enter the no policy-map configuration command or the no policy-map policy-map-name global
configuration command to delete a policy map that is attached to an interface, a warning message
appears that lists any interfaces from which the policy map is being detached. The policy map is then
detached and deleted. For example:
Warning: Detaching Policy test1 from Interface GigabitEthernet0/1
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-346
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policy-map
You can configure class policies in a policy map only if the classes have match criteria defined for them.
To configure the match criteria for a class, use the class-map global configuration and match class-map
configuration commands. You define packet classification on a physical-port basis.
You can create input policy maps and output policy maps, and you can assign one input policy map and
one output policy map to a port. The input policy map acts on incoming traffic on the port; the output
policy map acts on outgoing traffic.
You can apply the same policy map to multiple physical ports.
Follow these guidelines when configuring input policy maps:
•
The total number of input policy maps that can be attached to interfaces on the switch is limited by
the availability of hardware resources. If you attempt to attach an input policy map that would
exceed any hardware resource limitation, the configuration fails.
•
An input policy map can contain a maximum of 64 class maps, plus class-default.
•
You cannot configure an IP (IP standard and extended ACL, DSCP or IP precedence) and a non-IP
(MAC ACL or CoS) classification within the same policy map, either within a single class map or
across class maps within the policy map.
•
After you use the service-policy input policy-map configuration command to attach an input policy
map to an interface, you can modify the policy without detaching it from the interface. You can add
or delete classification criteria, classes, or actions, or change the parameters of the configured
actions (policers, rates, mapping, marking, and so on).
•
These commands are not supported on input policy maps: match qos-group command, bandwidth
command for Class-Based-Weighting-Queuing (CBWFQ), priority command for class-based
priority queueing, queue-limit command for Weighted Tail Drop (WTD), shape average command
for port shaping, or class-based traffic shaping.
Follow these guidelines when configuring output policy maps:
•
Output policy maps can have a maximum of four classes, one of which is the class-default.
•
The switch supports configuration and attachment of a unique output policy map for each port on
the switch. However, these output policy maps can contain only three configurations of queue limits.
You can include these three unique queue-limit configurations in as many output policy maps as
there are switch ports. If you try to attach an output policy map that has a fourth queue-limit
configuration, you see an error message, and the attachment is not allowed. There are no limitations
on the configurations of bandwidth, priority, or shaping.
•
All output policy maps must include the same number of class maps (one to three) and the same
classification (that is, the same class maps).
•
After you have attached a output policy map to an interface by using the service-policy output
interface configuration command, you can only change the parameters of the configured actions
(rates, percentages, and so on) or add or delete classification criteria of the class map while the
policy map is attached to the interface. To add or delete a class or an action, you must detach the
policy map from all interfaces, change it, and then reattach it to interfaces.
•
These commands are not supported on output policy maps: match access-group command, set
command for marking, and police command for policing without including the priority command.
For more information about policy maps, see the software configuration guide for this release.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-347
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
policy-map
Examples
This example shows how to create an input policy map for three classes:
Switch(config)# policy-map input-all
Switch(config-pmap)# class gold
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp af43
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class silver
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 50000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class bronze
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 20000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
This example shows how to configure an output policy map that provides priority with rate limiting to
the gold class and guarantees a minimum remaining bandwidth percent of 20 percent to the silver class
and 10 percent to the bronze class:
Switch(config)# policy-map output-2
Switch(config-pmap)# class gold-out
Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 50000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class silver-out
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class bronze-out
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
This example shows how to delete the policy map output-2:
Switch(config)# no policy-map output-2
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified class-map
name.
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name
you specify.
service-policy
(interface
configuration)
Applies a policy map to a port.
show policy-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-348
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
port-channel load-balance
port-channel load-balance
Use the port-channel load-balance global configuration command to set the load-distribution method
among the ports in the EtherChannel. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
port-channel load-balance {dst-ip | dst-mac | src-dst-ip | src-dst-mac | src-ip | src-mac}
no port-channel load-balance
Syntax Description
dst-ip
Load distribution is based on the destination host IP address.
dst-mac
Load distribution is based on the destination host MAC address. Packets to the same
destination are sent on the same port, but packets to different destinations are sent on
different ports in the channel.
src-dst-ip
Load distribution is based on the source and destination host IP address.
src-dst-mac
Load distribution is based on the source and destination host MAC address.
src-ip
Load distribution is based on the source host IP address.
src-mac
Load distribution is based on the source MAC address. Packets from different hosts use
different ports in the channel, but packets from the same host use the same port.
Defaults
The default is src-mac.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
For information about when to use these forwarding methods, see the “Configuring EtherChannels”
chapter in the software configuration guide for this release.
Examples
This example shows how to set the load-distribution method to dst-mac:
Switch(config)# port-channel load-balance dst-mac
You can verify your setting by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command or the
show etherchannel load-balance privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-349
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
port-channel load-balance
Related Commands
Command
Description
interface port-channel
Accesses or creates the port channel.
show etherchannel
Displays EtherChannel information for a channel.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration. For syntax information, use this link
to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference listing page:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/prod_comman
d_reference_list.html
Select the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 to navigate
to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-350
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
port-type
port-type
Use the port-type interface configuration command to change the port type on a Cisco ME switch from
its existing port type to a network node interface (NNI), a user network interface (UNI), or an enhanced
network interfaces (ENI). Use the no form of this command to return the port to its default setting.
port-type {eni | nni | uni}
no port-type
Syntax Description
Defaults
eni
Enhanced network interface. ENIs have the same default configuration as UNIs, but
you can configure ENI to support protocol control packets for Cisco Discovery
Protocol (CDP), Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP), Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP), and EtherChannel Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) or Port
Aggregation Protocol (PAgP).
nni
Network node interface.
uni
User network interface.
If no configuration file exists, all the 10/100 ports on the Cisco ME switch are UNIs, and the small
form-factor pluggable (SFP) module slots on the Cisco ME switch are NNIs. You must configure a port
to be an ENI port.
A port configured as an ENI has the same defaults as a UNI port, but the you can configure control
protocols (CDP, STP, LLDP, LACP and PAgP) on ENIs. These protocols are not supported on UNIs.
The default status for a UNI or ENI is administratively down to prevent unauthorized users from gaining
access to other ports as you configure the switch. You must use the no shutdown interface configuration
command to enable a UNI or ENI before you can configure it.
The default status for an NNI is administratively up to allow a service provider remote access to the
switch during initial configuration.
Configuring a port as an ENI does not change the administrative state of the port. If the port state is
shutdown before a port-type change, it remains in shutdown state; if the state is no shutdown, it
remains in no shutdown state.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
A port can be reconfigured to another port type. When a port is reconfigured as the other interface type,
it inherits all the characteristics of that interface type. By default all ports on the switch are either UNI
or NNI. At any time, all ports on the Cisco ME switch are UNIs, NNIs, or ENIs.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-351
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
port-type
Some features are not supported only on all port types. Control protocols (CDP, STP, LLDP, and
EtherChannel LACP and PAgP) have different support on each port type:
•
On NNIs, these features are enabled by default.
•
On ENIs, these features are disabled by default, but you can enable them by using the command-line
interface.
•
On UNIs, these features are not supported.
For information about specific feature support, see the software configuration guide for this
release.When you change a port from one type to another, any features exclusive to a port type are
removed from the configuration to prevent conflicting configuration options on a specific interface.
Every port on the switch can be a UNI or ENI, but when the switch is running the metro access image,
only four ports can be NNIs at the same time. If the switch is running the metro IP access image, you
can configure all ports as NNIs.
Entering the no port-type or default port-type interface configuration command returns the port to the
default state: UNI for Fast Ethernet ports and NNI for Gigabit Ethernet ports.
Traffic is not switched between UNIs or ENIs, and all traffic incoming on UNIs or ENIs must exit on
NNIs to prevent a user from gaining access to another user’s private network. If it is appropriate for two
or more UNIs or ENIs to exchange traffic within the switch, you can assign the interface to a community
VLAN. A community VLAN can contain a maximum of eight UNIs or ENIs. We do not recommend
mixing UNIs and ENIs in the same community VLAN.
For more information about configuring VLANs, see the software configuration guide for this release.
Examples
This example shows how to change a port to an NNI.
Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
Switch(config-if)# port-type nni
5d20h: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# copy running-config startup-config
This example shows how to change a port type to an ENI.
Switch# config terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
Switch(config-if)# port-type eni
Switch(config-if)# end
Related Commands
End with CNTL/Z.
Command
Description
no shutdown
Enables an interface.
show interfaces
Displays the statistical information specific to all interfaces or to a specific
interface.
show port-type
Displays the port type of an interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-352
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
power-supply dual
power-supply dual
Use the power-supply dual global configuration command to enable power-supply alarms (LED state,
MIB state, and MIB traps) when only one power supply is installed in the switch. Use the no form of
this command when running the switch on a single power supply to suppress the power-supply alarm for
the missing second power supply. Use the power-supply dual dc-feed command to enable an alarm
when a DC-power input is not present.
power-supply dual [dc-feed]
no power-supply dual [dc-feed]
Syntax Description
dc-feed
Defaults
The default is that no alarm occurs with only one installed power supply (no power-supply dual). The
default when a DC-power supply is installed is that both DC inputs are providing power. If not, an alarm
is triggered.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
(Optional) Entering the no power-supply dual dc-feed command specifies that
only one DC input is expected when a DC-power supply is installed. This
suppresses any alarm associated with a missing DC input.
Entering the no power-supply dual global configuration command (the default) specifies that only one
power supply is expected to be present. The switch does not generate an alarm when a power supply is
missing.
This command controls only the sending of messages about the absence of a second power supply or the
absence of input to the second power supply. The software detects whether a power supply is present and
if there is an input voltage. When there is input, the software can detect if there is an output voltage and
if the fan is operating.
•
If only one power supply is present, no alarm is sent. However, if this power supply is connected to
the AC input and is not receiving or sending power, a power-supply fault message is sent.
•
If two power supplies are present, and both are receiving and sending power, no message is sent.
•
If two power supplies are present, and one is connected and operating and the other is not connected
to the AC input, no message is sent.
•
If two power supplies are present and both are connected to AC inputs, but only one is receiving or
sending power, a power-supply fault message is sent.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-353
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
power-supply dual
Note
The switch always sends an error message when an AC-power supply is connected to an AC input but is
not receiving or sending power.
If you operate the switch with two power supplies, enter the power-supply dual global configuration
command to configure the switch to send a message when one power supply is missing.
When one or two DC-power supplies are installed, if the switch does not detect both DC inputs, it creates
an LED alarm color and sends a system message. If you want to use only one DC input, enter the no
power-supply dual dc-feed global configuration command to disable alarm messages if the second DC
input is not present. This command is valid only when DC-power supplies are installed in the switch.
Examples
This example shows how to suppress power-supply alarms for a missing second power supply and to
verify the configuration:
Switch(config)# no power-supply dual
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show env power
POWER SUPPLY 1 is DC OK
DC A Input: OK
DC B Input: OK
Output
: OK
Fan
: OK
POWER SUPPLY 2 is DC OK
DC A Input: OK
DC B Input: OK
Output
: OK
Fan
: OK
This example shows how to suppress power-supply alarms when a DC-power supply is installed and only
one DC input is present:
Switch(config)# no power-supply dual dc-feed
Switch(config)# end
You can display the power-supply alarm status by entering the show env all or show env power
privileged EXEC commands.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show env {all | power} Displays the power-supply alarm setting for the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-354
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
priority
priority
Use the priority policy-map class configuration command to configure class-based priority queuing for
a class of traffic belonging to an output policy map. The switch supports strict priority queuing or
priority used with the police policy-map command. Use the no form of this command to remove a
priority specified for a class.
priority
no priority
Note
When the police command is used with the priority policy-map class command for unconditionally
rate-limiting the priority queue, burst size values are not supported for the police command.
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
No policers are defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Note
When used by itself (not followed by the police policy-map command), the priority command assigns
traffic to a low-latency path and ensures that packets belonging to the class have the lowest possible
latency. With strict priority queuing, packets in the priority queue are scheduled and sent until the queue
is empty.
You should exercise care when using the priority command without the policy command. Excessive use
of strict priority queuing might cause congestion in other queues.
You can use priority with the police {rate-bps | cir cir-bps} policy-map command to reduce the
bandwidth used by the priority queue. This is the only form of policing that is supported in output policy
maps. Using this combination of commands configures a maximum rate on the priority queue and allows
you to use the bandwidth and shape average policy-map commands for other classes to allocate traffic
rates on other queues.
Note
When you use the police command with the priority command in an output policy, the police rate range
is 64000 to 1000000000 bps, even though the range that appears in the command-line help is 8000 to
1000000000. Configured burst size is ignored when you try to attach the output service policy.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-355
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
priority
When you configure priority in an output policy map without the police command, you can only
configure the other queues for sharing by using the bandwidth remaining percent policy-map class
command. This command does not guarantee the allocated bandwidth, but the rate of distribution.
When you configure priority in an output policy map with the police command, you can configure other
queues for sharing by using the bandwidth policy-map class command and for shaping by using the
shape average policy-map class command.
You can associate the priority command only with a single unique class for all attached output policies
on the switch.
You cannot associate the priority command with the class-default of the output policy map.
You cannot configure priority and any other scheduling action (shape average or bandwidth) in the
same class.
The priority command uses a default queue limit for the class. You can change the queue limit by using
the queue-limit policy-map class command, overriding the default set by the priority command.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the class out-class1 as a strict priority queue so that all packets in
that class are sent before any other class of traffic. Other traffic queues are configured so that out-class-2
gets 50 percent of the remaining bandwidth and out-class3 gets 20 percent of the remaining bandwidth.
The class class-default receives the remaining 30 percent with no guarantees.
Switch(config)# policy-map policy1
Switch(config-pmap)# class out-class1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class out-class2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth remaining percent 50
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class out-class3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth remaining percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output policy1
Switch(config-if)# exit
This example shows how to use the priority with police commands to configure out-class1 as the
priority queue, with traffic going to the queue limited to 20000000 bits per second (bps) so that the
priority queue never uses more than that. Traffic above that rate is dropped. The other traffic queues are
configured as in the previous example.
Switch(config)# policy-map policy1
Switch(config-pmap)# class out-class1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 20000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class out-class2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 50
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class out-class3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output policy1
Switch(config-if)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-356
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
priority
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified
class-map name.
police
Defines a policer for classified traffic.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple
ports to specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-357
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
private-vlan
private-vlan
Use the private-vlan VLAN configuration command to configure private VLANs and to configure the
association between private-VLAN primary and secondary VLANs. Use the no form of this command
to return the VLAN to normal VLAN configuration.
private-vlan {association [add | remove] secondary-vlan-list | community | isolated | primary}
no private-vlan {association | community | isolated | primary}
Syntax Description
association
Create an association between the primary VLAN and a secondary VLAN.
secondary-vlan-list
Specify one or more secondary VLANs to be associated with a primary
VLAN in a private VLAN.
add
Associate a secondary VLAN to a primary VLAN.
remove
Clear the association between a secondary VLAN and a primary VLAN.
community
Designate the VLAN as a community VLAN.
isolated
Designate the VLAN as a community VLAN.
primary
Designate the VLAN as a community VLAN.
Defaults
The default is to no configured private VLANs.
Command Modes
VLAN configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must manually configure private VLANs on all switches in the Layer 2 network to merge their Layer
2 databases and to prevent flooding of private-VLAN traffic.
You cannot include VLAN 1 or VLANs 1002 to 1005 in the private-VLAN configuration. Extended
VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094) can be configured as private VLANs.
You can associate a secondary (isolated or community) VLAN with only one primary VLAN. A primary
VLAN can have one isolated VLAN and multiple community VLANs associated with it.
•
A secondary VLAN cannot be configured as a primary VLAN.
•
The secondary_vlan_list parameter cannot contain spaces. It can contain multiple comma-separated
items. Each item can be a single private-VLAN ID or a hyphenated range of private-VLAN IDs. The
list can contain one isolated VLAN and multiple community VLANs.
•
If you delete either the primary or secondary VLANs, the ports associated with the VLAN become
inactive.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-358
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
private-vlan
A community VLAN carries traffic among community ports and from community ports to the
promiscuous ports on the corresponding primary VLAN. A community VLAN can include no more than
eight user network interfaces (UNIs).
An isolated VLAN is used by isolated ports to communicate with promiscuous ports. It does not carry
traffic to other community ports or to isolated ports with the same primary VLAN domain.
A primary VLAN is the VLAN that carries traffic from a gateway to customer end stations on private
ports.
Configure Layer 3 VLAN interfaces (SVIs) only for primary VLANs. You cannot configure Layer 3
VLAN interfaces for secondary VLANs. SVIs for secondary VLANs are inactive while the VLAN is
configured as a secondary VLAN.
The private-vlan commands do not take effect until you exit from VLAN configuration mode.
Do not configure private-VLAN ports as EtherChannels. While a port is part of the private-VLAN
configuration, any EtherChannel configuration for it is inactive.
A private VLAN cannot be a Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN) VLAN.
A private VLAN cannot be a user network interface-enhanced network interface (UNI-ENI) VLAN. If
the VLAN is a UNI-ENI isolated VLAN (the default), you can change it to a private VLAN by entering
the private-vlan VLAN configuration command. If a VLAN has been configured as a UNI-ENI
community VLAN, you must first enter the no uni-vlan VLAN configuration command before
configuring it as a private VLAN.
Although a private VLAN contains more than one VLAN, only one STP instance runs for the entire
private VLAN. When a secondary VLAN is associated with the primary VLAN, the STP parameters of
the primary VLAN are propagated to the secondary VLAN.
See the switchport private-vlan command for information about configuring host ports and
promiscuous ports.
Note
Examples
For more information about private-VLAN interaction with other features, see the software
configuration guide for this release.
This example shows how to configure VLAN 20 as a primary VLAN, VLAN 501 as an isolated VLAN,
VLANs 502 and 503 as community VLANs, and to associate them in a private VLAN. The example
assumes that VLANs 502 and 503 were previously configured as UNI-ENI community VLANs.
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# vlan 20
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan
Switch(config-vlan)# exit
Switch(config)# vlan 501
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan
Switch(config-vlan)# exit
Switch(config)# vlan 502
Switch(config-vlan)# no uni-vlan
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan
Switch(config-vlan)# exit
Switch(config)# vlan 503
Switch(config-vlan)# no uni-vlan
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan
Switch(config-vlan)# exit
Switch(config)# vlan 20
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan
Switch(config-vlan)# end
primary
isolated
community
community
association 501-503
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-359
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
private-vlan
You can verify your setting by entering the show vlan private-vlan or show interfaces status privileged
EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces status
Displays the status of interfaces, including the VLANs to which they
belong.
show vlan private-vlan
Displays the private VLANs and VLAN associations configured on
the switch.
switchport private-vlan
Configures a private-VLAN port as a host port or promiscuous port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-360
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
private-vlan mapping
private-vlan mapping
Use the private-vlan mapping interface configuration command on a switch virtual interface (SVI) to
create a mapping between a private-VLAN primary and secondary VLANs so that both VLANs share
the same primary VLAN interface. Use the no form of this command to remove private-VLAN mappings
from the interface.
private-vlan mapping {[add | remove] secondary-vlan-list}
no private-vlan mapping
Syntax Description
secondary-vlan-list
Specify one or more secondary VLANs to be mapped to the primary VLAN
interface.
add
(Optional) Map the secondary VLAN to the primary VLAN interface.
remove
(Optional) Remove the mapping between the secondary VLAN and the
primary VLAN interface.
Defaults
The default is to have no private VLAN mapping configured.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The SVI of the primary VLAN is created at Layer 3.
Configure Layer 3 VLAN interfaces (SVIs) only for primary VLANs. You cannot configure Layer 3
VLAN interfaces for secondary VLANs. SVIs for secondary VLANs are inactive while the VLAN is
configured as a secondary VLAN.
The secondary_vlan_list parameter cannot contain spaces. It can contain multiple comma-separated
items. Each item can be a single private-VLAN ID or a hyphenated range of private-VLAN IDs. The list
can contain one isolated VLAN and multiple community VLANs.
Traffic that is received on the secondary VLAN is routed by the interface of the primary VLAN.
A secondary VLAN can be mapped to only one primary VLAN. IF you configure the primary VLAN as
a secondary VLAN, all SVIs specified in this command are brought down.
If you configure a mapping between two VLANs that do not have a valid Layer 2 private-VLAN
association, the mapping configuration does not take effect.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-361
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
private-vlan mapping
Examples
This example shows how to map the interface of VLAN 20 to the SVI of VLAN 18:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch# interface vlan 18
Switch(config-if)# private-vlan mapping 20
Switch(config-vlan)# end
This example shows how to permit routing of secondary VLAN traffic from secondary VLANs 303 to
305 and 307 through VLAN 20 SVI:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch# interface vlan 20
Switch(config-if)# private-vlan mapping 303-305, 307
Switch(config-vlan)# end
You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces private-vlan mapping privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces private-vlan
mapping
Display private-VLAN mapping information for interfaces or VLAN
SVIs.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-362
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
queue-limit
queue-limit
Use the queue-limit policy-map class configuration command to set the queue maximum threshold for
weighted tail drop (WTD) in an output policy map. Use the no form of this command to return to the
default.
queue-limit [cos value | dot1ad dei value | dscp value | precedence value | qos-group value]
{number-of-packets [packets]| percent value}
no queue-limit [cos value | dot1ad dei value | dscp value | precedence value | qos-group value]
number-of-packets [packets] {number-of-packets [packets]| percent value}
Syntax Description
cos value
(Optional) Set the parameters for each cost of service (CoS) value. The range
is from 0 to 7.
dot1ad dei value
(Optional) Set the parameters for each drop eligibility indicator (DEI) value.
The range is from 0 to 1.
dscp value
(Optional) Set the parameters for each Differentiated Services Code Point
(DSCP) value. The range is from 0 to 63.
precedence value
(Optional) Set the parameters for each IP precedence value. The range is
from 0 to 7.
qos-group value
(Optional) Set the parameters for each quality-of-service (QoS) group value.
The range is from 0 to 99.
number-of-packets
[packets]
Set the maximum threshold for WTD as the number of packets in the queue.
The range is from 16 to 4272 and refers to 256-byte packets. The default is
160 packets. The packets keyword is optional.
Note
percent value
For optimal network performance, we strongly recommend that you
configure the maximum queue-limit to 272 or less.
(Optional) Set the maximum threshold for WTD as a percentage of the total
number of packets (buffers) in the common pool.
The range is from 1 to 100.
Defaults
Default queue limit is 160 (256-byte) packets.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(55)SE
The dot1ad dei keywords were added.
12.2(58)EX
The percent keyword was added.
Usage Guidelines
You use the queue-limit policy-map class command to control output traffic. Queue-limit settings are
not supported in input policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-363
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
queue-limit
Beginning with Cisco IOS Release 12.2(35)SE, the switch supports one output policy map for each
interface. However, the limit of three unique queue-limit configurations across all output policy maps
remains in effect. You can use the same queue-limit configuration across multiple policy maps.
Within an output policy map only four queues (classes) are allowed, including the class default. Each
queue has three defined thresholds (queue limits). Only three queue-limit configurations are allowed on
the switch, but multiple policy maps can share the same queue-limits. For two policy maps to share a
queue-limit configuration, all threshold values must be the same for all classes in both policy maps.
If you try to attach an output policy map that contains a fourth queue-limit configuration to an interface,
you see an error message, and the attachment is not allowed.
The queue-limit command is supported only after you first configure a scheduling action, such as
bandwidth, shape-average, or priority, except when you configure queue-limit in the class-default of
an output policy map.
You cannot configure more than two unique threshold values for WTD qualifiers (cos, dscp,
precedence, or qos-group) in the queue-limit command. However, you can map any number of
qualifiers to those thresholds. You can configure a third unique threshold value to set the maximum
queue, using the queue-limit command with no qualifiers.
You cannot configure the queue limit in absolute (number of packets) and percentage terms in the same
policy.
When you use the queue-limit command to configure thresholds within a class map, the WTD thresholds
must be less than or equal to the maximum threshold of the queue. This means that the queue size
configured without a qualifier must be larger than any of the queue sizes configured with a qualifier.
When you use the percent keyword to configure the queue limit, note that the threshold values for WTD
qualifiers are calculated based on the number of packets (buffers) available for each policy or class (the
default for which is 160 packets if you do not configure a queue limit). The threshold values are not a
percentage of the total number of packets in the common pool on the switch.
Examples
This example shows how to configure WTD so that out-class1, out-class2, out-class3, and class-default
get a minimum of 40, 20, 10 and 10 percent of the traffic bandwidth respectively. The corresponding
queue-sizes are set to 48, 32, 16 and 272 (256-byte) packets:
Switch(config)# policy-map out-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 40
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit 48
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit 32
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit 16
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit 272
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output out-policy
Switch(config-if)# exit
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-364
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
queue-limit
This example shows how to configure WTD for a Fast Ethernet port where outclass1, outclass2, and
outclass3 get a minimum of 50, 20, and 10 percent of the traffic bandwidth. The class-default gets the
remaining 20 percent. Each corresponding queue size is set to 64, 32, and 16 (256-byte) packets,
respectively. The example also shows how if outclass1 matches to dscp 46, 56, 57, 58, 60, 63, a DSCP
value of 46 gets a queue size of 32 (256-byte) packets; DSCP values 56, 57, and 58 get queue sizes of
48 (256-byte) packets; and the remaining DSCP values of 60 and 63 get the default queue size of 64
(256-byte) packets.
Switch(config)# policy-map out-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 50
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit 64
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit dscp 46 32
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit dscp 56 48
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit dscp 57 48
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit dscp 58 48
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit 32
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class outclass3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# queue-limit 16
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output out-policy
Switch(config-if)# exit
You can use these same queue-limit values in multiple output policy maps on the switch. However,
changing one of the queue-limit values in a class would create a new, unique queue-limit configuration.
You can attach only three unique queue-limit configurations in output policy maps to interfaces at any
one time. If you try to attach an output policy map with a fourth unique queue-limit configuration, you
see this error message:
QoS: Configuration failed. Maximum number of allowable unique queue-limit
configurations exceeded.
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
This example shows how to configure WTD as a percentage of packets in the queue where freeclass1,
freeclass2, and freeclass3 get a minimum of 20 percent of the traffic bandwidth. The class-default gets
the remaining 10 percent. In the example:
Part A shows how you can set a percentage queue limit for each class of traffic.
Part B shows how you can set a percentage queue limit for the threshold.
Part C show how you can configure both in the same policy.
Part A:
Switch(config)#policy-map free-class
Switch(config-pmap)#class freeclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)#bandwidth percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)#queue-limit cos 1 percent 60
Switch(config-pmap-c)#exit
Part B:
Switch(config-pmap)#class freeclass2
Switch(config-pmap-c)#bandwidth percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)#queue-limit percent 40
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-365
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
queue-limit
Part C:
Switch(config-pmap)#class freeclass3
Switch(config-pmap-c)#bandwidth percent 20
Switch(config-pmap-c)#queue-limit percent 40
Switch(config-pmap-c)#queue-limit cos 4 percent 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)#exit
Switch(config-pmap)#exit
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified
class-map name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple
ports to specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-366
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
remote-span
remote-span
Use the remote-span VLAN configuration command to configure a VLAN as a Remote Switched Port
Analyzer (RSPAN) VLAN. Use the no form of this command to remove the RSPAN designation from
the VLAN.
remote-span
no remote-span
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
No RSPAN VLANs are defined.
Command Modes
VLAN configuration (config-VLAN)
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Valid RSPAN VLAN IDs are 2 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094. The RSPAN VLAN cannot be VLAN 1 (the
default VLAN) or VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 (reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs).
Before you configure the RSPAN remote-span command, use the vlan global configuration command
to create the VLAN.
•
To change a VLAN from a user network interface-enhanced network interface (UNI-ENI) isolated
VLAN (the default) to an RSPAN VLAN, enter the rspan-vlan VLAN configuration command.
•
To change a UNI-ENI community VLAN to an RSPAN VLAN, you must first remove the
community VLAN type by entering the no uni-vlan VLAN configuration command.
The RSPAN VLAN has these characteristics:
•
No MAC address learning occurs on it.
•
RSPAN VLAN traffic flows only on trunk ports.
•
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) can run in the RSPAN VLAN, but it does not run on RSPAN
destination ports. On the Cisco ME switch only network node interfaces (NNIs) or enhanced
network interfaces (ENIs) on which STP has been enabled participate in STP.
You must manually also configure both source, destination, and intermediate switches (those in the
RSPAN VLAN between the source switch and the destination switch) with the RSPAN VLAN ID.
When an existing VLAN is configured as an RSPAN VLAN, the VLAN is first deleted and then recreated
as an RSPAN VLAN. Any access ports become inactive until the RSPAN feature is disabled.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-367
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
remote-span
Examples
This example shows how to configure a VLAN as an RSPAN VLAN.
Switch(config)# vlan 901
Switch(config-vlan)# remote-span
This example shows how to remove the RSPAN feature from a VLAN.
Switch(config)# vlan 901
Switch(config-vlan)# no remote-span
You can verify your settings by entering the show vlan remote-span user EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
monitor session
Enables Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) and RSPAN monitoring on a port
and configures a port as a source or destination port.
vlan
Changes to config-vlan mode where you can configure VLANs 1 to 4094.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-368
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
renew ip dhcp snooping database
renew ip dhcp snooping database
Use the renew ip dhcp snooping database privileged EXEC command to renew the DHCP snooping
binding database.
renew ip dhcp snooping database [validation none] [{flash:/filename |
ftp://user:password@host/filename | nvram:/filename | rcp://user@host/filename |
tftp://host/filename}] [validation none]
Syntax Description
validation none
(Optional) Specify that the switch does not verify the cyclic redundancy check
(CRC) for the entries in the binding file specified by the URL.
flash:/filename
(Optional) Specify that the database agent or the binding file is in the flash
memory.
ftp://user:password
@host/filename
(Optional) Specify that the database agent or the binding file is on an FTP
server.
nvram:/filename
(Optional) Specify that the database agent or the binding file is in the NVRAM.
rcp://user@host/file
name
(Optional) Specify that the database agent or the binding file is on a Remote
Control Protocol (RCP) server.
tftp://host/filename
(Optional) Specify that the database agent or the binding file is on a TFTP
server.
Defaults
No default is defined.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If you do not specify a URL, the switch tries to read the file from the configured URL.
Examples
This example shows how to renew the DHCP snooping binding database without checking CRC values:
Switch# renew ip dhcp snooping database validation none
You can verify settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping database privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping
Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
ip dhcp snooping binding
Configures the DHCP snooping binding database.
show ip dhcp snooping database
Displays the status of the DHCP snooping database agent.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-369
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep admin vlan
rep admin vlan
Use the rep admin vlan global configuration command to configure a Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP)
administrative VLAN for REP to transmit hardware flood layer (HFL) messages. Use the no form of this
command to return to the default configuration with VLAN 1 as the administrative VLAN.
rep admin vlan vlan-id
no rep admin vlan
Syntax Description
vlan-id
Defaults
The administrative VLAN is VLAN 1.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094. The default is VLAN 1; the range to
configure is 2 to 4094.
If the VLAN does not already exist, this command does not create the VLAN.
To avoid the delay introduced by relaying messages in software for link-failure or VLAN-blocking
notification during load balancing, REP floods packets at the hardware flood layer (HFL) to a regular
multicast address. These messages are flooded to the whole network, not just the REP segment. Switches
that do not belong to the segment treat them as data traffic. Configuring an administrative VLAN for the
whole domain can control flooding of these messages.
If no REP administrative VLAN is configured, the default is VLAN 1.
There can be only one administrative VLAN on a switch and on a segment.
The administrative VLAN cannot be the RSPAN VLAN.
Examples
This example shows how to configure VLAN 100 as the REP administrative VLAN:
Switch (config)# rep admin vlan 100
You can verify your settings by entering the show interface rep detail privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces rep
detail
Displays detailed REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the
specified interface, including the administrative VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-370
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep block port
rep block port
Use the rep block port interface configuration command on the REP primary edge port to configure
Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) VLAN load balancing. Use the no form of this command to return to
the default configuration.
rep block port {id port-id | neighbor_offset | preferred} vlan {vlan-list | all}
no rep block port {id port-id | neighbor_offset | preferred}
Syntax Description
id port-id
Identify the VLAN blocking alternate port by entering the unique port ID that is
automatically generated when REP is enabled. The REP port ID is a 16-character
hexadecimal value. You can view the port ID for an interface by entering the show
interface interface-id rep detail command.
neighbor_offset
Identify the VLAN blocking alternate port by entering the offset number of a
neighbor. The range is –256 to +256; a value of 0 is invalid. The primary edge port
has an offset number of 1; positive numbers above 1 identify downstream
neighbors of the primary edge port. Negative numbers identify the secondary edge
port (offset number -1) and its downstream neighbors.
preferred
Identify the VLAN blocking alternate port as the segment port on which you
entered the rep segment segment-id preferred interface configuration command.
Note
Defaults
Entering the preferred keyword does not ensure that the preferred port is
the alternate port; it gives it preference over other similar ports.
vlan
Identify the VLANs to be blocked.
vlan-list
Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 or a range or sequence of VLANs (such as 1-3,
22, 41-44) of VLANs to be blocked.
all
Enter to block all VLANs.
The default behavior after you enter the rep preempt segment privileged EXEC command (for manual
preemption) is to block all VLANs at the primary edge port. This behavior remains until you configure
the rep block port command.
If the primary edge port cannot determine which port is to be the alternate port, the default action is no
preemption and no VLAN load balancing.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You must enter this command on the REP primary edge port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-371
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep block port
When you select an alternate port by entering an offset number, this number identifies the downstream
neighbor port of an edge port. The primary edge port has an offset number of 1; positive numbers above
1 identify downstream neighbors of the primary edge port. Negative numbers identify the secondary
edge port (offset number -1) and its downstream neighbors. See Neighbor Offset Numbers in a REP
SegmentFigure 2-1.
Figure 2-1
Neighbor Offset Numbers in a REP Segment
-1
-9 2
E1
1
E2
10
E1 = Primary edge port
E2 = Secondary edge port
9
Offset numbers from the primary edge port
Offset numbers from the secondary edge
port (negative numbers)
8 -3
-8 3
7
-7
5
-6
6
-4
-5
201890
4
Note
-2
You would never enter an offset value of 1 because that is the offset number of the primary edge port
itself.
If you have configured a preempt delay time by entering the rep preempt delay seconds interface
configuration command and a link failure and recovery occurs, VLAN load balancing begins after the
configured preemption time period elapses without another link failure. The alternate port specified in
the load-balancing configuration blocks the configured VLANs and unblocks all other segment ports. If
the primary edge port cannot determine the alternate port for VLAN balancing, the default action is no
preemption.
Each port in a segment has a unique port ID. The port ID format is similar to the one used by the spanning
tree algorithm: a port number (unique on the bridge) associated to a MAC address (unique in the
network). To determine the port ID of a port, enter the show interface interface-id rep detail privileged
EXEC command.
There is no limit to the number of times that you can enter the rep block port id port-id vlan vlan-list
interface configuration command. You can block an unlimited number, range, or sequence of VLANs.
When you use the rep block port id port-id vlan vlan-list interface configuration command on a REP
primary edge port to block a VLAN list and then use the same command to block another VLAN list on
the same port, the second VLAN list does not replace the first VLAN list but is appended to the first
VLAN list.
When you use the rep block port id port-id vlan vlan-list interface configuration command on a REP
primary edge port to block a VLAN list on one port and then use the same command to block another
VLAN list on another port, the original port number and VLAN list are overwritten.
Examples
This example shows how to configure REP VLAN load balancing on the Switch B primary edge port
(Gigabit Ethernet port 0/1) and to configure Gigabit Ethernet port 0/2 of Switch A as the alternate port
to block VLANs 1 to 100. The alternate port is identified by its port ID, shown in bold in the output of
the show interface rep detail command for the Switch A port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-372
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep block port
Switch A# show interface gigabitethernet0/2 rep detail
GigabitEthernet0/2 REP enabled
Segment-id: 2 (Segment)
PortID: 0080001647FB1780
Preferred flag: No
Operational Link Status: TWO_WAY
Current Key: 007F001647FB17800EEE
Port Role: Open
Blocked Vlan: <empty>
Admin-vlan: 1
Preempt Delay Timer: 35 sec
Load-balancing block port: none
Load-balancing block vlan: none
STCN Propagate to:
PDU/TLV statistics:
LSL PDU rx: 107122, tx: 192493
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
B# config t
(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
(config-if)# rep block port id 0080001647FB1780 vlan 1-100
(config-if)# exit
This example shows how to configure VLAN load balancing by using a neighbor offset number and how
to verify the configuration by entering the show interfaces rep detail privileged EXEC command:
Switch# config t
Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch (config-if)# rep block port 6 vlan 1-110
Switch (config-if)# end
Switch# show interface gigabitethernet0/2 rep detail
GigabitEthernet0/2 REP enabled
Segment-id: 2 (Segment)
PortID: 0080001647FB1780
Preferred flag: No
Operational Link Status: TWO_WAY
Current Key: 007F001647FB178009C3
Port Role: Open
Blocked Vlan: <empty>
Admin-vlan: 3
Preempt Delay Timer: 35 sec
Load-balancing block port: 6
Load-balancing block vlan: 1-110
STCN Propagate to: none
LSL PDU rx: 1466780, tx: 3056637
HFL PDU rx: 2, tx: 0
BPA TLV rx: 1, tx: 2119695
BPA (STCN, LSL) TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
BPA (STCN, HFL) TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
EPA-ELECTION TLV rx: 757406, tx: 757400
EPA-COMMAND TLV rx: 1, tx: 1
EPA-INFO TLV rx: 178326, tx: 178323
Related Commands
Command
Description
rep preempt delay
Configures a waiting period after a segment port failure and recovery before
REP VLAN load balancing is triggered.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-373
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep block port
Command
Description
rep preempt segment
Manually starts REP VLAN load balancing on a segment.
show interfaces rep
detail
Displays REP detailed configuration and status for all interfaces or the
specified interface, including the administrative VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-374
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep lsl-age-timer
rep lsl-age-timer
Use the rep lsl-age-timer interface configuration command on a Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) port
to configure the Link Status Layer (LSL) age timer for the time period that the REP interface remains
up without receiving a hello from the REP neighbor. Use the no form of this command to return to the
default time.
rep lsl-age timer value
no rep lsl-age timer
Syntax Description
value
Defaults
The REP link shuts down if it does not receive a hello message from a neighbor for 5000 ms.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
12.2(52)SE
The age-out timer interval range changed to 120 to 10000 ms in 40-ms
increments.
Usage Guidelines
The age-out time in milliseconds. The range is from 120 to 10000 ms in 40-ms
increments. The default is 5000 ms (5 seconds).
The LSL hello timer is set to the age-timer value divided by 3 so that there should be at least two LSL
hellos sent during the LSL age timer period. If no hellos are received within that time, the REP link shuts
down.
In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(52)SE, the LSL age-timer range changed from 3000 to 10000 ms in 500-ms
increments to 120 to 10000 ms in 40-ms increments. If the REP neighbor device is not running Cisco
IOS Release 12.2(52)SE or later, you must use the shorter time range because the device does not accept
values out of the earlier range.
EtherChannel port channel interfaces do not support LSL age-timer values less than 1000 ms. If you try
to configure a value less than 1000 ms on a port channel, you receive an error message and the command
is rejected.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the REP LSL age timer on a REP link to 7000 ms:
Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch (config-if)# rep lsl-age-timer 7000
Switch (config-if)# exit
You can verify the configured ageout time by entering the show interfaces rep detail privileged EXEC
command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-375
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep lsl-age-timer
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces rep
[detail]
Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified
interface, including the configured LSL age-out timer value.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-376
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep preempt delay
rep preempt delay
Use the rep preempt delay interface configuration command on the REP primary edge port to configure
a waiting period after a segment port failure and recovery before Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP)
VLAN load balancing is triggered. Use the no form of this command to remove the configured delay.
rep preempt delay seconds
no rep preempt delay
Syntax Description
seconds
Defaults
No preemption delay is set. If you do not enter the rep preempt delay command, the default is manual
preemption with no delay.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Set the number of seconds to delay REP preemption. The range is 15 to 300.
You must enter this command on the REP primary edge port.
You must enter this command and configure a preempt time delay if you want VLAN load balancing to
automatically trigger after a link failure and recovery.
If VLAN load balancing is configured, after a segment port failure and recovery, the REP primary edge
port starts a delay timer before VLAN load balancing occurs. Note that the timer restarts after each link
failure. When the timer expires, the REP primary edge alerts the alternate port to perform VLAN load
balancing (configured by using the rep block port interface configuration command) and prepares the
segment for the new topology. The configured VLAN list is blocked at the alternate port, and all other
VLANs are blocked at the primary edge port.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a REP preemption time delay of 100 seconds on the primary edge
port:
Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch (config-if)# rep preempt delay 100
Switch (config-if)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces rep privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-377
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep preempt delay
Related Commands
Command
Description
rep block port
Configures VLAN load balancing.
show interfaces rep Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or a specified interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-378
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep preempt segment
rep preempt segment
Use the rep preempt segment privileged EXEC command to manually start Resilient Ethernet Protocol
(REP) VLAN load balancing on a segment.
rep preempt segment segment_id
Syntax Description
segment-id
Defaults
Manual preemption is the default behavior.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
ID of the REP segment. The range is from 1 to 1024.
When you enter the rep preempt segment segment-id command, a confirmation message appears before
the command is executed because preemption can cause network disruption.
Enter this command on the switch on the segment that has the primary edge port.
If you do not configure VLAN load balancing, entering this command results in the default
behavior—the primary edge port blocks all VLANs.
You configure VLAN load balancing by entering the rep block port {id port-id | neighbor_offset |
preferred} vlan {vlan-list | all} interface configuration command on the REP primary edge port before
you manually start preemption.
There is not a no version of this command.
Examples
This example shows how to manually trigger REP preemption on segment 100 with the confirmation
message:
Switch)# rep preempt segment 100
The command will cause a momentary traffic disruption.
Do you still want to continue? [confirm]
Related Commands
Command
Description
rep block port
Configures VLAN load balancing.
show interfaces rep [detail] Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified
interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-379
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep segment
rep segment
Use the rep segment interface configuration command to enable Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) on
the interface and to assign a segment ID to it. Use the no form of this command to disable REP on the
interface.
rep segment segment-id [edge [no-neighbor] [primary]] [preferred]
no rep segment
Syntax Description
segment-id
Assign a segment ID to the interface. The range is from 1 to 1024.
edge
(Optional) Identify the interface as one of the two REP edge ports. Entering the edge
keyword without the primary keyword configures the port as the secondary edge
port.
no-neighbor
(Optional) Configure a segment edge with no external REP neighbor.
primary
(Optional) On an edge port, specify that the port is the primary edge port. A segment
has only one primary edge port. If you configure two ports in a segment as the
primary edge port, for example ports on different switches, the REP selects one of
them to serve as the segment primary edge port.
preferred
(Optional) Specify that the port is the preferred alternate port or the preferred port
for VLAN load balancing.
Configuring a port as preferred does not guarantee that it becomes the
alternate port; it merely gives it a slight edge among equal contenders. The
alternate port is usually a previously failed port.
Note
Defaults
REP is disabled on the interface.
When REP is enabled on an interface, the default is for the port to be a regular segment port.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(50)SE
The no-neighbor keyword was added.
Usage Guidelines
REP ports must be Layer 2 trunk ports.
A non-ES REP port can be either an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port or an ISL trunk port.
REP ports should not be configured as one of these port types:
•
SPAN destination port
•
Private VLAN port
•
Tunnel port
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-380
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep segment
•
Access port
•
REP ports must be network node interfaces (NNIs). REP ports cannot be user-network interfaces
(UNIs) or enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
You must configure two edge ports on each REP segment, a primary edge port and a port to act as a
secondary edge port. If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example ports
on different switches, the configuration is allowed, but the REP selects one of them to serve as the
segment primary edge port.
•
REP ports follow these rules:
– There is no limit to the number of REP ports on a switch; however, only two ports on a switch
can belong to the same REP segment.
– If only one port on a switch is configured in a segment, the port should be an edge port.
– If two ports on a switch belong to the same segment, they must be both edge ports, both regular
segment ports, or one regular port and one edge no-neighbor port. An edge port and regular
segment port on a switch cannot belong to the same segment.
– If two ports on a switch belong to the same segment and one is configured as an edge port and
one as a regular segment port (a misconfiguration), the edge port is treated as a regular segment
port.
If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example ports on different switches,
the REP selects one of them to serve as the segment primary edge port. Enter the show rep topology
privileged EXEC command on a port in the segment to verify which port is the segment primary edge
port.
REP interfaces come up in a blocked state and remain in a blocked state until notified that it is safe to
unblock. You need to be aware of this to avoid sudden connection losses.
You should configure REP only in networks with redundancy. Configuring REP in a network without
redundancy causes loss of connectivity.
In networks where ports on a neighboring switch do not support REP, you can configure the non-REP
facing ports as edge no-neighbor ports. These ports inherit all properties of edge ports and you can
configure them as any other edge port, including to send STP or REP topology change notices to the
aggregation switch. In this case, the STP topology change notice (TCN) that is sent is a multiple
spanning-tree (MST) STP message.
Examples
This example shows how to enable REP on a regular (nonedge) segment port:
Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch (config-if)# rep segment 100
This example shows how to enable REP on a port and to identify the port as the REP primary edge port:
Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch (config-if)# rep segment 100 edge primary
This example shows how to configure the same configuration when the interface has no external REP
neighbor:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch (conf)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch (conf-if)# rep segment 100 edge no-neighbor primary
This example shows how to enable REP on a port and to identify the port as the REP secondary edge port:
Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-381
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep segment
Switch (config-if)# rep segment 100 edge
You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces rep privileged EXEC command. To verify
which port in the segment is the primary edge port, enter the show rep topology privileged EXEC
command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces rep
[detail]
Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified
interface.
show rep topology
[detail]
Displays information about all ports in the segment, including which one was
configured and selected as the primary edge port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-382
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rep stcn
rep stcn
Use the rep stcn interface configuration command on a Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) edge port to
configure the port to send REP segment topology change notifications (STCNs) to another interface, to
other segments, or to Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) networks. Use the no form of this command to
disable the sending of STCNs to the interface, segment, or STP network.
rep stcn {interface interface-id | segment id-list | stp}
no rep stcn {interface | segment | stp}
Syntax Description
interface interface-id Identify a physical interface or port channel to receive STCNs.
segment id-list
Identify one REP segment or list of segments to receive STCNs. The range is 1
to 1024. You can also configure a sequence of segments (for example 3-5, 77,
100).
stp
Send STCNs to an STP network.
Defaults
Transmission of STCNs to other interfaces, segments, or STP networks is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Enter this command on a segment edge port.
You use this command to notify other portions of the Layer 2 network of topology changes that occur in
the local REP segment. This removes obsolete entries in the Layer 2 forwarding table in other parts of
the network, which allows faster network convergence.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the REP primary edge port to send STCNs to segments 25 to 50:
Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch (config-if)# rep stcn segment 25-50
Switch (config-if)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces rep detail privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces rep
[detail]
Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified
interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-383
Chapter 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
reserved-only
reserved-only
Use the reserved-only DHCP pool configuration mode command to allocate only reserved addresses in
the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) address pool. Use the no form of the command to
return to the default.
reserved-only
no reserved-only
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
The default is to not restrict pool addresses
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Entering the reserved-only command restricts assignments from the DHCP pool to preconfigured
reservations. Unreserved addresses that are part of the network or on pool ranges are not offered to the
client, and other clients are not served by the pool.
By entering this command, users can configure a group of switches with DHCP pools that share a
common IP subnet and that ignore requests from clients of other switches.
To access DHCP pool configuration mode, enter the ip dhcp pool name global configuration command.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the DHCP pool to allocate only reserved addresses:
Switch# config t
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Switch(config)# ip dhcp pool test1
Switch(dhcp-config)# reserved-only
End with CNTL/Z.
You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp pool privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp pool
Displays the DHCP address pools.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-384
OL-26663-01
2 \ ]
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
rmon collection stats
rmon collection stats
Use the rmon collection stats interface configuration command to collect Ethernet group statistics,
which include usage statistics about broadcast and multicast packets, and error statistics about cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) alignment errors and collisions. Use the no form of this command to return to
the default setting.
rmon collection stats index [owner name]
no rmon collection stats index [owner name]
Syntax Description
index
Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) collection control index. The range is
1 to 65535.
owner name
(Optional) Owner of the RMON collection.
Defaults
The RMON statistics collection is disabled.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The RMON statistics collection command is based on hardware counters. If the port is a user network
interface (UNI) or enhanced network interface (ENI), you must use the no shutdown interface
configuration command to enable it before using the rmon collection stats command. UNIs and ENIs
are disabled by default. Network node interfaces (NNIs) are enabled by default.
Examples
This example shows how to collect RMON statistics for the owner root:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# rmon collection stats 2 owner root
You can verify your setting by entering the show rmon statistics privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show rmon statistics
Displays RMON statistics.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-385
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
sdm prefer
sdm prefer
Use the sdm prefer global configuration command to configure the template used in Switch Database
Management (SDM) resource allocation. If the switch is running the metro IP access image, you can use
a template to balance resources between Layer 2 and Layer 3 functionality, or you can maximize system
usage to support only Layer 2 features in hardware. You can also select the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template
to support IPv6 forwarding. Use the no form of this command to return to the default template.
sdm prefer {default | dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default | routing | vlan} | layer-2}
no sdm prefer
Note
Syntax Description
Defaults
The default and dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 keywords are visible only when the metro IP access image is
installed on the switch.
default
Give balance to all functions.
layer-2
Maximizes system resources for Layer 2 functionality with no routing support.
dual-ipv4-and-ipv6
{default | routing |
vlan}
Select a template that supports both IPv4 and IPv6 routing.
•
default—Provide balance to IPv4 and IPv6 Layer 2 and Layer 3
functionality.
•
routing—Provide maximum system usage for IPv4 and IPv6 routing,
including IPv4 policy-based routing.
•
vlan—Provide maximum system usage for IPv4 and IPv6 VLANs.
The default template provides a balance to all features.
On switches that are running the metro access image, only the layer-2 template is supported.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
12.2(50)SE
The dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 templates were added.
Usage Guidelines
You must reload the switch for the configuration to take effect. If you enter the show sdm prefer
command before you enter the reload privileged EXEC command, the show sdm prefer command
shows the template currently in use and the template that will become active after a reload.
The default templates balances the use of system resources. Do not use the default template if you do
not have routing enabled on your switch. Using the balanced template prevents Layer 2 features from
using the memory allocated to unicast routing in the default template.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-386
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
sdm prefer
Do not use the layer-2 template if the switch is routing packets. The layer-2 template does not support
routing and forces any routing to be done through software. This overloads the CPU and severely
degrades routing performance.
If you try to configure IPv6 features without first selecting a dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, a warning
message appears.
The dual-stack templates provide in less allowable TCAM capacity for each resource. Do not use them
if you plan to forward only IPv4 traffic.
Table 2-4 lists the approximate number of each resource supported in each of the two IPv4 templates for
a switch running the metro IP access image. The values in the template are based on eight routed
interfaces and approximately 1024 VLANs and represent the approximate hardware boundaries set when
a template is selected. If a section of a hardware resource is full, all processing overflow is sent to the
CPU, seriously impacting switch performance.
Table 2-4
Approximate Number of Feature Resources Allowed by Each Template
Resource
Layer-2
Default
Unicast MAC addresses
8K
5K
IPv4 IGMP groups + multicast routes (default only)
–
1K
IP v4 IGMP groups (layer-2 only)
1K
–
IPv4 multicast routes (layer-2 only)
0
–
IPv4 IGMP groups and multicast routes
1K
–
IPv4 unicast routes
0
9K
•
Directly connected IPv4 hosts
–
5K
•
Indirect IPv4 routes
–
4K
0
0.5 K
IPv4 or MAC QoS ACEs
0.5 K
0.5 K
IPv4 or MAC security ACEs
1K
1K
IPv4 policy-based routing ACEs
1
2
1. ACEs = Access control entries.
2. QoS = Quality of service.
Table 2-5 defines the approximate feature resources allocated by each dual template. Template
estimations are based on a switch with 8 routed interfaces and approximately 1000 VLANs.
Table 2-5
Approximate Feature Resources Allowed by Dual IPv4-IPv6 Templates
Resource
IPv4-and-IPv6
Default
IPv4-and-IPv6
Routing
IPv4-and-IPv6
VLAN
Unicast MAC addresses
2K
1.5 K
8K
IPv4 IGMP groups and multicast routes
1K
1K
1K
Total IPv4 unicast routes:
3K
2.75 K
0
•
Directly connected IPv4 hosts
2K
1.5 K
0
•
Indirect IPv4 routes
1K
1.25 K
0
IPv6 multicast groups
1K
1K
1K
Total IPv6 unicast routes:
3K
2.75 K
0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-387
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
sdm prefer
Table 2-5
Approximate Feature Resources Allowed by Dual IPv4-IPv6 Templates (continued)
Resource
IPv4-and-IPv6
Default
IPv4-and-IPv6
Routing
IPv4-and-IPv6
VLAN
•
Directly connected IPv6 addresses
2K
1.5 K
0
•
Indirect IPv6 unicast routes
1K
1.25 K
0
IPv4 policy-based routing ACEs
0
0.25 K
0
IPv4 or MAC QoS ACEs (total)
0.75 K
0.75 K
0.75 K
1K
0.5 K
1K
0
0.25 K
0
IPv6 QoS ACEs
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
IPv6 security ACEs
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
IPv4 or MAC security ACEs (total)
IPv6 policy-based routing ACEs
1
1. IPv6 policy-based routing is not supported.
Examples
This example shows how to configure the layer-2 template on a switch:
Switch(config)# sdm prefer layer-2
Switch(config)# exit
Switch# reload
This is an example of an output display when you have changed the template to the layer-2 template and
have not reloaded the switch:
Switch# show sdm prefer
The current template is "default" template.
The selected template optimizes the resources in
the switch to support this level of features for
8 routed interfaces and 1024 VLANs.
number of unicast mac addresses:
5K
number of IPv4 IGMP groups + multicast routes:
1K
number of IPv4 unicast routes:
9K
number of directly-connected IPv4 hosts:
5K
number of indirect IPv4 routes:
4K
number of IPv4 policy based routing aces:
0.5K
number of IPv4/MAC qos aces:
0.5K
number of IPv4/MAC security aces:
1K
On next reload, template will be "layer-2" template.
You can verify your settings by entering the show sdm prefer privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
show sdm prefer
Displays the current SDM template in use or displays the templates that can
be used, with the approximate resource allocation per feature.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-388
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
service instance
service instance
Use the service instance interface configuration command to configure an Ethernet service instance on
the interface and to enter Ethernet service configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to
delete the service instance.
service instance id ethernet [evc-id]
no service instance id
This command is available only if your switch is running the metro IP access or metro access image.
Syntax Description
id
Define a service instance identifier, a per-interface service identifier that
does not map to a VLAN. The range is 1 to 4294967295.
ethernet
Identify the service instance as an Ethernet instance.
evc-id
(Optional) Attach an Ethernet virtual connection (EVC) to the service
instance.
Defaults
No Ethernet service instances are defined.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
After you enter the service instance id ethernet command, the switch enters Ethernet service
configuration mode, and these configuration commands are available:
•
default: sets the service instance to its default state.
•
ethernet lmi ce-vlan map: configures Ethernet Local Management Interface (LMI) parameters. See
the ethernet lmi ce-vlan map command.
•
exit: exits EVC configuration mode and returns to global configuration mode.
•
no: negates a command or returns a command to its default setting.
This example shows how to define an Ethernet service instance and to enter Ethernet service
configuration mode for EVC test:
Switch(config-if)# service instance 333 ethernet test
Switch(config-if-srv)#
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-389
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
service instance
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ethernet service
instance
Displays information about configured Ethernet service instances.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-390
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
service password-recovery
service password-recovery
Use the service password-recovery global configuration command to enable the password-recovery
mechanism (the default). This mechanism allows an end user with physical access to the switch to press
the break key on the console terminal to interrupt the boot process while the switch is powering up and
to assign a new password.
Use the no form of this command to disable part of the password-recovery functionality. When the
password-recovery mechanism is disabled, interrupting the boot process is allowed only if the user
agrees to set the system back to the default configuration.
service password-recovery
no service password-recovery
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
The password-recovery mechanism is enabled.
Command Modes
Global configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
As a system administrator, you can use the no service password-recovery command to disable some of
the functionality of the password recovery feature by allowing an end user to reset a password only by
agreeing to return to the default configuration. This provides configuration file security by ensuring that
only authenticated and authorized users have access to the configuration file and prevents users from
accessing the configuration file by using the password recovery process.
The password recovery procedure requires using a break key. After the switch performs power-on self
test (POST), the switch begins the autoboot process. The boot loader prompts the user for a break key
character during the boot-up sequence, as shown in this example:
***** The system will autoboot in 5 seconds *****
Send a break key to prevent autobooting.
You must enter the break key on the console terminal within 5 seconds of receiving the message that the
system will autoboot. A user with physical access to the switch presses the break key on the console terminal
within 5 seconds of receiving the message that flash memory is initializing. The System LED flashes
green until the break key is accepted. After the break key is accepted, the System LED turns off until
after the switch boots.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-391
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
service password-recovery
If the password-recovery mechanism is disabled, this message appears:
The password-recovery mechanism has been triggered, but
is currently disabled. Access to the boot loader prompt
through the password-recovery mechanism is disallowed at
this point. However, if you agree to let the system be
reset back to the default system configuration, access
to the boot loader prompt can still be allowed.
Would you like to reset the system back to the default configuration (y/n)?
If the user chooses not to reset the system to the default configuration, the normal boot process continues
as if the break key had not been pressed. If you choose to reset the system to the default configuration,
the configuration file in flash memory is deleted, and the VLAN database file, flash:vlan.dat (if present),
is deleted.
Note
If you use the no service password-recovery command to control end user access to passwords, we
recommend that you save a copy of the configuration file in a location away from the switch in case the
end user uses the password recovery procedure and sets the system back to default values. Do not keep
a backup copy of the configuration file on the switch.
You can enter the show version privileged EXEC command to determine if password recovery is enabled
or disabled.
Examples
This example shows how to disable password recovery on a switch so that a user can only reset a
password by agreeing to return to the default configuration.
Switch(config)# no service-password recovery
Switch(config)# exit
Related Commands
Command
Description
show version
Displays version information for the hardware and firmware.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-392
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
service-policy (interface configuration)
service-policy (interface configuration)
Use the service-policy interface configuration command to apply a policy map defined by the
policy-map command to the incoming or outgoing traffic of a physical port. Use the no form of this
command to remove the policy map and port association.
service-policy {input | output} policy-map-name
no service-policy {input | output} policy-map-name
Syntax Description
Note
input
Apply the policy map to the input of a physical port.
output
Apply the policy map to the output of a physical port.
policy-map-name
The specified policy map to be applied.
Though visible in the command-line help strings, the history keyword is not supported, and you should
ignore the statistics that it gathers.
Defaults
No policy maps are attached to the port.
Command Modes
Interface configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Only one input policy map and one output policy map can be attached to an interface.
Beginning with Cisco IOS Release 12.2(35)SE, you can attach an output policy map to each interface on
the switch. However, the switch supports a limit of three unique queue-limit configurations across all
output policy maps at any time. Multiple policy maps can share the same queue-limit configuration.If
you try to attach an output policy map with a fourth unique queue-limit configuration, you see this error
message:
QoS: Configuration failed. Maximum number of allowable unique queue-limit
configurations exceeded.
You can attach input or output policy maps to a Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet port. You cannot attach
policy maps to switch virtual interfaces (SVIs) and EtherChannel interfaces.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-393
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
service-policy (interface configuration)
Examples
This example shows how to apply plcmap1 as an output policy map:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy output plcmap1
This example shows how to remove plcmap2 from the port:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# no service-policy output plcmap2
You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) policy maps.
show policy-map
interface [interface-id]
Displays policy maps configured on the specified interface or on all
interfaces.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-394
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
service-policy (policy-map class configuration)
service-policy (policy-map class configuration)
Use the service-policy policy-map class configuration command to configure a quality of service (Q0S)
service policy for an input or output policy map or a per-port, per-VLAN policy map. Use the no form
of this command to disable a service policy as a QoS policy within a policy map.
service-policy policy-map-name
no service-policy policy-map-name
Syntax Description
policy-map-name
Defaults
No service policies are defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Name of the service policy map (created by using the policy-map global
configuration command) to be used in a QoS hierarchical service policy.
You can use the service-policy input command to assign a child QoS policy to a parent input policy
defined with a classification based on VLAN IDs. This allows you to create a hierarchical policy for
per-port, per-VLAN QoS.
You attach a service policy created in policy-map class configuration to a parent output policy map. This
creates hierarchical policy mapping. Use the service-policy policy-map-name policy-map class
configuration command to enter a second-level (child) policy map.
For an input policy map, when you configure classes with classification based on VLAN IDs by using
the match vlan class-map configuration command, you can use service-policy policy-map class
configuration command to associate a child QoS policy with that class. This provides the ability to apply
independent QoS policies based on the VLAN IDs of the incoming traffic on the port. The per-port,
per-vlan ingress QoS feature is supported only using a 2-level hierarchical input policymap, where the
parent level defines the VLAN-based classification and the child level defines the QoS policy to be
applied to the corresponding VLAN or VLANs. You can configure the child policy with all actions that
are available for input policy maps, specifically policing and marking.
For an output policy map, when shape average is also configured on the class class-default, you can
configure hierarchical policy maps by attaching a single service-policy policy-map class command to
the class class-default. This policy map specifies the service policy for the port-shaped traffic on the
port and is the parent policy map. You can configure the child policy with class-based queuing actions
by using the queue-limit policy map class command and with scheduling actions (by using the
bandwidth, shape average, or priority command).
To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode,
use the end command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-395
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
service-policy (policy-map class configuration)
Examples
This example shows how to define the service policy and to attach it to a parent policy map to set the
maximum bandwidth (shape) for an output queue at 90000000 bits per second:
Switch(config)# policy-map out-policy-parent
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# shape average 90000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# service-policy out-policy
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
In this example, the class maps in the child-level policy map specify matching criteria for voice and
video traffic, and the child policy map sets the action for input policing each type of traffic. The
parent-level policy map specifies the VLANs to which the child policy maps are applied on the specified
port.
Switch(config)# class-map match-any dscp-23 video
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp 23
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any dscp-63 voice
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp-63
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map match-any customer-1-vlan
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan 100
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan 200
Switch(config-cmap)# match vlan 300
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Note
You can also enter the match criteria as match vlan 100 200 300 with the same result.
Switch(config)# policy-map child policy-1
Switch(config-pmap)# class dscp-63 voice
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 10000000 bc 50000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# conform-action set-cos-transmit 5
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exceed-action drop
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class dscp-23 video
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos 4
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set ip precedence 4
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config)# policy-map parent-customer-1
Switch(config-pmap)# class customer-1-vlan
Switch(config-pmap-c)# service-policy ingress-policy-1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified
class-map name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple
ports to specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays quality of service (QoS) policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-396
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set cos
set cos
Use the set cos policy-map class configuration command to set a Layer 2 class of service (CoS) value in
the packet. Use the no form of this command to remove traffic marking.
set cos {cos_value | from-field [table table-map-name]}
no set cos {cos_value | from-field [table table-map-name]}
Syntax Description
cos_value
Enter an IEEE 802.1Q class of service/user priority value with which
to classify traffic. The range is from 0 to 7.
from-field
Specific a packet-marking category to be used to set the CoS value of
the packet. If you are using a table map for mapping and converting
packet-marking values, this establishes the map-from packet-marking
category.
These options are supported:
•
cos—CoS value
•
dscp—Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value.
•
precedence—IP-precedence value
table
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the from-field keyword. Indicates
that the values set in a specified table map are used to set the CoS value
table-map-name
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the table keyword. Name of the
table map used to specify the CoS value. The table map name can be a
maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters.
Defaults
No traffic marking is defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can configure set cos with all other marking actions, specifically set dscp, set precedence, and set
qos-group, for the same class. Support was also added for the ability to configure more than one marking
action with enhanced packet marking by using table maps for the same class.
Use the set cos command if you want to mark a packet that is being sent to a switch. Switches can
leverage Layer 2 header information including a CoS value marking.
You can use the match cos class-map configuration command and the set cos policy-map class
configuration command together to allow switches to interoperate and provide quality of service (QoS)
based on the CoS markings. You can also configure Layer 2 to Layer 3 mapping by matching on the CoS
value because switches can already match and set CoS values.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-397
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set cos
If you are using this command to perform enhanced packet marking, you can use the from-field packet
marking option for mapping and setting the CoS value. The supported from-field marking categories are:
CoS, DSCP, and IP precedence.
If you specify a from-field category, but do not specify the table keyword and table-map-name, the
default action is to copy the value associated with the from-field category as the CoS value. For example,
if you enter the set cos precedence command, the precedence value is copied and used as the CoS value.
If you enter the set cos dscp command, the DSCP value is copied and used as the CoS value.
Examples
This example shows how to set all FTP traffic to cos 3:
Switch(config)# policy-map policy_ftp
Switch(config-pmap)# class ftp_class
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos 3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
This example shows how to assign a DSCP to CoS table map to a class:
Switch(config)# policy-map inpolicy
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos dscp table dscp-cos-tablemap
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified class-map name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-398
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set dot1ad dei
set dot1ad dei
Use the set dot1ad dei policy-map class configuration command to mark IPv4 traffic by setting a drop
eligibility indicator (DEI) in the IEEE 802.1ad frame. Use the no form of this command to remove traffic
marking.
set dot1ad dei dei_value
no set dot1ad dei
Syntax Description
dei-value
Defaults
No DEI bit value is set.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(55)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Set the DEI bit in the 802.1ad packet. The range is 0 to 1.
You can use this command with per port or per-port per-VLAN policies to set the DEI bit in the 802.1ad
header of the packet.
DEI marking is supported only in ingress packets.
You can set the DEI bit only on 802.1ad ports. You configure these ports by entering the ethernet dot1ad
{nni | uni {c-port | s-port | c-port isolate | s-port isolate}} interface configuration command.
•
C-UNI ports can both classify and mark on the DEI bit.
•
S-UNI ports can classify and mark on the DEI bit of either the default S-tag on the port or the
S-tagged packet received from the customer port.
•
S-NNI ports can both classify and mark on the DEI bit.
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Examples
This example shows how to configure a policy map with two classes (match_1 and match_0) that set the
DEI bit:
Switch(config)# policy-map dei
Switch(config-pmap)# class match 1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set set dot1ad dei1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class match 0
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set set dot1ad dei0
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-399
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set dot1ad dei
This example shows how to apply the policy map to an S-NNI port ingress:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# ethernet dot1ad
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
Switch(config-if)# switchport
Switch(config-if)# service-policy input match-dei
Related Commands
Command
Description
match dot1ad dei
Defines a traffic classification match criteria to use the DEI bit.
ethernet dot1ad
Configures an interface as an 802.1ad C-port or S-port.
show policy map
Displays QoS policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-400
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set dscp
set dscp
Use the set [ip] dscp policy-map class configuration command to mark IPv4 traffic by setting a
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value in the type of service (ToS) byte of the packet. Use the
no form of this command to remove traffic marking.
set [ip] dscp {dscp_value |from-field [table table-map-name]}
no set [ip] dscp {dscp_value | from-field [table table-map-name]}
Note
Syntax Description
Entering ip dscp is the same as entering dscp.
dscp-value
Enter a DSCP value with which to classify traffic. The range is from
0 to 63. You also can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly used
value.
from-field
Specific a packet-marking category to be used to set the DSCP value of
the packet. If you are using a table map for mapping and converting
packet-marking values, this establishes the map-from packet-marking
category.
These options are supported:
•
cos—class of service (CoS) value
•
dscp—DSCP value.
•
precedence—IP-precedence value
table
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the from-field keyword. Indicates
that the values set in a specified table map are used to set the DSCP
value
table-map-name
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the table keyword. Name of the
table map used to specify the DSCP value. The table map name can be
a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters.
Defaults
No traffic marking is defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-401
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set dscp
Usage Guidelines
You can configure set dscp with other marking actions, specifically set cos and set qos-group, for the
same class. Support was also added for the ability to configure more than one marking action with
enhanced packet marking by using table maps for the same class.
You cannot use the set dscp command with the set precedence command to mark the same packet.
DSCP values and IP precedence values are mutually exclusive. A packet can have one value of the other,
but not both.
After DSCP bits are set, other quality of service (QoS) features can then operate on the bit settings.
The network gives priority (or some type of expedited handling) to marked traffic. Typically, you set the
DSCP value at the edge of the network (or administrative domain) and data is then queued according to
the precedence. Class-based weighted fair queuing (CBWFQ) can speed up handling for
high-precedence traffic at congestion points. Weighted Tail Drop (WTD) ensures that high-precedence
traffic has lower loss rates than other traffic during times of congestion.
Instead of using numeric values, you can also specify the dscp-value by using the reserved keywords EF,
AF11, and AF12.
If you are using this command to perform enhanced packet marking, you can use the from-field packet
marking option for mapping and setting the DSCP value. The supported from-field marking categories
are: CoS, DSCP, and IP precedence.
If you specify a from-field category, but do not specify the table keyword and table-map-name, the
default action is to copy the value associated with the from-field category as the DSCP value. For
example, if you enter the set dscp cos command, the CoS value is copied and used as the DSCP value.
Examples
This example shows how to set all FTP traffic to DSCP 10:
Switch(config)# policy-map policy_ftp
Switch(config-pmap)# class ftp_class
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp 10
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
This example shows how to assign a CoS to DSCP table map to a class:
Switch(config)# policy-map inpolicy
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp cos table cos-dscp-tablemap
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified class-map name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-402
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set precedence
set precedence
Use the set [ip] precedence policy-map class configuration command to mark IPv4 traffic by setting an
IP-precedence value in the packet. Use the no form of this command to remove traffic marking.
set [ip] precedence {precedence_value | from-field [table table-map-name]}
no set [ip] precedence {precedence_value | from-field [table table-map-name]}
Note
Syntax Description
Entering ip precedence is the same as entering precedence.
precedence_value
Enter an IPv4 precedence value with which to classify traffic. The
range is 0 to 7. You also can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly
used value.
from-field
Specific a packet-marking category to be used to set the precedence
value of the packet. If you are using a table map for mapping and
converting packet-marking values, this establishes the map-from
packet-marking category.
These options are supported:
•
cos—class of service (CoS) value
•
dscp—Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value.
•
precedence—IP-precedence value
table
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the from-field keyword. Indicates
that the values set in a specified table map are used to set the
precedence value
table-map-name
(Optional) Used in conjunction with the table keyword. Name of the
table map used to specify the precedence value. The table map name
can be a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters.
Defaults
No traffic marking is defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-403
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set precedence
Usage Guidelines
You can configure set precedence with other marking actions, specifically set cos and set qos-group,
for the same class. Support was also added for the ability to configure more than one marking action with
enhanced packet marking by using table maps for the same class.
You cannot use the set precedence command with the set dscp command to mark the same packet.
DSCP values and IP precedence values are mutually exclusive. A packet can have one value of the other,
but not both.
After precedence bits are set, other quality of service (QoS) features can then operate on the bit settings.
The network gives priority (or some type of expedited handling) to marked traffic. Typically, you set the
precedence value at the edge of the network (or administrative domain) and data is then queued
according to the precedence. Class-based weighted fair queuing (CBWFQ) can speed up handling for
high-precedence traffic at congestion points. Weighted Tail Drop (WTD) ensures that high-precedence
traffic has lower loss rates than other traffic during times of congestion.
Instead of using numeric values, you can also specify the dscp-value by using the reserved keywords EF,
AF11, and AF12.
If you are using this command to perform enhanced packet marking, you can use the from-field packet
marking option for mapping and setting the precedence value. The supported from-field marking
categories are: CoS, DSCP, and IP precedence.
If you specify a from-field category, but do not specify the table keyword and table-map-name, the
default action is to copy the value associated with the from-field category as the precedence value. For
example, if you enter the set precedence cos command, the CoS value is copied and used as the
precedence value.
Examples
This example shows how to give all FTP traffic an IP precedence value of 5:
Switch(config)# policy-map policy_ftp
Switch(config-pmap)# class ftp_class
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set precedence 5
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
This example shows how to assign a CoS to precedence table map to a class:
Switch(config)# policy-map inpolicy
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set precedence cos table cos-prec-tablemap
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified class-map name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-404
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set qos-group
set qos-group
Use the set qos-group policy-map class configuration command to set a a quality of service (QoS) group
identifier that can be used later to classify packets. Use the no form of this command to remove the group
identifier.
set qos-group value
no set qos-group value
Syntax Description
value
Set the QoS group value to use to classify traffic. The range is from 0
to 99.
Defaults
No traffic marking is defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can configure set qos-group with all other marking actions, specifically set cos, set dscp, and set
precedence, for the same class. Support was also added for the ability to configure more than one
marking action with enhanced packet marking by using table maps for the same class.
Use this command to associate a QoS group value with a traffic flow as it enters the switch, which can
then be used in an output policy map to identify the flow.
A maximum of 100 QoS groups (0 through 99) is supported on the switch.
To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode,
use the end command.
Examples
This example shows how to set all FTP traffic to QoS group 5:
Switch(config)# policy-map policy_ftp
Switch(config-pmap)# class ftp_class
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set qos-group 5
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-405
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
set qos-group
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified class-map name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-406
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
setup
setup
Use the setup privileged EXEC command to configure the switch with its initial configuration.
setup
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When you use the setup command, make sure that you have this information:
•
IP address and network mask
•
Password strategy for your environment
When you enter the setup command, an interactive dialog, called the System Configuration Dialog,
appears. It guides you through the configuration process and prompts you for information. The values
shown in brackets next to each prompt are the default values last set by using either the setup command
facility or the configure privileged EXEC command.
Help text is provided for each prompt. To access help text, press the question mark (?) key at a prompt.
To return to the privileged EXEC prompt without making changes and without running through the entire
System Configuration Dialog, press Ctrl-C.
When you complete your changes, the setup program shows you the configuration command script that
was created during the setup session. You can save the configuration in NVRAM or return to the setup
program or the command-line prompt without saving it.
Examples
This is an example of output from the setup command:
Switch# setup
--- System Configuration Dialog --Continue with configuration dialog? [yes/no]: yes
At any point you may enter a question mark '?' for help.
Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt.
Default settings are in square brackets '[]'.
Basic management setup configures only enough connectivity
for management of the system, extended setup will ask you
to configure each interface on the system.
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]: yes
Configuring global parameters:
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-407
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
setup
Enter host name [Switch]:host-name
The enable secret is a password used to protect access to
privileged EXEC and configuration modes. This password, after
entered, becomes encrypted in the configuration.
Enter enable secret: enable-secret-password
The enable password is used when you do not specify an
enable secret password, with some older software versions, and
some boot images.
Enter enable password: enable-password
The virtual terminal password is used to protect
access to the router over a network interface.
Enter virtual terminal password: terminal-password
Configure SNMP Network Management? [no]: yes
Community string [public]:
Current interface summary
Any interface listed with OK? value “NO” does not have a valid configuration
Interface
Vlan1
IP-Address
172.20.135.202
OK? Method Status
YES NVRAM up
Protocol
up
GigabitEthernet0/1
unassigned
YES unset
up
up
GigabitEthernet0/2
unassigned
YES unset
up
down
unassigned
YES unset
up
down
<output truncated>
Port-channel1
Enter interface name used to connect to the
management network from the above interface summary: vlan1
Configuring interface vlan1:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes]: yes
IP address for this interface: ip_address
Subnet mask for this interface [255.0.0.0]: subnet_mask
The following configuration command script was created:
hostname host-name
enable secret 5 $1$LiBw$0Xc1wyT.PXPkuhFwqyhVi0
enable password enable-password
line vty 0 15
password terminal-password
snmp-server community public
!
no ip routing
!
interface GigabitEthernet0/1
no ip address
!
interface GigabitEthernet0/2
no ip address
!
end
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-408
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
setup
Use this configuration? [yes/no]: yes
!
[0] Go to the IOS command prompt without saving this config.
[1] Return back to the setup without saving this config.
[2] Save this configuration to nvram and exit.
Enter your selection [2]:
Related Commands
Command
Description
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration.
show version
Displays version information for the hardware and firmware.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-409
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
shape average
shape average
Use the shape average policy-map class configuration command to configure class-based or port
shaping by specifying the average traffic shaping rate. Use the command with the class class-default to
set port shaping. Use the no form of this command to remove traffic shaping.
shape average target bps
no shape average target bps
Syntax Description
target bps
Defaults
No traffic shaping is defined.
Command Modes
Policy-map class configuration
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Target average bit rate in bits per second (bps). The range is from
64000 to 1000000000 for class-based shaping and 4000000 to
1000000000 for port shaping.
You use the shape average policy-map class command to control output traffic. Shaping is not supported
in input policy maps.
Traffic shaping limits the rate of transmission of data. Configuring traffic shaping for a user-defined
class or class-default for class-based shaping sets the peak information rate (PIR) for that class.
Configuring traffic shaping for the class class-default when it is the only class in the policy map that is
attached to an interface sets the PIR for the interface (port shaping).
You cannot configure shape average in a class that includes priority queueing (configured with the
priority policy-map class configuration command).
The shape average command uses a default queue limit for the class. You can change the queue limit by
using the queue-limit policy-map class command, overriding the default that is set by the shape average
command.
You cannot use the bandwidth policy-map class configuration command to configure class-based
weighted fair queuing (CBWFQ) and the shape average command to configure traffic shaping for the
same class.
You can configure hierarchical policy maps by attaching the service-policy policy-map class command
to the class class-default only when shape average is also configured on the class class-default.
To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode,
use the end command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-410
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
shape average
Examples
This example shows how to configure traffic shaping for outgoing traffic on a Fast Ethernet port so that
outclass1, outclass2, and outclass3 get a maximum of 50, 20, and 10 Mbps of the buffer size. The class
class-default gets the remaining bandwidth.
Switch(config)# policy-map out-policy
Switch(config-pmap)# class classout1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# shape average 50000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class classout2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# shape average 20000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# class classout3
Switch(config-pmap-c)# shape average 10000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy out out-policy
This example shows how to configure port shaping by configuring a hierarchical policy map that shapes
a port to 90 Mbps, allocated according to the out-policy policy map configured in the previous example.
Switch(config)# policy-map out-policy-parent
Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default
Switch(config-pmap-c)# shape average 90000000
Switch(config-pmap-c)# service-policy out-policy
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.
Related Commands
Command
Description
class
Defines a traffic classification match criteria for the specified class-map
name.
policy-map
Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to
specify a service policy.
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy maps.
show policy-map
interface [interface-id]
Displays policy maps configured on the specified interface or on all
interfaces.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-411
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show access-lists
show access-lists
Use the show access-lists privileged EXEC command to display access control lists (ACLs) configured
on the switch.
show access-lists [name | number | hardware counters | ipc]
Syntax Description
Note
name
(Optional) Name of the ACL.
number
(Optional) ACL number. The range is 1 to 2699.
hardware counters
(Optional) Display global hardware ACL statistics for switched and
routed packets.
ipc
(Optional) Display Interprocess Communication (IPC) protocol
access-list configuration download information.
Though visible in the command-line help strings, the rate-limit keywords are not supported.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The switch supports only IP standard and extended access lists. Therefore, the allowed numbers are only
1 to 199 and 1300 to 2699.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-412
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show access-lists
Examples
This is an example of output from the show access-lists command:
Switch# show access-lists
Standard IP access list 1
10 permit 1.1.1.1
20 permit 2.2.2.2
30 permit any
40 permit 0.255.255.255, wildcard bits 12.0.0.0
Standard IP access list videowizard_1-1-1-1
10 permit 1.1.1.1
Standard IP access list videowizard_10-10-10-10
10 permit 10.10.10.10
Extended IP access list 121
10 permit ahp host 10.10.10.10 host 20.20.10.10 precedence routine
This is an example of output from the show access-lists hardware counters command:
Switch# show access-lists
L2 ACL INPUT Statistics
Drop:
Drop:
Drop And Log:
Drop And Log:
Bridge Only:
Bridge Only:
Bridge Only And Log:
Bridge Only And Log:
Forwarding To CPU:
Forwarding To CPU:
Forwarded:
Forwarded:
Forwarded And Log:
Forwarded And Log:
L3 ACL INPUT Statistics
Drop:
Drop:
Drop And Log:
Drop And Log:
Bridge Only:
Bridge Only:
Bridge Only And Log:
Bridge Only And Log:
Forwarding To CPU:
Forwarding To CPU:
Forwarded:
Forwarded:
Forwarded And Log:
Forwarded And Log:
hardware counters
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
855
94143
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2121
180762
0
0
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13586
1236182
0
0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-413
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show access-lists
Related Commands
L2 ACL OUTPUT Statistics
Drop:
Drop:
Drop And Log:
Drop And Log:
Bridge Only:
Bridge Only:
Bridge Only And Log:
Bridge Only And Log:
Forwarding To CPU:
Forwarding To CPU:
Forwarded:
Forwarded:
Forwarded And Log:
Forwarded And Log:
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
232983
16825661
0
0
L3 ACL OUTPUT Statistics
Drop:
Drop:
Drop And Log:
Drop And Log:
Bridge Only:
Bridge Only:
Bridge Only And Log:
Bridge Only And Log:
Forwarding To CPU:
Forwarding To CPU:
Forwarded:
Forwarded:
Forwarded And Log:
Forwarded And Log:
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
frame
bytes
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
count:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
514434
39048748
0
0
Command
Description
access-list
Configures a standard or extended numbered access list on the switch.
ip access list
Configures a named IP access list on the switch.
mac access-list extended
Configures a named or numbered MAC access list on the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-414
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show archive status
show archive status
Use the show archive status privileged EXEC command to display the status of a new image being
downloaded to a switch with the HTTP or the TFTP protocol.
show archive status
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
If you use the archive download-sw privileged EXEC command to download an image to a TFTP server,
the output of the show archive status command shows the status of the download.
These are examples of output from the show archive status command:
Switch# show archive status
IDLE: No upgrade in progress
Switch# show archive status
LOADING: Upgrade in progress
Switch# show archive status
EXTRACT: Extracting the image
Switch# show archive status
VERIFY: Verifying software
Switch# show archive status
RELOAD: Upgrade completed. Reload pending
Related Commands
Command
Description
Command History
Downloads a new image from a TFTP server to the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-415
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show arp access-list
show arp access-list
Use the show arp access-list user EXEC command to display detailed information about Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) access control (lists).
show arp access-list [acl-name]
Syntax Description
acl-name
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) Name of the ACL.
This is an example of output from the show arp access-list command:
Switch> show arp access-list
ARP access list rose
permit ip 10.101.1.1 0.0.0.255 mac any
permit ip 20.3.1.0 0.0.0.255 mac any
Related Commands
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP ACL.
deny (ARP access-list
configuration)
Denies an ARP packet based on matches against the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) bindings.
ip arp inspection filter vlan
Permits ARP requests and responses from a host configured with a
static IP address.
permit (ARP access-list
configuration)
Permits an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-416
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show boot
show boot
Use the show boot privileged EXEC command to display the settings of the boot environment variables.
show boot
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show boot command. Switch# show boot
5d05h: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BOOT path-list
:
Config file
: flash:/config.text
Private Config file : flash:/private-config.text
Enable Break
: no
Manual Boot
: yes
HELPER path-list
:
Auto upgrade
: yes
Table 2-6 describes each field in the display.
Table 2-6
show boot Field Descriptions
Field
Description
BOOT path-list
Displays a semicolon separated list of executable files to try to load and execute when
automatically booting.
If the BOOT environment variable is not set, the system attempts to load and execute
the first executable image it can find by using a recursive, depth-first search through the
flash file system. In a depth-first search of a directory, each encountered subdirectory
is completely searched before continuing the search in the original directory.
If the BOOT variable is set but the specified images cannot be loaded, the system
attempts to boot the first bootable file that it can find in the flash file system.
Config file
Displays the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read and write a nonvolatile copy of the
system configuration.
Private Config file
Displays the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read and write a nonvolatile copy of the
system configuration.
Enable Break
Displays whether a break during booting is enabled or disabled. If it is set to yes, on, or
1, you can interrupt the automatic boot process by pressing the Break key on the console
after the flash file system is initialized.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-417
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show boot
Table 2-6
show boot Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
Manual Boot
Displays whether the switch automatically or manually boots. If it is set to no or 0, the
boot loader attempts to automatically boot the system. If it is set to anything else, you
must manually boot the switch from the boot loader mode.
Helper path-list
Displays a semicolon separated list of loadable files to dynamically load during the boot
loader initialization. Helper files extend or patch the functionality of the boot loader.
Related Commands
Command
Description
boot config-file
Specifies the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read and write a nonvolatile
copy of the system configuration.
boot enable-break
Enables interrupting the automatic boot process.
boot manual
Enables manually booting the switch during the next boot cycle.
boot
private-config-file
Specifies the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read and write a nonvolatile
copy of the private configuration.
boot system
Specifies the Cisco IOS image to load during the next boot cycle.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-418
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show cable-diagnostics tdr
show cable-diagnostics tdr
Use the show cable-diagnostics tdr privileged EXEC command to display the Time Domain Reflector
(TDR) results.
show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id
Note
TDR is supported only on the copper Ethernet 10/100 ports on the Cisco ME switch.
Syntax Description
interface-id
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Specify the interface on which TDR was run.
Usage Guidelines
TDR is supported only on copper Ethernet 10/100 ports on the Cisco ME switch. It is not supported on
small form-factor pluggable (SFP)-module ports. For more information about TDR, see the software
configuration guide for this release.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id command on
a Cisco ME switch:
Switch# show cable-diagnostics tdr interface fastethernet0/1
TDR test last run on: March 01 18:14:44
Interface Speed Local pair Pair length
--------- ----- ---------- -----------------Fa0/1
100M Pair A
4
+/- 5 meters
Pair B
4
+/- 5 meters
Pair C
N/A
Pair D
N/A
Remote pair
----------Pair A
Pair B
Pair C
Pair D
Pair status
-------------------Normal
Normal
N/A
N/A
Table 2-7 lists the descriptions of the fields in the show cable-diagnostics tdr command output.
Table 2-7
Fields Descriptions for the show cable-diagnostics tdr Command Output
Field
Description
Interface
Interface on which TDR was run.
Speed
Speed of connection.
Local pair
Name of the pair of wires that TDR is testing on the local interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-419
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show cable-diagnostics tdr
Table 2-7
Fields Descriptions for the show cable-diagnostics tdr Command Output (continued)
Field
Description
Pair length
Location on the cable where the problem is, with respect to your switch. TDR can only
find the location in one of these cases:
•
The cable is properly connected, the link is up, and the interface speed is 100 Mbps.
•
The cable is open.
•
The cable has a short.
Remote pair
Name of the pair of wires to which the local pair is connected. TDR can learn about the
remote pair only when the cable is properly connected and the link is up.
Pair status
The status of the pair of wires on which TDR is running:
•
Normal—The pair of wires is properly connected.
•
Not completed—The test is running and is not completed.
•
Not supported—The interface does not support TDR.
•
Open—The pair of wires is open.
•
Shorted—The pair of wires is shorted.
•
ImpedanceMis—The impedance is mismatched.
•
Short/Impedance Mismatched—The impedance mismatched or the cable is short.
•
InProgress—The diagnostic test is in progress
This is an example of output from the show interface interface-id command when TDR is running:
Switch# show interface fastethernet0/1
fastethernet0/1 is up, line protocol is up (connected: TDR in Progress)
This is an example of output from the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id command when
TDR is not running:
Switch# show cable-diagnostics tdr interface fastethernet0/1
% TDR test was never issued on fa0/1
If an interface does not support TDR, this message appears:
% TDR test is not supported on switch 1
Related Commands
Command
Description
test cable-diagnostics tdr
Enables and runs TDR on an interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-420
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show class-map
show class-map
Use the show class-map user EXEC command to display quality of service (QoS) class maps, which
define the match criteria to classify traffic.
show class-map [class-map-name]
Syntax Description
class-map-name
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) Display the contents of the specified class map.
This is an example of output from the show class-map command:
Switch> show class-map
Class Map match-all videowizard_10-10-10-10 (id 2)
Match access-group name videowizard_10-10-10-10
Class Map match-any class-default (id 0)
Match any
Class Map match-all dscp5 (id 3)
Match ip dscp 5
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class
whose name you specify.
match access-group
Defines the match criteria to classify traffic.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-421
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers cpu-interface
show controllers cpu-interface
Use the show controllers cpu-interface privileged EXEC command to display the state of the CPU
network interface ASIC and the send and receive statistics for packets reaching the CPU.
show controllers cpu-interface
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This display provides information that might be useful for Cisco technical support representatives
troubleshooting the switch.
Examples
This is a partial output example from the show controllers cpu-interface command:
Switch# show controllers cpu-interface
cpu-queue-frames retrieved dropped
----------------- ---------- ---------rpc
4523063
0
stp
1545035
0
ipc
1903047
0
routing protocol 96145
0
L2 protocol
79596
0
remote console
0
0
sw forwarding
5756
0
host
225646
0
broadcast
46472
0
cbt-to-spt
0
0
igmp snooping
68411
0
icmp
0
0
logging
0
0
rpf-fail
0
0
queue14
0
0
cpu heartbeat
1710501
0
invalid
---------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
hol-block
---------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-422
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers cpu-interface
Supervisor ASIC receive-queue parameters
---------------------------------------queue 0 maxrecevsize 5EE pakhead 1419A20
queue 1 maxrecevsize 5EE pakhead 15828E0
queue 2 maxrecevsize 5EE pakhead 1470D40
queue 3 maxrecevsize 5EE pakhead 19CDDD0
paktail
paktail
paktail
paktail
13EAED4
157FBFC
1470FE4
19D02C8
<output truncated>
Supervisor ASIC Mic Registers
-----------------------------MicDirectPollInfo
80000800
MicIndicationsReceived
00000000
MicInterruptsReceived
00000000
MicPcsInfo
0001001F
MicPlbMasterConfiguration
00000000
MicRxFifosAvailable
00000000
MicRxFifosReady
0000BFFF
MicTimeOutPeriod:
FrameTOPeriod: 00000EA6 DirectTOPeriod: 00004000
<output truncated>
MicTransmitFifoInfo:
Fifo0:
StartPtrs:
WritePtrs:
Weights:
Fifo1: StartPtr:
WritePtrs:
writeHeaderPtr:
Fifo2: StartPtr:
WritePtrs:
writeHeaderPtr:
Fifo3: StartPtr:
WritePtrs:
writeHeaderPtr:
Fifo4: StartPtr:
WritePtrs:
writeHeaderPtr:
Fifo5: StartPtr:
WritePtrs:
writeHeaderPtr:
Fifo6: StartPtr:
WritePtrs:
038C2800
038C2C38
001E001E
03A9BC00
03A9BC60
03A9BC60
038C8800
038C88E0
038C88E0
03C30400
03C30638
03C30638
03AD5000
03AD50A0
03AD50A0
03A7A600
03A7A600
03A7A600
03BF8400
03BF87F0
ReadPtr:
Fifo_Flag:
038C2C38
8A800800
ReadPtr:
Fifo_Flag:
03A9BC60
89800400
ReadPtr:
Fifo_Flag:
038C88E0
88800200
ReadPtr:
Fifo_Flag:
03C30638
89800400
ReadPtr:
Fifo_Flag:
03AD50A0
89800400
ReadPtr:
Fifo_Flag:
03A7A600
88800200
ReadPtr:
Fifo_Flag:
03BF87F0
89800400
<output truncated>
Related Commands
Command
Description
show controllers
ethernet-controller
Displays per-interface send and receive statistics read from the hardware or
the interface internal registers.
show interfaces
Displays the administrative and operational status of all interfaces or a
specified interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-423
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers ethernet-controller
show controllers ethernet-controller
Use the show controllers ethernet-controller privileged EXEC command without keywords to display
per-interface send and receive statistics read from the hardware. Use with the phy keyword to display
the interface internal registers or the port-asic keyword to display information about the port ASIC.
show controllers ethernet-controller [interface-id] [phy [detail]] [port-asic {configuration |
statistics}]
Syntax Description
interface-id
The physical interface (including type, module, and port number).
phy
(Optional) Display the status of the internal registers on the switch physical layer
device (PHY) for the device or the interface. This display includes the operational
state of the automatic medium-dependent interface crossover (Auto-MDIX)
feature on an interface.
detail
(Optional) Display details about the PHY internal registers.
port-asic
(Optional) Display information about the port ASIC internal registers.
configuration
Display port ASIC internal register configuration.
statistics
Display port ASIC statistics, including the Rx/Sup Queue and miscellaneous
statistics.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC (only supported with the interface-id keywords in user EXEC mode)
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This display without keywords provides traffic statistics, basically the RMON statistics for all interfaces
or for the specified interface.
When you enter the phy or port-asic keywords, the displayed information is useful primarily for Cisco
technical support representatives troubleshooting the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-424
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers ethernet-controller
Examples
This is an example of output from the show controllers ethernet-controller command for an interface.
Table 2-8 describes the Transmit fields, and Table 2-9 describes the Receive fields.
Switch# show controllers ethernet-controller gigabitethernet0/1
Transmit GigabitEthernet0/1
Receive
0 Bytes
0 Bytes
0 Unicast frames
0 Unicast frames
0 Multicast frames
0 Multicast frames
0 Broadcast frames
0 Broadcast frames
0 Too old frames
0 Unicast bytes
0 Deferred frames
0 Multicast bytes
0 MTU exceeded frames
0 Broadcast bytes
0 1 collision frames
0 Alignment errors
0 2 collision frames
0 FCS errors
0 3 collision frames
0 Oversize frames
0 4 collision frames
0 Undersize frames
0 5 collision frames
0 Collision fragments
0 6 collision frames
0 7 collision frames
0 Minimum size frames
0 8 collision frames
0 65 to 127 byte frames
0 9 collision frames
0 128 to 255 byte frames
0 10 collision frames
0 256 to 511 byte frames
0 11 collision frames
0 512 to 1023 byte frames
0 12 collision frames
0 1024 to 1518 byte frames
0 13 collision frames
0 Overrun frames
0 14 collision frames
0 Pause frames
0 15 collision frames
0 Symbol error frames
0 Excessive collisions
0 Late collisions
0 Invalid frames, too large
0 VLAN discard frames
0 Valid frames, too large
0 Excess defer frames
0 Invalid frames, too small
0 64 byte frames
0 Valid frames, too small
0 127 byte frames
0 255 byte frames
0 Too old frames
0 511 byte frames
0 Valid oversize frames
0 1023 byte frames
0 System FCS error frames
0 1518 byte frames
0 RxPortFifoFull drop frame
0 Too large frames
0 Good (1 coll) frames
Table 2-8
Transmit Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Bytes
The total number of bytes sent on an interface.
Unicast Frames
The total number of frames sent to unicast addresses.
Multicast frames
The total number of frames sent to multicast addresses.
Broadcast frames
The total number of frames sent to broadcast addresses.
Too old frames
The number of frames dropped on the egress port because the packet aged out.
Deferred frames
The number of frames that are not sent after the time exceeds 2*maximum-packet time.
MTU exceeded frames The number of frames that are larger than the maximum allowed frame size.
1 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after one collision occurs.
2 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after two collisions occur.
3 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after three collisions occur.
4 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after four collisions occur.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-425
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers ethernet-controller
Table 2-8
Transmit Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
5 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after five collisions occur.
6 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after six collisions occur.
7 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after seven collisions occur.
8 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after eight collisions occur.
9 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after nine collisions occur.
10 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after ten collisions occur.
11 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 11 collisions occur.
12 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 12 collisions occur.
13 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 13 collisions occur.
14 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 14 collisions occur.
15 collision frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 15 collisions occur.
Excessive collisions
The number of frames that could not be sent on an interface after 16 collisions occur.
Late collisions
After a frame is sent, the number of frames dropped because late collisions were detected while the
frame was sent.
VLAN discard frames
The number of frames dropped on an interface because the CFI1 bit is set.
Excess defer frames
The number of frames that are not sent after the time exceeds the maximum-packet time.
64 byte frames
The total number of frames sent on an interface that are 64 bytes.
127 byte frames
The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 65 to 127 bytes.
255 byte frames
The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 128 to 255 bytes.
511 byte frames
The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 256 to 511 bytes.
1023 byte frames
The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 512 to 1023 bytes.
1518 byte frames
The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 1024 to 1518 bytes.
Too large frames
The number of frames sent on an interface that are larger than the maximum allowed frame size.
Good (1 coll) frames
The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after one collision occurs. This value
does not include the number of frames that are not successfully sent after one collision occurs.
1. CFI = Canonical Format Indicator
Table 2-9
Receive Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Bytes
The total amount of memory (in bytes) used by frames received on an interface, including the
FCS1 value and the incorrectly formed frames. This value excludes the frame header bits.
Unicast frames
The total number of frames successfully received on the interface that are directed to unicast
addresses.
Multicast frames
The total number of frames successfully received on the interface that are directed to multicast
addresses.
Broadcast frames
The total number of frames successfully received on an interface that are directed to broadcast
addresses.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-426
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers ethernet-controller
Table 2-9
Receive Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
Unicast bytes
The total amount of memory (in bytes) used by unicast frames received on an interface, including
the FCS value and the incorrectly formed frames. This value excludes the frame header bits.
Multicast bytes
The total amount of memory (in bytes) used by multicast frames received on an interface,
including the FCS value and the incorrectly formed frames. This value excludes the frame header
bits.
Broadcast bytes
The total amount of memory (in bytes) used by broadcast frames received on an interface,
including the FCS value and the incorrectly formed frames. This value excludes the frame header
bits.
Alignment errors
The total number of frames received on an interface that have alignment errors.
FCS errors
The total number of frames received on an interface that have a valid length (in bytes) but do not
have the correct FCS values.
Oversize frames
The number of frames received on an interface that are larger than the maximum allowed frame
size.
Undersize frames
The number of frames received on an interface that are smaller than 64 bytes.
Collision fragments
The number of collision fragments received on an interface.
Minimum size frames
The total number of frames that are the minimum frame size.
65 to 127 byte frames
The total number of frames that are from 65 to 127 bytes.
128 to 255 byte frames
The total number of frames that are from 128 to 255 bytes.
256 to 511 byte frames
The total number of frames that are from 256 to 511 bytes.
512 to 1023 byte frames
The total number of frames that are from 512 to 1023 bytes.
1024 to 1518 byte frames
The total number of frames that are from 1024 to 1518 bytes.
Overrun frames
The total number of overrun frames received on an interface.
Pause frames
The number of pause frames received on an interface.
Symbol error frames
The number of frames received on an interface that have symbol errors.
Invalid frames, too large
The number of frames received that were larger than maximum allowed MTU2 size (including
the FCS bits and excluding the frame header) and that have either an FCS error or an alignment
error.
Valid frames, too large
The number of frames received on an interface that are larger than the maximum allowed frame
size.
Invalid frames, too small
The number of frames received that are smaller than 64 bytes (including the FCS bits and
excluding the frame header) and that have either an FCS error or an alignment error.
Valid frames, too small
The number of frames received on an interface that are smaller than 64 bytes (or 68 bytes for
VLAN-tagged frames) and that have valid FCS values. The frame size includes the FCS bits but
excludes the frame header bits.
Too old frames
The number of frames dropped on the ingress port because the packet aged out.
Valid oversize frames
The number of frames received on an interface that are larger than the maximum allowed frame
size and have valid FCS values. The frame size includes the FCS value but does not include the
VLAN tag.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-427
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers ethernet-controller
Table 2-9
Receive Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
System FCS error frames
The total number of frames received on an interface that have a valid length (in bytes) but that do
not have the correct FCS values.
RxPortFifoFull drop
frames
The total number of frames received on an interface that are dropped because the ingress queue
is full.
1. FCS = frame check sequence
2. MTU = maximum transmission unit
This is an example of output from the show controllers ethernet-controller phy command for a specific
interface. Note that the last line of the display is the setting for Auto-MDIX for the interface.
Switch# show controllers ethernet-controller gigabitethernet0/2 phy
Control Register
: 0001 0001 0100 0000
Control STATUS
: 0111 1001 0100 1001
Phy ID 1
: 0000 0001 0100 0001
Phy ID 2
: 0000 1100 0010 0100
Auto-Negotiation Advertisement
: 0000 0011 1110 0001
Auto-Negotiation Link Partner
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Auto-Negotiation Expansion Reg
: 0000 0000 0000 0100
Next Page Transmit Register
: 0010 0000 0000 0001
Link Partner Next page Registe
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1000BASE-T Control Register
: 0000 1111 0000 0000
1000BASE-T Status Register
: 0100 0000 0000 0000
Extended Status Register
: 0011 0000 0000 0000
PHY Specific Control Register
: 0000 0000 0111 1000
PHY Specific Status Register
: 1000 0001 0100 0000
Interrupt Enable
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Interrupt Status
: 0000 0000 0100 0000
Extended PHY Specific Control
: 0000 1100 0110 1000
Receive Error Counter
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Reserved Register 1
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Global Status
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
LED Control
: 0100 0001 0000 0000
Manual LED Override
: 0000 1000 0010 1010
Extended PHY Specific Control
: 0000 0000 0001 1010
Disable Receiver 1
: 0000 0000 0000 1011
Disable Receiver 2
: 1000 0000 0000 0100
Extended PHY Specific Status
: 1000 0100 1000 0000
Auto-MDIX
: On
[AdminState=1
Flags=0x00052248]
This is an example of output from the show controllers ethernet-controller port-asic configuration
command:
Switch# show controllers ethernet-controller port-asic configuration
========================================================================
PortASIC 0 Registers
-----------------------------------------------------------------------DeviceType
: 000101BC
Reset
: 00000000
PmadMicConfig
: 00000001
PmadMicDiag
: 00000003
SupervisorReceiveFifoSramInfo
: 000007D0 000007D0 40000000
SupervisorTransmitFifoSramInfo
: 000001D0 000001D0 40000000
GlobalStatus
: 00000800
IndicationStatus
: 00000000
IndicationStatusMask
: FFFFFFFF
InterruptStatus
: 00000000
InterruptStatusMask
: 01FFE800
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-428
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers ethernet-controller
SupervisorDiag
SupervisorFrameSizeLimit
SupervisorBroadcast
GeneralIO
StackPcsInfo
:
:
:
:
:
StackRacInfo
:
StackControlStatus
stackControlStatusMask
TransmitBufferFreeListInfo
:
:
:
TransmitRingFifoInfo
:
TransmitBufferInfo
TransmitBufferCommonCount
TransmitBufferCommonCountPeak
TransmitBufferCommonCommonEmpty
NetworkActivity
DroppedStatistics
FrameLengthDeltaSelect
SneakPortFifoInfo
MacInfo
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
00000000
000007C8
000A0F01
000003F9
FFFF1000
FF0FFF00
73001630
24140003
18E418E0
FFFFFFFF
00000854
0000088A
00000016
0000000C
00012000
00000F7A
0000001E
000000FF
00000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
0EC0801C
00C0001D
00000000
860329BD
86020000
00000003
FD632B00
00000004
5555FFFF
5555FFFF
7F001644
18E418E0
FFFFFFFF
00000000
00000003
FFFFFFFF
00000800
0000085D
00000016
0000000C
00000FFF
00000FF8
00000FF8
40000000
40000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000030
00000000 00000000 02400000
00000001 0EC0801B 00000001
00000001 00C0001E 00000001
<output truncated>
This is an example of output from the show controllers ethernet-controller port-asic statistics
command:
Switch# show controllers ethernet-controller port-asic statistics
===========================================================================
PortASIC 0 Statistics
--------------------------------------------------------------------------0 RxQ-0, wt-0 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-0 drop frames
4118966 RxQ-0, wt-1 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-1 drop frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-2 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-2 drop frames
0 RxQ-1, wt-0 enqueue frames
296 RxQ-1, wt-1 enqueue frames
2836036 RxQ-1, wt-2 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-1, wt-0 drop frames
0 RxQ-1, wt-1 drop frames
0 RxQ-1, wt-2 drop frames
0 RxQ-2, wt-0 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-2, wt-1 enqueue frames
158377 RxQ-2, wt-2 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-2, wt-0 drop frames
0 RxQ-2, wt-1 drop frames
0 RxQ-2, wt-2 drop frames
0 RxQ-3, wt-0 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-3, wt-1 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-3, wt-2 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-3, wt-0 drop frames
0 RxQ-3, wt-1 drop frames
0 RxQ-3, wt-2 drop frames
15
0
0
0
0
74
0
0
0
TxBufferFull Drop Count
TxBufferFrameDesc BadCrc16
TxBuffer Bandwidth Drop Cou
TxQueue Bandwidth Drop Coun
TxQueue Missed Drop Statist
RxBuffer Drop DestIndex Cou
SneakQueue Drop Count
Learning Queue Overflow Fra
Learning Cam Skip Count
15 Sup Queue 0 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 1 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 2 Drop Frames
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Rx Fcs Error Frames
Rx Invalid Oversize Frames
Rx Invalid Too Large Frames
Rx Invalid Too Large Frames
Rx Invalid Too Small Frames
Rx Too Old Frames
Tx Too Old Frames
System Fcs Error Frames
0 Sup Queue 8 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 9 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 10 Drop Frames
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-429
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers ethernet-controller
0 Sup Queue 3 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 11 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 4 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 12 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 5 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 13 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 6 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 14 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 7 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 15 Drop Frames
===========================================================================
PortASIC 1 Statistics
--------------------------------------------------------------------------0 RxQ-0, wt-0 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-0 drop frames
52 RxQ-0, wt-1 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-1 drop frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-2 enqueue frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-2 drop frames
<output truncated>
Related Commands
Command
Description
show controllers
cpu-interface
Displays the state of the CPU network ASIC and send and receive statistics
for packets reaching the CPU.
show controllers tcam
Displays the state of registers for all ternary content addressable memory
(TCAM) in the system and for TCAM interface ASICs that are CAM
controllers.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-430
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers tcam
show controllers tcam
Use the show controllers tcam privileged EXEC command to display the state of the registers for all
ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) in the system and for all TCAM interface ASICs that are
CAM controllers.
show controllers tcam [asic [number]] [detail]
Syntax Description
asic
(Optional) Display port ASIC TCAM information.
number
(Optional) Display information for the specified port ASIC number. The range is
from 0 to 15.
detail
(Optional) Display detailed TCAM register information.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This display provides information that might be useful for Cisco technical support representatives
troubleshooting the switch.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show controllers tcam command:
Switch# show controllers tcam
-----------------------------------------------------------------------TCAM-0 Registers
-----------------------------------------------------------------------REV:
00B30103
SIZE:
00080040
ID:
00000000
CCR:
00000000_F0000020
RPID0:
RPID1:
RPID2:
RPID3:
00000000_00000000
00000000_00000000
00000000_00000000
00000000_00000000
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-431
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers tcam
HRR0:
00000000_E000CAFC
HRR1:
00000000_00000000
HRR2:
00000000_00000000
HRR3:
00000000_00000000
HRR4:
00000000_00000000
HRR5:
00000000_00000000
HRR6:
00000000_00000000
HRR7:
00000000_00000000
<output truncated>
GMR31:
GMR32:
GMR33:
FF_FFFFFFFF_FFFFFFFF
FF_FFFFFFFF_FFFFFFFF
FF_FFFFFFFF_FFFFFFFF
=============================================================================
TCAM related PortASIC 1 registers
=============================================================================
LookupType:
89A1C67D_24E35F00
LastCamIndex:
0000FFE0
LocalNoMatch:
000069E0
ForwardingRamBaseAddress:
00022A00 0002FE00 00040600 0002FE00 0000D400
00000000 003FBA00 00009000 00009000 00040600
00000000 00012800 00012900
Related Commands
Command
Description
show controllers
cpu-interface
Displays the state of the CPU network ASIC and send and receive statistics
for packets reaching the CPU.
show controllers
ethernet-controller
Displays per-interface send and receive statistics read from the hardware or
the interface internal registers.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-432
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers utilization
show controllers utilization
Use the show controllers utilization user EXEC command to display bandwidth utilization on
the switch or specific ports.
show controllers [interface-id] utilization
Syntax Description
interface-id
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) ID of the switch interface.
This is an example of output from the show controllers utilization command.
Switch> show controllers utilization
Port
Receive Utilization Transmit Utilization
Fa0/1
0
0
Fa0/2
0
0
Fa0/3
0
0
Fa0/4
0
0
Fa0/5
0
0
Fa0/6
0
0
Fa0/7
0
0
<output truncated>
Switch Receive Bandwidth Percentage Utilization : 0
Switch Transmit Bandwidth Percentage Utilization : 0
Switch Fabric Percentage Utilization : 0
This is an example of output from the show controllers utilization command on a specific port:
Switch> show controllers gigabitethernet0/1 utilization
Receive Bandwidth Percentage Utilization
: 0
Transmit Bandwidth Percentage Utilization : 0
Table 2-10
Field
show controllers utilization Field Descriptions
Description
Receive Bandwidth Percentage Displays the received bandwidth usage of the switch, which is the
Utilization
sum of the received traffic on all the ports divided by the switch
receive capacity.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-433
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show controllers utilization
Table 2-10
Related Commands
show controllers utilization Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Transmit Bandwidth
Percentage Utilization
Displays the transmitted bandwidth usage of the switch, which is the
sum of the transmitted traffic on all the ports divided it by the switch
transmit capacity.
Fabric Percentage Utilization
Displays the average of the transmitted and received bandwidth usage
of the switch.
Command
Description
show controllers
ethernet-controller
Displays the interface internal registers.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-434
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show cpu traffic qos
show cpu traffic qos
Use the show cpu traffic qos command in user EXEC mode to display the QoS marking values for
CPU-generated traffic.
show cpu traffic qos
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Displays output the QoS marking values for all CPU-generated traffic.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Examples
The following is sample output from the show cpu traffic qos command:
Switch> show cpu traffic qos
QOS - CPU Generated Traffic
--------------------------Set parameter-type
To parameter-value/From
parameter-type based on table-map
--------------------------------------------------------Cos
cos
precedence table-map map1
DSCP
Default
Precedence
dscp
Qos Group
5
Related Commands
Command
Description
class-map
Configures a class map to be used for matching packets to a specified
criteria and enters class-map configuration mode.
cpu traffic qos cos
Configures class of service (CoS) marking for control plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos dscp
Configures quality of service (QoS) marking based on DSCP for control
plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos
precedence
Configure quality of service (QoS) marking based on precedence for
control plane traffic.
cpu traffic qos
qos-group
Maps all CPU-generated traffic to a single class in the output policy-maps
without changing the class of service (CoS), IP differentiated services
code point (DSCP), or IP-precedence packet markings.
policy-map
Configures a policy map that can be attached to multiple physical ports and
enters policy-map configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-435
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show cpu traffic qos
Command
Description
show policy-map
Displays QoS policy map information for the specified policy map name,
interface, input or output policy maps, or policy-map class.
show running-config
Displays the configured class maps, policy maps, table maps, and
aggregate policers.
Related Commands
Displays information for all configured table maps or the specified table
map.
table-map
Configures quality of service (QoS) mapping and enters table-map
configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-436
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show diagnostic
show diagnostic
Use the show diagnostic user EXEC command to display the online diagnostic test results and the
supported test suites.
show diagnostic content
show diagnostic post
show diagnostic result [test {name | test-id | test-id-range | all}] [detail]
show diagnostic schedule
show diagnostic status
show diagnostic switch [detail]
Syntax Description
content
Display test information including the test ID, the test attributes, and the
supported coverage test levels for specific tests and for switches.
post
Display the power-on self-test (POST) results.
result
Display the diagnostic test results.
test
(Optional) Specify the test results to display:
•
name—Enter the name of the diagnostic test to display results only for this
test.
•
test-id—Enter the test ID number to display results only for this test. The
test ID can be from 1 to 6.
•
test-id-range—Enter the range of test ID numbers to display results only
for these tests.
•
all—Enter this keyword to display results for all the tests.
detail
(Optional) Display the detailed test results.
schedule
Display the scheduled diagnostic tests.
status
Display the running diagnostic tests.
switch
Display diagnostic results for the switch.
Defaults
This command has no default setting.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-437
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show diagnostic
Usage Guidelines
The show diagnostic post command output is the same as the show post command output.
The show diagnostic result [detail] command output is the same as the show diagnostic switch [detail]
command output.
Examples
This example shows how to display the diagnostic test IDs and attributes.
Switch> show diagnostic content
:
Diagnostics test suite attributes:
B/* - Basic ondemand test / NA
P/V/* - Per port test / Per device test / NA
D/N/* - Disruptive test / Non-disruptive test / NA
S/* - Only applicable to standby unit / NA
X/* - Not a health monitoring test / NA
F/* - Fixed monitoring interval test / NA
E/* - Always enabled monitoring test / NA
A/I - Monitoring is active / Monitoring is inactive
R/* - Switch will reload after test list completion / NA
P/* - will partition stack / NA
ID
====
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Test Name
==================================
TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback --->
TestPortAsicLoopback ------------>
TestPortAsicCam ----------------->
TestPortAsicRingLoopback -------->
TestMicRingLoopback ------------->
TestPortAsicMem ----------------->
Attributes
============
B*N****I**
B*D*X**IR*
B*D*X**IR*
B*D*X**IR*
B*D*X**IR*
B*D*X**IR*
Test Interval
day hh:mm:ss.ms
===============
not configured
not configured
not configured
not configured
not configured
not configured
Threshold
=====
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
This example shows how to display the diagnostic test results for a switch. You can also use the show
diagnostic switch command to display these results.
Switch> show diagnostic result
SerialNo : ME3400E44
Overall diagnostic result: PASS
Test results: (. = Pass, F = Fail, U = Untested)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback --->
TestPortAsicLoopback ------------>
TestPortAsicCam ----------------->
TestPortAsicRingLoopback -------->
TestMicRingLoopback ------------->
TestPortAsicMem ----------------->
.
U
U
U
U
U
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-438
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show diagnostic
This example shows how to display the running tests in a switch:
Switch> show diagnostic status
<BU> - Bootup Diagnostics, <HM> - Health Monitoring Diagnostics,
<OD> - OnDemand Diagnostics, <SCH> - Scheduled Diagnostics
====== ================================= =============================== ======
Card
Description
Current Running Test
Run by
------ --------------------------------- -------------------------1
N/A
N/A
2
TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback
<OD>
TestPortAsicLoopback
<OD>
TestPortAsicCam
<OD>
TestPortAsicRingLoopback
<OD>
TestMicRingLoopback
<OD>
TestPortAsicMem
<OD>
3
N/A
N/A
4
N/A
N/A
====== ================================= =============================== ======
<output truncated>
This example shows how to display the online diagnostic test schedule for a switch:
Switch> show diagnostic schedule
Current Time = 14:39:49 PST Tue Jul 5 2005
Diagnostic for Switch 1:
Schedule #1:
To be run daily 12:00
Test ID(s) to be executed: 1.
This example shows how to display the detailed results for a switch. You can also use the show
diagnostic result all detail command to display these results.
Switch> show diagnostic switch detail
Switch:
SerialNo : ME3400E44
Overall diagnostic result: PASS
Test results: (. = Pass, F = Fail, U = Untested)
___________________________________________________________________________
1) TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback ---> .
Error code ------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)
Total run count -------------> 19
Last test execution time ----> Mar 01 1993 00:21:46
First test failure time -----> n/a
Last test failure time ------> n/a
Last test pass time ---------> Mar 01 1993 00:21:46
Total failure count ---------> 0
Consecutive failure count ---> 0
___________________________________________________________________________
2) TestPortAsicLoopback ------------> U
Error code ------------------>
Total run count ------------->
Last test execution time ---->
First test failure time ----->
Last test failure time ------>
Last test pass time --------->
Total failure count --------->
Consecutive failure count --->
0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)
0
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0
0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-439
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show diagnostic
___________________________________________________________________________
3) TestPortAsicCam -----------------> U
Error code ------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)
Total run count -------------> 0
Last test execution time ----> n/a
First test failure time -----> n/a
Last test failure time ------> n/a
Last test pass time ---------> n/a
Total failure count ---------> 0
Consecutive failure count ---> 0
___________________________________________________________________________
4) TestPortAsicRingLoopback --------> U
Error code ------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)
Total run count -------------> 0
Last test execution time ----> n/a
First test failure time -----> n/a
Last test failure time ------> n/a
Last test pass time ---------> n/a
Total failure count ---------> 0
Consecutive failure count ---> 0
___________________________________________________________________________
5) TestMicRingLoopback -------------> U
Error code ------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)
Total run count -------------> 0
Last test execution time ----> n/a
First test failure time -----> n/a
Last test failure time ------> n/a
Last test pass time ---------> n/a
Total failure count ---------> 0
Consecutive failure count ---> 0
___________________________________________________________________________
6) TestPortAsicMem -----------------> U
Error code ------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)
Total run count -------------> 0
Last test execution time ----> n/a
First test failure time -----> n/a
Last test failure time ------> n/a
Last test pass time ---------> n/a
Total failure count ---------> 0
Consecutive failure count ---> 0
__________________________________________________________________________
Related Commands
Command
Description
diagnostic monitor
Configures the health-monitoring diagnostic test.
diagnostic schedule test
Sets the scheduling of test-based online diagnostic testing.
diagnostic start test
Starts the online diagnostic test.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-440
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show dot1q-tunnel
show dot1q-tunnel
Use the show dot1q-tunnel user EXEC command to display information about IEEE 802.1Q tunnel
ports.
show dot1q-tunnel [interface interface-id]
This command is visible only when the switch is running the metro IP access or metro access image.
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) Specify the interface for which to display IEEE 802.1Q tunneling
information. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.
These are examples of output from the show dot1q-tunnel commands:
Switch> show dot1q-tunnel
dot1q-tunnel mode LAN Port(s)
----------------------------Gi0/1
Gi0/2
Gi0/3
Gi0/6
Po2
Switch> show dot1q-tunnel interface gigabitethernet0/1
dot1q-tunnel mode LAN Port(s)
----------------------------Gi0/1
Related Commands
Command
Description
show vlan dot1q tag native
Displays 802.1Q native VLAN tagging status.
switchport mode dot1q-tunnel
Configures an interface as an IEEE 802.1Q tunnel port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-441
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show dot1x
show dot1x
Use the show dot1x privileged EXEC command to display IEEE 802.1x statistics, administrative status,
and operational status for the switch or for the specified port.
show dot1x [all | interface interface-id | statistics interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
all
(Optional) Display the IEEE 802.1x status for all ports.
interface interface-id
(Optional) Display the IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port (including
type, module, and port number).
statistics interface
interface-id
(Optional) Display IEEE 802.1x statistics for the specified port (including
type, module, and port number).
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If you do not specify a port, global parameters and a summary appear. If you specify a port, details for
that port appear.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show dot1x and the show dot1x all privileged EXEC commands:
Switch# show dot1x
Sysauthcontrol
Dot1x Protocol Version
Dot1x Oper Controlled Directions
Dot1x Admin Controlled Directions
=
=
=
=
Enabled
1
Both
Both
Switch# show dot1x all
Dot1x Info for interface GigabitEthernet0/1
---------------------------------------------------Supplicant MAC 00d0.b71b.35de
AuthSM State
= CONNECTING
BendSM State
= IDLE
PortStatus
= UNAUTHORIZED
MaxReq
= 2
HostMode
= Single
Port Control
= Auto
QuietPeriod
= 60 Seconds
Re-authentication = Disabled
ReAuthPeriod
= 3600 Seconds
ServerTimeout
= 30 Seconds
SuppTimeout
= 30 Seconds
TxPeriod
= 30 Seconds
Guest-Vlan
= 0
Dot1x Info for interface GigabitEthernet0/2
----------------------------------------------------
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-442
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show dot1x
PortStatus
MaxReq
HostMode
Port Control
QuietPeriod
Re-authentication
ReAuthPeriod
ServerTimeout
SuppTimeout
TxPeriod
Guest-Vlan
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
UNAUTHORIZED
2
Multi
Auto
60 Seconds
Disabled
3600 Seconds
30 Seconds
30 Seconds
30 Seconds
0
This is an example of output from the show dot1x interface interface-id privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show dot1x interface gigabitethernet0/1
Supplicant MAC 00d0.b71b.35de
AuthSM State
= AUTHENTICATED
BendSM State
= IDLE
PortStatus
= AUTHORIZED
MaxReq
= 2
HostMode
= Single
Port Control
= Auto
QuietPeriod
= 60 Seconds
Re-authentication = Disabled
ReAuthPeriod
= 3600 Seconds
ServerTimeout
= 30 Seconds
SuppTimeout
= 30 Seconds
TxPeriod
= 30 Seconds
Guest-Vlan
= 0
This is an example of output from the show dot1x statistics interface interface-id command. Table 2-11
describes the fields in the display.
Switch# show dot1x statistics interface gigabitethernet0/1
PortStatistics Parameters for Dot1x
-------------------------------------------TxReqId = 15
TxReq = 0
TxTotal = 15
RxStart = 4
RxLogoff = 0
RxRespId = 1
RxResp = 1
RxInvalid = 0
RxLenErr = 0
RxTotal= 6
RxVersion = 1
LastRxSrcMac 00d0.b71b.35de
Table 2-11
show dot1x statistics Field Descriptions
Field
Description
TxReqId
Number of Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)-request/identity frames
that have been sent.
TxReq
Number of EAP-request frames (other than request/identity frames) that have
been sent.
TxTotal
Number of Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) frames of any
type that have been sent.
RxStart
Number of valid EAPOL-start frames that have been received.
RxLogoff
Number of EAPOL-logoff frames that have been received.
RxRespId
Number of EAP-response/identity frames that have been received.
RxResp
Number of valid EAP-response frames (other than response/identity frames) that
have been received.
RxInvalid
Number of EAPOL frames that have been received and have an unrecognized
frame type.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-443
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show dot1x
Table 2-11
Related Commands
show dot1x statistics Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
RxLenError
Number of EAPOL frames that have been received in which the packet body
length field is invalid.
RxTotal
Number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received.
RxVersion
Number of received packets in the IEEE 802.1x Version 1 format.
LastRxSrcMac
Source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.
Command
Description
dot1x default
Resets the configurable IEEE 802.1x parameters to their default values.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-444
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show env
show env
Use the show env user EXEC command to display alarm contact, fan, temperature, and power
information for the switch.
show env {alarm-contact | all | fan | power | temperature}
Syntax Description
alarm-contact
Display alarm contact status.
all
Display fan, temperature, power supply, and alarm status.
fan
Display the status of the power supply fans. There are two fans in each power
supply. If either fan in a power supply fails, the status is reported as FAULTY.
power
Display the switch power-supply status.
temperature
Display the switch temperature status as OK or FAULTY and the temperature
thresholds.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show env alarm-contact command:
Switch# show env alarm-contact
ALARM CONTACT 1
Status:
asserted
Description: main_lab_door
Severity:
critical
Trigger:
open
ALARM CONTACT 2
Status:
asserted
Description: main_lab_cabinet-1_door
Severity:
major
Trigger:
open
ALARM CONTACT 3
Status:
asserted
Description: main_lab_supply-room_door
Severity:
major
Trigger:
open
ALARM CONTACT 4
Status:
not asserted
Description: main_lab_water-level_FLOOD
Severity:
critical
Trigger:
closed
This is an example of output from the show env all command:
Switch# show env all
FAN PS 1 is OK
FAN PS 2 is OK
TEMPERATURE is OK
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-445
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show env
Temperature Value: 23 Degree Celsius
Temperature State: GREEN
Yellow Threshold : 66 Degree Celsius
Red Threshold
: 74 Degree Celsius
POWER SUPPLY 1 is DC OK
POWER SUPPLY 2 is DC OK
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
1
2
3
4
is
is
is
is
asserted
asserted
asserted
not asserted
This is an example of output from the show env fan command:
Switch> show env fan
FAN PS 1 is OK
FAN PS 2 is FAULTY
This is an example of output from the show env power command when both DC inputs are expected but
one is missing:
Switch# show env power
POWER SUPPLY 1 is DC OK
POWER SUPPLY 2 is DC FAULTY
This is an example of output from the show env power command when one AC-power supply is present:
Switch# show
POWER SUPPLY
AC Input
Output
Fan
POWER SUPPLY
env power
1 is AC OK
: OK
: OK
: OK
2 is NOT PRESENT
This is an example of output from the show env temperature command:
Switch# show env temperature
TEMPERATURE is OK
Related Commands
Command
Description
alarm-contact
Configures alarm contacts.
power-supply dual
Configures power supply alarms.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-446
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show errdisable detect
show errdisable detect
Use the show errdisable detect user EXEC command to display error-disable detection status.
show errdisable detect
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The Mode column shows the shutdown mode that was configured for the error-disabled reason:
•
port—The physical port is error disabled if a violation occurs.
•
vlan—The virtual port is disabled if a violation occurs.
•
port/vlan—Some ports are configured for physical port disable, and others are configured for virtual
port disable. Enter the show running config privileged EXEC command to see the configuration for
each port.
A displayed gbic-invalid error in the Reason column refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) interface.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show errdisable detect command:
Switch> show errdisable detect
ErrDisable Reason
Detection
Mode
---------------------------arp-inspection
Enabled
port
bpduguard
Enabled
port
channel-misconfig
Enabled
port
community-limit
Enabled
port
dhcp-rate-limit
Enabled
port
dtp-flap
Enabled
port
gbic-invalid
Enabled
port
invalid-policy
Enabled
port
l2ptguard
Enabled
port
link-flap
Enabled
port
link-monitor-fail
Enabled
port
loopback
Enabled
port
lsgroup
Enabled
port
oam-remote-failure
Enabled
port
pagp-flap
Enabled
port
psecure-violation
Enabled
port/vlan
security-violatio
Enabled
port
sfp-config-mismatch
Enabled
port
storm-control
Enabled
port
udld
Enabled
port
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-447
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show errdisable detect
vmps
Note
Related Commands
Enabled
port
Though visible in the output, the dtp-flap, ilpower, storm-control, and unicast-flood fields are not valid.
Command
Description
errdisable detect cause
Enables error-disable detection for a specific cause or all causes.
show errdisable flap-values
Displays error condition recognition information.
show errdisable recovery
Displays error-disable recovery timer information.
show interfaces status
Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in an error-disabled
state.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-448
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show errdisable flap-values
show errdisable flap-values
Use the show errdisable flap-values user EXEC command to display conditions that cause an error to
be recognized for a cause.
show errdisable flap-values
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The Flaps column in the display shows how many changes to the state within the specified time interval
will cause an error to be detected and a port to be disabled. For example, the display shows that an error
will be assumed and the port shut down if three Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP)-state (port mode
access/trunk) or Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) flap changes occur during a 30-second interval, or if
5 link-state (link up/down) changes occur during a 10-second interval.
ErrDisable Reason
----------------pagp-flap
dtp-flap
link-flap
Note
Examples
Flaps
-----3
3
5
Time (sec)
---------30
30
10
Although visible in the output display, the switch does not support DTP.
This is an example of output from the show errdisable flap-values command:
Switch> show errdisable flap-values
ErrDisable Reason
Flaps
Time (sec)
------------------------------pagp-flap
3
30
dtp-flap
3
30
link-flap
5
10
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-449
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show errdisable flap-values
Related Commands
Command
Description
errdisable detect cause
Enables error-disable detection for a specific cause or all causes.
show errdisable detect
Displays error-disable detection status.
show errdisable recovery
Displays error-disable recovery timer information.
show interfaces status
Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-450
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show errdisable recovery
show errdisable recovery
Use the show errdisable recovery user EXEC command to display the error-disable recovery timer
information.
show errdisable recovery
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
A gbic-invalid error-disable reason refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module
interface.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show errdisable recovery command:
Switch> show errdisable recovery
ErrDisable Reason
Timer Status
-----------------------------udld
Disabled
bpduguard
Disabled
security-violatio
Disabled
channel-misconfig
Disabled
vmps
Disabled
pagp-flap
Disabled
dtp-flap
Disabled
l2ptguard
Disabled
link-flap
Enabled
psecure-violation
Disabled
gbic-invalid
Disabled
dhcp-rate-limit
Disabled
unicast-flood
Disabled
storm-control
Disabled
arp-inspection
Disabled
loopback
Disabled
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-451
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show errdisable recovery
Timer interval:300 seconds
Interfaces that will be enabled at the next timeout:
Interface
--------Gi0/2
Note
Related Commands
Errdisable reason
----------------link-flap
Time left(sec)
-------------279
Though visible in the output, the unicast-flood and DTP fields are not valid.
Command
Description
errdisable recovery
Configures the recover mechanism variables.
show errdisable detect
Displays error-disabled detection status.
show errdisable flap-values Displays error condition recognition information.
show interfaces status
Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-452
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show etherchannel
show etherchannel
Use the show etherchannel user EXEC command to display EtherChannel information for a channel.
show etherchannel [channel-group-number {detail | port | port-channel | protocol | summary}]
{detail | load-balance | port | port-channel | protocol | summary}
Syntax Description
channel-group-number
(Optional) Number of the channel group. The range is 1 to 48.
detail
Display detailed EtherChannel information.
load-balance
Display the load-balance or frame-distribution scheme among ports in the
port channel.
port
Display EtherChannel port information.
port-channel
Display port-channel information.
protocol
Display the protocol that is being used in the EtherChannel.
summary
Display a one-line summary per channel-group.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If you do not specify a channel-group, all channel groups are displayed.
In the output, the Passive port list field is displayed only for Layer 3 port channels. This field means that
the physical port, which is still not up, is configured to be in the channel group (and indirectly is in the
only port channel in the channel group).
Note
The switch must be running the metro IP access image to support Layer 3 ports.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-453
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show etherchannel
Examples
This is an example of output from the show etherchannel 1 detail command:
Switch> show etherchannel 1 detail
Group state = L2
Ports: 2
Maxports = 16
Port-channels: 1 Max Port-channels = 16
Protocol:
LACP
Ports in the group:
------------------Port: Gi0/1
-----------Port state
Channel group
Port-channel
Port index
Flags:
=
=
=
=
Up Mstr In-Bndl
1
Mode = Active
Po1
GC
=
0
Load = 0x00
Gcchange = Pseudo port-channel = Po1
Protocol =
LACP
S - Device is sending Slow LACPDUs
A - Device is in active mode.
F - Device is sending fast LACPDU
P - Device is in passive mode.
Local information:
Port
Gi0/1
Flags
SA
State
bndl
LACP port
Priority
32768
Admin
Key
0x0
Oper
Key
0x1
Port
Number
0x0
Port
State
0x3D
Age of the port in the current state: 01d:20h:06m:04s
Port-channels in the group:
---------------------Port-channel: Po1
------------
(Primary Aggregator)
Age of the Port-channel
= 01d:20h:20m:26s
Logical slot/port
= 10/1
Number of ports = 2
HotStandBy port = null
Port state
= Port-channel Ag-Inuse
Protocol
=
LACP
Ports in the Port-channel:
Index
Load
Port
EC state
No of bits
------+------+------+------------------+----------0
00
Gi0/1
Active
0
0
00
Gi0/2
Active
0
Time since last port bundled:
01d:20h:20m:20s
Gi0/2
This is an example of output from the show etherchannel 1 summary command:
Switch> show etherchannel 1 summary
Flags: D - down
P - in port-channel
I - stand-alone s - suspended
H - Hot-standby (LACP only)
R - Layer3
S - Layer2
u - unsuitable for bundling
U - in use
f - failed to allocate aggregator
d - default port
Number of channel-groups in use: 1
Number of aggregators:
1
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-454
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show etherchannel
Group Port-channel Protocol
Ports
------+-------------+-----------+---------------------------------------1
Po1(SU)
LACP
Gi0/1(P)
Gi0/2(P)
This is an example of output from the show etherchannel 1 port-channel command:
Switch> show etherchannel 1 port-channel
Port-channels in the group:
---------------------Port-channel: Po1
(Primary Aggregator)
-----------Age of the Port-channel
= 01d:20h:24m:50s
Logical slot/port
= 10/1
Number of ports = 2
HotStandBy port = null
Port state
= Port-channel Ag-Inuse
Protocol
=
LACP
Ports in the Port-channel:
Index
Load
Port
EC state
No of bits
------+------+------+------------------+----------0
00
Gi0/1
Active
0
0
00
Gi0/2
Active
0
Time since last port bundled:
01d:20h:24m:44s
Gi0/2
This is an example of output from show etherchannel protocol command:
Switch# show etherchannel protocol
Channel-group listing:
----------------------Group: 1
---------Protocol: LACP
Group: 2
---------Protocol: PAgP
Related Commands
Command
Description
channel-group
Assigns an Ethernet port to an EtherChannel group.
channel-protocol
Restricts the protocol used on a port to manage channeling.
interface port-channel
Accesses or creates the port channel.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-455
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ethernet loopback
show ethernet loopback
Use the show ethernet loopback privileged EXEC command to display information about per port
Ethernet loopbacks configured on the switch or on an interface.
show ethernet loopback [interface-id]
Syntax Description
interface-id
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
(Optional) Show loopback information for the specified interface. Only
physical interfaces support Ethernet loopback.
Usage Guidelines
If you do not specify an interface-id, all configured loopbacks appear. The switch supports a maximum
of two Ethernet loopback configurations.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ethernet loopback command:
Switch# show ethernet loopback
=====================================
Loopback Session 0 : Interface Gi0/3
Status
: configured
MAC Mode
: swap
Time out
: 60
This is an example of output with both a port and a VLAN loopback session configured and started.
Switch# show ethernet loopback
=====================================
Loopback Session 0 : Interface Fa0/1
Direction
: facility
Type
: port
Status
: active
MAC Mode
: swap
Time out
: none
=====================================
Loopback Session 1 : Interface Fa0/2
Direction
: facility
Type
: vlan
Status
: active
MAC Mode
: copy
Vlan
: 3
Time out
: 100
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-456
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ethernet loopback
Related Commands
Command
Description
ethernet loopback
(interface configuration)
Configures an Ethernet loopback operation on an interface.
ethernet loopback
(privileged EXEC)
Starts or stops the loopback operation.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-457
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ethernet service evc
show ethernet service evc
Use the show ethernet service evc privileged EXEC command to display information about Ethernet
virtual connection (EVC) customer-service instances.
show ethernet service evc [id evc-id | interface interface-id] [detail]
Syntax Description
id evc-id
(Optional) Display EVC information for the specified service. The EVC
identifier can be a string of from 1 to 100 characters.
interface interface-id
(Optional) Display EVC information for the specified interface.
detail
(Optional) Display detailed information about EVC service or the specified
EVC ID or interface.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ethernet service evc command:
Switch# show ethernet service evc
Identifier
Type Act-UNI-cnt Status
BLUE
P-P
2
Active
PINK
MP-MP
2
PartiallyActive
PURPLE
P-P
2
Active
BROWN
MP-MP
2
Active
GREEN
P-P
3
Active
YELLOW
MP-MP
2
PartiallyActive
BANANAS
P-P
0
InActive
TEST2
P-P
0
NotDefined
ORANGE
P-P
2
Active
TEAL
P-P
0
InActive
Related Commands
Command
Description
ethernet evc evc-id
Defines an EVC and enters EVC configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-458
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ethernet service instance
show ethernet service instance
Use the show ethernet service instance privileged EXEC command to display information about
Ethernet customer-service instances.
show ethernet service instance [id id] [interface interface-id] [detail]
Syntax Description
id id
(Optional) Display information for the specified service-instance identifier, a
per-interface service identifier that does not map to a VLAN. The range is 1
to 4294967295.
interface interface-id
(Optional) Display service-instance information for the specified interface.
detail
(Optional) Display detailed information about service instances or the
specified service-instance ID or interface.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ethernet service instance command:
Switch# show ethernet service instance
Identifier Interface
CE-Vlans
222
FastEthernet0/1
untagged,1-4094
10
FastEthernet0/2
222
FastEthernet0/2
200
333
FastEthernet0/2
default
10
FastEthernet0/3
300
11
FastEthernet0/3
10
FastEthernet0/4
300
10
FastEthernet0/6
untagged,1-4094
10
FastEthernet0/7
untagged,1-4094
10
FastEthernet0/8
untagged,1-4094
10
FastEthernet0/9
untagged
20
FastEthernet0/9
222
FastEthernet0/11
300-350,900-999
333
FastEthernet0/11
100-200,1000,1999-4094
222
FastEthernet0/12
20
333
FastEthernet0/12
10
10
FastEthernet0/13
10
20
FastEthernet0/13
20
30
FastEthernet0/13
30
200
FastEthernet0/13
222
200
FastEthernet0/14
200,222
300
FastEthernet0/14
333
555
FastEthernet0/14
555
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-459
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ethernet service instance
Related Commands
Command
Description
service instance id ethernet
Defines an Ethernet service instance and enters Ethernet service
configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-460
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ethernet service interface
show ethernet service interface
Use the show ethernet service interface privileged EXEC command to display interface-based
information about Ethernet customer-service instances for all interfaces or a specified interface.
show ethernet service interface [interface-id] [detail]
Syntax Description
interface-id
(Optional) Display service-instance information for the specified interface.
detail
(Optional) Display detailed information about service instances on all
interfaces or the specified interface.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
These are examples of outputs from the show ethernet service interface commands:
Switch# show ethernet service interface gigabitethernet0/1
Interface
Identifier
GigabitEthernet0/1 PE2-G101
Switch# show ethernet service interface detail
Interface: FastEthernet0/1
ID:
CE-VLANS:
EVC Map Type: Bundling-Multiplexing
Interface: FastEthernet0/2
ID:
CE-VLANS:
EVC Map Type: Bundling-Multiplexing
Interface: FastEthernet0/3
ID:
CE-VLANS:
EVC Map Type: Bundling-Multiplexing
<output truncated>
Interface: GigabitEthernet0/1
ID: PE2-G101
CE-VLANS: 10,20,30
EVC Map Type: Bundling-Multiplexing
Associated EVCs:
EVC-ID CE-VLAN
WHITE 30
RED 20
BLUE 10
Associated Service Instances:
Service-Instance-ID CE-VLAN
10 10
20 20
30 30
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-461
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ethernet service interface
Related Commands
Command
Description
service instance id ethernet
Defines an Ethernet service instance and enters Ethernet service
configuration mode from interface configuration mode.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-462
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show flowcontrol
show flowcontrol
Use the show flowcontrol user EXEC command to display the flow control status and statistics.
show flowcontrol [interface interface-id | module number]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
(Optional) Display the flow control status and statistics for a specific
interface.
module number
(Optional) Display the flow control status and statistics for all interfaces on the
switch. The only valid module number is 1. This option is not available if you
have entered a specific interface ID.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to display the flow control status and statistics on the switch or for a specific interface.
Use the show flowcontrol command to display information about all the switch interfaces. The output
from the show flowcontrol command is the same as the output from the show flowcontrol module
number command.
Use the show flowcontrol interface interface-id command to display information about a specific
interface.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show flowcontrol command.
Switch> show flowcontrol
Port
Send FlowControl
admin
oper
--------- -------- -------Gi0/1
Unsupp. Unsupp.
Gi0/2
desired off
Gi0/3
desired off
<output truncated>
Receive FlowControl
admin
oper
-------- -------off
off
off
off
off
off
RxPause TxPause
------0
0
0
------0
0
0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-463
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show flowcontrol
This is an example of output from the show flowcontrol interface interface-id command:
Switch> show flowcontrol interface gigabitethernet0/2
Port
Send FlowControl Receive FlowControl RxPause TxPause
admin
oper
admin
oper
--------- -------- -------- -------- -------------- ------Gi0/2
desired off
off
off
0
0
Related Commands
Command
Description
flowcontrol
Sets the receive flow-control state for an interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-464
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show idprom
show idprom
Use the show idprom user EXEC command to display the IDPROM information for a Gigabit Ethernet
interface.
show idprom {interface interface-id} [detail]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
Display the IDPROM information for the specified Gigabit Ethernet
interface.
detail
(Optional) Display detailed IDPROM information.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
This command applies only to Gigabit Ethernet interfaces and displays information about SFPs inserted
in the SFP module slot.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show idprom interface command for a Gigabit Ethernet interface:
Switch# show idprom interface gigabitethernet0/1
General SFP Information
----------------------------------------------Identifier
:
0x03
Connector
:
0x07
Transceiver
:
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Encoding
:
0x02
BR_Nominal
:
0x01
Vendor Name
:
CISCO-NEC
Vendor Part Number
:
OD-BP1511-23SL2
Vendor Revision
:
0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31
Vendor Serial Number :
NEC08440067
-----------------------------------------------
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-465
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show idprom
Other Information
------------------------------------------------------Port asic num
: 0
Port asic port num
: 0
XCVR init completed
: 1
Embedded PHY
: not present
SFP presence index
: 0
SFP iter cnt
: 697918
SFP failed oper flag
IIC error cnt
IIC error dsb cnt
IIC max sts cnt
Chk for link status
Link Status
Link Status Media
Preferred media
Resolved Media
Config Media
Access Count
Access Count Max
Port Rx Loss
Port Tx Fault
Port Tx Disable
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0x0
0
0
4
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
2
no
no
no
Sfp selection asic reg map
-------------------------------stbi
: 0x00
sfpControl
: 0x4C
Regs Loc
: 0xF0000000
------------------------------------------------------Page 0 Registers
-----------------------------------------------------------------------0000: 1140 Control Register
: 0001 0001 0100 0000
0001: 6149 Control STATUS
: 0110 0001 0100 1001
0002: 0141 Phy ID 1
: 0000 0001 0100 0001
0003: 0C92 Phy ID 2
: 0000 1100 1001 0010
0004: 01E1 Auto-Negotiation Advertisement
: 0000 0001 1110 0001
0005: 0000 Auto-Negotiation Link Partner
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
0006: 0004 Auto-Negotiation Expansion Reg
: 0000 0000 0000 0100
0007: 2001 Next Page Transmit Register
: 0010 0000 0000 0001
0008: 0000 Link Partner Next page Registe
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
0009: 0F00 1000BASE-T Control Register
: 0000 1111 0000 0000
000A: 0000 1000BASE-T Status Register
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
000F: 0000 Extended Status Register
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
0010: 6028 PHY Specific Control Register
: 0110 0000 0010 1000
0011: 6CC8 PHY Specific Status Register
: 0110 1100 1100 1000
0012: 0000 Interrupt Enable Register
: 0000 0000 0000 0000
0013: 0700 PHY Specific Status Register2
: 0000 0111 0000 0000
0015: 01C0 Receive Error Counter
: 0000 0001 1100 0000
0016: 0000 Page Address Register
001A: 8040 PHY Specific Control Register2
Related Commands<
:
:
0000 0000 0000 0000
1000 0000 0100 0000
Command
Description
show controllers
ethernet-controller
Displays per-interface send and receive statistics read from the
hardware, interface internal registers, or port ASIC information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-466
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces
show interfaces
Use the show interfaces privileged EXEC command to display the administrative and operational status
of all interfaces or a specified interface.
show interfaces [interface-id [mtu] | vlan vlan-id] [accounting | capabilities [module number] |
counters | description | etherchannel | flowcontrol | private-vlan mapping | rep | stats |
status [err-disabled] | switchport [backup | module number] | transceivers | trunk]
Syntax Description
interface-id
(Optional) Valid interfaces include physical ports (including type, module, and
port number) and port channels. The port-channel range is 1 to 48.
mtu
(Optional) Display the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size set on the
interface.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) VLAN identification. The range is 1 to 4094.
accounting
(Optional) Display accounting information on the interface, including active
protocols and input and output packets and octets.
capabilities
(Optional) Display the capabilities of all interfaces or the specified interface,
including the features and options that you can configure on the interface. Though
visible in the command line help, this option is not available for VLAN IDs.
module number
(Optional) Display capabilities, switchport configuration, or transceiver
characteristics (depending on preceding keyword) of all interfaces on the switch.
The only valid module number is 1. This option is not available if you have entered
a specific interface ID.
counters
(Optional) See the show interfaces counters command.
description
(Optional) Display the administrative status and description set for an interface.
etherchannel
(Optional) Display interface EtherChannel information.
flowcontrol
(Optional) Display interface flowcontrol information
private-vlan
mapping
(Optional) Display private-VLAN mapping information for the VLAN switch
virtual interfaces (SVIs) and private VLAN promiscuous ports. A promiscuous
port must be a network node interface (NNI). This keyword is visible only when
the switch is running the metro access or metro IP access image.
rep
(Optional) See the show interfaces rep command.
stats
(Optional) Display the input and output packets by switching path for the
interface.
status
(Optional) Display the status of the interface. A status of unsupported in the Type
field means that a non-Cisco small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module is inserted
in the module slot.
err-disabled
(Optional) Display interfaces in error-disabled state.
switchport
(Optional) Display the administrative and operational status of a switching
(nonrouting) port, including port blocking and port protection settings.
backup
(Optional) Display Flex Link backup interface configuration and status for the
specified interface or all interfaces on the switch. This keyword is visible only
when the switch is running the metro access or metro IP access image.
transceivers
(Optional) See the show interfaces transceivers command.
trunk
Display interface trunk information. If you do not specify an interface, only
information for active trunking ports appears.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-467
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces
Note
Though visible in the command-line help strings, the rb, fair-queue, irb, mac-accounting, precedence,
pruning random-detect, rate-limit, and shape keywords are not supported.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
The show interfaces capabilities command with different keywords has these results:
•
Use the show interface capabilities module 1 to display the capabilities of all interfaces on the
switch. Entering any other number is invalid.
•
Use the show interfaces interface-id capabilities to display the capabilities of the specified
interface.
•
Use the show interfaces capabilities (with no module number or interface ID) to display the
capabilities of all interfaces on the switch.
•
Use the show interface switchport module 1 to display the switch port characteristics of all
interfaces on the switch. Entering any other number is invalid.
This is an example of output from the show interfaces command for an interface:
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/2
GigabitEthernet0/2 is down, line protocol is down
Hardware is Gigabit Ethernet, address is 0009.43a7.d085 (bia 0009.43a7.d085)
MTU 1500 bytes, BW 10000 Kbit, DLY 1000 usec,
reliability 255/255, txload 1/255, rxload 1/255
Encapsulation ARPA, loopback not set
Keepalive set (10 sec)
Auto-duplex, Auto-speed
input flow-control is off, output flow-control is off
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last input never, output never, output hang never
Last clearing of "show interface" counters never
Input queue: 0/75/0/0 (size/max/drops/flushes); Total output drops: 0
Queueing strategy: fifo
Output queue :0/40 (size/max)
5 minute input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
2 packets input, 1040 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored
0 watchdog, 0 multicast, 0 pause input
0 input packets with dribble condition detected
4 packets output, 1040 bytes, 0 underruns
0 output errors, 0 collisions, 3 interface resets
0 babbles, 0 late collision, 0 deferred
0 lost carrier, 0 no carrier, 0 PAUSE output
0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out
This is an example of output from the show interfaces accounting command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-468
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces
Switch# show interfaces accounting
Vlan1
Protocol
Pkts In
Chars In
IP
1094395 131900022
Spanning Tree
283896
17033760
ARP
63738
3825680
Interface Vlan2 is disabled
Vlan7
Protocol
Pkts In
Chars In
No traffic sent or received on this interface.
Vlan31
Protocol
Pkts In
Chars In
No traffic sent or received on this interface.
GigabitEthernet0/1
Protocol
No traffic sent or received
GigabitEthernet0/2
Protocol
No traffic sent or received
Pkts Out
559555
42
231
Chars Out
84077157
2520
13860
Pkts Out
Chars Out
Pkts Out
Chars Out
Pkts In
Chars In
on this interface.
Pkts Out
Chars Out
Pkts In
Chars In
on this interface.
Pkts Out
Chars Out
<output truncated>
This is an example of output from the show interfaces capabilities command for an interface.
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/2 capabilities
GigabitEthernet0/2
Model:
modell-ic
Type:
10/100/1000BaseTX SFP
Speed:
10,100,1000,auto
Duplex:
half,full,auto
Trunk encap. type:
802.1Q
Trunk mode:
on,off,desirable,nonegotiate
Channel:
yes
Broadcast suppression: percentage(0-100)
Flowcontrol:
rx-(off,on,desired),tx-(none)
Fast Start:
yes
QoS scheduling:
rx-(not configurable on per port basis),tx-(4q2t)
CoS rewrite:
yes
ToS rewrite:
yes
UDLD:
yes
SPAN:
source/destination
PortSecure:
yes
Dot1x:
yes
This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface description command when the
interface has been described as Connects to Marketing by using the description interface configuration
command.
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/2 description
Interface Status
Protocol Description
Gi0/2
up
down
Connects to Marketing
This is an example of output from the show interfaces etherchannel command when port channels are
configured on the switch:
Switch# show interfaces etherchannel
---Port-channel1:
Age of the Port-channel
= 03d:20h:17m:29s
Logical slot/port
= 10/1
Number of ports = 0
GC
= 0x00000000
HotStandBy port = null
Port state
= Port-channel Ag-Not-Inuse
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-469
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces
Port-channel2:
Age of the Port-channel
= 03d:20h:17m:29s
Logical slot/port
= 10/2
Number of ports = 0
GC
= 0x00000000
HotStandBy port = null
Port state
= Port-channel Ag-Not-Inuse
Port-channel3:
Age of the Port-channel
= 03d:20h:17m:29s
Logical slot/port
= 10/3
Number of ports = 0
GC
= 0x00000000
HotStandBy port = null
Port state
= Port-channel Ag-Not-Inuse
This is an example of output from the show interfaces private-vlan mapping command when the
private-VLAN primary VLAN is VLAN 10 and the secondary VLANs are VLANs 501 and 502:
Switch# show interfaces private-vlan mapping
Interface Secondary VLAN Type
--------- -------------- ----------------vlan10
501
isolated
vlan10
502
community
This is an example of output from the show interfaces stats command for a specified VLAN interface.
Switch# show interfaces vlan 1 stats
Switching path
Pkts In
Chars In
Pkts Out Chars Out
Processor
1165354 136205310
570800
91731594
Route cache
0
0
0
0
Total
1165354 136205310
570800
91731594
This is an example of partial output from the show interfaces status command. It displays the status of
all interfaces.
Switch# show interfaces status
Port
Name
Status
Fa0/1
connected
Fa0/2
connected
Fa0/3
notconnect
Fa0/4
disabled
Fa0/5
disabled
Fa0/6
disabled
Fa0/7
disabled
Fa0/8
disabled
Fa0/9
disabled
Fa0/10
disabled
Fa0/11
disabled
Fa0/12
disabled
Fa0/13
disabled
Fa0/14
disabled
Fa0/15
disabled
Fa0/16
disabled
Fa0/17
disabled
Fa0/18
disabled
Fa0/19
disabled
Fa0/20
disabled
Fa0/21
disabled
Fa0/22
disabled
Fa0/23
disabled
Fa0/24
disabled
Gi0/1
notconnect
seTX SFP
Gi0/2
connected
Vlan
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Duplex
a-full
a-full
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
Speed
a-100
a-100
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
auto
Type
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100BaseTX
10/100/1000Ba
vl-err-dis a-full a-1000 10/100/1000BaseTX
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-470
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces
These are examples of output from the show interfaces status command for a specific interface when
private VLANs are configured. Port 22 is configured as a private-VLAN host port. It is associated with
primary VLAN 20 and secondary VLAN 25.
Switch# show interfaces fastethernet0/22 status
Port
Name
Status
Vlan
Fa0/22
connected
20,25
Duplex
a-full
Speed Type
a-100 10/100BaseTX
In this example, port 2 is configured as a private-VLAN promiscuous port. The display shows only the
primary VLAN 20.
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/2 status
Port
Name
Status
Vlan
Gi0/2
connected
20
Duplex
a-full
Speed Type
a-100 10/100/1000BaseTX
This is an example of output from the show interfaces status err-disabled command for an interface:
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/2 status err-disabled
Port
Gi0/2
Name
Status
connected
Reason
elmi evc down
Err-disabled Vlans
1,200
This is an example of output from the show interfaces switchport command for a single port.
Table 2-12 describes the fields in the display.
Note
Private VLAN trunks are not supported in this release, so those fields are not applicable.
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/1 switchport
Name: Gi0/1
Switchport: Enabled
Administrative Mode: static access
Operational Mode: static access
Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q
Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native
Negotiation of Trunking: Off
Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)
Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)
Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled
Administrative private-vlan host-association: none
Administrative private-vlan mapping: none
Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: none
Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled
Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q
Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none
Administrative private-vlan trunk private VLANs: none
Operational private-vlan: none
Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL
Capture Mode Disabled
Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL
Unknown unicast blocked: disabled
Unknown multicast blocked: disabled
Appliance trust: none
Administrative
Administrative
Administrative
Administrative
Administrative
Administrative
Administrative
Administrative
Native VLAN tagging: enabled
private-vlan host-association: none
private-vlan mapping: none
private-vlan trunk native VLAN: none
private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled
private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q
private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none
private-vlan trunk private VLANs: none
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-471
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces
Operational private-vlan: none
Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL
Capture Mode Disabled
Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL
Unknown unicast blocked: disabled
Unknown multicast blocked: disabled
Appliance trust: none
Table 2-12
show interfaces switchport Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Name
Displays the port name.
Switchport
Displays the administrative and operational status of the port.
In this display, the port is in switchport mode.
Administrative Mode
Displays the administrative and operational modes.
Operational Mode
Administrative Trunking
Encapsulation
Displays the administrative and operational encapsulation
method and whether trunking negotiation is enabled.
Negotiation of Trunking
Access Mode VLAN
Displays the VLAN ID to which the port is configured.
Trunking Native Mode VLAN
Lists the VLAN ID of the trunk that is in native mode.
Administrative Native VLAN tagging Displays whether or not VLAN tagging is enabled.
Administrative private-vlan
host-association
Displays the administrative VLAN association for
private-VLAN host ports.
Administrative private-vlan mapping
Displays the administrative VLAN mapping for private-VLAN
promiscuous ports.
Operational private-vlan
Displays the operational private-VLAN status.
Trunking VLANs enabled
Lists the active VLANs on the trunk.
Capture VLANs allowed
Lists the allowed VLANs on the trunk.
Unknown unicast blocked
Displays whether or not unknown multicast and unknown
unicast traffic is blocked on the interface.
Unknown multicast blocked
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-472
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces
This is an example of output from the show interfaces switchport command for a port configured as a
private VLAN promiscuous port. The primary VLAN 20 is mapped to secondary VLANs 25, 30 and 35:
Switch# show interface gigabitethernet0/2 switchport
Name: Gi0/2
Switchport: Enabled
Administrative Mode: private-vlan promiscuous
Operational Mode: private-vlan promiscuous
Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate
Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native
Negotiation of Trunking: Off
Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)
Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)
Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled
Administrative private-vlan host-association: none
Administrative private-vlan mapping: 20 (VLAN0020) 25 (VLAN0025) 30 (VLAN0030) 35
(VLAN0035)
Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: none
Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled
Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q
Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none
Administrative private-vlan trunk private VLANs: none
Operational private-vlan:
20 (VLAN0020) 25 (VLAN0025)
30 (VLAN0030)
35 (VLAN0035)
<output truncated>
This is an example of out put from the show interfaces switchport backup command when a Flex Link
interface goes down (LINK_DOWN), and VLANs preferred on this interface are moved to the peer
interface of the Flex Link pair. In this example, if interface Gi0/6 goes down, Gi0/8 carries all VLANs
of the Flex Link pair.
Switch#show interfaces switchport backup
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
Active Interface
Backup Interface
State
-----------------------------------------------------------------------GigabitEthernet2/0/6
GigabitEthernet0/8
Active Down/Backup Up
Vlans Preferred on Active Interface: 1-50
Vlans Preferred on Backup Interface: 60, 100-120
This is an example of output from the show interfaces switchport backup command. In this example,
VLANs 1 to 50, 60, and 100 to 120 are configured on the switch:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/6
Switch(config-if)# switchport backup interface gigabitEthernet 0/8 prefer vlan 60,100-120
When both interfaces are up, G/0/8 forwards traffic for VLANs 60, 100 to 120, and Gi0/6 will forward
traffic for VLANs 1 to 50.
Switch#show interfaces switchport backup
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
Active Interface
Backup Interface
State
-----------------------------------------------------------------------GigabitEthernet0/6
GigabitEthernet2/0/8
Active Up/Backup Up
Vlans on Interface Gi 0/6: 1-50
Vlans on Interface Gi 0/8: 60, 100-120
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-473
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces
When a Flex Link interface goes down (LINK_DOWN), VLANs preferred on this interface are moved
to the peer interface of the Flex Link pair. In this example, if interface Gi0/6 goes down, Gi0/8 carries
all VLANs of the Flex Link pair.
Switch#show interfaces switchport backup
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
Active Interface
Backup Interface
State
-----------------------------------------------------------------------GigabitEthernet0/6
GigabitEthernet0/8
Active Down/Backup Up
Vlans on Interface Gi 0/6:
Vlans on Interface Gi 0/8: 1-50, 60, 100-120
When a Flex Link interface comes up, VLANs preferred on this interface are blocked on the peer
interface and moved to the forwarding state on the interface that has just come up. In this example, if
interface Gi0/6 comes up, then VLANs preferred on this interface are blocked on the peer interface Gi0/8
and forwarded on Gi0/6.
Switch#show interfaces switchport backup
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
Active Interface
Backup Interface
State
-----------------------------------------------------------------------GigabitEthernet20/6
GigabitEthernet0/8
Active Up/Backup Up
Vlans on Interface Gi 0/6: 1-50
Vlans on Interface Gi 0/8: 60, 100-120
This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id trunk command. It displays trunking
information for the port.
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/1 trunk
Port
Mode
Encapsulation Status
Gi0/1
auto
negotiate
trunking
Related Commands
Native vlan
1
Port
Gi0/1
Vlans allowed on trunk
1-4094
Port
Gi0/1
Vlans allowed and active in management domain
1-4
Port
Gi0/1
Vlans in spanning tree forwarding state and not pruned
1-4
Command
Description
switchport access vlan
Configures a port as a static-access or a dynamic-access port.
switchport block
Blocks unknown unicast or multicast traffic on an interface.
switchport backup interface Configures Flex Links, a pair of Layer 2 interfaces that provide mutual
backup.
switchport mode
Configures the VLAN membership mode of a port.
switchport mode
private-vlan
Configures a port as a private-VLAN host or a promiscuous port.
switchport private-vlan
Defines private-VLAN association for a host port or private-VLAN
mapping for a promiscuous port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-474
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces counters
show interfaces counters
Use the show interfaces counters privileged EXEC command to display various counters for the switch
or for a specific interface.
show interfaces [interface-id | vlan vlan-id] counters [errors | trunk] [module switch- number] |
etherchannel | protocol status]
Syntax Description
interface-id
(Optional) ID of the physical interface, including type, module, and port
number.
errors
(Optional) Display error counters.
trunk
(Optional) Display trunk counters.
module switch- number (Optional) Display counters for the specified switch number. The only
available value is 1.
Note
etherchannel
(Optional) Display EtherChannel counters, including octets, broadcast
packets, multicast packets, and unicast packets received and sent.
protocol status
(Optional) Display status of protocols enabled on interfaces.
Though visible in the command-line help string, the vlan vlan-id keyword is not supported.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If you do not enter any keywords, all counters for all interfaces are included.
Examples
This is an example of partial output from the show interfaces counters command. It displays all
counters for the switch.
Switch# show interfaces counters
Port
InOctets
InUcastPkts
Fa0/1
0
0
Fa0/2
0
0
<output truncated>
InMcastPkts
0
0
InBcastPkts
0
0
This is an example of partial output from the show interfaces counters protocol status command for
all interfaces.
Switch# show interfaces counters protocol status
Protocols allocated:
Vlan1: Other, IP
Vlan20: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan30: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan40: Other, IP, ARP
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-475
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces counters
Vlan50: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan60: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan70: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan80: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan90: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan900: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan3000: Other, IP
Vlan3500: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/1: Other, IP, ARP, CDP
FastEthernet0/2: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/3: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/4: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/5: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/6: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/7: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/8: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/9: Other, IP
FastEthernet0/10: Other, IP, CDP
<output truncated>
This is an example of output from the show interfaces counters trunk command. It displays trunk
counters for all interfaces.
Switch# show interfaces counters trunk
Port
TrunkFramesTx TrunkFramesRx
Gi0/1
0
0
Gi0/2
0
0
Gi0/3
80678
4155
Gi0/4
82320
126
Gi0/5
0
0
WrongEncap
0
0
0
0
0
<output truncated>
Related Commands
Command
Description
show interfaces
Displays additional interface characteristics.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-476
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces rep
show interfaces rep
Use the show interfaces rep User EXEC command to display Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP)
configuration and status for a specified interface or for all interfaces.
show interfaces [interface-id] rep [detail]
Syntax Description
interface-id
(Optional) Display REP configuration and status for a specified physical interface or
port channel ID.
detail
(Optional) Display detailed REP configuration and status information.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
In the output for the show interface rep [detail] command, in addition to an Open, Fail, or AP (alternate
port) state, the Port Role might show as Fail Logical Open (FailLogOpen) or Fail No Ext Neighbor
(FailNoNbr). These states indicate that the port is physically up, but REP is not configured on the
neighboring port. In this case, one port goes into a forwarding state for the data path to help maintain
connectivity during configuration. The Port Role for this port shows as Fail Logical Open; the port
forwards all data traffic on all VLANs. The other failed Port Role shows as Fail No Ext Neighbor; this
port blocks traffic for all VLANs.
When the external neighbors for the failed ports are configured, the failed ports go through the alternate
port state transitions and eventually go to an Open state or remain as the alternate port, based on the
alternate port election mechanism.
In the show interfaces rep command output, ports configured as edge no-neighbors are designated with
an asterisk (*) in front of Primary Edge or Secondary Edge. In the output of the show interfaces rep
detail command, No-Neighbor is spelled out.
The output of this command is also included in the show tech-support privileged EXEC command
output.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-477
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces rep
Examples
This is sample output from the show interface rep command:
Switch # show interface rep
Interface
Seg-id
Type
LinkOp
Role
---------------------- ------ ------------ ----------- ---GigabitEthernet 0/1
1
Primary Edge TWO_WAY
Open
GigabitEthernet 0/2
1
Edge
TWO_WAY
Open
FastEthernet 0/4
2
INIT_DOWN Fail
This is sample output from the show interface rep command when the edge port is configured to have
no REP neighbor. Note the asterisk (*) next to Primary Edge.
Switch# show interface
Interface
---------------------GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/2
rep
Seg-id Type
------ -------------2
2
Primary Edge*
LinkOp
----------TWO_WAY
TWO_WAY
Role
---Open
Open
This is sample output from the show interface rep command when external neighbors are not
configured:
Switch # show interface rep
Interface
Seg-id
Type
LinkOp
Role
---------------------- ------ ------------ ----------- ---GigabitEthernet0/1
1
NO_NEIGHBOR FailNoNbr
GigabitEthernet0/2
2
NO_NEIGHBOR FailLogOpen
This is sample output from the show interface rep detail command for a specified interface:
Switch # show interface gigabitethernet0/2 rep detail
GigabitEthernet0/2
REP enabled
Segment-id: 1 (Segment)
PortID: 00030019E85BDD00
Preferred flag: No
Operational Link Status: INIT_DOWN
Current Key: 00000000000000000000
Port Role: Fail
Blocked VLAN: 1-4094
Admin-vlan: 1
Preempt Delay Timer: disabled
LSL Ageout Timer: 5000 ms
Configured Load-balancing Block Port: 1234567890123456
Configured Load-balancing Block VLAN: 1-4094
STCN Propagate to: none
LSL PDU rx: 0, tx: 0
HFL PDU rx: 0, tx: 0
BPA TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
BPA (STCN, LSL) TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
BPA (STCN, HFL) TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
EPA-ELECTION TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
EPA-COMMAND TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
EPA-INFO TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
Related Commands
Command
Description
rep segment
Enables REP on an interface and assigns a segment ID. This command is also
used to configure a port as an edge port, a primary edge port, or a preferred
port.
show rep topology
[detail]
Displays information about all ports in the segment, including which one was
configured and selected as the primary edge port.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-478
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces transceivers
show interfaces transceivers
Use the show interfaces transceivers privileged EXEC command to display the physical properties of
a small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module interface.
show interfaces [interface-id] transceiver [detail | module number | properties | supported-list |
threshold-table]
Syntax Description
interface-id
(Optional) Display configuration and status for a specified physical
interface.
detail
(Optional) Display calibration properties, including high and low numbers
and any alarm information for any Digital Optical Monitoring
(DoM)-capable transceiver if one is installed in the switch.
supported-list
(Optional) List all supported DoM transceivers.
threshold-table
(Optional) Display alarm and warning threshold table.
Note
This keyword displays the thresholds that are programmed into SFP
hardware and are not those used to determine when to send alarms or
traps. To view those thresholds, enter the show interfaces
transceiver detail command.
module number
(Optional) Limit display to interfaces on module on the switch. The range
is 1 to 9. This option is not available if you entered a specific interface ID.
properties
(Optional) Display speed, duplex, and inline power settings on an interface.
threshold-table
(Optional) Display alarm and warning threshold table
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The threshold values shown in the outputs from the show interfaces transceiver threshold-table and
the show interfaces transceiver detail are not the same. The thresholds shown in the output from the
show interfaces transceiver threshold-table command are hard-coded in Cisco IOS, but are not
supported.
The thresholds shown in the output from the show interfaces transceiver detail command are read from
the SFP EEPROM and are supported. You should always use the show interfaces transceiver detail
command to view transceiver thresholds.
The DOM threshold provides a mechanism to send traps when parameters from the EEPROM exceed the
thresholds. The firmware reads real-time values, including temperature, voltage, transmitted power and
received power, from the SFP EEPROM and compares them against product alarm and warning
thresholds. When transceiver traps are enabled, a trap is sent every 10 minutes when thresholds are
exceeded.
The reading of entSensorThresholdTable and SNMP notification upon threshold violations in
CISCO-ENTITY-SENSOR-MIB is supported only in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(52)SE and later.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-479
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces transceivers
Examples
This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id transceiver properties command:
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/1 transceiver properties
Name : Gi0/1
Administrative Speed: auto
Operational Speed: auto
Administrative Duplex: auto
Administrative Power Inline: enable
Operational Duplex: auto
Administrative Auto-MDIX: off
Operational Auto-MDIX: off
This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id transceiver detail command:
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/3 transceiver detail
ITU Channel not available (Wavelength not available),
Transceiver is externally calibrated.
mA:milliamperes, dBm:decibels (milliwatts), N/A:not applicable.
++:high alarm, +:high warning, -:low warning, -- :low alarm.
A2D readouts (if they differ), are reported in parentheses.
The threshold values are uncalibrated.
Temperature
Port
(Celsius)
------- -----------------Gi0/3
41.5
Port
------Gi0/3
Voltage
(Volts)
--------------3.20
Current
Port
(milliamperes)
------- ----------------Gi0/3
31.0
<output truncated>
High Alarm
Threshold
(Celsius)
---------110.0
High Warn
Threshold
(Celsius)
--------103.0
Low Warn
Threshold
(Celsius)
---------8.0
Low Alarm
Threshold
(Celsius)
---------12.0
High Alarm
Threshold
(Volts)
---------4.00
High Warn
Threshold
(Volts)
--------3.70
Low Warn
Threshold
(Volts)
--------3.00
Low Alarm
Threshold
(Volts)
--------2.95
High Alarm
Threshold
(mA)
---------84.0
High Warn
Threshold
(mA)
--------70.0
Low Warn
Threshold
(mA)
--------4.0
Low Alarm
Threshold
(mA)
--------2.0
This is an example of output from the show interfaces transceiver dom-supported-list command:
Switch# show interfaces transceiver dom-supported-list
Transceiver Type
Cisco p/n min version
supporting DOM
-----------------------------------------DWDM GBIC
ALL
DWDM SFP
ALL
RX only WDM GBIC
ALL
DWDM XENPAK
ALL
DWDM X2
ALL
DWDM XFP
ALL
CWDM GBIC
NONE
CWDM X2
ALL
CWDM XFP
ALL
XENPAK ZR
ALL
X2 ZR
ALL
XFP ZR
ALL
Rx_only_WDM_XENPAK
ALL
XENPAK_ER
10-1888-03
X2_ER
ALL
XFP_ER
ALL
XENPAK_LR
10-1838-04
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-480
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show interfaces transceivers
X2_LR
<output truncated>
ALL
This is an example of output from the show interfaces transceiver threshold-table command. Note that
these are thresholds programmed into IOS software, and are NOT used to determine alarms.
Optical Tx
Optical Rx
-------------
DWDM GBIC
Min1
-0.50
Min2
-0.30
Max2
3.29
Max1
3.50
DWDM SFP
Min1
-0.50
Min2
-0.30
Max2
4.30
Max1
4.50
RX only WDM GBIC
Min1
N/A
Min2
N/A
Max2
N/A
Max1
N/A
DWDM XENPAK
Min1
-1.50
Min2
-1.29
Max2
3.29
Max1
3.50
DWDM X2
Min1
-1.50
Min2
-1.29
Max2
3.29
Max1
3.50
DWDM XFP
Min1
-1.50
Min2
-1.29
Max2
3.29
Max1
3.50
CWDM X2
Min1
N/A
Min2
N/A
Max2
N/A
Max1
N/A
Related Commands
Temp
Laser Bias
-------------
------
Voltage
current
------------
---------
-28.50
-28.29
-6.69
6.00
0
5
60
70
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4.50
4.75
5.25
5.50
-28.50
-28.29
-9.50
9.30
0
5
60
70
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3.00
3.09
3.59
3.70
-28.50
-28.29
-6.69
6.00
0
5
60
70
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4.50
4.75
5.25
5.50
-24.50
-24.29
-6.69
4.00
0
5
60
70
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
-24.50
-24.29
-6.69
4.00
0
5
60
70
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
-24.50
-24.29
-6.69
4.00
0
5
60
70
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0
0
0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Command
Description
show interfaces
Displays additional interface characteristics.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-481
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show inventory
show inventory
Use the show inventory user EXEC command to display product identification (PID) information for
the hardware.
show inventory [entity-name | raw]
Syntax Description
entity-name
(Optional) Display the specified entity. For example, enter the interface
(such as gigabitethernet 0/x) into which a small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
module is installed to display its identity.
raw
(Optional) Display every entity in the device.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The command is case sensitive. With no arguments, the show inventory command produces a compact
display of all identifiable entities that have a product identifier. The display shows the entity location
(slot identity), entity description, and the unique device identifier (UDI), including PID, version
identifier (VID), and serial number (SN) of that entity.
Many legacy SFPs are not programmed with PIDs and VID.s
Note
If there is no PID, no output appears when you enter the show inventory command.
For the product identifier (PID) and version identifier (VID) of SFP modules, the output of the show
inventory user EXEC command displays either the correct information or displays Unspecified for the
PID and nothing for the VID if the SFP module does not have PID and VID information.
Examples
This is example output from the show inventory command:
Switch> show inventory
NAME: "1", DESCR: "model-id"
PID: model-id , VID:Vo1 , SN: FSJC0407839
NAME: "GigabitEthernet0/1", DESCR:
PID:
, VID:
NAME: "GigabitEthernet0/2", DESCR:
PID:
, VID:
"100BaseBX-10U SFP"
, SN: NEC08440067
"10/100/1000BaseTX SFP"
, SN: 00000MTC0839048G
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-482
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip arp inspection
show ip arp inspection
Use the show ip arp inspection privileged EXEC command to display the configuration and the
operating state of dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection or the status of this feature
for all VLANs or for the specified interface or VLAN.
show ip arp inspection [interfaces [interface-id] | log | statistics [vlan vlan-range] | vlan
vlan-range]
Syntax Description
interfaces [interface-id]
(Optional) Display the trust state and the rate limit of ARP packets for
the specified interface or all interfaces. Valid interfaces include
physical ports and port channels.
log
(Optional) Display the configuration and contents of the dynamic
ARP inspection log buffer.
statistics [vlan vlan-range]
(Optional) Display statistics for forwarded, dropped, MAC validation
failure, IP validation failure, access control list (ACL) permitted and
denied, and DHCP permitted and denied packets for the specified
VLAN. If no VLANs are specified or if a range is specified, display
information only for VLANs with dynamic ARP inspection enabled
(active).
You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a
range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs
separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.
vlan vlan-range
(Optional) Display the configuration and the operating state of
dynamic ARP inspection for the specified VLAN. If no VLANs are
specified or if a range is specified, display information only for
VLANs with dynamic ARP inspection enabled (active).
You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a
range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs
separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection command
Switch# show ip arp inspection
Source Mac Validation
: Disabled
Destination Mac Validation : Disabled
IP Address Validation
: Enabled
Vlan
----
Configuration
-------------
Operation
---------
ACL Match
---------
Static ACL
----------
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-483
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip arp inspection
1
Enabled
Active
deny-all
No
Vlan
---1
ACL Logging
----------Acl-Match
DHCP Logging
-----------All
Vlan
---1
Forwarded
--------0
Dropped
------0
DHCP Drops
---------0
Vlan
---1
DHCP Permits
-----------0
ACL Permits
----------0
Probe Permits
------------0
Vlan
---1
Dest MAC Failures
----------------0
Probe Logging
------------Permit
IP Validation Failures
---------------------0
ACL Drops
--------0
Source MAC Failures
------------------0
Invalid Protocol Data
--------------------0
This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection interfaces command:
Switch# show ip arp inspection interfaces
Interface
Trust State
Rate (pps)
--------------- -------------------Gi0/1
Untrusted
15
Gi0/2
Untrusted
15
Gi0/3
Untrusted
15
Burst Interval
-------------1
1
1
This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection interfaces interface-id command:
Switch# show ip arp inspection interfaces gigabitethernet0/1
Interface
Trust State
Rate (pps)
Burst Interval
--------------- --------------------------------Gi0/1
Untrusted
15
1
This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection log command. It shows the contents of
the log buffer before the buffers are cleared:
Switch# show ip arp inspection log
Total Log Buffer Size : 32
Syslog rate : 10 entries per 300 seconds.
Interface
Vlan
---------- ---Gi0/1
5
Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi0/1
5
Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi0/1
5
Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi0/1
5
Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi0/1
5
Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi0/1
5
Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi0/1
5
Mon Mar 1 1993
Sender MAC
-------------0003.0000.d673
Sender IP
--------------192.2.10.4
0001.0000.d774
128.1.9.25
0001.c940.1111
Num Pkts
--------5
Reason
----------DHCP Deny
Time
---19:39:01 UTC
6
DHCP Deny
19:39:02 UTC
10.10.10.1
7
DHCP Deny
19:39:03 UTC
0001.c940.1112
10.10.10.2
8
DHCP Deny
19:39:04 UTC
0001.c940.1114
173.1.1.1
10
DHCP Deny
19:39:06 UTC
0001.c940.1115
173.1.1.2
11
DHCP Deny
19:39:07 UTC
0001.c940.1116
173.1.1.3
12
DHCP Deny
19:39:08 UTC
If the log buffer overflows, it means that a log event does not fit into the log buffer, and the display for
the show ip arp inspection log privileged EXEC command is affected. A -- in the display appears in
place of all data except the packet count and the time. No other statistics are provided for the entry. If
you see this entry in the display, increase the number of entries in the log buffer, or increase the logging
rate in the ip arp inspection log-buffer global configuration command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-484
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip arp inspection
This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection statistics command. It shows the statistics
for packets that have been processed by dynamic ARP inspection for all active VLANs.
Switch# show ip arp inspection statistics
Vlan
Forwarded
Dropped
DHCP Drops
--------------------------5
3
4618
4605
2000
0
0
0
Vlan
---5
2000
DHCP Permits
-----------0
0
ACL Permits
----------12
0
Vlan
---5
2000
Dest MAC Failures
----------------0
0
ACL Drops
--------4
0
Source MAC Failures
------------------0
0
IP Validation Failures
---------------------9
0
For the show ip arp inspection statistics command, the switch increments the number of forwarded
packets for each ARP request and response packet on a trusted dynamic ARP inspection port. The switch
increments the number of ACL or DHCP permitted packets for each packet that is denied by source
MAC, destination MAC, or IP validation checks, and the switch increments the appropriate failure count.
This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection statistics vlan 5 command. It shows
statistics for packets that have been processed by dynamic ARP for VLAN 5.
Switch# show ip arp inspection statistics vlan 5
Vlan
Forwarded
Dropped
DHCP Drops
--------------------------5
3
4618
4605
Vlan
---5
DHCP Permits
-----------0
ACL Permits
----------12
Vlan
---5
Dest MAC Failures
----------------0
ACL Drops
--------4
Source MAC Failures
------------------0
IP Validation Failures
---------------------9
Invalid Protocol Data
--------------------3
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-485
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip arp inspection
This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection vlan 5 command. It shows the
configuration and the operating state of dynamic ARP inspection for VLAN 5.
Switch# show ip arp inspection vlan 5
Source Mac Validation
:Enabled
Destination Mac Validation :Enabled
IP Address Validation
:Enabled
Related Commands
Vlan
---5
Configuration
------------Enabled
Operation
--------Active
Vlan
---5
ACL Logging
----------Acl-Match
DHCP Logging
-----------All
ACL Match
--------second
Static ACL
---------No
Command
Description
arp access-list
Defines an ARP ACL.
clear ip arp inspection log
Clears the dynamic ARP inspection log buffer.
clear ip arp inspection statistics
Clears the dynamic ARP inspection statistics.
ip arp inspection log-buffer
Configures the dynamic ARP inspection logging buffer.
ip arp inspection vlan logging
Controls the type of packets that are logged per VLAN.
show arp access-list
Displays detailed information about ARP access lists.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-486
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip dhcp snooping
show ip dhcp snooping
Use the show ip dhcp snooping user EXEC command to display the DHCP snooping configuration.
show ip dhcp snooping
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping command.
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping
Switch DHCP snooping is enabled
DHCP snooping is configured on following VLANs:
40-42
Insertion of option 82 is enabled
Option 82 on untrusted port is allowed
Verification of hwaddr field is enabled
Interface
Trusted
Rate limit (pps)
--------------------------------------------GigabitEthernet0/1
yes
unlimited
GigabitEthernet0/2
yes
unlimited
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-487
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip dhcp snooping binding
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Use the show ip dhcp snooping binding user EXEC command to display the DHCP snooping binding
database and configuration information for all interfaces on a switch.
show ip dhcp snooping binding [ip-address] [mac-address] [interface interface-id] [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
ip-address
(Optional) Specify the binding entry IP address.
mac-address
(Optional) Specify the binding entry MAC address.
interface interface-id
(Optional) Specify the binding input interface.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Specify the binding entry VLAN.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The show ip dhcp snooping binding command output shows only the dynamically configured bindings.
Use the show ip source binding privileged EXEC command to display the dynamically and statically
configured bindings in the DHCP snooping binding database.
If DHCP snooping is enabled and an interface changes to the down state, the switch does not delete the
statically configured bindings.
Examples
This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries for a switch:
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding
MacAddress
IpAddress
Lease(sec)
------------------ --------------- ---------01:02:03:04:05:06
10.1.2.150
9837
00:D0:B7:1B:35:DE
10.1.2.151
237
Total number of bindings: 2
Type
------------dhcp-snooping
dhcp-snooping
VLAN
---20
20
Interface
-------------------GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-488
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip dhcp snooping binding
This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries for a specific IP address:
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding 10.1.2.150
MacAddress
IpAddress
Lease(sec) Type
------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------01:02:03:04:05:06
10.1.2.150
9810
dhcp-snooping
Total number of bindings: 1
VLAN
---20
Interface
-------------------GigabitEthernet0/1
This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries for a specific MAC address:
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding 0102.0304.0506
MacAddress
IpAddress
Lease(sec) Type
------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------01:02:03:04:05:06
10.1.2.150
9788
dhcp-snooping
Total number of bindings: 1
VLAN
---20
Interface
-------------------GigabitEthernet0/2
This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries on a port:
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding interface gigabitethernet0/2
MacAddress
IpAddress
Lease(sec) Type
VLAN
------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---00:30:94:C2:EF:35
10.1.2.151
290
dhcp-snooping 20
Total number of bindings: 1
Interface
-------------------GigabitEthernet0/2
This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries on VLAN 20:
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding vlan 20
MacAddress
IpAddress
Lease(sec)
------------------ --------------- ---------01:02:03:04:05:06
10.1.2.150
9747
00:00:00:00:00:02
10.1.2.151
65
Total number of bindings: 2
Type
------------dhcp-snooping
dhcp-snooping
VLAN
---20
20
Interface
-------------------GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/2
Table 2-13 describes the fields in the show ip dhcp snooping binding command output:
Table 2-13
show ip dhcp snooping binding Command Output
Field
Description
MacAddress
Client hardware MAC address
IpAddress
Client IP address assigned from the DHCP server
Lease(sec)
Remaining lease time for the IP address
Type
Binding type
VLAN
VLAN number of the client interface
Interface
Interface that connects to the DHCP client host
Total number of bindings
Total number of bindings configured on the switch
Note
Related Commands
The command output might not show the total number of
bindings. For example, if 200 bindings are configured on the
switch and you stop the display before all the bindings appear, the
total number does not change.
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping binding
Configures the DHCP snooping binding database
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-489
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip dhcp snooping database
show ip dhcp snooping database
Use the show ip dhcp snooping database user EXEC command to display the status of the DHCP
snooping binding database agent.
show ip dhcp snooping database [detail]
Syntax Description
detail
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) Display detailed status and statistics information.
This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping database command:
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping database
Agent URL :
Write delay Timer : 300 seconds
Abort Timer : 300 seconds
Agent Running : No
Delay Timer Expiry : Not Running
Abort Timer Expiry : Not Running
Last Succeded Time : None
Last Failed Time : None
Last Failed Reason : No failure recorded.
Total Attempts
Successful Transfers
Successful Reads
Successful Writes
Media Failures
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
Startup Failures
Failed Transfers
Failed Reads
Failed Writes
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping database detail command:
Switch# show ip dhcp snooping database detail
Agent URL : tftp://10.1.1.1/directory/file
Write delay Timer : 300 seconds
Abort Timer : 300 seconds
Agent Running : No
Delay Timer Expiry : 7 (00:00:07)
Abort Timer Expiry : Not Running
Last Succeded Time : None
Last Failed Time : 17:14:25 UTC Sat Jul 7 2001
Last Failed Reason : Unable to access URL.
Total Attempts
:
Successful Transfers :
21
0
Startup Failures :
Failed Transfers :
0
21
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-490
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip dhcp snooping database
Successful Reads
Successful Writes
Media Failures
:
:
:
0
0
0
Failed Reads
Failed Writes
:
:
0
21
First successful access: Read
Last ignored bindings counters
Binding Collisions
:
Invalid interfaces
:
Parse failures
:
Last Ignored Time : None
Related Commands
:
0
0
0
Expired leases
:
Unsupported vlans :
0
0
Total ignored bindings counters:
Binding Collisions
:
0
Invalid interfaces
:
0
Parse failures
:
0
Expired leases
:
Unsupported vlans :
0
0
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping
Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
ip dhcp snooping database
Configures the DHCP snooping binding database agent or the
binding file.
show ip dhcp snooping
Displays DHCP snooping information.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-491
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
Use the show ip dhcp snooping statistics user EXEC command to display DHCP snooping statistics in
summary or detail form.
show ip dhcp snooping statistics [detail]
Syntax Description
detail
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) Display detailed statistics information.
This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping statistics command:
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping statistics
Packets Forwarded
Packets Dropped
Packets Dropped From untrusted ports
= 0
= 0
= 0
This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping statistics detail command:
Switch> show ip dhcp snooping statistics detail
Packets Processed by DHCP Snooping
Packets Dropped Because
IDB not known
Queue full
Interface is in errdisabled
Rate limit exceeded
Received on untrusted ports
Nonzero giaddr
Source mac not equal to chaddr
Binding mismatch
Insertion of opt82 fail
Interface Down
Unknown output interface
Reply output port equal to input port
Packet denied by platform
= 0
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 2-14 shows the DHCP snooping statistics and their descriptions:
Table 2-14
DHCP Snooping Statistics
DHCP Snooping Statistic
Description
Packets Processed by DHCP Snooping
Total number of packets handled by DHCP snooping,
including forwarded and dropped packets.
Packets Dropped Because IDB not known
Number of errors when the input interface of the packet
cannot be determined.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-492
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
Table 2-14
DHCP Snooping Statistics
DHCP Snooping Statistic
Description
Queue full
Number of errors when an internal queue used to process
the packets is full. This might happen if DHCP packets
are received at an excessively high rate and rate limiting
is not enabled on the ingress ports.
Interface is in errdisabled
Number of times a packet was received on a port that has
been marked as error disabled. This might happen if
packets are in the processing queue when a port is put into
the error-disabled state and those packets are
subsequently processed.
Rate limit exceeded
Number of times the rate limit configured on the port was
exceeded and the interface was put into the error-disabled
state.
Received on untrusted ports
Number of times a DHCP server packet (OFFER, ACK,
NAK, or LEASEQUERY) was received on an untrusted
port and was dropped.
Nonzero giaddr
Number of times the relay agent address field (giaddr) in
the DHCP packet received on an untrusted port was not
zero, or the no ip dhcp snooping information option
allow-untrusted global configuration command is not
configured and a packet received on an untrusted port
contained option-82 data.
Source mac not equal to chaddr
Number of times the client MAC address field of the
DHCP packet (chaddr) does not match the packet source
MAC address and the ip dhcp snooping verify
mac-address global configuration command is
configured.
Binding mismatch
Number of times a RELEASE or DECLINE packet was
received on a port that is different than the port in the
binding for that MAC address-VLAN pair. This indicates
someone might be trying to spoof the real client, or it
could mean that the client has moved to another port on
the switch and issued a RELEASE or DECLINE. The
MAC address is taken from the chaddr field of the DHCP
packet, not the source MAC address in the Ethernet
header.
Insertion of opt82 fail
Number of times the option-82 insertion into a packet
failed. The insertion might fail if the packet with the
option-82 data exceeds the size of a single physical packet
on the internet.
Interface Down
Number of times the packet is a reply to the DHCP relay
agent, but the SVI interface for the relay agent is down.
This is an unlikely error that occurs if the SVI goes down
between sending the client request to the DHCP server
and receiving the response.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-493
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
Table 2-14
Related Commands
DHCP Snooping Statistics
DHCP Snooping Statistic
Description
Unknown output interface
Number of times the output interface for a DHCP reply
packet cannot be determined by either option-82 data or a
lookup in the MAC address table. The packet is dropped.
This can happen if option 82 is not used and the client
MAC address has aged out. If IPSG is enabled with the
port-security option and option 82 is not enabled, the
MAC address of the client is not learned, and the reply
packets will be dropped.
Reply output port equal to input port
Number of times the output port for a DHCP reply packet
is the same as the input port, causing a possible loop.
Indicates a possible network misconfiguration or misuse
of trust settings on ports.
Packet denied by platform
Number of times the packet has been denied by a
platform-specific registry.
Command
Description
clear ip dhcp snooping
Clears the DHCP snooping binding database, the DHCP
snooping binding database agent statistics, or the DHCP
snooping statistics counters.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-494
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip igmp profile
show ip igmp profile
Use the show ip igmp profile privileged EXEC command to display all configured Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) profiles or a specified IGMP profile.
show ip igmp profile [profile number]
Syntax Description
profile number
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) The IGMP profile number to be displayed. The range is 1 to
4294967295. If no profile number is entered, all IGMP profiles are displayed.
These are examples of output from the show ip igmp profile privileged EXEC command, with and
without specifying a profile number. If no profile number is entered, the display includes all profiles
configured on the switch.
Switch# show ip igmp profile 40
IGMP Profile 40
permit
range 233.1.1.1 233.255.255.255
Switch# show ip igmp profile
IGMP Profile 3
range 230.9.9.0 230.9.9.0
IGMP Profile 4
permit
range 229.9.9.0 229.255.255.255
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp profile
Configures the specified IGMP profile number.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-495
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip igmp snooping
show ip igmp snooping
Use the show ip igmp snooping user EXEC command to display the Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping [groups | mrouter | querier [vlan vlan-id] [detail]] [vlan vlan-id] [detail]
Syntax Description
groups
(Optional) See the show ip igmp snooping groups command.
mrouter
(Optional) See the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command.
querier
(Optional) See the show ip igmp snooping querier command.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Specify a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094 (available
only in privileged EXEC mode).
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to display snooping configuration for the switch or for a specific VLAN.
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
Although visible in the output display, output lines for source-only learning are not valid.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping vlan 1 command. It shows snooping
characteristics for a specific VLAN.
Switch# show ip igmp snooping vlan 1
Global IGMP Snooping configuration:
----------------------------------IGMP snooping
:Enabled
IGMPv3 snooping (minimal) :Enabled
Report suppression
:Enabled
TCN solicit query
:Disabled
TCN flood query count
:2
Last member query interval : 100
Vlan 1:
-------IGMP snooping
Immediate leave
Multicast router learning mode
Source only learning age timer
CGMP interoperability mode
Last member query interval : 100
:Enabled
:Disabled
:pim-dvmrp
:10
:IGMP_ONLY
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-496
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip igmp snooping
Note
Source-only learning are not supported, and information appearing for this feature is not valid.
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping command. It displays snooping
characteristics for all VLANs on the switch.
Switch> show ip igmp snooping
Global IGMP Snooping configuration:
----------------------------------IGMP snooping
: Enabled
IGMPv3 snooping (minimal) : Enabled
Report suppression
: Enabled
TCN solicit query
: Disabled
TCN flood query count
: 2
Last member query interval : 100
Vlan 1:
-------IGMP snooping
Immediate leave
Multicast router learning mode
Source only learning age timer
CGMP interoperability mode
Last member query interval
:Enabled
:Disabled
:pim-dvmrp
:10
:IGMP_ONLY
: 100
Vlan 2:
-------IGMP snooping
Immediate leave
Multicast router learning mode
Source only learning age timer
CGMP interoperability mode
Last member query interval
:Enabled
:Disabled
:pim-dvmrp
:10
:IGMP_ONLY
: 333
<output truncated>
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping
Enables and configures IGMP snooping on the switch or on
a VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Displays IGMP snooping multicast router ports for the
switch or for the specified multicast VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping querier
Displays the configuration and operation information for
the IGMP querier configured on a switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-497
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip igmp snooping groups
show ip igmp snooping groups
Use the show ip igmp snooping groups privileged EXEC command to display the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping multicast table for the switch or the multicast information. Use
with the vlan keyword to display the multicast table for a specified multicast VLAN or specific multicast
information.
show ip igmp snooping groups [count | dynamic [count] | user [count]]
show ip igmp snooping groups vlan vlan-id [ip_address | count | dynamic [count] | user [count]]
Syntax Description
count
(Optional) Display the total number of entries for the specified command
options instead of the actual entries.
dynamic
(Optional) Display entries learned by IGMP snooping.
user
ip_address
Optional) Display only the user-configured multicast entries.
(Optional) Display characteristics of the multicast group with the specified group
IP address.
vlan-id
(Optional) Specify a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to display multicast information or the multicast table.
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-498
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip igmp snooping groups
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping groups command without any keywords.
It displays the multicast table for the switch.
Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups
Vlan
Group
Type
Version
Port List
------------------------------------------------------------104
224.1.4.2
igmp
v2
Gi0/1, Gi0/2
104
224.1.4.3
igmp
v2
Gi0/1, Gi0/2
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping groups count command. It displays the
total number of multicast groups on the switch.
Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups count
Total number of multicast groups: 2
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping groups dynamic command. It shows
only the entries learned by IGMP snooping.
Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 1 dynamic
Vlan
Group
Type
Version
Port List
------------------------------------------------------------104
224.1.4.2
igmp
v2
Gi0/1, Fa0/15
104
224.1.4.3
igmp
v2
Gi0/1, Fa0/15
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping groups vlan vlan-id ip-address
command. It shows the entries for the group with the specified IP address.
Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 104 224.1.4.2
Vlan
Group
Type
Version
Port List
------------------------------------------------------------104
224.1.4.2
igmp
v2
Gi0/1, Fa0/15
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping
Enables and configures IGMP snooping on the switch or on a
VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the IGMP snooping configuration of the switch or the
VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Displays IGMP snooping multicast router ports for the switch or
for the specified multicast VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-499
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Use the show ip igmp snooping mrouter privileged EXEC command to display the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping dynamically learned and manually configured multicast router
ports for the switch or for the specified multicast VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-id
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
(Optional) Specify a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
Use this command to display multicast router ports on the switch or for a specific VLAN.
VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP
snooping.
When multicast VLAN registration (MVR) is enabled, the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command
displays MVR multicast router information and IGMP snooping information.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command. It shows how to
display multicast router ports on the switch.
Switch#
Vlan
---1
Related Commands
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
ports
----Gi0/1(dynamic)
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping
Enables and configures IGMP snooping on the switch or a VLAN.
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
Adds a multicast router port to a multicast VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping
Displays the IGMP snooping configuration of the switch or VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping groups
Displays IGMP snooping multicast information for the switch or
for the specified parameter.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-500
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip igmp snooping querier
show ip igmp snooping querier
Use the show ip igmp snooping querier user EXEC command to display the IP address and incoming
port for the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) query most recently received by the switch.
show ip igmp snooping querier [vlan vlan-id] [detail]
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Specify a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
detail
(Optional) Display querier information as well as configuration and operational
information pertaining to the querier.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the show ip igmp snooping querier command to display the IGMP version and IP address of a
detected device (also called a querier) that sends IGMP query message. A subnet can have multiple
multicast routers but has only one IGMP querier. In a subnet running IGMPv2, one of the multicast
routers is elected as the querier. The querier can be a Layer 3 switch.
The show ip igmp snooping querier command output also shows the VLAN and interface on which the
querier was detected. If the querier is the switch, the output shows the Port field as Router. If the querier
is a router, the output shows the port number on which the querier is learned in the Port field.
The show ip igmp snooping querier detail user EXEC command is similar to the show ip igmp
snooping querier command. However, the show ip igmp snooping querier detail command displays
the IP address of the most recent device detected by the switch querier along with this additional
information:
•
The elected IGMP querier in the VLAN
•
The configuration and operational information pertaining to the switch querier (if any) that is
configured in the VLAN
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-501
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip igmp snooping querier
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping querier command:
Switch> show ip igmp snooping querier
Vlan
IP Address
IGMP Version
Port
--------------------------------------------------1
172.20.50.11
v3
Gi0/1
2
172.20.40.20
v2
Router
This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping querier detail command:
Switch> show ip igmp snooping querier detail
Vlan
IP Address
IGMP Version
Port
------------------------------------------------------------1
1.1.1.1
v2
Fa0/1
Global IGMP switch querier status
-------------------------------------------------------admin state
: Enabled
admin version
: 2
source IP address
: 0.0.0.0
query-interval (sec)
: 60
max-response-time (sec)
: 10
querier-timeout (sec)
: 120
tcn query count
: 2
tcn query interval (sec)
: 10
Vlan 1:
IGMP switch querier status
-------------------------------------------------------elected querier is 1.1.1.1
on port Fa0/1
-------------------------------------------------------admin state
: Enabled
admin version
: 2
source IP address
: 10.1.1.65
query-interval (sec)
: 60
max-response-time (sec)
: 10
querier-timeout (sec)
: 120
tcn query count
: 2
tcn query interval (sec)
: 10
operational state
: Non-Querier
operational version
: 2
tcn query pending count
: 0
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip igmp snooping querier
Enables and configures the IGMP snooping querier on the switch
or on a VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Displays IGMP snooping multicast router ports for the switch or
for the specified multicast VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-502
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip sla standards
show ip sla standards
Use the show ip sla standards command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode to display the Cisco
IOS IP Service Level Agreements (SLAs) and Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
standards implemented on the switch.
show ip sla standards
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
Displays the IP SLAs and TWAMP standards implemented on the switch.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the show ip sla standards command to display the IP SLAs TWAMP standards implemented on the
switch.
Examples
The following is sample output from the show ip sla standards command:
Switch> show ip sla standards
Feature
Organization
TWAMP Server
IETF
TWAMP Reflector
IETF
Related Commands
Standard
draft-ietf-ippm-twamp-06
draft-ietf-ippm-twamp-06
Command
Description
show ip sla twamp
connection {detail |
requests}
Displays IP SLAs TWAMP connections.
show ip sla twamp
session
Displays IP SLAs TWAMP sessions.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-503
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip sla twamp connection
show ip sla twamp connection
Use the show ip sla twamp connection command in user EXEC mode to display the current Cisco IOS
IP Service Level Agreements (SLAs) Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) connections.
show ip sla twamp connection {detail [source-ip ip-address] | requests}
Syntax Description
detail
Display current connection details.
source-ip ip-address
(Optional) Display connection details from a specific TWAMP connection.
requests
Display current connection requests.
Defaults
Displays output for all running IP SLAs TWAMP sessions.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the detail keyword to display detailed information for a single IP SLAs TWAMP connection.
Use the requests keyword to display the current IP SLAs TWAMP connection requests.
Examples
The following is sample output from the show ip sla twamp connection detail command:
Switch> show ip sla twamp connection detail
Connection Id:
91
Client IP Address:
172.27.111.225
Client Port:
43026
Mode:
Unauthenticated
Connection State:
Connected
Control State:
None
Number of Test Requests - 0:1
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-504
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip sla twamp connection
The following is sample output from the show ip sla twamp connection requests command:
Switch> show ip sla twamp connection requests
Connection-Id
Client Address
Client Port
91
172.27.111.225
43026
Total number of current connections: 1
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip sla standards
Displays the TWAMP server and reflector standards implemented on the
switch.
show ip sla twamp
session
Displays IP SLAs TWAMP sessions.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-505
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip sla twamp session
show ip sla twamp session
Use the show ip sla twamp session command in user EXEC mode to display Cisco IOS IP Service Level
Agreements (SLAs) Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) test sessions.
show ip sla twamp session [source-ip ip address | source-port port-number]
Syntax Description
source-ip ip-address
(Optional) Display results from the TWAMP test session on the specified IP
address.
source-port
port-number
(Optional) Display results from the TWAMP test session on the specified
port.
Defaults
Displays the IP SLAs TWAMP test sessions and results.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(52)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the show ip sla twamp session command to display information about IP SLAs TWAMP test
sessions.
Examples
The following is sample output from the show ip sla twamp session command:
Switch> show ip sla twamp session
IP SLAs Responder TWAMP is: Enabled
Recvr Addr: 172.27.117.116
Recvr Port: 3619
Sender Addr: 172.27.111.225
Sender Port: 32910
Session Id: 172.27.117.116:533112:9C41EC42
Connection Id: 95
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ip sla standards
Displays the TWAMP server and reflector standards implemented on the
switch.
show ip sla twamp
connection {detail |
requests}
Displays IP SLAs TWAMP connections.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-506
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip source binding
show ip source binding
Use the show ip source binding user EXEC command to display the IP source bindings on the switch.
show ip source binding [ip-address] [mac-address] [dhcp-snooping | static] [vlan vlan-id]
[interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
ip-address
(Optional) Display IP source bindings for a specific IP address.
mac-address
(Optional) Display IP source bindings for a specific MAC address.
dhcp-snooping
(Optional) Display IP source bindings that were learned by DHCP snooping.
static
(Optional) Display static IP source bindings.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Display IP source bindings on a specific VLAN.
interface interface-id (Optional) Display IP source bindings on a specific interface.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The show ip source binding command output shows the dynamically and statically configured bindings
in the DHCP snooping binding database. Use the show ip dhcp snooping binding privileged EXEC
command to display only the dynamically configured bindings.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ip source binding command:
Switch> show ip source binding
MacAddress
IpAddress
---------------------------00:00:00:0A:00:0B
11.0.0.1
00:00:00:0A:00:0A
11.0.0.2
Related Commands
Lease(sec)
---------infinite
10000
Type
------------static
dhcp-snooping
VLAN
---10
10
Interface
-------------------GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/1
Command
Description
ip dhcp snooping binding
Configures the DHCP snooping binding database.
ip source binding
Configures static IP source bindings on the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-507
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip verify source
show ip verify source
Use the show ip verify source user EXEC command to display the IP source guard configuration on the
switch or on a specific interface.
show ip verify source [interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) Display IP source guard configuration on a specific interface.
This is an example of output from the show ip verify source command:
Switch> show ip verify source
Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address
--------- ----------- ----------- --------------fa0/1
ip
active
10.0.0.1
fa0/1
ip
active
deny-all
fa0/2
ip
inactive-trust-port
fa0/3
ip
inactive-no-snooping-vlan
fa0/4
ip-mac
active
10.0.0.2
fa0/4
ip-mac
active
11.0.0.1
fa0/4
ip-mac
active
deny-all
fa0/5
ip-mac
active
10.0.0.3
fa0/5
ip-mac
active
deny-all
Mac-address
--------------
Vlan
--------10
11-20
aaaa.bbbb.cccc
aaaa.bbbb.cccd
deny-all
permit-all
permit-all
10
11
12-20
10
11-20
In the previous example, this is the IP source guard configuration:
•
On the Fast Ethernet 0/1 interface, dynamic host control protocol (DHCP) snooping is enabled on
VLANs 10 to 20. For VLAN 10, IP source guard with IP address filtering is configured on the
interface, and a binding is on the interface. For VLANs 11 to 20, the second entry shows that a
default port access control list (ACL) is applied on the interface for the VLANs on which IP source
guard is not configured.
•
The Fast Ethernet 0/2 interface is configured as trusted for DHCP snooping.
•
On the Fast Ethernet 0/3 interface, DHCP snooping is not enabled on the VLANs to which the
interface belongs.
•
On the Fast Ethernet 0/4 interface, IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering is
enabled, and static IP source bindings are configured on VLANs 10 and 11. For VLANs 12 to 20,
the default port ACL is applied on the interface for the VLANs on which IP source guard is not
configured.
•
On the Fast Ethernet 0/5 interface, IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering is
enabled and configured with a static IP binding, but port security is disabled. The switch cannot
filter source MAC addresses.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-508
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ip verify source
This is an example of output on an interface on which IP source guard is disabled:
Switch> show ip verify source gigabitethernet0/6
IP source guard is not configured on the interface gi0/6.
Related Commands
Command
Description
ip verify source
Enables IP source guard on an interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-509
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipc
show ipc
Use the show ipc user EXEC command to display Interprocess Communications Protocol (IPC)
configuration, status, and statistics.
show ipc {mcast {appclass | groups | status} | nodes | ports [open] | queue | rpc | session {all |
rx | tx} [verbose] | status [cumlulative] | zones}
Syntax Description
mcast {appclass |
groups | status}
Display the IPC multicast routing information. The keywords have these
meanings:
•
appclass—Display the IPC multicast application classes.
•
groups—Display the IPC multicast groups.
•
status—Display the IPC multicast routing status.
nodes
Display participating nodes.
ports [open]
Display local IPC ports. The keyword has this meaning:
•
open—(Optional) Display only the open ports.
queue
Display the contents of the IPC transmission queue.
rpc
Display the IPC remote-procedure statistics.
session {all | rx | tx} Display the IPC session statistics (available only in privileged EXEC mode).
The keywords have these meanings:
verbose
•
all—Display all the session statistics.
•
rx—Display the sessions statistics for traffic that the switch receives
•
tx—Display the sessions statistics for traffic that the switch forwards.
(Optional) Display detailed statistics (available only in privileged EXEC
mode).
status [cumlulative] Display the status of the local IPC server. The keyword has this meaning:
•
zones
cumlulative—(Optional) Display the status of the local IPC server since
the switch was started or restarted.
Display participating IPC zones. The switch supports one IPC zone.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-510
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipc
Examples
This example shows how to display the IPC routing status:
Switch> show ipc mcast status
IPC Mcast Status
Tx
Rx
Total
Total
Total
Total
Frames
control Frames
Frames dropped
control Frames dropped
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Total
Total
Total
Total
Reliable messages
Reliable messages acknowledged
Out of Band Messages
Out of Band messages acknowledged
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Total No Mcast groups
Total Retries
Total OOB Retries
Total flushes
0
0
0
Total Timeouts
Total OOB Timeouts
Total No ports
0
0
0
This example shows how to display the participating nodes:
Switch> show ipc nodes
There is 1 node in this IPC realm.
ID
Type
Name
Last
Sent
10000 Local
IPC Master
0
Last
Heard
0
This example shows how to display the local IPC ports:
Switch> show ipc ports
There are 8 ports defined.
Port ID
Type
Name
(current/peak/total)
There are 8 ports defined.
10000.1
unicast
IPC Master:Zone
10000.2
unicast
IPC Master:Echo
10000.3
unicast
IPC Master:Control
10000.4
unicast
IPC Master:Init
10000.5
unicast
FIB Master:DFS.process_level.msgs
10000.6
unicast
FIB Master:DFS.interrupt.msgs
10000.7
unicast
MDFS RP:Statistics
port_index = 0 seat_id = 0x10000
last sent = 0
last heard = 0
0/2/159
10000.8
unicast
Slot 1 :MDFS.control.RIL
port_index = 0 seat_id = 0x10000
last sent = 0
0/0/0
last heard = 0
RPC packets:current/peak/total
0/1/4
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-511
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipc
This example shows how to display the contents of the IPC retransmission queue:
Switch> show ipc queue
There are 0 IPC messages waiting for acknowledgement in the transmit queue.
There are 0 IPC messages waiting for a response.
There are 0 IPC messages waiting for additional fragments.
There are 0 IPC messages currently on the IPC inboundQ.
Messages currently in use
:
3
Message cache size
:
1000
Maximum message cache usage
:
1000
0
times message cache crossed
5000 [max]
Emergency messages currently in use
:
0
There are 2 messages currently reserved for reply msg.
Inbound message queue depth 0
Zone inbound message queue depth 0
This example shows how to display all the IPC session statistics:
Switch# show ipc session all
Tx Sessions:
Port ID
Type
Name
10000.7
Unicast
MDFS RP:Statistics
port_index = 0 type = Unreliable
last sent = 0
Msgs requested = 180 Msgs returned = 180
last heard = 0
10000.8
Unicast
Slot 1 :MDFS.control.RIL
port_index = 0 type = Reliable
last sent = 0
Msgs requested = 0
Msgs returned = 0
last heard = 0
Rx Sessions:
Port ID
Type
Name
10000.7
Unicast
MDFS RP:Statistics
port_index = 0 seat_id = 0x10000
last sent = 0
No of msgs requested = 180
Msgs returned = 180
last heard = 0
10000.8
Unicast
Slot 1 :MDFS.control.RIL
port_index = 0 seat_id = 0x10000
last sent = 0
No of msgs requested = 0
Msgs returned = 0
last heard = 0
This example shows how to display the status of the local IPC server:
Switch> show ipc status cumulative
IPC System Status
Time last IPC stat cleared :never
This processor is the IPC master server.
Do not drop output of IPC frames for test purposes.
1000 IPC Message Headers Cached.
Rx Side
Total
0
Total
Total
Total
Tx Side
Frames
12916
608
0
from Local Ports
Protocol Control Frames
Frames Dropped
13080
116
0
574
17
0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-512
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipc
Service Usage
Total via Unreliable Connection-Less Service
Total via Unreliable Sequenced Connection-Less Svc
Total via Reliable Connection-Oriented Service
12783
0
17
171
0
116
<output truncated>
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear ipc
Clears the IPC multicast routing statistics.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-513
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipv6 access-list
show ipv6 access-list
Use the show ipv6 access-list user EXEC command to display the contents of all current IPv6 access
lists.
show ipv6 access-list [access-list-name]
Note
This command is available only if you have configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database
Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Syntax Description
access-list-name
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
(Optional) Name of access list.
The show ipv6 access-list command provides output similar to the show ip access-list command, except
that it is IPv6-specific.
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default |
routing | vlan) global configuration command, and reload the switch.
Examples
The following output from the show ipv6 access-list command shows IPv6 access lists named inbound:
Switch# show ipv6 access-list
IPv6 access list inbound
permit tcp any any eq bgp (8 matches) sequence 10
permit tcp any any eq telnet (15 matches) sequence 20
permit udp any any sequence 30
Table 2-15 show ipv6 access-list Field Descriptions
Field
Description
IPv6 access list inbound
Name of the IPv6 access list, for example, inbound.
permit
Permits any packet that matches the specified protocol type.
tcp
Transmission Control Protocol. The higher-level (Layer 4) protocol type
that the packet must match.
any
Equal to ::/0.
eq
An equal operand that compares the source or destination ports of TCP or
UDP packets.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-514
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipv6 access-list
Table 2-15 show ipv6 access-list Field Descriptions (continued)
Related Commands
Field
Description
bgp (matches)
Border Gateway Protocol. The protocol type that the packet is equal to and
the number of matches.
sequence 10
Sequence in which an incoming packet is compared to lines in an access
list. Access list lines are ordered from first priority (lowest number, for
example, 10) to last priority (highest number, for example, 80).
Command
Description
clear ipv6 access-list
Resets the IPv6 access list match counters.
ipv6 access-list
Defines an IPv6 access list and puts the switch into IPv6 access-list
configuration mode.
sdm prefer
Configures an SDM template to optimize system resources based on how the
switch is being used.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-515
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipv6 dhcp conflict
show ipv6 dhcp conflict
Use the show ipv6 dhcp conflict privileged EXEC command to display address conflicts found by a
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server when addresses are offered to the
client.
show ipv6 dhcp conflict
Note
This command is available only if the switch is running the metro IP access image and you have
configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default |
routing | vlan) global configuration command, and reload the switch.
When you configure the DHCPv6 server to detect conflicts, it uses ping. The client uses neighbor
discovery to detect clients and reports to the server through a DECLINE message. If an address conflict
is detected, the address is removed from the pool, and the address cannot be assigned until it is removed
from the conflict list.
Examples
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 dhcp conflict command:
Switch# show ipv6 dhcp conflict
Pool 350, prefix 2001:1005::/48
2001:1005::10
Related Commands
Command
Description
ipv6 dhcp pool
Configures a DHCPv6 pool and enters DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.
clear ipv6 dhcp
conflict
Clears an address conflict from the DHCPv6 server database.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-516
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipv6 route updated
show ipv6 route updated
Use the show ipv6 route updated user EXEC command to display the current contents of the IPv6
routing table.
show ipv6 route [protocol] updated [boot-up] {hh:mm | day{month [hh:mm]} [{hh:mm |
day{month [hh:mm]}]
Syntax Description
protocol
(Optional) Display routes for the specified routing protocol. You can enter
any of these keywords:
•
eigrp
•
ospf
•
rip
or display routes for the specified type of route. You can enter any of these
keywords:
•
connected
•
local
•
static
•
interface interface id
boot-up
Display the current contents of the IPv6 routing table.
hh:mm
Enter the time as a 2-digit number for a 24-hour clock. Make sure to use the
colons (:). For example, enter 13:32
day
Enter the day of the month. The range is from 1 to 31.
month
Enter the month in upper case or lower case letters. You can enter the full
name of the month, such as January or august, or the first three letters of the
month, such as jan or Aug.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(50)SE
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the show ipv6 route privileged EXEC command to display the current contents of the IPv6 routing
table.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show ipv6 route updated rip command.
Switch> show ipv6 route rip updated
IPv6 Routing Table - 12 entries
Codes: C - Connected, L - Local, S - Static, U - Per-user Static route
B - BGP, R - RIP, I1 - ISIS L1, I2 - ISIS L2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-517
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show ipv6 route updated
IA - ISIS interarea, IS - ISIS summary
O - OSPF Intra, OI - OSPF Inter, OE1 - OSPF ext 1, OE2 - OSPF ext 2
ON1 - OSPF NSSA ext 1, ON2 - OSPF NSSA ext 2
R 2001::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:8D01, GigabitEthernet0/1
Last updated 10:31:10 27 February 2007
R 2004::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:9001, GigabitEthernet0/2
Last updated 17:23:05 22 February 2007
R 4000::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:9001, GigabitEthernet0/3
Last updated 17:23:05 22 February 2007
R 5000::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:9001, GigabitEthernet0/4
Last updated 17:23:05 22 February 2007
R 5001::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:9001, GigabitEthernet0/5
Last updated 17:23:05 22 February 2008
Related Commands
Command
Description
show ipv6 route
Displays the current contents of the IPv6 routing table. For syntax
information, select Cisco IOS Software > Command References for the
Cisco IOS Software Releases 12.3 Mainline > Cisco IOS IPv6
Command Reference > IPv6 Commands: show ipv6 nat translations
through show ipv6 protocols
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-518
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show l2protocol-tunnel
show l2protocol-tunnel
Use the show l2protocol-tunnel user EXEC command to display information about Layer 2 protocol
tunnel ports. Displays information for interfaces with protocol tunneling enabled.
show l2protocol-tunnel [interface interface-id] [summary]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
(Optional) Specify the interface for which protocol tunneling information
appears. Valid interfaces are physical ports and port channels; the port
channel range is 1 to 64.
summary
(Optional) Display only Layer 2 protocol summary information.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
After enabling Layer 2 protocol tunneling on an access port, a trunk port, or an IEEE 802.1Q tunnel port
by using the l2protocol-tunnel interface configuration command, you can configure some or all of these
parameters:
•
Protocol type to be tunneled
•
Shutdown threshold
•
Drop threshold
If you enter the show l2protocol-tunnel [interface interface-id] command, only information about the
active ports on which all the parameters are configured appears.
If you enter the show l2protocol-tunnel summary command, only information about the active ports
on which some or all of the parameters are configured appears.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-519
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show l2protocol-tunnel
Examples
This is an example of output from the show l2protocol-tunnel command:
Switch> show l2protocol-tunnel
COS for Encapsulated Packets: 5
Drop Threshold for Encapsulated Packets: 0
Port
Protocol Shutdown Drop
Encapsulation Decapsulation Drop
Threshold Threshold Counter
Counter
Counter
---------- -------- --------- --------- ------------- ------------- ------------Fa0/3
---------------------------------------------------pagp
------0
242500
lacp
------24268
242640
udld
------0
897960
Fa0/4
---------------------------------------------------pagp
1000
---24249
242700
lacp
------24256
242660
udld
------0
897960
Gi0/1
cdp
------134482
1344820
----------------------------------pagp
1000
---0
242500
lacp
500
---0
485320
udld
300
---44899
448980
This is an example of output from the show l2protocol-tunnel summary command:
Switch> show l2protocol-tunnel summary
COS for Encapsulated Packets: 5
Drop Threshold for Encapsulated Packets: 0
Port
Shutdown
Threshold
(cdp/stp/vtp)
(pagp/lacp/udld)
------- ----------- ---------------Fa0/2 --- --- --- ----/----/---pagp lacp udld ----/----/---Fa0/3 --- --- --- ----/----/---pagp lacp udld 1000/----/---Fa0/4 --- --- --- ----/----/---pagp lacp udld 1000/ 500/---Fa0/5 cdp stp vtp ----/----/------- ---- ---- ----/----/---Gi0/1 --- --- --- ----/----/---pagp ---- ---- ----/----/---Gi0/2 --- --- --- ----/----/---pagp ---- ---- ----/----/----
Related Commands
Protocol
Drop
Status
Threshold
(cdp/stp/vtp)
(pagp/lacp/udld)
---------------- -------------/----/---up
----/----/-------/----/---up
----/----/-------/----/---up
----/----/-------/----/---down
----/----/-------/----/---down
1000/----/-------/----/---down
1000/----/----
Command
Description
clear l2protocol-tunnel counters
Clears counters for protocol tunneling ports.
l2protocol-tunnel
Enables Layer 2 protocol tunneling for CDP, STP, or VTP
packets on an interface.
l2protocol-tunnel cos
Configures a class of service (CoS) value for tunneled Layer 2
protocol packets.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-520
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show lacp
show lacp
Use the show lacp user EXEC command to display Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
channel-group information.
show lacp [channel-group-number] {counters | internal | neighbor | sys-id}
Note
Syntax Description
LACP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) or enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
channel-group-number
(Optional) Number of the channel group. The range is 1 to 48.
counters
Display traffic information.
internal
Display internal information.
neighbor
Display neighbor information.
sys-id
Display the system identifier that is being used by LACP. The system
identifier is made up of the LACP system priority and the switch MAC
address.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can enter any show lacp command to display the active channel-group information. To display
specific channel information, enter the show lacp command with a channel-group number.
If you do not specify a channel group, information for all channel groups appears.
You can enter the channel-group-number option to specify a channel group for all keywords except
sys-id.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-521
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show lacp
Examples
This is an example of output from the show lacp counters user EXEC command. Table 2-16 describes
the fields in the display.
Switch> show lacp counters
LACPDUs
Marker
Marker Response
LACPDUs
Port
Sent
Recv
Sent
Recv
Sent
Recv
Pkts Err
--------------------------------------------------------------------Channel group:1
Gi0/1
19
10
0
0
0
0
0
Gi0/2
14
6
0
0
0
0
0
Table 2-16
show lacp counters Field Descriptions
Field
Description
LACPDUs Sent and Recv
The number of LACP packets sent and received by a port.
Marker Sent and Recv
The number of LACP marker packets sent and received by a port.
Marker Response Sent and Recv
The number of LACP marker response packets sent and received by a port.
LACPDUs Pkts and Err
The number of unknown and illegal packets received by LACP for a port.
This is an example of output from the show lacp internal command:
Switch> show lacp 1 internal
Flags: S - Device is requesting Slow LACPDUs
F - Device is requesting Fast LACPDUs
A - Device is in Active mode
P - Device is in Passive mode
Channel group 1
Port
Gi0/1
Gi0/2
Flags
SA
SA
State
bndl
bndl
LACP port
Priority
32768
32768
Admin
Key
0x3
0x3
Oper
Key
0x3
0x3
Port
Number
0x4
0x5
Port
State
0x3D
0x3D
Table 2-17 describes the fields in the display.
Table 2-17
show lacp internal Field Descriptions
Field
Description
State
State of the specific port. These are the allowed values:
LACP Port Priority
•
– —Port is in an unknown state.
•
bndl—Port is attached to an aggregator and bundled with other ports.
•
susp—Port is in a suspended state; it is not attached to any aggregator.
•
hot-sby—Port is in a hot-standby state.
•
indiv—Port is incapable of bundling with any other port.
•
indep—Port is in an independent state (not bundled but able to switch data traffic.
In this case, LACP is not running on the partner port).
•
down—Port is down.
Port priority setting. LACP uses the port priority to put ports s in standby mode when
there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-522
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show lacp
Table 2-17
show lacp internal Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
Admin Key
Administrative key assigned to this port. LACP automatically generates an
administrative key value as a hexadecimal number. The administrative key defines the
ability of a port to aggregate with other ports. A port’s ability to aggregate with other
ports is determined by the port physical characteristics (for example, data rate and
duplex capability) and configuration restrictions that you establish.
Oper Key
Runtime operational key that is being used by this port. LACP automatically generates
this value as a hexadecimal number.
Port Number
Port number.
Port State
State variables for the port, encoded as individual bits within a single octet with these
meanings:
•
bit0: LACP_Activity
•
bit1: LACP_Timeout
•
bit2: Aggregation
•
bit3: Synchronization
•
bit4: Collecting
•
bit5: Distributing
•
bit6: Defaulted
•
bit7: Expired
Note
In the above list, bit7 is the MSB and bit0 is the LSB.
This is an example of output from the show lacp neighbor command:
Switch> show lacp neighbor
Flags: S - Device is sending Slow LACPDUs F - Device is sending Fast LACPDUs
A - Device is in Active mode
P - Device is in Passive mode
Channel group 3 neighbors
Partner’s information:
Port
Gi0/1
Partner
System ID
32768,0007.eb49.5e80
LACP Partner
Port Priority
32768
Partner
Port Number
0xC
Partner
Oper Key
0x3
Age
19s
Partner
Flags
SP
Partner
Port State
0x3C
Partner’s information:
Port
Gi0/2
Partner
System ID
32768,0007.eb49.5e80
LACP Partner
Port Priority
32768
Partner
Port Number
0xD
Partner
Oper Key
0x3
Age
15s
Partner
Flags
SP
Partner
Port State
0x3C
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-523
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show lacp
This is an example of output from the show lacp sys-id command:
Switch> show lacp sys-id
32765,0002.4b29.3a00
The system identification is made up of the system priority and the system MAC address. The first two
bytes are the system priority, and the last six bytes are the globally administered individual MAC address
associated to the system.
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear lacp
Clears the LACP channel-group information.
lacp port-priority
Configures the LACP port priority.
lacp system-priority
Configures the LACP system priority.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-524
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show link state group
show link state group
Use the show link state group global configuration command to display the link-state group
information.
show link state group [number] [detail]
Syntax Description
number
(Optional) Number of the link-state group.
detail
(Optional) Specify that detailed information appears.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the show link state group command to display the link-state group information. Enter this
command without keywords to display information about all link-state groups. Enter the group number
to display information specific to the group.
Enter the detail keyword to display detailed information about the group. The output for the show link
state group detail command displays only those link-state groups that have link-state tracking enabled
or that have upstream or downstream interfaces (or both) configured. If there is no link-state group
configuration for a group, it is not shown as enabled or disabled.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show link state group 1 command:
Switch> show link state group 1
Link State Group: 1
Status: Enabled, Down
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-525
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show link state group
This is an example of output from the show link state group detail command:
Switch> show link state group detail
(Up):Interface up
(Dwn):Interface Down
(Dis):Interface disabled
Link State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Down
Upstream Interfaces : Gi0/15(Dwn) Gi0/16(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Gi0/11(Dis) Gi0/12(Dis) Gi0/13(Dis) Gi0/14(Dis)
Link State Group: 2 Status: Enabled, Down
Upstream Interfaces : Gi0/15(Dwn) Gi0/16(Dwn) Gi0/17(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Gi0/11(Dis) Gi0/12(Dis) Gi0/13(Dis) Gi0/14(Dis)
(Up):Interface up (Dwn):Interface Down (Dis):Interface disabled
Related Commands
Command
Description
link state group
Configures an interface as a member of a link-state group.
link state track
Enables a link-state group.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-526
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show location
show location
Use the show location user EXEC command to display location information for an endpoint.
show location admin-tag
show location civic-location {identifier id number | interface interface-id | static}
show location elin-location {identifier id number | interface interface-id | static}
Syntax Description
admin-tag
Display administrative tag or site information.
civic-location
Display civic location information.
elin-location
Display emergency location information (ELIN).
identifier id
Specify the ID for the civic location or the elin location. The id range
is 1 to 4095.
interface interface-id
Display location information for the specified interface or all
interfaces. Valid interfaces include physical ports.
static
Display static configuration information.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the show location command to display location information for an endpoint.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-527
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show location
Examples
This is an example of output from the show location civic-location command that displays location
information for an interface:
Switch> show location civic interface gigabitethernet2/0/1
Civic location information
-------------------------Identifier
: 1
County
: Santa Clara
Street number
: 3550
Building
: 19
Room
: C6
Primary road name
: Cisco Way
City
: San Jose
State
: CA
Country
: US
This is an example of output from the show location civic-location command that displays all the civic
location information:
Switch> show location civic-location static
Civic location information
-------------------------Identifier
: 1
County
: Santa Clara
Street number
: 3550
Building
: 19
Room
: C6
Primary road name
: Cisco Way
City
: San Jose
State
: CA
Country
: US
Ports
: Gi2/0/1
-------------------------Identifier
: 2
Street number
: 24568
Street number suffix
: West
Landmark
: Golden Gate Bridge
Primary road name
: 19th Ave
City
: San Francisco
Country
: US
--------------------------
This is an example of output from the show location elin-location command that displays the emergency
location information:
Switch> show location elin-location identifier 1
Elin location information
-------------------------Identifier : 1
Elin
: 14085553881
Ports
: Gi2/0/2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-528
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show location
This is an example of output from the show location elin static command that displays all emergency
location information:
Switch> show location elin static
Elin location information
-------------------------Identifier : 1
Elin
: 14085553881
Ports
: Gi2/0/2
-------------------------Identifier : 2
Elin
: 18002228999
--------------------------
Related Commands
Command
Description
location (global configuration)
Configures the global location information for an endpoint.
location (interface configuration)
Configures the location information for an interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-529
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show logging onboard
show logging onboard
Use the show logging onboard privileged EXEC command to display the on-board failure logging
(OBFL) information.
show logging onboard [module [slot-number]] {{clilog | environment | message |temperature |
uptime | voltage} [continuous | detail | summary] [start hh:mm:ss day month year] [end
hh:mm:ss day month year]}
Syntax Description
module [slot-number]
(Optional) The module slot number is always 1 and is not relevant for
the ME-3400E.
clilog
Display the OBFL CLI commands that were entered on the switch.
environment
Display the unique device identifier (UDI) information for the switch
and for all the connected devices: the product identification (PID), the
version identification (VID), and the serial number.
message
Display the hardware-related system messages generated by the switch.
temperature
Display the temperature of the switch.
uptime
Display the time when the switch starts, the reason the switch restarts,
and the length of time the switch has been running since it last
restarted.
voltage
Display the system voltages of the switch.
continuous
(Optional) Display the data in the continuous file. For more
information, see the “Usage Guidelines” section.
summary
(Optional) Display the data in the summary file. For more information,
see the “Usage Guidelines” section.
start hh:mm:ss day month
year
(Optional) Display the data from the specified time and date. For more
information, see the “Usage Guidelines” section.
end hh:mm:ss day month year (Optional) Display the data up to the specified time and date. For more
information, see the “Usage Guidelines” section.
detail
(Optional) Display both the continuous and summary data.
Defaults
There is no default.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
When OBFL is enabled, the switch records all the OBFL data in a continuous, circular file. When the
continuous file is full, the switch combines the data into a summary file, which is also known as a
historical file. The switch then continues to write new data to the continuous file.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-530
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show logging onboard
Use the start and end keywords to display data collected only during a particular time period. When
specifying the start and end times, follow these guidelines:
Examples
•
hh:mm:ss—Enter the time as a 2-digit number for a 24-hour clock. Make sure to use the colons (:).
For example, enter 13:32:45.
•
day—Enter the day of the month. The range is from 1 to 31.
•
month—Enter the month in upper-case or lower-case letters. You can enter the full name of the
month, such as January or august, or the first three letters of the month, such as jan or Aug.
•
year—Enter the year as a 4-digit number, such as 2008. The range is from 1993 to 2035.
This is an example of output from the show logging onboard clilog continuous command:
Switch# show logging onboard clilog continuous
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CLI LOGGING CONTINUOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS COMMAND
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------05/12/2006 15:33:17 show logging onboard temperature detail
05/12/2006 15:33:21 show logging onboard voltage detail
05/12/2006 16:14:09 show logging onboard temperature summary
...
<output truncated>
....
05/16/2006 13:07:53 no hw-module module logging onboard message level
05/16/2006 13:16:13 show logging onboard uptime continuous
05/16/2006 13:39:18 show logging onboard uptime summary
05/16/2006 13:45:57 show logging onboard clilog summary
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This is an example of output from the show logging onboard message command:
Switch# show logging onboard message
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------ERROR MESSAGE SUMMARY INFORMATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Facility-Sev-Name
| Count | Persistence Flag
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------No historical data to display
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-531
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show logging onboard
This is an example of output from the show logging onboard status command:
Switch# show logging onboard status
Devices registered with infra
Slot no.: 0 Subslot no.: 0, Device obfl0:
Application name clilog :
Path : obfl0:
CLI enable status : enabled
Platform enable status: enabled
Application name environment :
Path : obfl0:
CLI enable status : enabled
Platform enable status: enabled
Application name errmsg :
Path : obfl0:
CLI enable status : enabled
Platform enable status: enabled
Application name poe :
Path : obfl0:
CLI enable status : enabled
Platform enable status: enabled
Application name temperature :
Path : obfl0:
CLI enable status : enabled
Platform enable status: enabled
Application name uptime :
Path : obfl0:
CLI enable status : enabled
Platform enable status: enabled
Application name voltage :
Path : obfl0:
CLI enable status : enabled
Platform enable status: enabled
This is an example of output from the show logging onboard temperature continuous command:
Switch# show logging onboard temperature continuous
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------TEMPERATURE CONTINUOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sensor
|
ID |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Board temperature
1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Time Stamp
|Sensor Temperature 0C
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS | 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------05/12/2006 15:33:20
35
-----------05/12/2006 16:31:21
35
-----------05/12/2006 17:31:21
35
-----------05/12/2006 18:31:21
35
-----------05/12/2006 19:31:21
35
-----------05/12/2006 20:31:21
35
-----------05/12/2006 21:29:22
35
-----------05/12/2006 22:29:22
35
-----------05/12/2006 23:29:22
35
-----------05/13/2006 00:29:22
35
-----------05/13/2006 01:29:22
35
-----------05/13/2006 02:27:23
35
-----------05/13/2006 03:27:23
35
-----------05/13/2006 04:27:23
35
-----------05/13/2006 05:27:23
35
-----------05/13/2006 06:27:23
35
------------
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-532
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show logging onboard
05/13/2006 07:25:24
05/13/2006 08:25:24
<output truncated>
36
35
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
This is an example of output from the show logging onboard uptime summary command:
Switch# show logging onboard uptime summary
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------UPTIME SUMMARY INFORMATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------First customer power on : 03/01/1993 00:03:50
Total uptime
:
0 years
0 weeks
3 days 21 hours 55 minutes
Total downtime
:
0 years
0 weeks
0 days
0 hours
0 minutes
Number of resets
: 2
Number of slot changes : 1
Current reset reason
: 0x0
Current reset timestamp : 03/01/1993 00:03:28
Current slot
: 1
Current uptime
:
0 years
0 weeks
0 days
0 hours 55 minutes
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Reset |
|
Reason | Count |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------No historical data to display
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This is an example of output from the show logging onboard voltage summary command:
Switch# show logging onboard voltage summary
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------VOLTAGE SUMMARY INFORMATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Number of sensors
: 8
Sampling frequency
: 60 seconds
Maximum time of storage
: 3600 minutes
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sensor
|
ID | Maximum Voltage
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------12.00V
0
12.567
5.00V
1
5.198
3.30V
2
3.439
2.50V
3
2.594
1.50V
4
1.556
1.20V
5
1.239
1.00V
6
0.980
0.75V
7
0.768
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Nominal Range
Sensor ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------No historical data to display
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear logging onboard
Removes the OBFL data in the flash memory.
hw-module module logging onboard
Enables OBFL.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-533
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac access-group
show mac access-group
Use the show mac access-group user EXEC command to display the MAC access control lists (ACLs)
configured for an interface or a switch.
show mac access-group [interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
interface interface-id
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) Display the MAC ACLs configured on a specific interface. Valid
interfaces are physical ports and port channels; the port-channel range is 1
to 48 (available only in privileged EXEC mode).
This is an example of output from the show mac-access group user EXEC command. In this display,
Fast Ethernet interface 0/2 has the MAC access list macl_e1 applied to inbound traffic; no MAC ACLs
are applied to other interfaces.
Switch> show mac access-group
Interface FastEthernet0/1:
Inbound access-list is macl_e1
Outbound access-list is not set
Interface FastEthernet0/2:
Inbound access-list is not set
Outbound access-list is not set
Interface FastEthernet0/3:
Inbound access-list is not set
Outbound access-list is not set
Interface FastEthernet0/4:
Inbound access-list is not set
Outbound access-list is not set
Interface FastEthernetv0/5:
Inbound access-list is not set
Outbound access-list is not set
<output truncated>
This is an example of output from the show mac access-group interface fastethernet0/1 command:
Switch# show mac access-group interface fastethernet0/1
Interface FastEthernet0/1:
Inbound access-list is macl_e1
Related Commands
Command
Description
mac access-group
Applies a MAC access group to an interface.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-534
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table
show mac address-table
Use the show mac address-table user EXEC command to display a specific MAC address table static
and dynamic entry or the MAC address table static and dynamic entries on a specific interface or VLAN.
show mac address-table
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table command:
Switch> show mac address-table
Mac Address Table
-----------------------------------------Vlan
Mac Address
Type
Ports
--------------------All
0000.0000.0001
STATIC
CPU
All
0000.0000.0002
STATIC
CPU
All
0000.0000.0003
STATIC
CPU
All
0000.0000.0009
STATIC
CPU
All
0000.0000.0012
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000b
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000c
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000d
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000e
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000f
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0010
STATIC
CPU
1
0030.9441.6327
DYNAMIC
Gi0/4
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 12
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-535
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear mac address-table dynamic
Deletes from the MAC address table a specific dynamic
address, all dynamic addresses on a particular interface, or all
dynamic addresses on a particular VLAN.
show mac address-table aging-time
Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table count
Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the
specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic
Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table interface
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
interface.
show mac address-table notification Displays the MAC address notification settings for all
interfaces or the specified interface.
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table vlan
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-536
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table address
show mac address-table address
Use the show mac address-table address user EXEC command to display MAC address table
information for the specified MAC address.
show mac address-table address mac-address [interface interface-id] [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
mac-address
Specify the 48-bit MAC address; the valid format is H.H.H.
interface interface-id
(Optional) Display information for a specific interface. Valid interfaces
include physical ports and port channels.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Display entries for the specific VLAN only. The range is 1 to
4094.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table address command:
Switch# show mac address-table address 0002.4b28.c482
Mac Address Table
-----------------------------------------Vlan
Mac Address
-------------All
0002.4b28.c482
Total Mac Addresses for
Related Commands
Type
Ports
-------STATIC CPU
this criterion: 1
Command
Description
show mac address-table aging-time
Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table count
Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the
specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic
Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table interface
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
interface.
show mac address-table notification Displays the MAC address notification settings for all
interfaces or the specified interface.
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table vlan
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-537
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table aging-time
show mac address-table aging-time
Use the show mac address-table aging-time user EXEC command to display the aging time of a
specific address table instance, all address table instances on a specified VLAN or, if a specific VLAN
is not specified, on all VLANs.
show mac address-table aging-time [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-id
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
(Optional) Display aging time information for a specific VLAN. The range
is 1 to 4094.
Usage Guidelines
If no VLAN number is specified, the aging time for all VLANs appears.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table aging-time command:
Switch> show mac address-table aging-time
Vlan
Aging Time
------------1
300
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table aging-time vlan 10 command:
Switch> show mac address-table aging-time vlan 10
Vlan
Aging Time
------------10
300
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-538
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table aging-time
Related Commands
Command
Description
mac address-table aging-time
Sets the length of time that a dynamic entry remains in the MAC
address table after the entry is used or updated.
show mac address-table address
Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC
address.
show mac address-table count
Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the
specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic
Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table interface Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
interface.
show mac address-table
notification
Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces
or the specified interface.
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table vlan
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-539
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table count
show mac address-table count
Use the show mac address-table count user EXEC command to display the number of addresses present
in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table count [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-id
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
(Optional) Display the number of addresses for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to
4094.
Usage Guidelines
If no VLAN number is specified, the address count for all VLANs appears.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table count command:
Switch# show mac address-table count
Mac Entries for Vlan
: 1
--------------------------Dynamic Address Count : 2
Static Address Count : 0
Total Mac Addresses
: 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-540
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table count
Related Commands
Command
Description
show mac address-table address
Displays MAC address table information for the specified
MAC address.
show mac address-table aging-time Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic
Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table interface
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
interface.
show mac address-table
notification
Displays the MAC address notification settings for all
interfaces or the specified interface.
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table vlan
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-541
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table dynamic
show mac address-table dynamic
Use the show mac address-table dynamic user EXEC command to display only dynamic MAC address
table entries.
show mac address-table dynamic [address mac-address] [interface interface-id] [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
address mac-address
(Optional) Specify a 48-bit MAC address; the valid format is H.H.H
(available in privileged EXEC mode only).
interface interface-id
(Optional) Specify an interface to match; valid interfaces include physical
ports and port channels.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Display entries for a specific VLAN; the range is 1 to 4094.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table dynamic command:
Switch> show mac address-table dynamic
Mac Address Table
-----------------------------------------Vlan
Mac Address
-------------1
0030.b635.7862
1
00b0.6496.2741
Total Mac Addresses for
Type
Ports
-------DYNAMIC Gi0/2
DYNAMIC Gi0/2
this criterion: 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-542
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table dynamic
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear mac address-table dynamic
Deletes from the MAC address table a specific dynamic
address, all dynamic addresses on a particular interface, or all
dynamic addresses on a particular VLAN.
show mac address-table address
Displays MAC address table information for the specified
MAC address.
show mac address-table aging-time
Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table count
Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the
specified VLAN.
show mac address-table interface
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
interface.
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table vlan
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-543
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table interface
show mac address-table interface
Use the show mac address-table interface user command to display the MAC address table information
for the specified interface in the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table interface interface-id [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
interface-id
Specify an interface type; valid interfaces include physical ports and port
channels.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Display entries for a specific VLAN; the range is 1 to 4094.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table interface command:
Switch> show mac address-table interface gigabitethernet0/2
Mac Address Table
-----------------------------------------Vlan
Mac Address
-------------1
0030.b635.7862
1
00b0.6496.2741
Total Mac Addresses for
Type
Ports
-------DYNAMIC Gi0/2
DYNAMIC Gi0/2
this criterion: 2
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-544
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table interface
Related Commands
Command
Description
show mac address-table address
Displays MAC address table information for the specified
MAC address.
show mac address-table aging-time
Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified
VLAN.
show mac address-table count
Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or
the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic
Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table notification
Displays the MAC address notification settings for all
interfaces or the specified interface.
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table vlan
Displays the MAC address table information for the
specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-545
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table learning
show mac address-table learning
Use the show mac address-table learning user EXEC command to display the status of MAC address
learning for all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table learning [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
vlan vlan-id
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
(Optional) Display information for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.
Usage Guidelines
Use the show mac address-table learning command without any keywords to display configured
VLANs and whether MAC address learning is enabled or disabled on them. The default is that MAC
address learning is enabled on all VLANs. Use the command with a specific VLAN ID to display the
learning status on an individual VLAN.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table learning user EXEC command showing
that MAC address learning is disabled on VLAN 200:
Switch> show mac address-table learning
VLAN
Learning Status
-----------------1
yes
100
yes
200
no
Related Commands
Command
Description
mac address-table learning vlan
Enables or disables MAC address learning on a VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-546
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table move update
show mac address-table move update
Use the show mac address-table move update user EXEC command to display the MAC address-table
move update information on the switch.
show mac address-table move update
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table move update command:
Switch> show mac address-table move update
Switch-ID : 010b.4630.1780
Dst mac-address : 0180.c200.0010
Vlans/Macs supported : 1023/8320
Default/Current settings: Rcv Off/On, Xmt Off/On
Max packets per min : Rcv 40, Xmt 60
Rcv packet count : 10
Rcv conforming packet count : 5
Rcv invalid packet count : 0
Rcv packet count this min : 0
Rcv threshold exceed count : 0
Rcv last sequence# this min : 0
Rcv last interface : Po2
Rcv last src-mac-address : 0003.fd6a.8701
Rcv last switch-ID : 0303.fd63.7600
Xmt packet count : 0
Xmt packet count this min : 0
Xmt threshold exceed count : 0
Xmt pak buf unavail cnt : 0
Xmt last interface : None
switch#
Related Commands
Command
Description
clear mac address-table move
update
Clears the MAC address-table move update counters.
mac address-table move update
{receive | transmit}
Configures MAC address-table move update on the switch.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-547
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table notification
show mac address-table notification
Use the show mac address-table notification user EXEC command to display the MAC address
notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface.
show mac address-table notification {change [interface [interface-id] | mac-move | threshold}
Syntax Description
change
Display the MAC change notification feature parameters and the history
table.
interface
(Optional) Display information for all interfaces. Valid interfaces include
physical ports and port channels.
interface-id
(Optional) Display information for the specified interface. Valid interfaces
include physical ports and port channels.
mac-move
Display status for MAC address move notifications.
threshold
Display status for MAC-address table threshold monitoring.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
Use the show mac address-table notification change command without keywords to see if the MAC
address change notification feature is enabled or disabled, the MAC notification interval, the maximum
number of entries allowed in the history table, and the history table contents.
Use the interface keyword to display the notifications for all interfaces. If the interface-id is included,
only the flags for that interface appear.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table notification change command:
Switch> show mac address-table notification change
MAC Notification Feature is Enabled on the switch
Interval between Notification Traps : 60 secs
Number of MAC Addresses Added : 4
Number of MAC Addresses Removed : 4
Number of Notifications sent to NMS : 3
Maximum Number of entries configured in History Table : 100
Current History Table Length : 3
MAC Notification Traps are Enabled
History Table contents
---------------------History Index 0, Entry Timestamp 1032254, Despatch Timestamp 1032254
MAC Changed Message :
Operation: Added
Vlan: 2
MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0001 Module: 0
Port: 1
History Index 1, Entry Timestamp 1038254, Despatch Timestamp 1038254
MAC Changed Message :
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-548
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table notification
Operation: Added
Operation: Added
Operation: Added
Vlan: 2
Vlan: 2
Vlan: 2
MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0000 Module: 0
MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0002 Module: 0
MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0003 Module: 0
Port: 1
Port: 1
Port: 1
History Index 2, Entry Timestamp 1074254, Despatch Timestamp 1074254
MAC Changed Message :
Operation: Deleted Vlan: 2
MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0000 Module: 0
Port:
Operation: Deleted Vlan: 2
MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0001 Module: 0
Port:
Operation: Deleted Vlan: 2
MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0002 Module: 0
Port:
Operation: Deleted Vlan: 2
MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0003 Module: 0
Port:
Related Commands
Command
1
1
1
1
Description
clear mac address-table notification Clears the MAC address notification global counters.
show mac address-table address
Displays MAC address table information for the specified
MAC address.
show mac address-table aging-time
Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table count
Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the
specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic
Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table interface
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
interface.
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table vlan
Displays the MAC address table information for the specified
VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-549
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table static
show mac address-table static
Use the show mac address-table static user EXEC command to display only static MAC address table
entries.
show mac address-table static [address mac-address] [interface interface-id] [vlan vlan-id]
Syntax Description
address mac-address
(Optional) Specify a 48-bit MAC address; the valid format is H.H.H
(available in privileged EXEC mode only).
interface interface-id
(Optional) Specify an interface to match; valid interfaces include physical
ports and port channels.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Display addresses for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table static command:
Switch> show mac address-table static
Mac Address Table
-----------------------------------------Vlan
Mac Address
-------------All
0100.0ccc.cccc
All
0180.c200.0000
All
0100.0ccc.cccd
All
0180.c200.0001
All
0180.c200.0004
All
0180.c200.0005
4
0001.0002.0004
6
0001.0002.0007
Total Mac Addresses for
Related Commands
Type
Ports
-------STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC Drop
STATIC Drop
this criterion: 8
Command
Description
mac address-table static
Adds static addresses to the MAC address table.
mac address-table static drop
Enables unicast MAC address filtering and configures the
switch to drop traffic with a specific source or destination
MAC address.
show mac address-table address
Displays MAC address table information for the specified
MAC address.
show mac address-table aging-time
Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified
VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-550
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table static
Command
Description
show mac address-table count
Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or
the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic
Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table interface
Displays the MAC address table information for the
specified interface.
show mac address-table notification
Displays the MAC address notification settings for all
interfaces or the specified interface.
show mac address-table vlan
Displays the MAC address table information for the
specified VLAN.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-551
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table vlan
show mac address-table vlan
Use the show mac address-table vlan user EXEC command to display the MAC address table
information for the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table vlan vlan-id
Syntax Description
vlan-id
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
(Optional) Display addresses for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.
This is an example of output from the show mac address-table vlan 1 command:
Switch> show mac address-table vlan 1
Mac Address Table
-----------------------------------------Vlan
Mac Address
-------------1
0100.0ccc.cccc
1
0180.c200.0000
1
0100.0ccc.cccd
1
0180.c200.0001
1
0180.c200.0002
1
0180.c200.0003
1
0180.c200.0005
1
0180.c200.0006
1
0180.c200.0007
Total Mac Addresses for
Type
Ports
-------STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
STATIC CPU
this criterion: 9
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-552
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mac address-table vlan
Related Commands
Command
Description
show mac address-table address
Displays MAC address table information for the specified
MAC address.
show mac address-table aging-time
Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified
VLAN.
show mac address-table count
Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or
the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic
Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.
show mac address-table interface
Displays the MAC address table information for the
specified interface.
show mac address-table notification
Displays the MAC address notification settings for all
interfaces or the specified interface.
show mac address-table static
Displays static MAC address table entries only.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-553
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show monitor
show monitor
Use the show monitor user EXEC command to display information about all Switched Port Analyzer
(SPAN) and Remote SPAN (RSPAN) sessions on the switch. Use the command with keywords to show
a specific session, all sessions, all local sessions, or all remote sessions.
show monitor [session {session_number | all | local | range list | remote} [detail]]
Syntax Description
session
(Optional) Display information about specified SPAN sessions.
session_number
Specify the number of the SPAN or RSPAN session. The range is 1 to 66.
all
Display all SPAN sessions.
local
Display only local SPAN sessions.
range list
Display a range of SPAN sessions, where list is the range of valid sessions,
either a single session or a range of sessions described by two numbers, the
lower one first, separated by a hyphen. Do not enter any spaces between
comma-separated parameters or in hyphen-specified ranges.
remote
Display only remote SPAN sessions.
detail
(Optional) Display detailed information about the specified sessions.
Note
This keyword is available only in privileged EXEC mode.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
The output is the same for the show monitor command and the show monitor session all command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-554
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show monitor
Examples
This is an example of output for the show monitor user EXEC command:
Switch# show monitor
Session 1
--------Type
:Local Session
Source Ports:
RX Only:
Fa0/24
TX Only:
None
Both:
Fa0/1-2,Fa0/1-5
Destination Ports:Fa0/18
Encapsulation:Replicate
Session 2
--------Type
:Remote Source Session
Source Ports:
Source VLANs:
TX Only:
10
Both:
1-9
Dest RSPAN VLAN: 105
This is an example of output for the show monitor user EXEC command for RSPAN source session 1:
Switch# show monitor session 1
Session 1
--------Type
:Local Session
Source Ports:
RX Only:
Fa0/24
TX Only:
None
Both:
Fa0/1-2,Fa0/1-5
Destination Ports:Fa0/18
Encapsulation:Replicate
This is an example of output for the show monitor session all user EXEC command when ingress traffic
forwarding is enabled:
Switch# show monitor session all
Session 1
--------Type
:Local Session
Source Ports
:
Both
:Fa0/2
Destination Ports :Fa0/3
Encapsulation :Replicate
Ingress:Enabled, default VLAN = 5
Ingress encapsulation:DOT1Q
Session 2
--------Type
:Local Session
Source Ports
:
Both
:Fa0/1
Destination Ports :Fa0/4
Encapsulation :Replicate
Ingress:Enabled
Ingress encapsulation:DOT1Q
Related Commands
Command
Description
monitor session
Starts or modifies a SPAN or RSPAN session.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-555
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mvr
show mvr
Use the show mvr privileged EXEC command without keywords to display the current Multicast VLAN
Registration (MVR) global parameter values, including whether or not MVR is enabled, the MVR
multicast VLAN, the maximum query response time, the number of multicast groups, and the MVR
mode (dynamic or compatible).
show mvr
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mvr command:
Switch# show mvr
MVR Running: TRUE
MVR multicast VLAN: 1
MVR Max Multicast Groups: 256
MVR Current multicast groups: 0
MVR Global query response time: 5 (tenths of sec)
MVR Mode: compatible
In the preceding display, the maximum number of multicast groups is fixed at 256. The MVR mode is
either compatible (for interoperability with Catalyst 2900 XL and Catalyst 3500 XL switches) or
dynamic (where operation is consistent with IGMP snooping operation and dynamic MVR membership
on source ports is supported).
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-556
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mvr
Related Commands
Command
Description
mvr (global configuration)
Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.
mvr (interface configuration) Configures MVR ports.
show mvr interface
Displays the configured MVR interfaces, status of the specified
interface, or all multicast groups to which the interface belongs when
the interface and members keywords are appended to the command.
show mvr members
Displays all ports that are members of an MVR multicast group or, if
there are no members, means the group is inactive.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-557
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mvr interface
show mvr interface
Use the show mvr interface privileged EXEC command without keywords to display the Multicast
VLAN Registration (MVR) receiver and source ports. Use the command with keywords to display MVR
parameters for a specific receiver port.
show mvr interface [interface-id [members [vlan vlan-id]]]
Syntax Description
interface-id
(Optional) Display MVR type, status, and Immediate Leave setting for the
interface.
Valid interfaces include physical ports (including type, module, and port
number.
members
(Optional) Display all MVR groups to which the specified interface belongs.
vlan vlan-id
(Optional) Display all MVR group members on this VLAN. The range is 1
to 4094.
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
If the entered port identification is a non-MVR port or a source port, the command returns an error
message. For receiver ports, it displays the port type, per port status, and Immediate-Leave setting.
If you enter the show mvr interface interface-id command and the specified port is a non-MVR port,
the output displays NON MVR in the Type field. For active MVR ports, it displays the port type
(RECEIVER or SOURCE), mode (access or trunk), VLAN, status, and Immediate-Leave setting.
If you enter the members keyword, all MVR group members on the interface appear.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-558
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mvr interface
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mvr interface command:
Switch# show mvr interface
Port
Type
Mode
---------Fa0/1 Receiver
Trunk
Fa0/1 Receiver
Trunk
Fa0/2 Receiver
Trunk
Fa0/2 Receiver
Trunk
Fa0/3 Receiver
Trunk
Fa0/3 Receiver
Trunk
Fa0/10 Source
Access
VLAN
---1
2000
2
3000
2
3000
10
Status
------ACTIVE/UP
ACTIVE/DOWN
ACTIVE/UP
ACTIVE/UP
ACTIVE/UP
ACTIVE/UP
ACTIVE/UP
Immediate Leave
--------------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
In the preceding display, Status is defined as follows:
•
Active means the port is part of a VLAN.
•
Up/Down means that the port is forwarding/nonforwarding.
•
Inactive means that the port is not yet part of any VLAN.
This is an example of output from the show mvr interface fastethernet0/10 command:
switch#
Port
---Fa0/10
show mvr interface fa0/10
Type
Mode
------RECEIVER
Trunk
VLAN
---201
Status
------ACTIVE/DOWN
Immediate Leave
--------------DISABLED
This is an example of output from the show mvr interface fastethernet0/1 command. In this example,
the port is not an MVR member:
switch#
Port
---Fa0/1
show mvr interface fa0/1
Type
Mode
------NON MVR
Access
VLAN
---0
Status
------INACTIVE
Immediate Leave
--------------DISABLED
This is an example of output from the show mvr interface gigabitethernet0/1 members command:
Switch# show mvr interface gigabitethernet0/1 members
239.255.0.0
vlan 202
DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.1
vlan 202
DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.2
vlan 202
DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.3
vlan 203
DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.4
vlan 203
DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.5
vlan 203
DYNAMIC ACTIVE
Related Commands
Command
Description
mvr (global configuration)
Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the
switch.
mvr (interface configuration)
Configures MVR ports.
show mvr
Displays the global MVR configuration on the switch.
show mvr members
Displays all receiver ports that are members of an MVR
multicast group.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-559
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mvr members
show mvr members
Use the show mvr members privileged EXEC command to display all receiver and source ports that are
currently members of an IP multicast group.
show mvr members [ip-address]
Syntax Description
ip-address
Command Modes
Privileged EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
(Optional) The IP multicast address. If the address is entered, all receiver and
source ports that are members of the multicast group appear. If no address is
entered, all members of all Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) groups are
listed. If a group has no members, the group is listed as Inactive.
Usage Guidelines
The show mvr members command applies to receiver and source ports. For MVR-compatible mode, all
source ports are members of all multicast groups.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show mvr members command:
Switch# show mvr members
MVR Group
Status
Members
------------ -----------239.1.1.1
ACTIVE
Fa0/1
239.1.1.1
ACTIVE
Fa0/1
239.1.1.1
ACTIVE
Fa0/2
239.1.1.1
ACTIVE
Fa0/2
239.1.1.2
ACTIVE
Fa0/1
239.1.1.2
ACTIVE
Fa0/2
VLAN
---1
2000
2
3000
1
2
Membership
---------Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
<output truncated>
This is an example of output from the show mvr members 239.255.0.2 command. It shows how to view
the members of the IP multicast group 239.255.0.2:
Switch# show mvr members 239.255.0.2
239.255.0.2
ACTIVE
Gi0/1(d), Gi0/2(d), Gi0/3(d),
Gi0/4(d), Gi0/5(s)
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-560
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show mvr members
Related Commands
Command
Description
mvr (global configuration)
Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the
switch.
mvr (interface configuration)
Configures MVR ports.
show mvr
Displays the global MVR configuration on the switch.
show mvr interface
Displays the configured MVR interfaces, status of the specified
interface, or all multicast groups to which the interface belongs
when the members keyword is appended to the command.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-561
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show pagp
show pagp
Use the show pagp user EXEC command to display Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) channel-group
information.
show pagp [channel-group-number] {counters | internal | neighbor}
Note
Syntax Description
PAgP is available only on network node interfaces (NNIs) or enhanced network interfaces (ENIs).
channel-group-number
(Optional) Number of the channel group. The range is 1 to 48.
counters
Display traffic information.
internal
Display internal information.
neighbor
Display neighbor information.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Usage Guidelines
You can enter any show pagp command to display the active channel-group information. To display the
nonactive information, enter the show pagp command with a channel-group number.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show pagp 1 counters command:
Switch> show pagp 1 counters
Information
Flush
Port
Sent
Recv
Sent
Recv
-------------------------------------Channel group: 1
Gi0/1
45
42
0
0
Gi0/2
45
41
0
0
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-562
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show pagp
This is an example of output from the show pagp 1 internal command:
Switch> show pagp 1 internal
Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello.
A - Device is in Auto mode.
Timers: H - Hello timer is running.
S - Switching timer is running.
C - Device is in Consistent state.
Q - Quit timer is running.
I - Interface timer is running.
Channel group 1
Port
Gi0/1
Gi0/2
Flags State
SC
U6/S7
SC
U6/S7
Timers
H
H
Hello
Interval
30s
30s
Partner PAgP
Count
Priority
1
128
1
128
Learning Group
Method Ifindex
Any
16
Any
16
This is an example of output from the show pagp 1 neighbor command:
Switch> show pagp 1 neighbor
Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello.
A - Device is in Auto mode.
Channel group 1 neighbors
Partner
Port
Name
Gi0/1
switch-p2
Gi0/2
switch-p2
Related Commands
C - Device is in Consistent state.
P - Device learns on physical port.
Partner
Device ID
0002.4b29.4600
0002.4b29.4600
Partner
Port
Gi0/1
Gi0/2
Command
Description
clear pagp
Clears PAgP channel-group information.
Partner
Age Flags
9s SC
24s SC
Group
Cap.
10001
10001
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-563
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show parser macro
show parser macro
Use the show parser macro user EXEC command to display the parameters for all configured macros
or for one macro on the switch.
show parser macro [{brief | description [interface interface-id] | name macro-name}]
Syntax Description]
brief
(Optional) Display the name of each macro.
description [interface
interface-id]
(Optional) Display all macro descriptions or the description of a specific
interface.
name macro-name
(Optional) Display information about a single macro identified by the macro
name.
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is a partial output example from the show parser macro command:
Switch# show parser macro
Total number of macros = 2
-------------------------------------------------------------Macro name : sample-macro1
Macro type : customizable
duplex full
speed auto
mdix auto
-------------------------------------------------------------Macro name : test1
Macro type : customizable
no shutdown
flowcontrol receive on
speed 100
--------------------------------------------------------------
This is an example of output from the show parser macro name command:
Switch# show parser macro name sample-macro1
Macro name : sample-macro1
Macro type : customizable
duplex full
speed auto
mdix auto
This is an example of output from the show parser macro brief command:
Switch# show parser macro brief
customizable
: sample-macro1
customizable
: test1
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
2-564
OL-26663-01
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show parser macro
Related Commands
Command
Description
macro apply
Applies a macro on an interface or applies and traces a macro on an interface.
macro description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to an interface.
macro global
Applies a macro on a switch or applies and traces a macro on a switch.
macro global
description
Adds a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.
macro name
Creates a macro.
show running-config
Displays the operating configuration.
Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Command Reference
OL-26663-01
2-565
Chapter 2 Cisco ME 3400E Ethernet Access Switch Cisco IOS Commands
show policer aggregate
show policer aggregate
Use the show policer aggregate user EXEC command to display quality of service (QoS) aggregate
policer information for all aggregate policers or a specific policer.
show policer aggregate [aggregate-policer-name]
Syntax Description
aggregate-policer- (Optional) The name of the aggregate policer.
name
Command Modes
User EXEC
Command History
Release
Modification
12.2(44)EY
This command was introduced.
Examples
This is an example of output from the show policer aggregate command:
Switch> show policer aggregate my-policer
aggregate-policer: my-policer
police